JP2024000417A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine that allows a game to proceed smoothly.

SOLUTION: An operation notification state includes at least a first operation notification state in which an increase expectation value in a game value per game is A (A is a numerical value) and a second operation notification state in which an increase expectation value in a game value per game is B (B is a numerical value) larger than A (A is a numerical value). When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the first operation notification state, a game machine is configured to enter the second operation notification state. The predetermined condition is configured to be satisfied once for every C (C is a numerical value) games in the first operation notification state. A trigger when an increase expectation value in a game value given to a player on the basis of a trigger is the maximum value is that the right to stay in the operation notification state is given in D times of game (D is a numerical value), and it is designed so that the following formula can be established: A×(D-D/C)+B×(D/C)≤specific number.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 99

COPYRIGHT: (C)2024,JPO&INPIT

Description

Regarding gaming machines.

In a reel-type gaming machine (slot machine), one game is started when a game start instruction device (start lever) is operated after inserting a predetermined number of gaming medals, and multiple symbols are arranged on the outer periphery. The reels in multiple rows are rotated, and as a result of stopping the reels using the reel stopping device (stop button) to stop the rotation, a predetermined symbol appears on the active line. (for example, winning combinations such as "777"), a special gaming state (a gaming state in which the lottery probability of small winning combinations, etc. is higher than in the normal state) has a higher profit state for the player than the normal gaming state. ) is common. Here, in a reel-type gaming machine, when images, etc. for presentation to increase the interest of the game are displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal display in synchronization with the rotating and stopping operations of the reels. It is designed so that when you operate the spinning drum stop device etc., you can enjoy predicting the result of the game by comparing the symbols displayed on the spinning drum with the presentation images displayed on the display. There are many things. Additionally, many gaming machines are configured so that if any abnormality occurs in the gaming machine, an error may occur that stops the progress of the game.

JP2022-079768

It is desired to provide a gaming machine that allows games to be played smoothly.

The gaming machine according to this aspect is
Equipped with an internal drawing means,
an operation notification state in which a predetermined operation mode can be notified in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means;
a first section in which the operation notification state does not occur;
and a second section that can be in the operation notification state,
After moving to the second section, if the number of differences in the second section reaches a predetermined number, the second section is terminated,
The operation notification state includes a first operation notification state in which the expected increase in gaming value per game is A (A is a numerical value), and a first operation notification state in which the expected increase in gaming value per game is greater than A (A is a numerical value). and a second operation notification state in which B is also large (B is a numerical value),
In the operation notification state, the maximum value of the expected increase in gaming value given to the player based on one opportunity is equal to or less than a specific number,
the specific number is larger than the predetermined number,
The first trigger when the expected increase value of the gaming value given to the player based on the first trigger reaches a maximum value is configured to occur only in the first operation notification state,
The controller is configured to enter the second operation notification state when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the first operation notification state,
The predetermined condition is configured to be satisfied once for every C (C is a numerical value) games in the first operation notification state,
When the expected increase in gaming value given to the player based on the first opportunity reaches the maximum value, the first opportunity grants the right to stay in the operation notification state after playing D (D is a numerical value) times. and
This gaming machine is characterized in that it is designed so that A×(DD/C)+B×(D/C)≦a specific number.

According to the gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the game to proceed smoothly.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a reel-type gaming machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment with the door open. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the inside of the medal slot in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front view and a top view of the medal payout device in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements in the reel type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 7 is a list of symbol combinations 1 in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 8 is a list of symbol combinations 2 in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 9 is a list of symbol combinations 3 in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a list of conditional devices in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 11 is a list of small winning combinations, replay winning combinations, and bonus appearance rates in the reel-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 12 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the reel-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 13 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a setting change device control process on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of unrecoverable error processing on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first page) on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second page) on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third page) on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of internal lottery execution processing on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution process on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (first page) on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (second page) on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (third page) on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of conditional device number management processing on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of a reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of remaining game number management processing on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of RT state transition control processing on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram in the reel-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of AT state start control processing on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the reel drive control process on the main control board side in the reel type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reel drive control process on the main control board side in the reel type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 35 is an image diagram regarding the rotating operation of the reels in the reel-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the power-off processing on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 37 is an image diagram of the push order display in the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the sub-side program start process on the sub-control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of sub-main loop processing on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the sub-side power-off processing on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of one command processing on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of performance-related determination processing when operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of a process for determining whether or not to execute a battle effect on the sub-control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table on the sub-control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of AT performance determination processing on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of a process for determining whether or not to allow revival on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of processing when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the processing during AT when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of specialization precursor processing when operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the additional special processing when operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of an advantageous BB internal process when operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the first reel stop reception process on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the second reel stop reception process on the sub control board side in the reel type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the production-related determination process when the third drum is stopped on the sub-control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the third drum stop reception process on the sub-control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the game progress control process on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of a termination monitoring process on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of MY counter monitoring processing on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 59 is a diagram regarding the MY counter and the difference counter in the drum-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 60 is a diagram regarding the state of prior notification of cancellation in the drum-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating a case where the upper limit of the difference number is exceeded during the bonus in the reel type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating a case where the upper limit of the difference is exceeded during the bonus in the reel-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 63 is a diagram illustrating a case where the upper limit of the number of differences is exceeded during a bonus in the reel-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 64 is an operational diagram 1 regarding a game in which a small winning combination is won in the drum-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 65 is an action diagram 2 regarding a game in which a small winning combination is won in the reel-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 66 is an image diagram of a case where a power outage occurs during a game in the AT state in the reel type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 67 is an image diagram 1 regarding an empty medal error in the reel-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 68 is an image diagram 2 regarding an empty medal error in the reel-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example 1 of performance in the reel-type gaming machine according to the first and second embodiments, and is an image diagram showing a command performance that can be completed in one game in a normal state. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing example 2 of the performance in the reel-type gaming machine according to the first and second embodiments, and is an image diagram showing a command performance to execute a premium display that can be completed in one game in a normal state. . FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating a third example of performance in the reel type gaming machine according to the first and second embodiments, and is an image diagram showing a command performance that is completed with a plurality of games in a normal state. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing example 3 of the performance in the reel-type gaming machine according to the first and second embodiments, and is an image diagram showing a command performance with a chance-up pattern completed in a plurality of games in a normal state. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing example 4 of performances in the reel type gaming machine according to the first and second embodiments, and is an image diagram showing a start performance display and an end performance display of a predetermined performance in the AT state. . FIG. 74 is a diagram showing example 5 of performances in the reel-type gaming machines according to the first and second embodiments, and is an image diagram showing a result performance display in continuous performances. FIG. 75 is a front view showing a medal selector, a type 1 coin shooter, a chute body, and a hopper in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first and second embodiments. FIG. 76 is a front view showing the medal selector, type 1 coin shooter, and chute body in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first and second embodiments. FIG. 77 is a plan view showing a medal selector, a type 1 coin shooter, and a chute body in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first and second embodiments. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a chute body of Modification 1 in the reel-type gaming machine according to the first and second embodiments. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a chute main body of a second modification of the reel-type gaming machine according to the first and second embodiments. FIG. 80 is a front view showing a medal selector, a type 2 coin shooter, a chute body, and a hopper in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first and second embodiments. FIG. 81 is a front view showing a medal selector, a type 2 coin shooter, and a chute body in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first and second embodiments. FIG. 82 is a plan view showing a medal selector, a type 2 coin shooter, and a chute body in the drum-type gaming machine according to the first and second embodiments. FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second page) on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 84 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third page) on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 85 is a diagram regarding the display of the payout number display device in the drum-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 86 is an image diagram of the payout number display device when the replay is displayed as stopped in the reel-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 87 is an image diagram of the payout number display device when the reel type gaming machine according to the third embodiment is in a stopped state. FIG. 88 is an image diagram of the payout number display device in the case where an inserted medal backflow error occurs in the drum-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 89 is an image diagram of the payout number display device when a power outage occurs in the drum-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 90 is an image diagram of the payout number display device when a power outage occurs during a bonus in the reel-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 91 is a diagram regarding the display on the lower panel of the drum-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 92 is a diagram relating to a notification mode of notification regarding a stoppage that can be applied to the drum-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the game progress control process on the main control board side in the reel type gaming machine applicable to this example. FIG. 94 is a flowchart of AT state transition control processing on the main control board side in the reel type gaming machine applicable to this example. FIG. 95 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process on the main control board side in the reel type gaming machine applicable to this example. FIG. 96 is an image diagram 1 regarding the AT state in the reel type gaming machine applicable to this example. FIG. 97 is an image diagram regarding the display of the number of acquired coins in the reel type gaming machine applicable to this example. FIG. 98 is an image diagram 2 regarding the AT state in the reel type gaming machine applicable to this example. FIG. 99 is an image diagram 3 regarding the AT state in the reel type gaming machine applicable to this example. FIG. 100 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process on the main control board side in the reel type gaming machine applicable to this example. FIG. 101 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution process on the main control board side in the reel type gaming machine applicable to this example. FIG. 102 is an image diagram 4 regarding the AT state in the reel type gaming machine applicable to this example. FIG. 103 is an image diagram regarding the add-on specialization state in the reel type gaming machine applicable to this example. FIG. 104 is an image diagram of an AT end screen in a reel-type gaming machine applicable to this example. FIG. 105 is an image diagram 1 regarding the maximum expected value of profit given to a player at a single opportunity in a reel-type gaming machine applicable to this example. FIG. 106 is an image diagram 2 regarding the maximum expected value of profit given to a player at a single opportunity in a reel-type gaming machine applicable to this example. FIG. 107 is an image diagram 3 regarding the maximum expected value of profit given to a player at a single opportunity in a reel-type gaming machine applicable to this example. FIG. 108 is an image diagram 4 regarding the maximum expected value of profit given to a player at a single opportunity in a reel-type gaming machine applicable to this example. FIG. 109 is an image diagram 5 regarding the maximum expected value of profit given to a player at a single opportunity in a reel-type gaming machine applicable to this example. FIG. 110 is an image diagram 6 regarding the maximum expected value of profit given to a player at a single opportunity in a reel-type gaming machine applicable to this example.

First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be explained. "Random number" is a random number used in a lottery (a lottery using an electronic computer, sometimes referred to as a lottery) to determine the content of a game in a reel-type gaming machine, and includes random numbers in a narrow sense. It also includes pseudo-random numbers (for example, the random numbers are hard random numbers, the built-in random numbers generated by the main control chip including the CPU, and the pseudo-random numbers are soft random numbers). For example, so-called "basic random numbers" that affect the outcome of games, specifically "winning random numbers" related to special roles and winning roles (small roles, replay roles) for transitioning to special games, etc. can be mentioned. "CPU" has the same meaning as is well known in the industry, and is not limited to the architecture (CISC, RISC, number of bits, etc.) used, processing performance, etc. "Power outage" refers to when the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine falls below a certain level, regardless of whether the power switch installed on the gaming machine is operated or not. This also includes interruption of power supply due to unforeseen circumstances such as damage to the unit or power outage. "ROM" has the same meaning as what is well known in the industry, and it physically holds information (for example, if the element configuration is conductive when a current for reading data is applied, it is "1", If the device configuration does not, it will be "0"). RAM has the same meaning as what is well known in the industry, and stores information electrically (for example, when a current for reading data is applied, it will be "1" if it is charged, and "1" if it is not stored). (Note that it is generally configured such that backup power is supplied to some or all of the data held in the RAM in the event of a power outage). "Game state" is, for example, a special game state where game medals are easy to obtain and is advantageous for the player (a so-called jackpot game, in which a bonus is activated, type 1 BB is activated, type 1 BB is activated, type 2 BB is activated, (sometimes referred to as ``operating'', 2nd type BB activated, etc.), an internal state where bonus winnings are carried over (sometimes referred to as 1st type BB inside, 2nd type BB inside, etc.), re-gaming role A re-gaming probability variable gaming state (RT state) in which the winning probability of the winning combination is higher (or lower) than the normal gaming state where the winning probability is a predetermined value, and a reel for winning the winning combination. an AT (assist time) state that can notify the stop order and stop position (sometimes referred to as a stop operation mode), an ART (assist replay time) state that is a combination of the RT state and the AT state, and processing related to AT. Examples include an advantageous section where AT-related processes can be executed, and a normal section where AT-related processes are not executed. In addition, even in the normal gaming state, the RT state, the AT state (sometimes referred to as the "AT gaming state", the "AT state", the "notification state", or simply "AT"). A state that is not in the AT state is sometimes referred to as a "non-AT gaming state", a "non-AT state", a "non-notification state", or simply "non-AT"), and a stop operation in the AT state. Notifying the mode may be referred to as "executing AT," "executing navigation," "executing instructions," "executing push order navigation," "executing a notification game," etc. . Examples include a high-probability normal game state, a low-probability normal game state, etc. (referred to as a lottery state in this example), which have different lottery probabilities of transition to the ART state. In addition, there is no problem even if the gaming states are combined {Furthermore, these gaming states and functions (for example, the lottery to transition to the AT state, the output of notification instructions related to the order in which the reels stop, etc.) control the progress of the game. There is no problem even if everything is mounted on the main control board. In addition, in this example, the AT-related state and the RT state are described separately, and the RT state is referred to as "RT1" and the AT-related state as "normal gaming state," but the RT state and the AT-related state are The states related to ART may be collectively referred to as the "normal gaming state" or the like. The "winning combination" is the type of conditional device (or conditional device number) that is won by an internal lottery (sometimes referred to as an internal lottery). The "notification state" is a state related to AT that can execute the push order navigation described later, and even in a game where the condition device in which the push order navigation is not executed because the winning combination does not differ depending on the reel stop order is won. , if the state related to AT is such that push-order navigation can be executed, it is configured to be in the "notification state". The "counter value" is also referred to as the "number of executable notification games" and is the number of remaining AT games or the counter value of the AT counter M60, which will be described later. For example, when the "Number of executable notification games" is 1 or more (this may include the game that is "0"), the push order navigation described later may be executed. In addition, the "number of playable information games" includes the difference number of game media obtained based on the winning of a small role (mainly the push order bell role) (the number of pieces that are paid out minus the number of pieces inserted), It is also possible to use the number of wins for the winning position. Further, the "special notification state" is the state that is most advantageous to the player among the states related to AT, and in this example, is referred to as the "additional special state". Note that the "predetermined gaming state" may be one or a combination of all states such as the gaming state and the notification state described in this example. Further, the "specific condition" is a condition under which the AT counter value can be subtracted, and for example, one game is completed, a predetermined combination (for example, a push order bell combination) is won, etc., are the specific conditions. "Type 1 special accessory" is a predetermined accessory that increases the number of symbol combinations for winning each specified number of prizes or increases the probability that a conditional device for winning for each specified number of prizes will operate. This is a bonus that can be activated when a bonus is received and can continue to operate until a result of no more than 12 games is obtained, and is sometimes referred to as an RB (Regular Bonus). "Class 1 special accessory continuous activation device" is a device that can operate the 1st class special accessory continuously, and it activates when a specific combination of symbols is displayed, and when a predetermined case occurs. The operation ends at the end of the game, and is sometimes referred to as BB (Big Bonus) or Type 1 BB. "Second-class special accessory" is an accessory that activates a conditional device related to winning regardless of the result of the winning lottery, and is activated in predetermined cases to obtain the result of one game. The operation is terminated when the bonus is exceeded, and is sometimes referred to as CB (Challenge Bonus). "Second-class special accessory continuous activation device" is a device that can operate the second-class special accessory continuously, and is activated when a specific combination of symbols is displayed, and when a predetermined case occurs. The operation ends at the end of the bonus period, and is sometimes referred to as MB (middle bonus) or second type BB. "Ordinary accessories" are accessories that increase the number of combinations of symbols related to winnings for each specified number, or increase the probability that a conditional device related to winnings for each specified number will operate. This is a bonus that is activated when a combination is displayed and ends when a result of one game is obtained, and is sometimes referred to as an SB (single bonus). The "all JACIN type" is a configuration in which when the first type BB combination wins, it is regarded as JACIN, and the player is always in RB while the first type BB is being executed. Furthermore, the "JACIN lottery type" is a configuration in which non-RB and RB are repeatedly executed during the execution of the first type BB. In addition, an "uncontrolled reel" is a reel in a state where retraction control that can be executed after a stop operation is not performed, and a reel that stops at the closest reel position that can be stopped from the reel position where the stop operation was accepted. This is the reel. The "all CB type" is a configuration in which CB is always in progress when the second type BB is executed. The "CB transition lottery type" is a configuration in which non-CB and CB are repeatedly executed when the second type BB is executed.

The following embodiment is just an example, and the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of turning on and off flags, the name of the means responsible for processing each step, etc. , but is not limited to the following aspects. Further, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be construed as being applied to specific things, and may be combined in any manner. For example, modifications to one embodiment should be understood as modifications from another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are independently described, the It should be understood that combinations of one variation with another variation are also described.

<<<First embodiment>>>
Here, before explaining each component, the characteristics (outline) of the reel-type gaming machine P according to the first embodiment will be explained. Each element will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

First, the basic structure of the front side of the reel-type gaming machine P according to the first embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 1 (FIG. 2 for a part of the structure). The reel-type gaming machine P mainly consists of a front door (also called a front door), a back box (also called a cabinet, a base), a reel unit installed inside the back box, a hopper device, a power supply unit E, and a main control. It is composed of a board M (a board on which a main control chip C including a CPUMC is mounted) and a sub-control board S (a board on which a sub-control chip SC including a CPUSC is mounted). These will be explained in order below.

<Front door DU>
The front door DU includes a mechanism for making the game state visible, a mechanism for inputting game media, a mechanism for operating the reel unit, and other mechanisms. Specifically, as a mechanism for making the gaming state visible, there are a reel window D160, a number of inputs indicator light D210, a start lamp D180, a replay lamp D290, a possible input lamp D300, a special gaming status display device D250, and the number of credits. A display device D200, a payout number display device (push order display device) D270 (sometimes referred to as a push order display device D270), an AT counter value display device D280, an advantageous section display YH, etc. are attached. In addition, there is a medal slot D170 and a bet button D220 as a mechanism for inserting game media and inputting the number of bets (number of bets), and a settlement system as a mechanism for enabling payout of the inserted game media. A button D60 is attached. A start lever D50 and a stop button D40 are attached as mechanisms for operating the reels. The reel type game machine in the first embodiment is a game in which a start lever D50, a stop button D40, a medal slot D170, a bet button D220, a settlement button D60, a sub-input button SB, a cross key SB2, etc. are attached. It is equipped with an operation console that protrudes toward the user's side. Each element will be explained in detail below.

<Mechanism for making the gaming status visible>
Next, the main parts of the mechanism for making the gaming state visible will be explained. The reel window D160 is a transparent member made of synthetic resin or the like that constitutes a part of the front door DU, and is configured so that the reel unit installed in the gaming machine frame can be visually recognized through the reel window D160. In addition, the number of inputs indicator light D210 is composed of three LEDs, and the LEDs of the same number as the number of medals currently bet (injecting the game medals necessary to start a game) are lit. It is configured like this. Specifically, the input number indicator D210 is composed of three LEDs (lamps): a 1-bet lamp D211, a 2-bet lamp D212, and a 3-bet lamp D213, and indicates that only one game medal has been bet. In this case, the 1-bet lamp D211: lights up, the 2-bet lamp D212: goes off, and the 3-bet lamp D213: goes off, and when the number of game medals bet is 2, the 1-bet lamp D211: lights up, and the 2-bet lamp D212 goes off. : lit, 3 bet lamp D213: turned off, and if there are 3 game medals bet, 1 bet lamp D211: lit, 2 bet lamp D212: lit, 3 bet lamp D213: lit (re-game) This does not apply to the next game where the display is stopped (details will be described later). Further, the start lamp D180 is composed of an LED, and lights up when the operation of the start lever D50 is valid (operation is accepted), and when the operation of the start lever D50 is invalid (operation is not accepted). It is configured to turn off in certain cases. Further, the replay lamp D290 is constituted by an LED, and is configured to be turned on when the replay is displayed as stopped, and turned off when the next game for which the replay is displayed as stopped is completed. In addition, the insertion enable lamp D300 lights up (or may blink) when the insertion of game medals into the medal slot D170 is valid or when the operation of the bet button D220 is valid, and the insertion of game medals is activated. It is configured to turn off when the bet button D220 is invalid or the operation of the bet button D220 is invalid. Further, the special game status display device D250 is constituted by a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of payouts during the special game. It should be noted that the special game state display device D250 may not be provided, and in such a case, the total number of payouts will be displayed on the effect display device S40 (also referred to as a second information display section), which will be described later. By displaying this, the player can recognize the total number of payouts made during the special game, and the game machine can be made user-friendly. Further, the credit number display device D200 is configured with a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of medals (number of credits) stored in the gaming machine as medals owned by the player. The payout number display device (press order display device) D270 is configured with a 7-segment display, and displays the number of game medals currently being paid out and the reel stop order (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button A conditional device in which the winning combination can differ depending on the stopping order of D43 (this is a so-called pressing order combination (also referred to as a pressing order combination), but when the winning combination or the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed is different. is generally structured so that the profit rate given to the player (number of coins paid out, subsequent RT status, etc.) can vary. It is configured to be able to notify the stop order (this notification may be referred to as push order navigation). In this way, the payout number display device (press order display device) D270 is configured to be able to display two things: the number of game medals currently being paid out and the reel stop order that provides the highest profit to the player. The display mode is such that the player does not misunderstand which of the two displays is being executed, and the details of this display mode will be described later. The AT counter value display device D280 also displays a push order navigation display (such as Then, the push order display device D270 informs the player of the advantageous operation mode (stop operation mode) of the stop button, such as "Execute push order navigation,""ExecuteAT," and "Enable navigation." A state related to AT that is advantageous to the player (in this example, the state of AT that is advantageous to the player that will be guaranteed when the game progresses according to the following terms) It is configured to display the number of games that can be played in the push-order navigation state (also referred to as a notification game (details will be described later)). Note that the AT counter value display device D280 may not be provided, and in such a case, the effect display device S40 can be configured to display the number of games that can remain in the AT state, so that the player can The game machine can recognize the number of games for which the advantageous AT-related state is guaranteed, making it possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine. Note that the payout number display device (press order display device) D270 may be configured to be divided into two devices: a payout number display device and a push order display device.

In addition, the advantageous section indicator YH is composed of an LED, and is configured to turn on when it is an "advantageous section" and turn off when it is not an "advantageous section" (as for the lighting and extinguishing timing) (described later). Here, in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present example, like the conventional reel-type gaming machine, game medals are easily acquired and a special gaming state (a so-called jackpot game, a bonus game BB, Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, etc.), the winning rate of the re-gaming combination is higher (or lower) than in the normal gaming state where the winning rate of the re-gaming combination is a predetermined value. a re-gaming probability variable gaming state (RT state), an AT (assist time) state that can notify the stopping order and stop position of the reels for winning the winning combination, and a state in which the RT state and the AT state are different from each other. A composite ART (Assist Replay Time) state, etc. can be taken, but apart from these "gaming states", one of the three "gaming sections": "normal section", "standby section", and "advantageous section" can be set. In this example, a "standby section" is not set, but either a "normal section" or an "advantageous section" is set. Among these, the "advantageous section" is positioned as being relatively more advantageous to the player than the other "gaming sections." For example, the "gaming state" is in the AT state or the ART state. It is associated with an “advantageous section”. That is, when the "gaming state" is in the AT state or the ART state, the advantageous section indicator YH lights up, but as will be described later, the setting control of the "gaming section" is also the setting control of the "gaming state". Similarly, since this is done on the main control board side that controls the game progress, whether or not the game progress situation is relatively advantageous for the player can be determined by the lighting/extinguishing status of the advantageous section indicator YH. This can be conveyed to the players without any falsehoods or falsehoods. As will be explained later, if the "advantageous section" continues until it reaches a predetermined upper limit for the number of games (for example, 1500 games), the "normal section" will be forcibly set. Since the state related to AT is also forcibly terminated (the information for maintaining the state during AT is cleared and initialized), changing the "gaming section" that is set will also affect the transition of the "gaming state". As a result, it is possible to automatically prevent the gambling nature from increasing significantly due to "gaming states" such as the AT state and the ART state, which have a relatively high degree of freedom in design. It is. As mentioned above, if the "advantageous section" continues until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games), the "normal section" is forcibly set, that is, the "advantageous section" ends. However, the conditions for ending the "advantageous section" are not limited to this. The end condition of the "advantageous section" in the drum-type gaming machine according to this example is "the push that allows you to obtain the small winning combination with the largest number of payouts among the small winning combinations that make up the pushing order winning combination (the winning combination with pressing order)". Execute the order navigation once (for example, if there are 7, 3, and 1 small roles as the minor roles that make up the push order role, the push order navigation that allows you to obtain the 7 pieces with the highest number of paid out pieces) If there is a push order combination in which you can get 7 cards or 1 card depending on the push order, and a push order combination in which you can get 3 cards depending on the push order, the push order navigation that allows you to get 3 cards is referred to here. (Does not apply to the push order navigation)" or "Win any of BB, RB, MB" and "Any ending condition (not winning the 40G 1 set loop lottery (AT), fixed 32G The completion condition is that the condition is met (e.g., false signs) or an advantageous section of 1500G. In addition, in the case of a specification in which there is no push order Bell combination (for example, there is a push order for replay to transition to RT state, but there is no minor combination in which the number of coins paid out varies depending on the push order), The condition for ending the advantageous section of ``one press order navigation that allows you to obtain the small winning combination with the largest number of paid out pieces'' is excluded. In addition, in the first embodiment, since the push order combination is composed of small roles including a small role corresponding to an 11-card role and a small role corresponding to a 1-card role, "the number of payouts is the highest ``One execution of the push order navigation that allows you to get the most small winning combinations'' means to notify you of the push order that allows you to get 11 medals (11 winning combinations).

<Mechanism for enabling input of game media>
Next, the main parts of the mechanism for making it possible to input game media will be explained. The medal slot D170 is a slot for game medals, and the game medals inserted into the slot in a state where medals can be accepted are guided into the inside of the gaming machine. Further, inside the gaming machine, there are provided sensors for detecting the insertion of medals, including an insertion reception sensor D10s, a first insertion sensor D20s, and a second insertion sensor D30s, which are used to detect the insertion of medals into the gaming machine. When it is determined that the game medals have been inserted normally, the inserted medals can be detected as betted medals. Further, the bet button D220 is configured to be operable by the player, and configured to allow the player to bet stored medals (credit medals) by operating the bet button D220. Further, the settlement button D60 is configured to be operable by the player, and by operation, it becomes possible to refund the stored medals (credit medals) and/or bet medals to the player. There is. Note that the game medals paid out by operating the settlement button D60 are configured to be paid out to the discharge port D240.

<Mechanism for operating the reel unit>
Next, the start lever D50 is configured to be operable by the player, and configured to be able to start the operation of the reels by operation. Further, the stop button D40 includes a left stop button D41, a middle stop button D42, and a right stop button D43 that can be operated by the player, and is configured so that the operation of the reels can be sequentially stopped by operating each stop button. has been done.

<Other mechanisms provided on the front door DU>
Next, the main parts of other mechanisms provided in the front door DU will be explained with reference to the perspective view of FIG. 2 showing the internal structure of the reel-type gaming machine P with the front door DU opened. On the front door DU, as a mechanism to increase the interest of the game, there is a performance display device S40 for displaying performances such as preview performances and background performances, and a game effect lamp D26 (non-functional) that can be lit in various lighting modes. ), door board D for signal relay, medal selector DS for detecting inserted medals, speaker S20 capable of outputting sound, middle panel (middle decorative panel), which is a member made of synthetic resin, etc. , an upper panel D130, a lower panel D140, etc. are provided. The effect display device S40 is attached to the upper part of the back side of the front door DU so that a display section that displays effects etc. can be viewed through a see-through area formed on the upper panel. In addition, the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 have a light emitting source that emits light according to the progress of the game of the reel-type gaming machine P, and the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 each have a decorative lamp on the right side and the left side with the lower panel D140 in between. A unit D150 is provided, and an LED lamp unit S10 is provided on each of the right and left sides of the upper panel D130 (the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 may be collectively referred to as a lamp unit). ). Further, a door board D is attached below the reel window D160 on the back side of the front door DU, and this door board D is provided with input signals such as the stop button D40, the start lever D50, and the payment button D60. It has the function of a relay board which directly or processes the input signal and outputs it to the main control board M, which will be described later. In addition, corresponding to the medal slot D170, a medal selector DS, which will be described in detail later, is provided near the door board D on the back side of the front door DU, and is capable of detecting medals inserted from the medal slot D170 and easily detecting the medals. It has a function of conducting proper authentication, guiding proper medals to a hopper H40 described later, and returning improper medals to a medal receiving tray D230 described later. Further, one speaker S20 is provided on each of the left and right sides below the door board D. The middle panel is a portion above the operation console and below the top panel D130, and is a panel portion including the above-mentioned reel window. In addition, the sub-input button SB and cross key SB2 attached to the console D190 described above are used to perform operations on the menu screen described later and button-pressing effects on the sub-control board S side (repeatedly-pressing the sub-input button SB). This is a member used for the progress of mini-games (for example, the performance of success or failure of entering the "AT state"), etc. The front door DU of the reel-type gaming machine P includes a medal receiving tray D230 for receiving game medals (or sometimes simply referred to as medals) released from the ejection port D240, and a medal tray D230 that can detect the open/closed state of the front door DU. A door switch D80 is provided. Further, the front door DU is provided with a keyhole D260, and by inserting a key (door key) that matches the shape of the keyhole D260 into the keyhole D260 {and twisting it in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise)}, It is configured so that the front door DU can be opened. Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the error state (door opening error, etc.) can be canceled by inserting the door key into the keyhole D260 {and twisting it in a predetermined direction (for example, counterclockwise)}. ing. Also, a bet button lamp S50 is provided inside the bet button D220, and the bet button lamp S50 is composed of an LED controlled by the sub-control board S, and the bet button lamp S50 lights up (or blinks). ), it is possible to make the player perceive that the operation of the bet button D220 is valid. Further, a stop button lamp S60 is provided inside the stop button D40 (provided for each of the three stop buttons, the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43), and the stop button lamp S60 is composed of LEDs controlled by the sub-control board S, and indicates to the player that the operation of the stop button D40 is valid by the presence or absence and/or color of the stop button lamp S60 being lit (or blinking). can be perceived. Note that since the configuration is such that only the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the valid stop button D40 lights up in the lighting color corresponding to the valid stop button D40, for example, the left stop button D41 is disabled. , when the middle stop button D42 is enabled and the right stop button D43 is enabled, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the left stop button D41 is turned off, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the middle stop button D42 is lit, and the right stop button D42 is turned off. The three stop button lamps S60 are configured to be lit in different ways, such as when the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the button D43 is lit. In addition, by changing the lighting color and lighting mode of the stop button lamp S60 (it may be made different such as lighting/blinking, or may be made different such as slow blinking/high speed blinking), the push order navigation is executed. In the game, the player may be configured to easily identify the stop button that should be operated at the moment. For example, if all the reels are spinning, the correct pressing order is "left → middle → right" ( If you win the push order bell that has the maximum number of coins paid out, the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button will blink in white, and the stop button lamp corresponding to the middle stop button and the stop button lamp corresponding to the right stop button will blink. When the player operates the left stop button to stop the left reels, the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button is turned off, and the button lamp corresponding to the middle stop button is turned off. The stop button lamp may be configured to blink in white, and the stop button lamp corresponding to the right stop button may be lit in blue.

Next, the back box (also referred to as a cabinet or base) and each device installed in the back box will be explained. A reel unit is attached to approximately the center of the back box so that a part of the reel unit is visible through the reel window D160. The reel unit includes a reel M50 and a drive source (such as a stepping motor) for the reel M50. Further, the reel M50 includes a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53. Here, each reel part is formed of synthetic resin or the like, and a plurality of patterns are drawn on the outer periphery of the reel part (on the reel band MO). Based on the operation of each stop button in the start lever D50 and the stop button D40, the reel unit is configured to be able to rotate and stop the respective reel units. Furthermore, although not shown, an LED (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a reel backlight) is provided inside the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53, and when the LED is lit, the outer periphery of the reel The outer periphery of the reel section is configured so that it can be visually recognized as if it were illuminated by the light that has passed through it. Further, above the reel M50, a rotating drum board K, which will be described later, is stored for driving each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53).

Further, above the reels M50, a main control board M, which will be described later and controls the entire game, is stored, and on the left side of the reels M50, the effect display device S40, the LED lamp unit S10, and the speaker S20 shown in FIG. A sub-control board S, which will be described later, is stored therein, and which controls various effects performed using the above. The main control board M includes a setting key switch M20 used to execute a setting change device control process (to change settings), which will be described later, and a setting/reset switch that can change setting values, cancel errors, etc. Button M30 is connected. Although the setting key switch M20 and the setting/reset button M30 are not shown in FIG. 2, they may be provided at an appropriate position on the main control board M (i.e., if the front door DU is not opened). (If not, it is sufficient if it is located in a location that is difficult to access manually).

Below the reel M50, there is provided a hopper H40 for collecting the inserted game medals, a medal payout device H for paying out the game medals, and a power supply board for supplying power to the entire reel type game machine P. E is stored. The game medals dispensed from the medal dispensing device H pass through the coin shooter D90 and are dispensed from the discharge port D240. Further, a power switch E10 for turning on the power of the drum-type gaming machine P is also provided on the front surface of the power supply board E (sometimes referred to as the power supply unit E). Note that details of the medal payout device H will be described later.

<Medal Selector DS>
Next, the medal selector DS will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the path (selector) of game medals inserted into the medal slot D170 inside the reel-type gaming machine P. The medal selector DS is provided with an input reception sensor D10s that serves as a path for game medals inserted from the medal input port D170 near the door board D, and below the input reception sensor D10s, the game medals are transferred to a discharge port D240. A coin shooter D90 and the like are provided to guide the coin. The input reception sensor D10s has a function of sorting the game medals input from the medal slot D170 mainly based on the dimensions and only accepting game medals that conform to the standard dimensions, and determines that the game medals do not conform based on this function. The medals (or other foreign objects) that have been removed are configured to be returned to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100. When the player inserts game medals before operating the start lever D50 (while inserting game medals is valid), the game medals are sorted by the input acceptance sensor D10s, and only those that meet the specifications are selected. Medals that are thrown into the hopper H40 and do not meet the specifications are returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. On the other hand, if a game medal is inserted after the start lever D50 is operated (in a state where the insertion of game medals is not valid), the inserted game medal is passes through the coin shooter D90 and is returned to the discharge port D240. Furthermore, inside the input reception sensor D10s (at the back of the flow path), there is provided a sensor related to medal input, which will be described in detail later. It is detected by the second input sensor D30s, and the signal thereof is supplied to the main control board M, which will be described later.

Next, the sensor related to medal insertion will be explained in detail. The game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 first pass through the insertion acceptance sensor D10s. The input reception sensor D10s is a mechanical double sensor, and when a game medal passes, two protruding mechanisms are pressed down and turned on, allowing the game medal to pass through the passage normally. . In addition, with this configuration, if a foreign object that is not a game medal (a foreign object that does not meet the standards, for example, one that is smaller in diameter than the game medal) is inserted, the two protruding mechanisms will be pressed down. Not done. Since such medals cannot maintain an upright state, they cannot pass through the passage (the medals fall down) and are returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90 as described above. In addition, the input reception sensor D10s is configured so that it can be determined that there is an error (as a result, the blocker D100 can be turned off) if the input reception sensor D10s continues to be on for a predetermined period of time or more. .

When the game medal passes through the blocker D100 normally, it passes through the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s immediately after passing. These input sensors (first input sensor D20s and second input sensor D30s) are composed of two sensors (arranged adjacently at an interval smaller than the standard diameter of game medals), and each sensor is turned on.・Various errors can be detected by monitoring the off status (the transition order of the on/off combination of the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s, etc.) and the on/off time. It is composed of

<Medal payout device H>
Next, the medal payout device H will be described in detail using the front view and top view of the medal payout device H in FIG. 4. The medal payout device H is operated when the settlement button is operated in a state where credits (gaming medals electronically stored inside the gaming machine) or bet medals (medals inserted to start a game) are present. It will be activated when game medals are paid out due to winning or winning. In operation, first, the hopper motor H80 is driven to rotate the disk H50 around the disk rotation axis H50a. Due to the rotation, the game medals in the medal payout device H displace the release biasing means H70 and flow down from the game medal outlet H60 toward the release port D240. The dispensing sensor (the first dispensing sensor H10s and the second dispensing sensor H20s) is composed of two sensors, and the on/off status of each sensor (the on/off status of the first dispensing sensor H10s and the second dispensing sensor H20s) It is configured to be able to detect various errors by monitoring the order in which the combination of off and on transitions, etc.) and the time during which the switch is on and off. More specifically, for example, when the game medals normally pass through the game medal outlet H60, the discharge biasing means H70 changes from the state where the first payout sensor H10s=off and the second payout sensor H20s=off to the state where the second payout sensor H20s=off. 1 payout sensor H10s=off・2nd payout sensor H20s=off→first payout sensor H10s=on・2nd payout sensor H20s=off→first payout sensor H10s=on・2nd payout sensor H20s=on→first payout The sensor state transition is sensor H10s=off, second dispensing sensor H20s=on→first dispensing sensor H10s=off, second dispensing sensor H20s=off, so if a movement contrary to this sensor state transition is detected, , an example of configuring it to be an error.

Next, FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of the reel-type gaming machine in the first embodiment. In the reel-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment, the specified number (the maximum number of gaming medals that can be bet in one game) is 3, and the number of symbols on the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53 is 20. The valid lines on which winnings are determined are "left reel M51 upper row, middle reel M52 middle row, right reel M53 lower row". The maximum number of coins to be paid out is 11, and the minimum number of coins to be paid out is 1 (the correspondence between the winning combination and the number of coins to be paid out will be described later). In addition, the priority winning order (draw-in priority order) is "Re-gaming role → Small role (Bell, Watermelon, etc.) → Bonus". For example, if a re-gaming role and a bonus are realized at the same time, , symbol combinations that will be replayable combinations are stopped and displayed, and bonuses cannot be won. In addition, if Bell and Watermelon are established, if you press the stop button at a position where both can be drawn (within 4 frames from the winning stop position), priority will be given to the small role with the highest number of payouts. It is configured to be retractable. The configuration shown in the figure is just an example, and the number of frames on each reel may be changed (for example, to 21 frames) or the configuration of effective lines may be changed (for example, 5 lines with 3 horizontal lines and 2 diagonal lines). There is no problem even if you change the line to one line (left reel M51 lower row, middle reel M52 middle row, right reel M53 upper row). In addition, in particular, as a pull-in control when a pressing order minor winning combination that gives different benefits to the player depending on the pressing order is won, a minor winning that will pay out a large number of coins if operated in a predetermined correct pressing order. (number of sheets priority control), and if the incorrect press order is different from the correct press order, it can be stopped and displayed (within 4 frames from the stop operation). Control (number priority control) is performed to draw in symbols that increase the probability of winning (out of a plurality of possible winning symbol combinations, the probability of winning is the highest) among the arranged symbols.

Next, FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements of the reel type gaming machine in the first embodiment. As shown in the figure, the number of symbols on the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53 is 20 (numbers 0 to 19), and the symbols are "Black Seven", "White Seven", " There are 10 types: "Sheep", "Blank", "Bell", "Replay A", "Replay B", "Watermelon A", "Watermelon B", and "Cherry". Here, "blank" is a symbol included in the symbol combination that constitutes a winning combination like other symbols, and does not mean a symbol that does not constitute a winning combination, but a symbol that constitutes a winning combination that includes "blank". As a combination, for example, "Watermelon B, Replay A, Blank" is replay 02. Note that the configuration shown in the figure is just an example, and there is no problem in increasing, decreasing, or changing the types of symbols.

Next, FIGS. 7 to 9 are symbol combination lists 1 to 3 in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, there are a plurality of symbol combinations for each condition device, and as described later, depending on the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53, It is configured such that any one of the symbol combinations is stopped and displayed on the active line (the above-mentioned one line). Furthermore, even if the same type of symbols are not aligned on the active line, from the player's point of view, the configuration is such that it is easy for the same type of symbols to be aligned in a row on lines other than the active line (in the case of watermelon, it is arranged in the middle row). It is structured so that three watermelon symbols line up in a straight line somewhere on the reels, such as in a horizontal straight line). In addition, in the first embodiment, a combination of symbols is used to form a first type BB combination (this is an accessory continuous activation device related to a so-called first type special accessory, but hereinafter may be simply referred to as a BB combination). , "Sheep, Sheep, Sheep", which is type 1 BB-A (operates RB-A continuously and ends with a payout of more than 264 pieces), and type 1 BB-B (operates RB-B continuously, and pays out 132 pieces) ``Black Seven, Black Seven, Black Seven'', which will end when the payout exceeds 132 pieces), and ``White Seven, White Seven'', which will be type 1 BB-C (end when the payout exceeds 132 pieces by continuously operating RB-B).・It has three symbol combinations with "White Seven". In the first embodiment, when the first type BB winning combination is won and the BB is executed (the accessory is activated), during the execution of the BB, in all games during the BB, 1 The system is configured to refer to two lottery tables and draw winning combinations (small prizes, replayed prizes) other than the prizes. (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the all-JACIN type). Note that the format of the first type BB winning combination is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that the table referred to when drawing the winning combination can be changed during execution of one BB. Furthermore, when the RT state is "RT1" and the symbol combination corresponding to numbers 14 to 16 that results in replay 04 is stopped and displayed, the system is configured to shift to RT0 (for details on the RT state, (described later). Note that since "RT0" is a more disadvantageous RT state for the player than "RT1," the transition from "RT1" to "RT0" is sometimes referred to as a fall. In addition, when the symbol combination for replay 05 corresponding to number 17 is stopped and displayed, "Black Seven" may be stopped and displayed at the bottom of the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53, and the number 18 is When the symbol combination for the corresponding replay 05 is stopped and displayed, "White Seven" can be stopped and displayed at the bottom of the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53 (details will be described later). ). In addition, if the push order bell, which is a condition device for "Win-A1" to "Win-A6" (described later), is won, if the reels are stopped in the push order that is most advantageous for the player, numbers 21 to 27 The symbol combinations corresponding to "Win 01" to "Win 03" are stopped and displayed, and 11 game medals are paid out. However, if the reels are stopped in a push order different from the push order that is most advantageous for the player, , symbol combinations "Win 08" to "Win 11" corresponding to numbers 39 to 56 are stopped and displayed, and one game medal is paid out. In addition, "-" in the same figure indicates that any symbol may be stopped and displayed. For example, "Bell...Bell" corresponding to number 23 is the active line of left reel M51 and right reel M53. If the bell is stopped and displayed on the top, 11 game medals can be obtained no matter which symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line of the middle reel M52.

Next, FIG. 10 is a list of conditional devices in the first embodiment. In the figure, the conditional device number is referred to as the winning number, and the conditional device number may also be referred to as the winning number hereinafter. In the first embodiment, re-gaming combinations are provided from re-gaming-A to re-gaming-D3 (winning numbers 1 to 6), and the stopping order and stopping position of the left reel M51, middle reel M52 and right reel M53 are provided. The system is configured such that the replay combination to be stopped and displayed can be different depending on the situation. Here, in the first embodiment, as illustrated in the "condition device" item in the rightmost column, depending on the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53, It is configured so that multiple types of condition devices can be stopped and displayed, and among the multiple types of condition devices, condition devices that have the same winning number are grouped together and displayed in the third column from the right. ” is shown in the figure. Specifically, for example, in "Re-gaming - A" which is the condition device corresponding to winning number 1, "Re-gaming 01'', ``Replay 02'', and ``Replay 03'', three types of condition devices are configured so that they can be stopped and displayed. Note that the "condition device (name)" may be simply referred to as a condition device. In addition, a conditional device related to replaying such as "Replay 01" may be referred to as a replaying combination, and a conditional device such as "Win 01" in which game medals are paid out upon winning may be referred to as a minor winning combination. A conditional device, such as "Type 1 BB-A", which is stopped and displayed to start a BB, is sometimes referred to as a BB combination. In addition, if winning numbers 21-23 and 25-27 are won, the BB role and the minor role will be won at the same time, and in such a case, the symbol corresponding to the won minor role will stop. If you operate the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42 and right stop button D43 at a position where it can be displayed, the symbols corresponding to the BB combination will not be stopped and displayed, but the symbols corresponding to the minor combination will be stopped and displayed, while the symbols corresponding to the minor combination will be stopped and displayed. If you operate the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43 at a position where the corresponding symbol does not stop and display (cannot be pulled in), the symbol corresponding to the minor role does not stop and display, but the symbol corresponding to the BB role is configured to stop displaying. Specifically, for example, if you win "1st type BB-B + prize-winning-C" which is the condition device of winning number 21, you will receive a cherry which is "prize 12" or "prize 13" and "1st type BB -B" and the black seven can be displayed in a stopped state. More specifically, when the reels are stopped in the order of left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53, (1) at the first stop, symbol numbers 0 to 4 are displayed in the upper row of left reel M51 (see Figure 6). If the left stop button D41 is operated at the timing when the reel (refer to the reel arrangement of ``Win 12'' is stopped and displayed regardless of the stop position of the right reel M53. (2) If the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing when symbol numbers 5 to 12 are located in the upper row of the left reel M51 at the first stop, "Win 13" will be displayed in the upper row of the left reel M51. The symbol number 6, 11, or 16 corresponding to the symbol number 6, 11, or 16 stops, and "Win 13" is stopped and displayed regardless of the stop position of the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. (3-1) If you operate the left stop button D41 at the operation timing when symbol numbers 13 to 19 are located in the upper row of the left reel M51 in the first stop, “1” will appear in the upper row of the left reel M51. The symbol number 17 or 19 corresponding to "Seed BB-B" will stop. (3-2) If you operate the middle stop button D42 at the operation timing when symbol numbers 14 to 18 are located in the middle stage of the middle reel M52 at the second stop, "1" will appear in the middle stage of the middle reel M52. The symbol number 18 corresponding to "Seed BB-B" stops, and then, at the third stop, operate the right stop button D43 at the operation timing when symbol numbers 13 to 17 are located at the bottom of the right reel M53. In this case, the symbol number 17 corresponding to "Type 1 BB-B" will stop at the bottom of the right reel M53, and the BB combination will be stopped and displayed. (3-3) If you operate the middle stop button D42 at the operation timing when symbol numbers 19 to 13 are located in the middle row of the middle reel M52 at the second stop, “1” will appear in the middle row of the middle reel M52. The symbol number 18 corresponding to "Seed BB-B" cannot be stopped, and none of the conditional devices will be stopped and displayed.

Next, in the "Role" item, the role of the "condition device (name)" is illustrated, and the "normal replay" corresponding to winning number 1 is displayed in the order in which the stop button is pressed. Regardless, it is a condition device related to re-gaming in which re-gaming combinations that do not change to RT state are stopped and displayed, and "reverse push white 7 set replay" corresponding to winning number 2 is a condition device related to re-gaming where the re-gaming combination that does not change to RT state is stopped and displayed. This is a condition device related to re-gaming in which re-gaming combinations whose state does not change are displayed in a stopped state. The range of symbol numbers 18 to 2 on the middle reel M52, the range of symbol numbers 9 to 13 on the left reel M51, and the range of symbol numbers 5 to 10 on the left reel M51 stop at the operation timing when they are located at the bottom of each reel. By operating the button, "white sevens" are stopped and displayed at the bottom of the right reel M53, middle reel M52 and left reel M51, and from the player's perspective, it appears as if the white sevens are lined up in the bottom row. There is. In addition, in the game where you won Replay-B and won the AT add-on lottery, you could win the AT add-on lottery by executing a direction (details will be described later) that instructs you to aim for "white seven" by pushing backwards. The player is configured to be able to notify the player of this fact. "Sequential press black 7 set replay" corresponding to winning number 3 is a condition device related to replay in which replay combinations whose RT state does not change are stopped and displayed regardless of the order in which the stop buttons are pressed. (stop the reels in the order of left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53), the range of symbol numbers 13 to 19 on the left reel M51, the range of symbol numbers 14 to 18 on the middle reel M52, and the right reel By operating the stop button at the timing when the range of symbol numbers 13 to 17 of M53 is located at the bottom of each reel, "Black Seven" will be displayed at the bottom of left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53. are displayed in a stopped state, and from the player's perspective, it appears as if the black sevens are lined up in the lower row. In addition, in the game where you won the replay-C and won the AT additional lottery, you could win the AT additional lottery by executing a production (details will be described later) that instructs you to aim for "black seven" in order. The player is configured to be able to notify the player of this fact.

In addition, "RT maintenance RP1** (3 choices)" corresponding to winning number 4 determines whether the first stop reel should be left reel M51, middle reel M52, or right reel M53 (which stop button should be operated) This is a conditional device in which the replay combinations that are stopped and displayed may differ depending on whether the replay combination is stopped or displayed, and if the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the RT state does not change to replay 01, replay 02, or replay 03. is displayed in a stopped state, and when the first stopped reel is set to the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, a re-game 04 in which the RT state can change from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed. In addition, "RT maintenance RP*1* (3 choices)" corresponding to winning number 5 determines whether the first stop reel should be left reel M51, middle reel M52, or right reel M53 (which stop button should be pressed) This is a conditional device in which the re-gaming combinations that are stopped and displayed can be different depending on whether the re-gaming combination is stopped and displayed, and when the first stopping reel is the middle reel M52, re-gaming 03 whose RT state does not change is stopped and displayed, and the first When the stop reel is the left reel M51 or the right reel M53, re-game 04 in which the RT state can change from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed. In addition, "RT maintenance RP**1 (3 choices)" corresponding to winning number 6 determines whether the first stop reel should be left reel M51, middle reel M52, or right reel M53 (which stop button should be pressed) This is a conditional device in which the re-game winning combinations that are stopped and displayed may be different depending on whether the re-playing combination is stopped and displayed.If the first stopping reel is the right reel M53, re-playing 01 or re-playing 03 whose RT state does not change will be stopped and displayed. When the first stop reel is set to the left reel M51 or the middle reel M52, re-game 04 in which the RT state can change from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed.

In addition, "push order bell 123" to "push order bell 321" corresponding to winning numbers 7 to 12 are conditional devices in which the winning small winning combination can be different depending on which of the six choices the reel stop order is made. For example, if it is "Left reel M51:1, Middle reel M52:2, Right reel M53:3" and it is "123", it will stop in the pressing order of "Left reel M51 → Middle reel M52 → Right reel M53". For example, in the case of "Win-A1" (winning number 7), if you stop in the order of "123" = "Left → Middle → Right" (correct answer in the order of presses), the maximum number of winning pieces is 11. The symbol combination that results in "Winning 01" that allows you to win 100 game medals will be stopped and displayed. Note that "123" in "Press order bell 123" indicates the push order (reel stop order) that can obtain the maximum number of coins for that winning number. In addition, if the reels are stopped in a push order other than the order in which the maximum number of coins can be obtained, that is, if the push order is not correct, one coin will be paid out. Then, in the AT-related state such as "AT in progress", you can navigate the push order of the replaying combinations and the push order of the bell (display the push order that gives the highest profit on the push order display device D270), and select "Normal gaming state". It is possible to create a plurality of gaming states with different profit rates for players who do not navigate the push order for AT-related states such as ``. Note that the state related to AT will be described later.

In addition, the "common bell" corresponding to winning number 13 allows you to obtain the maximum number of 11 game medals even if any of winning numbers 04 to 07 stops, that is, the maximum profit is achieved regardless of the order in which you press them. This is a conditional device that can be obtained, and is sometimes referred to as a bell that can be pressed in any order. In addition, "Watermelon A", which corresponds to winning number 15, is configured so that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can easily line up in parallel lines. For example, the winning number 60 in FIG. 14, three watermelons A line up in the middle row of each reel. In addition, "Watermelon B", which corresponds to winning number 16, is configured so that it is easy to line up three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) in a diagonal line; for example, the winning number 66 in FIG. 16, three watermelons are arranged diagonally downward to the right, such as watermelon B in the upper row of the left reel M51, watermelon B in the middle row of the middle reel M52, and watermelon A in the lower row of the right reel M53. In addition, the "BB medium-weak rare small winning combination (diagonal bell alignment)", which corresponds to winning number 17, is a conditional device in which 3 bells can be aligned on the active line, and the details will be described later, but the win is won during the BB. This is a conditional device by which an AT additional lottery is executed. In addition, the "BB medium strong rare small win (all V-shaped bells)" corresponding to winning number 18 is a conditional device in which bells can be stopped and displayed on the upper row of the left reel M51, the middle row of the middle reel M52, and the upper row of the right reel M53. Although the details will be described later, this is a conditional device in which an AT additional lottery is executed by winning during the BB.

Next, in the item "Bonus winning information", numerical values from 0 to 3 are assigned for each winning number. In the first embodiment, a winning number that does not include a bonus (BB role) has bonus winning information of 0, and a winning number that includes a bonus (BB role) is a winning number that includes type 1 BB-A (19 ) bonus winning information 1, bonus winning information of winning numbers (20-23) that include type 1 BB-B 2, bonus winning information of winning numbers (24-27) that include type 1 BB-C It is set at 3. By storing the bonus winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information regarding which BB has been established or not and which BB combination has been won. The details of the bonus winning information will be described later.

Next, in the item "Winning/re-gaming winning information", numerical values from 0 to 18 are assigned for each winning number. In the first embodiment, winning numbers that do not include a replay win or a small win (winning number 0 corresponding to a loss and winning numbers 19, 20, and 24 corresponding to a bonus) have winning/replay winning information set to 0. 1 to 18 winning/replay winning information is distributed for each condition device for winning numbers that include replay winnings or minor winnings. By storing the winning/re-gaming winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information regarding which re-gaming combination or minor winning combination has been won. The details of winning/replay winning information will be described later.

Next, in the item "Performance Group Number", numerical values from 0 to 11 are assigned for each winning number. By transmitting the effect group number from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, the sub control board S side is configured to be able to determine the effect to be executed. Note that the details of the performance group number will be described later.

Next, in the "ball group number" field, numerical values from 0 to 13 are assigned to each winning number. The main control board M stores the ball output group number, and uses the stored ball output group number when executing a lottery related to AT (for example, AT lottery, AT additional lottery), thereby executing lottery processing related to AT. The program can reduce the data capacity. Incidentally, even if the condition device with the ball group number 0 is won, the AT lottery and the AT additional lottery will not be executed. On the other hand, if a conditional device with a payout group number other than 0 wins, an AT lottery or an AT additional lottery can be executed. The details of the ball group number will be described later. Furthermore, even if a conditional device with a ball group number of 0 is won, an AT lottery or an AT additional lottery may be executed. In such a configuration, the ball group number is 0. It is preferable to configure the system so that if the AT lottery or the AT additional lottery is executed after a device with a condition of 0 is won, the lottery result is always a loss (non-winning).

Next, FIG. 11 shows a lottery in which the winning numbers (also referred to as condition device numbers, winning roles) and bonuses (also referred to as BB, BB role) regarding the minor winnings and replaying winnings in the first embodiment are determined by the winning winnings lottery means. This is a list showing probability (also referred to as winning rate or winning probability). In the figure, the winning rate of winning numbers is illustrated.

First, the lottery probabilities in "RT0", "RT1", and "RT2" when the BB is not activated will be described in detail. In the first embodiment, the appearance rate (lottery probability) of winning combinations (in particular, replayed combinations) can differ depending on the RT state, and the "replayed combination" (the sum of all replayed combinations) The appearance rate) is higher in the case of "RT1" than in other RT states. In addition, "Re-gaming 04" (so-called falling re-gaming combination, which can be stopped and displayed at winning numbers 4 to 6, and the symbol corresponding to the re-gaming combination in the situation where it is "RT1" and the bonus has not been won) When the combination is stopped and displayed, it will shift to "RT0" from now on) is mainly won in "RT1", and almost never appears in "RT0". In addition, in "RT2", "re-game 04" which can be stopped and displayed at winning numbers 4 to 6 may appear, but even if "re-play 04" is stopped and displayed, the RT state does not shift. In addition, when "Re-gaming 04" is stopped and displayed in "RT1", it has shifted to "RT0", that is, the falling effect which is the effect notifying that the RT state has fallen (for example, the effect display device S40 ``Unfortunate'') is executed, and when ``Re-game 04'' is stopped and displayed at ``RT0'', the falling effect may not be executed. With such a configuration, even though "Re-game 04" is stopped and displayed, the falling effect is not executed, so it can be recognized that the BB has been won, which increases the interest of the game. You can increase your sexuality. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the sound effect output when "Replay 04" is stopped and displayed and the replay combination other than "Replay 04" (for example, "Replay The sound effect that is output when "01") is stopped and displayed may be configured to be different, and by such a configuration, the player can recognize that "Replay 04" is stopped and displayed. It can be easily configured. In addition, there are cases where there is an AT-related state in which push-order navigation does not occur (for example, "normal gaming state", sometimes referred to as a non-AT gaming state), and an AT-related state where push-order navigation can occur (for example, "normal gaming state", sometimes referred to as a non-AT gaming state). The player may stay in "RT1" in both the "AT in progress state" (sometimes referred to as the "AT gaming state") and the "AT playing state". At this time, when a winning number that has the possibility of transitioning (falling) from "RT1" to "RT0" is won, a special sound effect will be played that indicates that the RT state may fall when in a non-AT gaming state. It may be configured not to output based on the operation of the start lever D50. This makes it possible to shift the gaming state without making the player realize that there is a possibility of falling to "RT0" in the non-AT gaming state. On the other hand, when in the AT gaming state, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall is output based on the operation of the start lever (and when the RT state does not fall, the re-gaming combination that does not fall is stopped and displayed). It may also be configured to notify the order navigation. This allows the player to operate the stop button D40 after the special sound effect is announced, being careful not to fall out of the RT state. In addition, "Re-gaming 05" which can be stopped and displayed at winning numbers 2 or 3 (a re-gaming combination which can notify you that you have won the AT additional lottery when it is stopped and displayed in the AT state) is mainly "RT1". It appears in this state, and almost never appears in other RT states. Incidentally, the transition of the state related to the RT state accompanying the stop display of the symbol combinations that become the re-gaming combinations will be described later. Furthermore, as will be described later, in the first embodiment, the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 are configured to execute a push order navigation that informs the player of the most advantageous reel stop order. There is. Note that there is no problem in changing the lottery probability as appropriate. Further, in the first embodiment, the bonus is configured so that it can overlap with the small winning combination, and overlaps with part of Watermelon A, Watermelon B, and Cherry. Specifically, winning numbers 21 to 23 and winning numbers 25 to 27 are conditional devices in which a bonus and a small win overlap.

In addition, in the situation of "RT2", since the BB has been won and the BB is not activated, the BB winning numbers 20 and 24 (a single individual that does not overlap with the minor winning numbers) If the BB role is won (sometimes referred to as a single BB role or a single BB role), the new winning of the BB role will be invalidated, and only the winning of the minor role will be valid. Specifically, for example, if you are "RT2" and have won (carried over) the 1st type BB-A, and you win the ``1st type BB-C'' with winning number 24, , Type 1 BB-C related to the winning number 24 will be invalidated. In other words, the situation is similar to the case where the winning number 0 "loses" and wins. In addition, the 1st type BB-A that has been carried over will continue to be won. In addition, in the situation of "RT2", since the BB has been won and the BB is not activated, the small winning numbers 21-23 and winning numbers 25-27 and the BB winning numbers are different. In the event that a duplicate condition device is won, the new winning of the BB winning combination will be invalidated and only the winning of the minor winning combination will be valid. Specifically, for example, if you are "RT2" and have won (carried over) 1st type BB-A, you win ``1st type BB-B + prize-C'' with winning number 21. In this case, the first type BB-B related to the winning number 21 will be invalidated, and only the winning prize-C will be valid. In other words, the situation is similar to the case where winning number 14 "Win-C" is won. In addition, the 1st type BB-A that has been carried over will continue to be won. Note that the overlap with the bonus is not limited to small winnings, and may overlap with a part of the replay winning combination. For example, some of the replay winning numbers 4 to 6 may overlap with the bonus winning combination. In this way, by making the bonus overlap with the conditional device that includes the RT transition replay (a re-gaming role that can change the RT state), the bonus can be won even when the conditional device that includes the RT transition replay is won. Even if there is a possibility that the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed, the bonus will not be denied, making it possible to give players expectations. In addition, when configured in this way, the RT state is controlled so as not to shift even if the RT shift replay is stopped and displayed. As a result, even though the player should have transitioned to an RT state (shifted to an RT state where the replay probability is relatively low), the replay probability has not become low (he frequently wins replays), etc. Therefore, it is possible to increase interest in the game, such as the possibility of winning a bonus.

Next, the lottery probability in "Type 1 BB-A, B, C" when the BB is activated will be explained in detail. In the first embodiment, during BB operation, winning number 13 "common bell", winning number 17 "BB medium-weak rare small combination (all diagonal bells)", and winning number 18 "BB medium-strong rare small It is structured so that you can win three small winning combinations: ``Win (V-shaped bells aligned)'' and ``BB medium-weak rare small winning combination (diagonal bell alignment)'' while the winning BB is in operation in the ``AT medium state''. ” or “BB medium-strong rare small winning combination (all V-shaped bells)”, an AT additional lottery is executed (details will be described later).

In addition, the upper part of the figure shows an example of the small role appearance rate when the setting value is 1, and for the common bell (winning number 13), the appearance rate is uniform regardless of the RT status. , as shown in the lower part of the figure, the appearance rate of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the set value (in this example, six levels). Specifically, the number in setting 1 is 3204, the number in setting 2 is 3404, the number in setting 3 is 3604, the number in setting 4 is 3904, the number in setting 5 is 4204, and the number in setting 6 is 3204. is 4504, and the configuration is such that the higher the setting value, the higher the appearance rate. With this configuration, for example, if a player plays a game while counting the number of times a common bell appears (number of wins), the common bell will be won frequently, and the number of times the common bell will be won will increase. It is possible to proceed with the game while having expectations that the set value is a relatively high set value. Further, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value per game, and the higher the set value, the higher the ball payout rate. Note that the appearance rate of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the set value, but depending on the winning of the common bell, the AT lottery, AT additional lottery, and high probability state transition lottery, which will be described later, will not be executed. It is configured so as not to affect the state transition lottery (also referred to as the AT-related lottery).

The middle part of the figure is a list of expected values when the push order navigation is available. In the same figure, when the push order navigation is executed in a state where the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 can execute the push order navigation such as in the "AT state", the reels are stopped according to the navigation. The average number of medals paid out per game (the average number of medals paid out according to winning small roles, also referred to as the expected number of gaming media obtained in one game) and the expected value of increase/decrease in medals per game ( This is the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of medals inserted when playing with a 3-bet bet.If it is larger than 1, the expected value will be positive and the number of medals will increase, while if it is smaller than 1, the expected value The value becomes negative and the number of medals decreases). The average number of payouts per game is calculated as follows: "Total number of replay winning combinations (total number of winning numbers 1 to 6) x number of payouts for replaying winning combinations (3) + minor winning combination (11) The sum of the numbers placed (minor role appearance rate) for the winning combination (sum of the numbers placed for winning numbers 7 to 16) x the number of payouts in the small role (11-card role) (11 pieces) / the sum of all the numbers placed (65536) )" can be calculated as follows. Further, the expected increase/decrease value of medals per game can be calculated as follows: "Average number of payouts per game/Number of medals inserted per game (3)". The number of medals inserted per game (the number of gaming media inserted when playing one game) is 3, and if the average number of payouts per game is greater than 3, an increase or decrease in medals per game is expected. The value is configured to be greater than 1. As shown in the figure, in the first embodiment, "RT1" has the relatively largest expected value of medal increase/decrease per game. Note that the numerical values in the figure do not take into account increases or decreases in medals due to bonuses. That is, if the game is played in a situation where push order navigation occurs (also referred to as a case of operation in an optimal operation mode or a case of operation in an advantageous operation mode), the number of medals will increase in "RT1". In addition, in "RT0" and "RT2", although not shown, in a situation where push order navigation is not occurring, the expected value of increase/decrease in medals per game is a value smaller than 1, and the medal increase/decrease is less than 1. will continue to decrease. In addition, in the first embodiment, the expected value of medal increase/decrease per game is greater than 1 when push order navigation is available in "RT0" or "RT2", but this is not limited to " It may be configured such that the expected value of medal increase/decrease per game when push order navigation is available in "RT0" or "RT2" is smaller than 1. In addition, when the symbol combination that becomes a re-gaming role is stopped and displayed, the number of bets (3 coins) in the previous game is actually automatically bet, but in calculating the expected medal increase/decrease value in the first embodiment, The calculation is based on the assumption that three medals will be paid out. Note that one game may be referred to as one game.

In addition, the average number of payouts per game in each RT state is 3.511291504 when the RT state is "RT0", and 4.737915039 when the RT state is "RT1". When is "RT2", it is 3.67137146. In addition, the expected value of medal increase/decrease per game in each RT state is 1.170430501 when the RT state is "RT0", and 1.579305013 when the RT state is "RT1". is 1.223790487 when it is "RT2", and when the push order navigation is available, the RT state "RT1" is the most advantageous RT state for the player. Note that the numerical value is the value when the setting is 1. The winning numbers and bonus lottery probabilities for the small roles and replay roles mentioned above are just examples. (expected medal increase/decrease value) may be configured to be less than 1. By configuring it like this, in a situation where the push order navigation occurs and in the case of "RT2" (when BB is internally established), if the bonuses are not arranged in a game where the bonuses can be arranged. Also, the number of medals you have will gradually decrease, and if you are in a situation where push order navigation occurs and you are in "RT2" (when BB is internally established), you may intentionally play games where you can collect bonuses. By not arranging bonuses, you can prevent strategies that increase the number of medals you have. Specifically, it is preferable to design the probability of losing in "RT2" to be higher than the winning probability of all the small winning combinations (Win-A1 to Winning-I) in "RT2". It is preferable to set the winning probability of the re-gaming combination so that it is designed so that the winning probability of the re-gaming combination is designed to be high. (It is preferable to design it so that it does not become too much.) In addition, in this example of "RT2", the total winning probability of all small winning combinations is 18784/65536, the total winning probability of all replays is 12501/65536, and the probability of losing is: 34251/65536 (see Figure 11), and is designed so that the probability of losing is higher than the probability of winning by adding up all the small winnings.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11, in the first embodiment, the appearance rate of type 1 BB-A is assigned the same number 40 for all settings 1 to 6. Further, the appearance rate of type 1 BB-C is assigned the same number 160 for all settings 1 to 6. On the other hand, the appearance rate of type 1 BB-B is 160 for setting 1, 180 for setting 2, 200 for setting 3, and 200 for setting 4. 220 is assigned, 240 is assigned to setting 5, and 270 is assigned to setting 6. That is, the appearance rate of type 1 BB-B is assigned a different number depending on the setting value. In this way, 1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C are BBs with no setting difference (1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C are sometimes referred to as BB with no setting difference or bonus with no setting difference). The first type BB-B functions as a BB with a setting difference (the first type BB-B is sometimes referred to as a BB with a setting difference or a bonus with a setting difference). Furthermore, the appearance rate of Type 1 BB-A, Type 1 BB-B, and Type 1 BB-C is uniform regardless of the RT status (between "RT0" and "RT1"). Note that the appearance rate of type 1 BB-A and type 1 BB-C (total) is the same regardless of the setting value, but the appearance rate of type 1 BB-B (total) differs depending on the setting value. Note that the total appearance rate as the appearance rate of type 1 BB-B is the same even if the setting values are different, but the appearance rate for each winning number may be configured to differ depending on the setting value, and in this way Even when configured, the type 1 BB-B may be referred to as a BB with a setting difference.

Next, a schematic electrical configuration of the reel-type gaming machine P according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 12. First, the drum-type game machine according to the first embodiment has a main control board M that controls the progress of the game, a sub-control board S, a door board D, a drum board K, a power supply board E, and a relay board IN. , a setting key switch M20, a setting/reset button M30, etc. are connected so as to be able to exchange data. In addition, the solid line part in the figure shows the movement related to data exchange, and the broken line part in the figure shows the power supply route. Note that the power supply route is not limited to this, and for example, power may be supplied from the power supply board E to the relay board IN or the door board D without going through the main control board.

The main control board (sometimes referred to as main control means, main board, main control means, main board, main game section) M is a board that controls the progress of the entire game played in the rotary gaming machine P. The main control board M is equipped with a main control chip C, and the main control chip C is connected to a CPU 100 (sometimes also referred to as CPUMC), a built-in ROMC 110, a built-in RAMC 120, etc. so that data can be exchanged with each other via a bus. It has been installed. Then, the main control board M receives a signal etc. indicating that the start lever D50 etc. has been operated from the door board D mounted on the front door DU, and then sends the sub control board S, the door board D, and the rotation drum board. The operations of these various boards are controlled by outputting control commands (or control signals) to the sub-control board S (for example, by outputting control commands (or control signals) to the sub-control board S By outputting (also referred to as), the sub-control board S is able to execute the push order navigation on the effect display device S40}.

Further, the sub-control board (sometimes referred to as sub-control means, sub-board, sub-control means, sub-board, sub-gaming section) S is also equipped with a sub-control chip SC, similar to the main control board M described above. The sub control chip SC is provided with a CPUSC 100, ROM, RAM, etc., and is configured to be connected to each other via a bus so that data can be exchanged. In addition, the sub-control board S includes various LED lamps S10 (including a bet button lamp S50 and a stop button lamp S60), a speaker S20, a production display device S40, a rotation drum backlight (also referred to as a back lamp) S30, etc. is connected. Here, the reel backlight S30 is a light provided inside each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and illuminates the symbols drawn on the surfaces of the reels from the back side. The sub-control board S analyzes the control commands received from the main control board M, and outputs drive signals to the various LED lamps S10, speakers S20, performance display device S40, drum backlight S30, etc. is being performed. In addition, in the reel-type gaming machine according to this example, the player can move the nine ranges of the upper, middle, and lower rows of the left reel, the upper, middle, and lower rows of the middle reel, and the upper, middle, and lower rows of the right reel. A plurality of LEDs are provided as the drum backlight S30 so that they can be individually identified. For example, the player can identify that the upper row of the left reel is lit by lighting up the LED corresponding to the upper row of the left reel and turning off all other LEDs. Furthermore, when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed in a stopped state, the player can inform the player that the predetermined symbol combination has been stopped and displayed by changing the lighting mode of the reel backlight S30. The device is configured to be able to perform a backlight effect (sometimes referred to as a backlight effect) as suggested by the following.

The door board D includes the aforementioned input reception sensor D10s, the first input sensor D20s, the second input sensor D30s, a stop button D40 for stopping the rotating reel M50, and a start button for starting the rotation of the reel M50. A lever D50, a settlement button D60 for dispensing stored game medals (credits) and inserted game medals to end the game, and various display panels D70 for displaying game status (not shown, but as described above) The input number indicator D210, the start lamp D180, the replay lamp D290, the input ready lamp D300, the special game status display device D250, the payout number display device (press order display device) D270, the credit number display device D200, the advantageous section A collection of display devices such as a display YH, etc.), a door switch D80 for determining whether the front door is open or closed, canceling an error, or changing a set value, a game medal (or , and other foreign matter) to the discharge port D240. Further, this door board D is connected to the above-mentioned main control board M so as to be able to exchange data. Therefore, when the start lever D50, stop button D40, payment button D60, etc. provided on the front door DU is operated, a signal related to the operation is supplied to the main control board M via the door board D. ing. Further, a signal that the input reception sensor D10s detects passage of a game medal is also supplied to the main control board M via the door board D.

Further, connected to the drum board K are a drum motor K10 for rotating the reel M50, a drum sensor K20 for detecting the rotational position of the reel M50, and the like. The reel board K can stop the reel M50 at the determined stop position by driving the reel motor K10 while detecting the rotational position of the reel M50 using the reel sensor K20. There is. Furthermore, in the reel type gaming machine of the first embodiment, a so-called step motor (sometimes referred to as a stepping motor) is used as the reel motor K10. Note that the step motor is set to 480 steps as the number of steps for one rotation of the reel M50. In addition, each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) has a predetermined number (for example, 20) of symbols of approximately uniform size, and the number of steps corresponding to one symbol is is set to 24 steps (=480/20). It should be noted that there is no problem even if the number of steps and the number of symbols per round of the reels are changed.

The medal payout device H is connected to the main control board M via the relay board IN, and pays out a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game medals based on a control signal from the main control board M. Perform the action of releasing. The medal dispensing device H includes a first dispensing sensor H10s and a second dispensing sensor H20s that determine whether medals have been normally dispensed and measure the number of dispensed game medals, and a disk H50. A hopper motor H80 for rotation is connected.

The power consumed by these various control boards and boards is supplied from a power supply board E (a board that controls whether or not power is supplied by a power switch E10). In FIG. 12, the manner in which power is supplied from the power supply board E is represented by broken arrows. As shown in the figure, power is directly supplied to the main control board M and the sub-control board S from the power supply board E, and the various boards (door board D, drum board K, relay board IN) are Power is supplied via the main control board M. A predetermined amount (for example, 100V) of AC voltage is supplied to the power supply board E, and after converting this power into a DC voltage of a specified voltage, it is supplied to each control board and the board.

In addition, the main control board M includes a setting key switch M20 used to execute a setting change device control process (to change settings), which will be described later, and a setting/reset key switch that can change setting values, cancel errors, etc. Button M30 is connected. The main control board M also includes a reel control means that controls the rotation and stop of the reels M50 (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53), and an "AT in progress state" which is a state related to AT that is advantageous to the player. AT lottery means that executes an AT transition lottery for transitioning to AT, and an AT additional lottery that increases the number of remaining AT games (or the counter value of AT counter M60), which is the number of games that can stay in the "AT state". It has an AT add-on lottery means for executing.

Next, FIGS. 13 to 36 are flowcharts showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M in the first embodiment.

The flowchart is mainly composed of processing steps (represented by rectangles), judgments (represented by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), and terminals indicating start, end, return, etc. (represented by rounded rectangles). ing. In addition, when the details of a processing step are illustrated in another flowchart, those that refer to the other flowchart are illustrated as subroutines (illustrated by a rectangle with double lines on the left and right). . At the development stage of gaming machines, gaming machines with different specifications are sometimes developed at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine ( The configuration is such that no subroutines (subroutines that are not normally used) are left behind, and processes related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed are prevented from being executed due to noise or fraudulent activity.

First, FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing that is executed for the first time in the CPUC 100 of the main control board M after turning on the power of the reel-type gaming machine P (or at the time of system reset or user reset). . First, in step 1000, after turning on the power of the reel-type gaming machine P, in step 1002, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes the initial setting of the timer interrupt (here, the timer interrupt is started). (Instead, it only sets the type of timer interrupt, and in subsequent processing, when a timer interrupt is started, a flowchart related to timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is executed periodically). Next, in step 1004, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes serial communication settings (speed, data length, data transmission method settings), etc. as function settings for the main control chip C. Next, in step 1006, the CPU 100 of the main control board M calculates the checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area. Next, in step 1008, the CPU 100 of the main control board M checks the RAM area (for example, based on the calculated checksum and the checksum data held in the checksum area) (checks whether the data stored in the built-in RAMC 120 is correctly held) and generates power-off recovery data. Next, in step 1010, the CPU 100 of the main control board M checks the switch state of the setting key switch M20. Next, in step 1014, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting key switch M20 is off.

If Yes in step 1014, in step 1016, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns on/off the power-off processed flag in the RAM (turned on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAM (in step 1006). check results) to determine whether the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal. If Yes in step 1016, in step 1020, the CPU 100 of the main control board M initializes the RAM area within the determined initialization range. Next, in step 1022, the CPU 100 of the main control board M restores the stack pointer based on the data related to the stack pointer saved in the power-off processing (step 1902). Next, in step 1036, the CPU 100 of the main control board M refers to the RAM area and determines whether the data related to the setting value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). judge. If Yes in step 1036, in step 1038, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M reads the input port. Next, in step 1040, the CPU 100 of the main control board M starts the timer interrupt set in step 1002. Next, in step 1042, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off the power-off processing completed flag and returns to the processing at the time of power-off according to the restored stack pointer.

If the answer is No in step 1016, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a backup error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area) in step 1024. Next, in step 1300, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes unrecoverable error processing, which will be described later.

Further, in the case of No in step 1036, in step 1046, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a setting value error display (for example, to be displayed on the payout number display device D270) (for example, in the register area ). Next, in step 1300, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes unrecoverable error processing, which will be described later.

If No in step 1014, in step 1028, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns on/off the power-off processed flag in the RAM (turned on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAM (step 1028). 1006), it is determined whether the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal. If Yes in step 1028, in step 1030, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the initialization range of the RAM to a predetermined range excluding the storage area for storing setting values (setting value data) in the RAM, and sets ( For example, it is set in a register area), and the process moves to step 1034. The range that is not included in the RAM initialization range is not limited to only the storage area that stores setting values (setting value data), but also includes the total cumulative number of games in the "advantageous section" and the total cumulative number of game sections (advantageous section + The number of games (normal section), the result of calculating the stay ratio in the "advantageous section", etc. are also outside the range of RAM initialization. With this configuration, it becomes possible to calculate and display the ratio of players staying in the "advantageous section" (advantageous section ratio) in the game. Further, the calculation process of the advantageous section ratio is configured to be calculated at the timing when the unit game ends. Further, the advantageous section ratio is displayed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (eg, displayed on a 4-digit 7-segment display). As a specific display mode, the following is repeated at 5-second intervals in the order of "advantageous section ratio → continuous character ratio per 6000 games → character ratio per 6000 games → cumulative successive character ratio → cumulative character ratio" Is displayed. In addition, the continuous accessory ratio is "the number of payouts when RB is operating / the total number of payouts", and the accessory ratio is "the number of payouts when RB, CB, or SB is operating". /total number of payouts. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1028, in step 1032, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the initialization range of the RAM to be a specific range that includes a storage area for storing setting values (setting value data) in the RAM. Set (for example, set in a register area) and proceed to step 1034. Next, in step 1034, the CPU 100 of the main control board M initializes the RAM area within the initialization range determined in step 1030 or step 1032. Next, in step 1100, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a setting change device control process, which will be described later.

Although not shown, it is preferable to configure the initial value (value at the start of processing) of the temporary storage area (RAM area, etc.) mounted on the main control board M so that it does not become the value at which the special game is executed. (This is to prevent the special game from being erroneously executed in the event that the process for determining whether to execute the special game is executed due to noise or fraudulent activity immediately after the start of program processing). Although not shown, when storing random numbers such as winning random numbers in the RAM area of the main control board M, a dedicated storage area is secured and the bytes storing information related to the random numbers are It is preferable to configure the system so that only information related to the random number is stored (other information such as various timer values is not stored). (To prevent information related to random numbers from being rewritten).

Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a setting change device control process related to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. 13, and is also referred to as a setting change mode. First, in step 1102, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a stack pointer (initializes it with the start address of the process). Next, in step 1104, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M activates a timer interrupt. Next, in step 1106, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting value (setting value data) in the RAM area is not within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). Note that if the setting values (setting value data) are managed as 1 to 6, it is necessary to initialize the RAM and return the setting value to ``1'' when it becomes ``0''. Therefore, in this example, by managing the normal range of the setting value (setting value data) as 0 to 5, the setting value (setting value data) correction process (step 1106 and The process in step 1108) can be made unnecessary, making it possible to shorten the processing time and reduce the processing capacity. If Yes in step 1106, in step 1108, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets the setting value (setting value data) to a predetermined value (for example, 0 = the value that is most disadvantageous to the player), and proceeds to step 1110. Transition. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1106, the process also moves to step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPU 100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (for example, the payout number display device D270) that the setting change device is in operation (for example, "88" that lights up all segments). Then, the setting value is displayed on the setting display LED (not shown) (the display related to the setting value is a value obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (setting value data) held in the RAM), and step 1112 to move to. Incidentally, as described above, the payout number display device D270 is also used when notifying the pressing order. Because of this configuration, for example, when a part of the 7-segment LED is malfunctioning (some segments cannot be lit), incorrect information may be reported when announcing the press order. could be. In order to prevent such a situation, by having all 7 segments on the payout number display device D270 light up to "88" while the setting change device is operating, it is possible to confirm whether or not the 7 segments are out of order, and to notify the player of any inconvenience. It is possible to prevent the giving of benefits, etc. In addition, as a configuration related to the display of setting values (setting value data), a RAM memory for setting value display stores data obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (setting value data) in the storage area for storing setting values. It may be configured to have a storage area and display the setting value by referring to the storage area. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1110, a process is executed to transmit a command indicating that the sub control board S is transitioning to the setting change mode.

Next, in step 1112, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting/reset button M30 has been switched from off to on. If Yes in step 1112, in step 1114, the CPU 100 of the main control board M adds 1 to the current setting value (setting value data). , the set value (set value data) becomes 0), and the process moves to step 1116. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 1112, the process moves to step 1116. Next, in step 1116, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the start lever D50 has been switched from off to on. If No in step 1116, the process moves to step 1112, and the processing from step 1112 to step 1116 is looped. If Yes in step 1116, in step 1118, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting key switch M20 has been switched from on to off. If No in step 1118, the process in step 1118 is looped. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1118, in step 1120, the CPU 100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (not shown) that the operation of the setting change device has been completed, and turns on the setting display LED (not shown). The display of the set value (set value data) is erased, and the process moves to step 1200, the game progress control process. Although not shown, after the process of step 1120 is executed, a process is executed to send a command to the sub-control board S side indicating that the setting change mode is to be terminated.

Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of non-recoverable error handling according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 13 (and called in other flowcharts). First, in step 1302, the CPU 100 of the main control board M prohibits interrupts (from then on, the flowchart related to timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not executed). Next, in step 1304, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the output port address and the number of output ports. Next, in step 1306, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off the output ports (0 to 6 in this example, display output to various LEDs and drive output to various motors). Next, in step 1308, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets the next port output address (by repeating this, display outputs to various LEDs and drive outputs to various motors are sequentially stopped). Next, in step 1310, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether output to each output port has been completed. If Yes in step 1310, in step 1312, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes the set error display (some error has occurred when executing this process), and The process repeats execution, and when the power supply voltage decreases, a reset signal is input and the process ends. (In other words, since it enters an infinite loop, it does not accept any operation that prompts a return). Note that if No in step 1310, the process moves to step 1306. Note that the processing from step 1306 to step 1310 is the processing for clearing the output to the LED/motor (however, since the external output signal is not cleared, information regarding the error and the game progress status at the time of the error occurrence are sent to the hall computer). ).

Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first page) related to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a stack pointer (initializes it with the start address of the process). Next, in step 1203, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets data in the RAM area necessary for the game (for example, the maximum number of bets, the winning line, etc.). Note that step 1203 includes data for clearing the data used in the previous game {for example, condition device number (winning number), production group number, instruction information} ("0" for clearing the RAM address). It also includes processing to set data) in RAM. Incidentally, the condition device number, performance group number, instruction information, etc. may not be cleared, but may be configured to be overwritten with the selected number when the next game is executed. Next, in step 1204, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets the RT state (for example, "RT0", etc.) in the game (sets the RT state determined in step 1704 of FIG. 27). Next, in step 1205, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) regarding the RT state set in step 1204. Note that the process of setting the RT state may be executed in step 1704 in FIG. 27. Further, in step 1704, a command related to the RT state (command to the sub side) may be set. Further, when transmitting the RT state to the sub-side, it is not necessary to always transmit it, and the RT state may be configured to be transmitted to the sub-side only when the gaming section is an "advantageous section". Next, in step 1206, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets the state related to AT in the game (for example, "AT in progress state", etc.) (steps 1420 and 1429 in FIG. 21, step 1435 in FIG. 22, (Set the state regarding the AT determined in steps 1439, 1443, and steps 1444-3 and 1444-4 in FIG. 23). Next, in step 1207, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) regarding the state regarding the AT set in step 1206. Further, the process of setting the state regarding the AT may be executed in steps 1416 and 1428 in FIG. 21, step 1438 in FIG. 22, and step 1444-1 in FIG. 23. Further, when transmitting the AT-related status to the sub-side, it is not necessary to always transmit it, and the AT-related status may be configured to be transmitted to the sub-side only when the gaming section is an "advantageous section". Next, in step 1208, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets the game period (for example, "advantageous period", etc.) in the game (the game period determined in steps 3510, 3516, and 3520 in FIG. 31). set). Next, in step 1208-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) regarding the game section set in step 1208. Next, in step 1209, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the medal payout device H is not full of game medals. Specifically, it includes a medal auxiliary tank HS (details will be described later) that stores medals overflowing from the medal dispensing device H, and two fullness detection electrodes DE (details will be described later) that can enter the inside of the medal auxiliary tank HS. Judgment is made based on whether the current is conductive or non-conductive (if the current is conductive through the medal, it is determined that the medal is full). If Yes in step 1209, the process moves to step 1218.

On the other hand, if No in step 1209, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns on the medal full error flag in step 1210 (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to "on"). ). Next, in step 1212, the CPU 100 of the main control board M displays an error number corresponding to the medal full error using a 7-segment LED (for example, a storage display LED or an acquired number LED). Next, in step 1214, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the medal full error has been canceled (for example, if the current from the two full detection electrodes provided in the medal auxiliary tank HS is non-conducting, and if the setting/ It is determined whether or not the reset button M30 has been pressed. If Yes in step 1214, in step 1216, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to OFF), and The process moves to 1218. On the other hand, if No in step 1214, the process moves to step 1212. Next, in step 1218, the CPU 100 of the main control board M permits acceptance of medal insertion (the insertion operation will be automatically executed in the next game of the replayed combination), and performs the next process (step 1220). processing). Here, in step 1218, a process of turning on the blocker D100 (a process of forming a medal flow path) is performed. Specifically, when a replay combination is established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is turned on, provided that the current number of credits (credits) is less than a predetermined value (50 in this example). Execute. In other words, when the current number of stored credits (credits) is a predetermined value, the blocker D100 is not turned on. On the other hand, if the re-gaming combination was not established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is uniformly turned on. With this configuration, even if a re-gaming combination is established, if the stored number (credits) has not reached a predetermined value, game medals can be inserted, such as "RT1" etc. When staying in the RT state (for example, "RT1") where the probability of winning a replay combination is higher than in the RT state, or when a replay combination is difficult to tell from the outside as a replay combination (a replay disguised as a small win). Even if a symbol combination (bell-bell-bell or a cherry stopped on the left reel) stops on the invalid line, the player can play the game in good rhythm (without feeling strange).

Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second page) related to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1220, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not game medals have not been bet or saved (credits do not exist). If Yes in step 1220, in step 1221, the CPU 100 of the main control board M satisfies the set value display condition (for example, the condition is satisfied when the door switch D80 and setting key switch M20 are all turned on). Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 1221, in step 1222, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets the setting display LED (although not shown, it may be a payout number display device D270, a credit number display device D200, or an input number display light D210). The value is displayed (transferring to the setting confirmation mode), and the process moves to step 1221 on the condition that the setting key switch M20 is turned off. Furthermore, when the transition conditions for the setting change mode are met, a process is performed to send a command to the sub-control board S side to indicate that the setting change mode is to be started, and when the conditions for ending the setting change mode are met, the setting change mode is started. Processing is being executed to send a command to indicate termination. In the case of No in step 1220 or step 1221, in step 1224, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes management related to the insertion and settlement of game medals. Next, in step 1225, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M checks the number of game medals that can be accepted. Next, in step 1226, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the blocker D100 is on. If Yes in step 1226, in step 1227, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the first input sensor D20s or the second input sensor D30s is on (in the first embodiment, the CPU It has two input sensors for detecting the input speed, and when the first input sensor D20s or the second input sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one game medal has been received). If Yes in step 1227, in step 1230, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are off (the first input sensor D20s or the second input sensor D20s is off). After the sensor D30s is turned on, when the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are turned off, it is determined that one accepted game medal has passed through the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s. ). In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1231, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the insertion of one normal game medal has been received. Although not shown, after step 1231, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the number of credits is the maximum number (50 in this example) and the number of bets is the maximum number (3 in this example). If it is determined as Yes, the blocker D100 is controlled to be off (a state in which no medal flow path is formed). Note that if No in step 1230, the process of step 1230 is repeated, and if No in step 1226 or 1227, the process moves to step 1232.

Next, in step 1232, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the payment button D60 has been operated. If Yes in step 1232, in step 1233, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether there is a remaining number of credits or betted game medals. If Yes in step 1233, in step 1234, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns on the hopper drive flag (a flag in the RAM area, which is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is being driven), and Execute the payout of one medal. Next, in step 1236, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (in the first embodiment, to detect the payout of medals). It has two payout sensors, and when the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal is being performed). If YES in step 1236, the process moves to step 1247. Here, although it is not specified on the flowchart, if the previous game was a replay combination, only the remaining number of credits is subject to settlement.

On the other hand, if No in step 1236, in step 1241, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of the process in step 1234). . Specifically, whether the situation in which it is determined that no medals have been paid out continues for a predetermined period of time even though the hopper drive signal is being sent to the hopper motor H80 (the hopper motor H80 is rotating) Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 1241, in step 1242, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 1244, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display. Next, in step 1245, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the medal empty error has been canceled (for example, whether the setting/reset button M30 has been pressed). If Yes in step 1245, in step 1246, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to OFF), and steps 1247. On the other hand, if No in step 1245, the process moves to step 1244.

Next, in step 1247, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the first dispensing sensor H10s and the second dispensing sensor H20s are off (the first dispensing sensor H10s or the second dispensing sensor H20s is on). After that, when the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of the one game medal that was being put out has been completed). If Yes in step 1247, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag in step 1248, and proceeds to step 1233. Note that if No in step 1241 or step 1247, the process moves to step 1236.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1232 or step 1233, in step 1251, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the start lever D50 is valid (for example, a specified number of game medals have been inserted to start the game, etc.). ), and it is determined whether or not the start lever D50 has been operated. If Yes in step 1251, in step 1253, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the set value in the RAM area is within a normal range (0 to 5 in this example). If Yes in step 1253, in step 1254, the CPU 100 of the main control board M obtains a random number and turns off the blocker D100, and then moves to the next process (the process in step 3600). On the other hand, if No in step 1253, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a setting value error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area) in step 1256. Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes unrecoverable error processing. Note that if No in step 1251, the process moves to step 1220.

Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third page) related to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 3600, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an internal lottery execution process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1259, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state regarding AT is a state in which an AT additional lottery is possible. Here, in this example, the states related to AT that can execute the AT add-on lottery are "AT in progress state", "add-on specialization state", "specialization precursor state", and "advantageous BB state". In the "advantageous BB internal medium game", the AT counter value may be greater than 0, but the AT add-on lottery is not executed. This is to prevent the player from daringly not aligning the BB symbol combinations in the "advantageous BB internal medium game" from becoming more advantageous to the player. It should be noted that it may be configured so that the AT add-on lottery can be executed in the "advantageous BB internal medium game", and in such a configuration, the player can win the AT add-on lottery in the "advantageous BB internal medium game". It may be configured such that the player is not notified immediately, but is then notified that he has won the AT additional lottery at the timing when the BB ends, or the number of AT remaining games after the number of AT games has been added.

If Yes in step 1259, in step 1500, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a game number addition execution process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1400. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1259, the process moves to step 1400. In this process of adding up the number of games, it is possible to execute the lottery using different lottery tables depending on the state related to AT, but the lottery probability does not differ depending on the setting value (using the same lottery table It is preferable to carry out a lottery. Next, in step 1400, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes AT state transition control processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 1450, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes condition device number management processing, which will be described later.

Here, the states related to AT in this example will be listed and explained in detail (also shown in the AT state transition diagram in FIG. 30). (1) The "low probability state" is a state in which the AT has not been won (the right to shift to the "AT in progress state" has not been acquired) and the bonus combination has not been won. Note that the "low probability state" is a so-called "normal state" and is therefore sometimes referred to as a "normal state." (2) "Normal BB internal medium game" is a state in which the BB combination has been won in the "low probability state", the BB combination has not been won, and the AT lottery has not been won. (3) "Normal BB state" means when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in a situation where the BB combination has been won in the "low probability state" and the AT lottery has not been won. Alternatively, it is a state that is executed when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the "normal BB internal medium game". (4) “High probability state” is a state in which the player has not won the AT lottery (has not acquired the right to move to the “AT middle state”) and has not won the bonus role. , is a state in which it is easier to win AT than the above-mentioned "low probability state". Furthermore, as will be described later, in the case of a new transition to the "high probability state", the configuration is such that the transition to the "low probability state" does not occur until the number of high secured obstacle games has elapsed (5) "AT in progress state" " is a state in which AT (press order navigation) is performed and the number of remaining AT games (AT counter value) is subtracted. Even if the AT counter value becomes 0, if you win the continuation lottery described later, a predetermined value will be set in the AT counter and the "AT in progress state" will continue (6) "Specialization precursor state". is a state in which the player has acquired the right to move to the "additional specialization state", which is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively more likely to be added than the "AT in progress state". (7) "Additional specialized state" is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively more likely to be added than "AT state". (8) "Advantageous BB internal medium game" means winning the BB role in the "high probability state", "AT medium state", "specialization precursor state", or "additional specialization state", and the BB role is It is in a state where it has not won a prize. (9) "Waiting BB internal game" is a state where the BB role is won in the "low probability state", the AT lottery is won by the BB role, and the BB role has not won. . (10) “Advantageous BB state” means that the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is won when the BB role is won in the “high probability state”, “AT medium state”, “specialization precursor state”, or “additional specialization state”. When the BB combination is stopped and displayed, or when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the "advantageous BB internal game", the BB combination is won in the "low probability state", and , when you have won the AT lottery with the BB role and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed, or when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed in the "standby BB internal medium game" It is a state that is executed at times. (12) "Resurrection propriety state" is a state related to the AT that changes when the AT counter value becomes 0 and the player does not win the continuous lottery to be described later. In the "resurrection possibility state", a revival lottery, which will be described later, is executed, and if the revival lottery is won, the state shifts to the "AT state" (the AT counter is set to a predetermined value), and the resurrection lottery is not played. If you win, you will move to a "low probability state".

Next, in step 1550, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M starts rotating all reels, which will be described later, and moves to step 1261-1. Next, in step 1261-1, the CPU 100 of the main control board M issues a pull-in point creation request (a request is made to determine the stop positions of the rotating left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53, and the stop order (as appropriate depending on the stop position of the other reels) is determined. If Yes in step 1261-1, the CPU 100 of the main control board M creates a pull-in point in step 1262, and proceeds to step 1263. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1261-1, the process moves to step 1263. In this way, in the "BB internal medium game", in the game where the press order bell was won, the stop button was not stopped in the correct press order that would result in a payout of 11 coins (for example, in the case of winning - A1, Even if the stop button is not stopped in the order of "left → middle → right" (the reels are stopped in the wrong order), the reel stop control (hereinafter referred to as "reel stop control") (or simply referred to as "stop control"), the system is configured so that symbol combinations resulting in 11 payouts will be won. Next, in step 1263, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a check to see if the reel stop is accepted. Next, in step 1264, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether any of the stop buttons (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) has been operated. If Yes in step 1264, in step 1265, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button (for example, the left reel M51 corresponds to the left stop button D41). . On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1264, the process moves to step 1266. Next, in step 1266, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an all reel stop check process. Next, in step 1267, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether all the reels (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) have stopped. If Yes in step 1267, the CPU 100 of the main control board M compares the symbol stop position data in the RAM with the internal winning combination stop possible position data in step 1268. Next, in step 1269, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the displayed combination of symbols is normal (if it does not match the winning combination determined by the internal lottery, it is abnormal). ). It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the displayed symbol combination is normal in step 1269 is made by determining whether or not the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally, and the winning combination is determined. In a game where the stop button is operated in an operation mode that allows the winning combination to win, the position of the reels that actually stopped was not normal (the winning combination determined by an internal lottery becomes possible). Even if the winning combination is not visually displayed as stopped by the player, if the reel stop control is successfully executed by the processing inside the gaming machine, the game medals based on the winning combination will be displayed. The payout is configured to be executed. If YES in step 1269, the process moves to step 1274. On the other hand, if No in step 1269, in step 1270, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a display determination error display (for example, sets it in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes unrecoverable error processing. On the other hand, if No in step 1267, the process moves to step 1261-1.

Next, in step 1274, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a process of paying out game medals based on winnings. Next, in step 1275, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a win that pays out game medals {if the game medals acquired by winning exceed the maximum number of credits (50 in this example) In this case, the game medals are paid out. If Yes in step 1275, in step 1276, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns on the hopper drive flag (a flag that is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is being driven) and executes the payout of one game medal. . Next, in step 1277, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the first dispensing sensor H10s or the second dispensing sensor H20s is on (the first dispensing sensor H10s or the second dispensing sensor H20s is on). In this case, it is determined that a payout operation for one game medal is being performed). If YES in step 1277, the process moves to step 1286.

On the other hand, if No in step 1277, in step 1279, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of the process in step 1276). . If YES in step 1279, in step 1280, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 1281, the CPU 100 of the main control board M displays a medal empty error display using the 7-segment LED. Next, in step 1282, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the medal empty error has been canceled (for example, whether the setting/reset button M30 has been pressed). If Yes in step 1282, in step 1283, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to OFF), and steps 1286. On the other hand, if No in step 1282, the process moves to step 1281.

Next, in step 1286, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the first dispensing sensor H10s and the second dispensing sensor H20s are off (the first dispensing sensor H10s or the second dispensing sensor H20s is on). After that, when the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of the one game medal that was being put out has been completed). If Yes in step 1286, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag in step 1288, and proceeds to step 1290. Note that if No in step 1279 or step 1286, the process moves to step 1277. Next, in step 1290, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout corresponding to the winning prize (winning prize determined as Yes in step 1275) has been completed. If YES in step 1290, the process moves to step 3400. Note that if No in step 1286, the process moves to step 1277, if No in step 1275, the process moves to step 3400, and if No in step 1290, the process moves to step 1276.

Next, in step 3400, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes remaining game number management processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 1700, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an RT state transition control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1750, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an AT state start control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 3500, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a game section transition control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1293, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a game end process (for example, clearing the number of bets, changing the game state, etc.), and moves to the next process (the process of step 1202).

Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of internal lottery execution processing related to the subroutine of step 3600 in FIG. 18 in the first embodiment. First, in step 3602, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets an internal lottery table (a table used when executing an internal lottery, in which winning numbers and numbers for comparison with acquired random numbers are stored). Then, the process moves to step 3604. Next, in step 3604, the CPU 100 of the main control board M obtains the winning number associated with the set internal lottery table address. Note that winning/replay winning information can be generated from the winning number. In addition, if a bonus and a small role are won at the same time, or a bonus and a replay role are won at the same time, both the winning/replay winning information and the bonus winning information will be calculated based on the winning number. Winning information can be generated. The specific generation process will be described later. Next, in step 3606, the CPU 100 of the main control board M obtains the number of repetitions related to the set internal lottery table address. Here, the number of repetitions is the number of consecutive winning numbers that have the same payout group number and the same number for comparison with the obtained random number, and is the number of consecutive winning numbers that are stored in the ROM of the main control board M in advance. remembered. For example, ball payout group number 2 includes nine winning numbers 4 to 12, and three consecutive winning numbers 4 to 6, which are replayable combinations in the push order, have the same number. As for the six consecutive winning numbers 7 to 12, which are push order bell combinations, the above numbers are the same, so the number of repetitions related to the push order replay winning combination is 3, and the push order bell The number of repetitions related to the winning combination is 6. In addition, the lottery table used when winning numbers 4 to 6, which are push order replay roles, and the lottery table used when winning numbers 7 to 12, which are push order bell roles, are obtained are a single lottery table. It is configured. Next, in step 3608, the CPU 100 of the main control board M obtains the payout group number related to the set internal lottery table address, and proceeds to step 3610.

Next, in step 3610, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M obtains setting value data. Next, in step 3612, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M obtains designated address data. Next, in step 3614, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the internal lottery was won (whether or not the obtained random number existed in the internal lottery table searched this time). In the case of Yes in step 3614, it is determined that the internal lottery has been won, so the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1259) without executing determination (lottery) regarding the subsequent internal lottery table address. On the other hand, if No in step 3614, the CPU 100 of the main control board M updates the number of repetitions in step 3616. Next, in step 3618, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether there is a remaining number of repetitions. If Yes in step 3618, the process moves to step 3610, and the processes from step 3610 to step 3618 are repeatedly executed until the remaining number of repetitions is exhausted or the internal lottery is won. If No in step 3618, in step 3620, the CPU 100 of the main control board M updates the internal lottery table address (updates it to the address related to the next ball group number), moves to step 3604, and returns to step 3604. Execute the following processing. Note that specific processing of the internal lottery will be described later.

Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution process related to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 18 in the first embodiment. First, in step 1502, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the state related to AT is "AT in progress", "specialization precursor state", or "additional specialization state". If Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the ball group number for the game is the winning number that can add up the number of remaining AT games in the AT state. In this example, it is determined whether the ball group number (1, 3 in this example) is related to the replay-B, re-game-C, winning-D. If YES in step 1504, the process moves to step 1514. In addition, in the case of No in step 1502, in other words, if the state related to AT is an advantageous BB state, in step 1512, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the ball group number for the game concerned is the BB medium bonus (" In the "advantageous BB state", it is a winning number that can add up to the number of remaining AT games, and in this example, whether it is a payout group number (5, 6 in this example) related to winning-H, winning-I). Determine. If Yes in step 1512, the process moves to step 1514, and if No in step 1512, the process moves to step 1518. Further, in the case of No in step 1504, in step 1506, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the state regarding the AT is the "additional specialization state". If Yes in step 1506, in step 1508, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the ball group number for the game is a specialization bonus role (in the "addition specialization state", the number of remaining AT games can be added and In the "AT state", it is a winning number that does not add the number of remaining AT games, and in this example, it is a winning group number related to re-play - A, re-play - D1 to D3, winning - A1 to A6) (in this example, 2, 13). If YES in step 1508, the process moves to step 1514. Note that if No in step 1506 or step 1508, the process moves to step 1518.

Next, in step 1514, the CPU 100 of the main control board M refers to the lottery table for the number of additional games upon winning and determines the number of AT additional games based on the ball group number related to the game (for example, In the lottery table shown in the drawing table, the determination is made based on which range the latched random number falls within. Note that determining the number of AT add-on games is also referred to as executing an AT add-on lottery. Next, in step 1516, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M adds the determined number of AT additional games to the counter value of the AT counter M60, and sets the AT counter value after the addition in the AT counter M60. Next, in step 1517, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sends a command (a command to the sub-control board S side) related to the determined number of AT additional games, and the sub-control board S receives the command. It is possible to recognize whether or not the number of AT games has been added and how many games are added, and the process moves to step 1518. Note that AT-related drawings (AT drawings, AT additional drawings) can also be executed in the case of ball playing group numbers 7 to 11, which are ball group numbers related to winning numbers (winning numbers 19 to 27) that include bonuses. .

Here, the lottery table shown outside the figure is an example of a lottery table for the number of additional games upon winning. If the winning combination is won in "AT state", "Specialization precursor state", "Additional specialization state", "Advantageous BB state"), the winning combination will be determined based on the ball group number related to the game. , the number of AT add-on games is determined by lottery from 0 to 300, and the determined value is added to the counter value of the AT counter M60. Note that if "0" is determined, the number of AT remaining games will not increase (if "0" is determined, it may be referred to as not winning the AT additional lottery).

In addition, the average value (expected value) of the number of AT additional games when winning the additional combination at the time of winning is as shown in the figure, and the specific calculation method is that the winning combination is Watermelon A. In this case, {Number of settings (600) x Number of AT additional games (0) + Number of settings (100) x Number of AT additional games (10) + Number of settings (300) x Number of AT additional games (30) + Number of settings ( 24)×Number of AT add-on games (100)}/total number of set numbers (1024)=12.1 (games).

Next, if the winning combination is replay-B or replay-C, {set number (500) x number of AT add-on games (0) + set number (200) x number of AT add-on games (50) + Calculate as follows: Placement number (300) x Number of AT additional games (100) + Placement number (24) x Number of AT addition games (300)}/Total number of placements (1024) = 46.1 (games) be able to.

Next, if the winning combination is Replay-A or Replay-D1 to D3, or Winning-A1 to A6, {Number of Places (300) x Number of AT Addition Games (10) + Number of Places (600) It can be calculated as follows: Number of AT add-on games (30) + number of entries (124) x number of AT addition games (50)}/Total number of additions (1024) = 26.61 (games). In addition, if the winning combination is Replay-A or Replay-D1 to D3, or Winning-A1 to A6, the number of AT games will be added only if the AT-related state is "Additional specialized state". It has become.

Next, if the winning combination is a BB medium-weak rare combination, {number of entries (800) x number of AT additional games (0) + number of entries (100) x number of AT addition games (10) + number of entries (100) )×Number of AT additional games (30)+Number of entries (24)×Number of AT additional games (100)}/Total number of additional entries (1024)=6.3 (games).

Next, if the winning combination is a BB medium strong rare combination, {Number of placements (300) x Number of AT additional games (0) + Number of placements (300) x Number of AT addition games (30) + Number of placements (400) )×Number of AT additional games (50)+Number of entries (24)×Number of AT additional games (300)}/Total number of additional entries (1024)=35.4 (games).

In addition, in the first embodiment, when an AT add-on lottery is executed, the average value of the number of AT add-on games may differ depending on the type of winning combination, but depending on the setting value, the number of AT add-on games may vary. The average values of are configured so that they do not differ. Here, when configuring to execute an AT additional lottery based on the winning number, for example, when executing the same process as an AT additional lottery with winning numbers 7 and 8, the winning number is 7. However, as in the first embodiment, by configuring to perform the AT additional lottery based on the winning number group number, the winning number 7 and the winning number When performing the same process as an AT add-on lottery with winning number 8, the process related to the AT add-on lottery for both winning number 7 and winning number 8 is also executed by only determining whether the payout group number is 2. This means that you can do it.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, next, in step 1518, the CPU 100 of the main control board M may make a determination based on the winning number (or prize winning/replay winning information, ball payout group number, etc.) related to the game. ) is a winning number related to replay-B (reverse push white 7 replay, which is a replay in which white seven can line up in a straight line on the invalid line by stopping with a reverse push). If Yes in step 1518, in step 1520, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there was an additional AT game number due to replay B. In other words, the number of AT additional games due to winning replay B is determined. Determine whether it is not 0. If Yes in step 1520, in step 1522, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sends a reverse push instruction command (a command to the sub control board S side, and a reverse push ("right → middle → left") to the invalid line. (to execute an effect instructing the player to line up the white sevens), and the process moves to step 1526. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1520, in step 1524, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a reverse push avoidance command (a command to the sub control board S side, other than a reverse push ("right → center → left") (This will instruct the pressing order and execute an effect to prevent white sevens from being aligned on the invalid line), and the process moves to step 1526. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 1518, the process moves to step 1526. Next, in step 1526, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the winning number (or winning/replay winning information, ball group number, etc.) related to the game is the replay-C ( It is determined whether or not it is a sequential push black 7 replay, which is a replay in which the black 7 can line up in a straight line with the invalid line by stopping with the sequential push. If Yes in step 1526, in step 1528, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there was an additional AT game number due to replay-C, in other words, the number of AT additional games due to winning replay-C. Determine whether it is not 0. If Yes in step 1528, in step 1530, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sends a sequential push instruction command (a command to the sub control board S side, and presses in the order ("left → middle → right") to line up the invalid line. 1400) is set, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1400). On the other hand, if No in step 1528, in step 1532, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a sequential push avoidance command (a command to the sub control board S side, other than sequential push ("left → middle → right") (This will instruct the pressing order and execute an effect that prevents black sevens from being aligned on the invalid line), and moves on to the next process (the process of step 1400). Note that even in the case of No in step 1526, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1400). In the first embodiment, by transmitting a reverse push instruction command, a reverse push avoidance command, a forward push instruction command, and a forward push avoidance command to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S receives these commands, Although the sub-control board S side is configured to perform effects related to the push order navigation, the present invention is not limited to this, and when winning the AT add-on lottery, it is possible to display the fact that the AT add-on lottery has been won and the number of AT add-on games. When a related command (for example, a command related to the number of AT additional games related to the process of step 1517) is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S side receives the command, the sub-control board S side changes the push order. It may be configured to determine the execution timing and presentation mode of navigation-related effects. As an example, in a game in which replay B is a winning game, the sub-control board S side receives the command (a game with an additional number of AT games), and selects an effect mode that instructs a reverse push. Alternatively, in the game in which the sub-control board S side receives the command, the effect instructing the reverse push is not executed, and the subsequent predetermined conditions (for example, a specific replay combination (e.g., replay) It may be configured to execute an effect that instructs the pressing order in which a set of 7 is possible on the invalid line in a game in which the game (game B or C) is satisfied. Alternatively, in a game in which replay B is a winning game and the sub-control board S side receives the above command (a game with an additional number of AT games), the effect that instructs the reverse push is not executed, and then (For example, after a predetermined number of games (continuous performances may be performed at the same time, in which case, the final game of the continuous performance) is satisfied, the AT game number additional performance (displayed on the performance display device S40) This is an effect in which the display related to the number of remaining AT games increases, for example, "+30G" may be executed.In addition, in this example, the effect display device S40 also displays an increase in the number of AT remaining games. The display is configured to display such a display, and the display and the number of AT remaining games stored on the main control board side may be the same or different. In the game in which B won and the sub-control board S side received the above command (a game with an additional number of AT games), the performance that instructs a reverse push is not executed, and the subsequent predetermined conditions are satisfied. An example of a case where an AT game number addition effect is executed in a game that is executed is when a special effect (for example, a predetermined continuous effect) to encourage winning of a bonus is executed on the sub-control board S side (within the bonus In this case, the winning probability of replay-B is low (including 0%), so if the pressing order in which a set of 7 is possible is announced, the player will realize that the bonus has not been won). An example is when the board S side is executing a special performance.In addition, the sub control board S side determines that the main control board M side has won the AT add-on lottery and the number of AT remaining games has been added. The information includes: (1) Information regarding the number of AT remaining games is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub-control board S side after the AT additional lottery.Then, on the sub-control board S side, information regarding the number of AT remaining games transmitted last time is transmitted. (2) Calculate the difference between the information about the number of AT additional games and the information about the number of AT remaining games sent this time, and grasp the number of AT additional games won in the AT additional lottery. A command related to the number of AT add-on games received is sent to the sub-control board S side.In addition, if the AT add-on lottery is not won, a command related to the fact that the AT add-on lottery was not won is sent to the sub-control board S side. It may be configured such that when the sub-control board S side receives the command, the sub-control board S side determines the performance mode of the performance related to the push order navigation. In the winning game, in which the command was received on the sub-control board S side (a game in which the number of AT games was not increased), press the middle button (operate the middle stop button as the first stop, and press the middle stop button as the first stop). It may also be configured to select and execute a performance mode that instructs the user to press the order of avoidance. Although the AT additional lottery was executed on the main control board M side, the information on which the sub control board S side determines that there was no addition of the number of remaining AT games includes (1) information regarding the number of remaining AT games; After the AT addition lottery, it is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. After that, the sub-control board S side calculates the difference between the information about the number of AT remaining games sent last time and the information about the number of AT remaining games sent this time, and grasps the number of AT extra games won in the AT extra lottery. (If the value obtained by subtracting the information about the number of AT remaining games sent this time from the information about the number of AT remaining games sent last time is 1, it is determined that the AT additional lottery was not won), (2) Main control board A command regarding the fact that the number of AT add-on games is 0 as a result of the AT add-on lottery on the M side is transmitted to the sub-control board S side.

Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart (first page) of AT state transition control processing related to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 18 in the first embodiment. First, in step 1402, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state regarding the AT is a state regarding the AT that can execute the AT lottery. In addition, in the first embodiment, the only state related to AT that can execute the AT lottery is the "high probability state", and by winning the BB in the "high probability state", the "advantageous BB internal medium game" ”, and then when the BB role wins, it moves to the “advantageous BB state”, and when the executed BB ends, it moves to the “AT in progress state”, and the AT counter shows the number of AT games. The initial value of 50 times will be set. Incidentally, even if the player wins the BB in the "low probability state", the game moves to the "normal BB internal game" and does not shift to the "AT state" thereafter. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that when a BB is won in the "normal gaming state", the AT lottery can be won using the BB combination as an opportunity. In such a configuration, if you win BB in the "normal gaming state" and win the AT lottery triggered by the BB role, you will be transferred to the "advantageous BB internal game" and then win the BB. By aligning them, you will move to an "advantageous BB state". In addition, in the internal state where the BB is won in the "normal gaming state" and the BBs are not lined up, the gaming section may be set as the "advantageous section" or may be set as the "standby section". If Yes in step 1402, in step 1404, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device for the game is the AT lottery winning combination (in this example, the first type BB-A or the first type BB winning combination with no setting difference). Species BB-C). In the first embodiment, the winning numbers of BB with no setting difference alone (winning numbers 19, 24) and the winning numbers of BB with no setting difference and the same small winning combination (winning numbers, 25, 26, 27). Both of these are AT lottery hands. In the case of Yes in step 1404, in step 1406, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding AT from the next game onwards to "advantageous BB internal medium game", and proceeds to step 1410. Also, if No in step 1402 or step 1404, the process moves to step 1410. In addition, in the first embodiment, the AT winning rate (whether you can win or not) related to the AT lottery is configured to differ when the AT-related states are different, but when the AT-related states are the same, Even if the setting values are different, the AT winning rate for the AT lottery is the same (if you win BB in the "high probability state", you will always win AT regardless of the setting value = then (transfers to "AT status").

Next, in step 1410, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the state regarding AT for the next game or later has not been determined. If Yes in step 1410, in step 1412, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state regarding the AT is a "low probability state". If Yes in step 1412, in step 1414, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device for the game is a state promotion win (a small number that can move from a "low probability state" to a "high probability state" by winning). It is determined whether the winning hand is a winning combination (in this example, a cherry). If Yes in step 1414, in step 1416, the CPU 100 of the main control board M wins with a predetermined probability (in this example, it is 1/2, and there is no problem in changing it as long as it does not differ depending on the setting value). A high probability state transition lottery is executed. Next, in step 1418, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed high probability state transition lottery has been won. If YES in step 1418, in step 1420, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding the AT from the next game onwards to be the "high probability state", and proceeds to step 1430.

Further, if No in step 1412, in step 1424, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state regarding the AT is a "high probability state". If Yes in step 1424, in step 1426, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the counter value of the high guarantee fault counter KHc is 1 (this is the final high guarantee fault game, and it is the 10th game after entering the "high probability state"). ). If Yes in step 1426, in step 1428, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the low probability transition condition is satisfied. Here, in the first embodiment, when the state related to AT is a "high probability state", the game section is an "advantageous section", and when the game section is an "advantageous section", the push The configuration is such that the "advantageous section" does not end unless the forward navigation is executed one or more times or the "advantageous section" continues for a predetermined number of games (1500 games in this example) (i.e. Even if you win the low probability state transition lottery, if the low probability transition conditions are not satisfied because the push order navigation has not been executed at least once, etc., the "high probability state" is configured not to end. ). In addition, if the BB role is won during the "advantageous section" and you execute BB, you can play the "advantageous section" at any timing even if you have not executed the push order navigation even once during the "advantageous section". It may be configured such that it can be terminated. If YES in step 1428, in step 1429, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding AT from the next game onwards to be a "low probability state", and proceeds to step 1430. Here, the low probability transition condition is satisfied by executing the push order navigation once. In addition, as the push order winnings (winning numbers that win different prizes depending on the order in which the reels stop and the player's profit rate differs), there are two types of winning numbers: a winning number with a maximum payout of 8 coins and a winning number with a maximum payout of 11 coins. In this case, the low probability transition condition may be that the push order navigation for a winning combination with a large maximum payout number of 11 pieces has been executed once. Note that the process also moves to step 1430 in the case of No in step 1410, step 1414, step 1418, step 1424, step 1426, or step 1428. In this way, in the first embodiment, when a new transition to the "high probability state" occurs, the high probability failure counter KHc is set to 10 games, which are high probability failure games, and the counter value becomes 0. The configuration is such that it does not shift to the "low probability state" until Note that such a lottery method is just an example; for example, the lottery for transitioning to a low probability state is not executed for 10 games after transitioning to a "high probability state" (staying in a "high probability state" is guaranteed). ), it may be configured to perform a lottery to shift from the "high probability state" to the "low probability state" at a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20) in every game after the 10 games have passed. Note that the AT lottery winnings (low-probability AT lottery winnings, high-probability AT lottery winnings) and status promotion winning combinations have the same probability of winning for all set values.

Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart (second page) of the AT state transition control process related to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 18 in the first embodiment. First, in step 1430, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current AT-related state is "AT in progress" or not. If Yes in step 1430, in step 1431, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the AT counter M60 is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (4 in this example). Here, in the first embodiment, when the AT-related state is "AT in progress" and the AT counter value is 4 or more, in other words, when the number of remaining AT games is 4 or more, the watermelon If you acquire the right to transition to the "additional specialization state" with a probability of 1/2 of winning B, and can transition to the "specialization precursor state," but the AT-related state is "AT in progress." , if the AT counter value is 3 or less, in other words, the number of remaining AT games is 3 or less, even if you win Watermelon B, there will be a lottery (special (also referred to as a specialization state transition lottery) is not executed, and the system is configured not to transition to the "specialization precursor state" or the "additional specialization state." However, this is not limited to this, and even if the AT counter value is 3 or less, there will be a lottery where you can win Watermelon B and gain the right to transition to the "additional specialization state" (also known as the specialization state transition lottery). It is also possible to configure the system so that it is possible to execute ``additional specialization state'' by winning watermelon B in a situation where the AT counter value is 3 or less. If a person wins a lottery to obtain a lottery, the system may be configured so that it can be (transitioned to) a "specialization precursor state" or an "additional specialization state" from the next game in which the lottery is won, or the AT counter value It may be configured so that when the value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 1 or 0), it can become (transfer to) the "specialization precursor state" or the "additional specialization state", and the game that won the lottery It may be configured such that after a predetermined number of games have been played, the game can enter (transfer to) a "specialization precursor state" or an "additional specialization state." In addition, when transitioning to the "additional specialization state", it is not necessarily necessary to go through the "specialization precursor state"; for example, the configuration is such that it is possible to directly transition from the "AT in progress state" to the "additional specialization state". You may. If Yes in step 1431, in step 1432, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is a specialization transition role (a small number that can execute a lottery to acquire the right to transition to an "additional specialization state"). In this example, it is determined whether or not it is Watermelon B). In the case of Yes in step 1432, in step 1433, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a specialized state transition lottery in which the lottery has a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/2) of winning. Next, in step 1434, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed specialized state transition lottery has been won. If YES in step 1434, in step 1435, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding AT in the next game and subsequent games to be the "specialization precursor state", and proceeds to step 1444-1. On the other hand, if No in step 1431, in step 1436, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 1 (if the AT counter value is 1, it is the final AT game). judge. If Yes in step 1436, in step 1437, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a continuous lottery in which the lottery is won with a predetermined probability (in this example, 2/3). Next, in step 1438, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed continuous lottery has been won. If Yes in step 1438, in step 1439, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT from the next game onwards to the "AT in progress state", and moves to step 1444-1 (defines the conditions for AT state transition. To satisfy this requirement, the AT initial number of games (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1438, in step 1443, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding AT in the next game and subsequent games to be the "resurrection possibility state", and proceeds to step 1444-1. It should be noted that even if No in step 1430, step 1432, step 1434, or step 1436, the process moves to step 1444-1. As described above, in the first embodiment, when the continuous lottery is executed in the AT final game and the continuous lottery is won, the initial value of 50 games is set in the AT counter M60 again. That is, when the addition of the number of AT games is not considered, the AT of 50 games per set continues to loop at 2/3. Note that the execution timing of the continuous lottery is not limited to the last AT game, but for example, the first AT game (the first game in which the AT state is newly entered, or after the initial value is set to the AT counter M60). The continuous lottery may be executed in the first game). With such a configuration, it has already been determined in the "AT in progress" whether or not the next set (AT related to the winning of the continuous lottery) will be executed (whether or not the AT will continue). , the performance during AT can be made different depending on whether you have won the continuous lottery or not. For example, if you have won the continuous lottery, the counter value of the AT counter M60 It is possible to change the BGM (playing a song, etc.) in a situation where is 1 or more (during AT execution), or to perform an effect that makes it certain that the player has won the continuous lottery.

Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart (third page) of the AT state transition control process related to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 18 in the first embodiment. First, in step 1444-1, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state regarding the AT is a state for displaying whether or not it is possible to recover. In the case of Yes in step 1444-1, in step 1444-2, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device for the game is a resurrection role (by winning in the “resurrection possibility state”), the CPU 100 of the main control board M It is determined whether the winning combination is a winning combination that can transition to the "AT state" (in other words, a winning combination that can bring back AT). Here, in the first embodiment, the resurrection combination includes one of Watermelon A, Watermelon B, Cherry, and a bonus combination (only the BB combination without setting difference, not including the BB combination with setting difference). If the condition device related to the game becomes a resurrection combination, it is called winning the resurrection lottery. If Yes in step 1444-2, in step 1444-3, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding AT from the next game onwards to the "AT in progress state", and proceeds to step 1445. Here, in order to satisfy the conditions for enabling transition to the AT state, the AT initial number of games (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1444-2, in step 1444-4, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding AT from the next game onwards to be a "low probability state", and proceeds to step 1445. Incidentally, even if the answer is No in step 1441-1, the process moves to step 1445. In this way, in the first embodiment, even if it is the final AT game and the player does not win the continuation lottery, the game moves to the "resurrection possibility state", and in the "resurrection possibility state" If the player wins the revival lottery, the game is configured to shift to the "AT state" from the next game. In addition, although the "Restoration possibility state" is set to "Advantageous section", AT-related lottery (AT additional lottery, continuation lottery, etc.) in "AT status" is not executed, and the revival lottery can be executed. The manner in which the AT-related lottery is executed is different between the "AT in progress state" and the "restoration possibility state".

Next, in step 1445, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state regarding AT for the next game and subsequent games has not been determined. If Yes in step 1445, in step 1446, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the transition conditions for the state related to AT are satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. (It is satisfied when 10 games, which is the number of precursory games, are played in the state). If Yes in step 1446, in step 1447, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding AT from the next game onward, and proceeds to step 1448 (for example, as shown in FIG. If you have completed the number of portent games in the "precursor state", it will be determined as the "additional specialization state"). Incidentally, even if the answer is No in step 1445 or step 1446, the process moves to step 1448. Next, in step 1448, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sends a high guarantee fault counter value command (in this example, a command to the sub side, the current high guarantee fault counter value, in other words, a high probability state is guaranteed). A command related to the remaining number of games played) is set, and the process moves to step 1449-1. Next, in step 1449-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the state regarding AT from the next game onward is determined to be "advantageous BB internal medium game". If YES in step 1449-1, in step 1449-2, the CPU 100 of the main control board M clears the counter value of the high security failure counter KHc to zero, and moves to the next process (the process in step 1450). Note that even in the case of No in step 1499-1, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1450).

In addition, in the first embodiment, the AT winning rate is configured to differ depending on the lottery state, and if you win the BB role (BB role with no setting difference) in the "low probability state", you will be transferred to the AT transition lottery. On the other hand, if you win the BB role (BB role with no setting difference) in the "high probability state", you will win the AT transition lottery (after that, you will not move to the "AT state"). However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the condition device A, which is a predetermined condition device, is used as an AT lottery winning combination, and the “high probability state A” and “high probability state A” are set as the states regarding AT, which is the “advantageous section” If the machine is configured to have "probability state B", if condition device A wins in "high probability state A", it will win the AT transition lottery at 1/10, and in "high probability state B" it will win the condition device A. If device A wins, it may be configured so that the AT transition lottery is won at 1/2. In addition, if you win the AT transition lottery, the AT-related state will transition to the "AT preparation state" which is a preparatory state until the transition to the "AT in progress state", and then the predetermined end condition (for example, "AT preparation state") will be entered. It may be configured such that when the condition (10 games have elapsed since the transition to the "AT state") is satisfied, the transition is made to the "AT in progress state."

Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of conditional device number management processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. 18 in the first embodiment. First, in step 1451, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current gaming section is an "advantageous section". If Yes in step 1451, in step 1452, the CPU 100 of the main control board M issues a command related to winning/replay winning information (a command on the sub control board S side, for example, a winning/replay winning information related to the game). commands related to information). Next, in step 1454, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the conditional device for the game is a combination with a pressing order (a conditional device in which winning combinations differ depending on the pressing order; for example, winning-A1, etc.). Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 1454, in step 1458, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the instruction number (also referred to as the push order number) during the game based on the winning/replay winning information related to the game, and The number is stored in a RAM address (an address different from the RAM address for displaying the push order navigation). Note that the instruction number is information related to the pressing order, and in this example, it is determined by the main control board M and transmitted to the sub-control board S (details will be described later). Further, by receiving the instruction number, the sub control board S can display the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. Note that the instruction number is configured to be determined even when the push order navigation is not executed (although not shown, the instruction number becomes an initial value based on clearing the instruction number). In addition, when executing the push order guessing game, a predetermined instruction number (for example, AX) exclusively for the push order guessing game may be determined. Next, in step 1460, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 based on the instruction number related to the game (display of the push order navigation display on the main control board side). (See Figure 34 for image). Next, in step 1466, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets the command (command to the sub side) related to the instruction number determined in step 1458 (for example, sets it in the register area), and proceeds to step 1472. (See FIG. 34 for a display image of the push order navigation display on the sub-control board side). In this example, displaying the stopping order of the reels with the highest profit to the player on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is referred to as displaying a push order navigation, displaying a push order navigation display, etc. ing. In the first embodiment, the push order navigation is displayed based on the instruction number, and for example, the push order of "left → middle → right" is displayed as "=1" on the push order display device D270. It is configured so that "=1" is displayed both in the case of a push-order bell and in the case of a push-order replay. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a case where the push order navigation of "Left → Middle → Right" is displayed on the push order display device D270 in a game related to the push order bell, and in a game related to the push order replay, " The display mode may be different depending on when the push order navigation of "Left→Middle→Right" is displayed on the push order display device D270. That is, the number of types of display modes of the press order navigation displayed on the press order display device D270 may be configured to be the same as the number of types of winning/replay winning information.

Further, if No in step 1451 or step 1454, in step 1468, the CPU 100 of the main control board M performs mask processing on the winning/replay winning information of the game, and transfers the masked information to a predetermined address in the RAM. to be memorized. Here, if winning/re-play winning information related to the game is sent to the sub-control board S side, and if the winning/re-play winning information is recognized due to fraudulent acts, the high profits related to the game will be lost. This means that the pressing order (reel stop order) will be recognized. Therefore, in this example, after masking the winning/replay winning information related to the game (processing to make winning/replay winning information (particularly information related to the pressing order) confidential), the sub control board S By configuring the system to send the data to the user, the system is configured so that high-profit press orders cannot be recognized. In addition, as a method of mask processing in the first embodiment, multiple winning/replay winning information (winning/replay winning information having a similar role is preferable; for example, the RT state changes depending on the order of presses. A plurality of pieces of winning/re-playing winning information in which symbol combinations that become re-playing roles can be stopped and displayed) are set as one production group number (for example, winning/re-playing winning information 4 to 6 are set to production group 4, etc.), It is configured to transmit the performance group number to the sub-control board S side. The method of mask processing is not limited to this, and for example, after the winning/re-play winning information (in this example, 0 to 18) that has been provided, a new winning/re-play after mask processing is performed. It may be configured to provide winning information. In addition, even in such cases, multiple winning/re-play winning information such as performance group number among existing winning/re-play winning information can be treated as one winning/re-play winning information after mask processing. It is desirable to configure the system so that game winning information is provided (for example, the winning/replay winning information 4 to 6 is combined with the winning/replay winning information 19 (newly provided winning/replay winning information) which is the winning/replay winning information after mask processing.・Re-play winning information), etc.). Furthermore, if it is determined that the game is a game that notifies operation information (push order navigation) based on the state of AT on the main control board M, winning/replay winning information is transmitted to the sub-control board S, In a game that does not notify operation information, the performance group number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side. When configured in this way, the command related to the instruction number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side, or may be configured not to be transmitted.

Next, in step 1470, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the production group number after performing the masking process (for example, sets it in the register area), and steps 1472. Next, in step 1472, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to bonus winning information (the sub side can recognize whether or not the bonus has been won) (for example, (set in the register area) and move on to the next process (the process of step 1550). In addition, in the first embodiment, the winning/replay winning information and the bonus winning information are derived from the winning number, but the deriving method will be described later. In addition, as shown in the lower part of the same figure, as a display example of the push order navigation, in the case of "AT status", (1) If a falling re-gaming combination is included -> Press when the falling re-gaming combination is not stopped and displayed. (2) In the case of Bell (1-card hand/11-card hand), the push order that yields the largest number of coins to be paid out is the navigation, etc. In this way, in the first embodiment, when the game section is an "advantageous section", the sub-control board S side displays the winning/re-play winning information (the type of winning combination and the most advantageous push order for the player). On the other hand, when the game section is a "normal section", the sub control board It is configured to be able to transmit the performance group number (a number that can specify only the outline of the winning combination) to the S side. In other words, in the "advantageous section", the winning/re-playing winning information related to the game, including the winning/re-playing winning information where the game result and the player's profit differ depending on the order of the presses, is directly sent to the sub-control board S. On the other hand, in game sections that are not "advantageous sections," winning/replay winning information related to the game is not transmitted, and winning/replay winning information for the game where the game results and the player's profits differ depending on the order of the presses is transmitted. In the case of winning information, it is configured to transmit to the sub-control board S side a performance group number in which information related to the pressing order is hidden.

In addition, in cases such as when the game section is not an "advantageous section", masking processing is performed when transmitting winning/replay winning information determined by the main control board M to the sub-control board S to determine the performance group number. Then, the production group number is transmitted to the sub-control board S. In addition, the performance group number refers to the winning/replay winning information, and the winning/replay winning information related to winning roles that play a similar role (for example, replaying roles that include falling replaying roles, push order bells, etc.) are grouped and assigned numbers. The configuration is configured such that the winning/replay winning information related to the game is subjected to mask processing {processing to make winning/replay winning information (particularly information related to the pressing order) confidential) before being transmitted to the sub-control board S. This prevents a situation in which information related to winning/replay winning information is recognized due to fraudulent acts, and the pressing order (reel stop order) that results in a high profit related to the game is recognized.

Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. 18 in the first embodiment. First, in step 1552, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 (subtraction timer) is 0 or not. Here, the game interval minimum time timer M70 is the time (in this example, 4.1 seconds) that should be ensured from a certain game start timing (reel rotation start timing) to the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing). This is a timer that measures the If Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPU 100 of the main control board M adds a new minimum time (sometimes referred to as minimum gaming time, and in this example, 4.1 seconds) and start. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1552, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process. Next, in step 1556, the CPU 100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the reel stop order and the information related to the push order related to the finished game. Next, in step 1558, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the stopped reel and the attraction point creation request related to the finished game. Next, in step 1560, the CPU 100 of the main control board M initializes symbol stop position data related to the finished game. Next, in step 1562, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an output request during standby for the start of reel rotation for the game. Next, in step 1564, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a reel control command for the game, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1260). In other words, the processing in steps 1562 and 1564 makes it possible to send a command to the sub-control board S to indicate that the reels will start rotating.

Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of remaining game number management processing according to the subroutine of step 3400 in FIG. 18 in the first embodiment. First, in step 3402, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current gaming section is an "advantageous section". Although the details will be described later, the "advantageous section" is one of the gaming sections, and is a gaming situation that is advantageous for the player, such as when the AT-related state is "AT in progress". This is a game section that is easy to set. If YES in step 3402, in step 3404, the CPU 100 of the main control board M controls the number of games remaining in the advantageous section counter YKc-1 (which is a decrement counter and is initially set to 1500, which is the maximum number of games that can stay in the "advantageous section"). The counter value (a counter that is set as a value and can be subtracted every game in a period that is an "advantageous section") is subtracted by 1.

Next, in step 3408, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state regarding AT is the "AT in progress state". If YES in step 3408, the CPU 100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the AT counter value in step 3410. Next, in step 3412, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the state related to AT is a high probability state. If Yes in step 3412, in step 3414, the CPU 100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the counter value of the high security failure counter KHc, and moves to the next process (the process in step 1700). Note that even in the case of No in step 3402, step 3408, or step 3412, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1700). As described above, in the first embodiment, when the AT-related state that can be displayed by the push order navigation is "AT in progress", the AT counter value is subtracted every game; In the case of "advantageous BB internal medium game", "specialization precursor state", or "additional specialization state", the AT counter value is configured not to be subtracted even if the game is executed. In other words, if the AT counter value remains (1 or more remains) and the transition is made from the "AT in progress state" to the "specialization precursor state", the "AT in progress state" is entered while the AT counter value is maintained. It is configured so that it can transition (transition) from "state" → "specialization precursor state" → "additional specialization state". Incidentally, even if the state related to AT is "AT in progress", it is possible to prevent the AT counter value from being decremented by 1 when a winning number including a bonus combination is determined in the game. At this time, for example, the AT counter value stored in the RAM of the main control board M is not subtracted, but the remaining AT game number displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S is displayed so as to be subtracted. It may be controlled. For example, if the AT counter value is "30" and the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "30", and a game is executed and a bonus is won, the AT counter value will be "30". , or store "30+α" which is the value obtained by adding the value "α" obtained from the AT add-on lottery related to the game, but when the start lever D50 is operated, it is displayed on the effect display device S40. You may display "29" as the number of remaining AT games, or "29 + α", which is the value obtained by adding the value "α" obtained from the AT additional lottery (in addition, "α" obtained from the additional AT lottery is , "α" in a specific game after the game (games that meet the predetermined conditions at the start of the bonus game, during the bonus game, at the end of the bonus game, or after the end of the bonus game) without being notified in the game. may be notified). Then, the number of AT remaining games displayed on the performance display device S40 is subtracted by 1 for each game even in the "advantageous BB internal medium game", and a performance suggesting bonus confirmation (for example, a bonus confirmation screen) is output. It is possible to configure the AT remaining game number to be subtracted for each game. With this configuration, even if the player wins a bonus in a state where the push order navigation can be executed, such as in an "AT state", it is possible to prevent the player from immediately knowing that the bonus has been won. That is, after a winning number including a bonus combination is determined, a continuous performance over a plurality of games that stimulates whether or not a bonus has been won can be executed using the performance display device S40 or the like, thereby increasing the interest of the game. In addition, after the bonus game ends, the number of remaining AT games displayed on the performance display device S40 is "30", or if the result of the AT add-on lottery is won and the result of the add-on is announced, it is a value of "30" or more. can be controlled to display. Furthermore, if a game is executed and a bonus is won when the AT counter value is "1" and the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "1", the bonus will be displayed on the effect display device S40. The display related to the number of remaining AT games will be "0", but while maintaining this state, a continuous performance over multiple games will be executed to incite whether or not you have won the bonus, and the AT counter value will be "1". , a winning number (or winning/replay winning information, or ball group number) that allows a game to be executed and an AT additional lottery to be executed when the number of AT remaining games displayed on the effect display device S40 is “1” is won and the AT additional lottery is not won, the number of AT games becomes "0" and the number of AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 becomes "0". Further, when the number of AT remaining games is small, the probability of executing the continuous performance may be set lower (including 0%) than when the AT remaining number of games is large.

Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process related to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. 18 in the first embodiment. First, in step 1702, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the conditions for enabling transition to the RT state are satisfied in the game. Here, in the first embodiment, the conditions for enabling transition to the RT state include execution of RAM clearing (initialization of RAM), stop display of replay (in this example, stop display of replay 04), winning of BB, It is structured so that it can be satisfied at the start and end. If Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the RT state transition is possible and the RT state from the next game onwards based on the satisfied RT state transition possible conditions (RT state transition in FIG. 28). (see figure), the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1750). Note that even in the case of No in step 1702, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1750). In the first embodiment, the RT state transition control process is executed after all the reels are stopped, but when transitioning to "RT1", the transition timing may be when the lever is turned on. The timing of transitioning the RT state (storing the RT number in the RAM) can be determined as appropriate.

Next, FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, there are four RT states: "RT0" to "RT2" and "Type 1 BB-A, B, C", and by satisfying the conditions indicated by the arrows in the figure, the RT state is The state will change. As a specific example of transition of the RT state, when the RT state is "RT1", RAM initialization is executed, or when re-game 04 is displayed as stopped, the state shifts to "RT0". Specifically, when replay 04 is displayed as stopped, if you win "Replay D1" in a situation where the RT status is "RT1" and operate the left stop button as the first stop. , regames 01 to 03 are displayed as stopped, and "RT1" is maintained as the RT state. On the other hand, if you win "Regame-D1" in a situation where the RT status is "RT1" and you operate the middle stop button or right stop button as the first stop, replay 04 will be stopped and displayed. , the RT state shifts from "RT1" to "RT0".

Also, if the RT status is "RT0" or "RT1", the BB combination is won and the BB combination is not won in the winning game (the conditional device related to Type 1 BB-A, B, and C is activated). ) and the RT state shifts to "RT2". Furthermore, if you win the BB combination in "RT2" (type 1 BB-A, B, C is activated), the game shifts to "type 1 BB-A, B, C." Further, when BB ends at "Type 1 BB-A, B, C" (operation of Type 1 BB-A, B, C ends), the process shifts to "RT1". In addition, if the state related to AT is "low probability state" and the BB is won, and the BB ends, the RT state will shift to "RT1" which is high profit for the player, but the state related to AT Since the state is such that the push order navigation does not occur, when you win "Re-game - D1 to D3", the incorrect press order (the first stop is the left button, middle button, right button), One of the three choices is the correct pressing order and replays other than replay 04 are stopped and displayed, and two of the three choices are incorrect and the replay 04 is stopped and displayed). By stopping the regame 04, the regame 04 is displayed as stopped, and the transition from "RT1" to "RT0" occurs. In addition, if the state related to AT is "high probability state", "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state", you will win BB, and if BB ends, you will be in RT state. will shift to "RT1", which is highly profitable for the player, and the AT-related state is a state in which push order navigation occurs, and even when "Re-game - D1 to D3" is won, the player will not be able to re-play 04. Since the button does not stop and display the correct answer in the pressing order, it is possible to maintain "RT1".

Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of AT state start control processing according to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. 18 in the first embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT state shift enable condition is satisfied in the game. Conditions for transitioning to AT state include, for example, (1) when BB with no setting difference won in the "high probability state" ends, (2) when winning the continuation lottery, (3) when winning the revival lottery. Satisfied if If Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the CPU 100 of the main control board M, triggered by the new transition to the "AT precursor state", determines the number of AT initial games (in this example, 50, and "AT in progress"). The AT counter M60 is set with the number of games whose subtraction is started after the transition to the "state", and the process moves to step 1756. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 1752, the process moves to step 1756. Next, in step 1756, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state regarding the AT is not a high probability state. If YES in step 1756, in step 1758, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the state regarding the AT of the next game is a high probability state. If Yes in step 1758, in step 1760, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets the number of high guaranteed failure games (in this example, 10) to the high guaranteed failure counter, and proceeds to the next process (processing in step 3500). Transition. Note that even in the case of No in step 1756 or step 1758, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 3500). In addition, after winning BB in the "high probability state" and moving to "advantageous BB internal medium game", by winning BB, it will move to "advantageous BB state", and in the "advantageous BB state", AT game If the number is added, the initial value set in the AT counter will exceed 50 when the BB ends and the transition from the "advantageous BB state" to the "AT in progress state" occurs. Specifically, if the number of AT games is added by 30 games in the "advantageous BB state" and then shifts to the "AT in progress state", the AT counter will be set to 80 (initial value 50 + additional 30). become. At this time, if an effect is performed to inform the player that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state", at the start of the "AT state", the player is informed that the initial number of AT games is 80 games. It is desirable to notify the player, but as another notification method, instead of notifying the player that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state", the initial value is set at the beginning of the "AT state". After presenting a certain 50 games to the player, the player is informed that 30 games have been added during AT (for example, immediately after the start of the "AT state" or a state where the number of AT remaining games on the effect display device S40 is small). A notification method may also be considered in which a notification effect is performed. By doing this, the player cannot clearly grasp whether the number of AT games has been added in the "advantageous BB state" or how many games have been added. It is possible to increase interest in an additional performance that suddenly occurs for unknown reasons during AT (a state in which push order navigation may occur). In this example, the AT initial number of games is set in the AT counter M60 in step 1754, but the execution timing of the process for setting the AT initial number of games is not limited to that of this example. , the AT initial game number may be set in the AT counter M60 at the timing of executing the AT state transition control process in step 1400 described above. Further, the number of games set in the AT counter M60 (the initial number of AT games) is configured to be subtracted from the time when the game after the BB ends (the state related to AT becomes "AT in progress state"). (Subtraction does not start during BB). Further, the counter value of the AT counter M60 is configured to be stored in a storage area of the RAM of the main control board M.

Next, FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, "low probability state", "normal BB internal medium game", "normal BB state", "high probability state", "AT medium state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization There are 10 states related to AT: "state", "advantageous BB internal game", "advantageous BB state", and "resurrection possibility state", and by satisfying the conditions indicated by the arrows in the figure, AT The related status will change. For example, if you win watermelon B in the "AT state" and win a specialization state transition lottery where you win at 1/2, the state shifts to the "specialization precursor state". Furthermore, if 10 games have elapsed (played) since the transition to the "specialization precursor state", the system is configured to transition to the "additional specialization state". In addition, as for the game section, the three AT-related states of "low probability state", "normal BB internal medium game", and "normal BB state" are set in the "normal section", and the "high probability state" and "AT in progress" are set in the "normal section". The seven AT-related states of "state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state", "advantageous BB internal medium game", "advantageous BB state", and "resurrection possibility state" are now "advantageous section" Set. In other words, even if the state related to the seven ATs that constitute the "advantageous section" has been transitioned, if 1,500 games have passed without setting it to the "normal section", the "advantageous section" will be forcibly ended. It is set to "normal section". In addition, if the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed when the push order navigation is displayed in the "AT state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state", which is the notification gaming state, However, the gaming state is maintained.

As described above, in the case of the "AT state", if the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 0 and the continuous lottery has not been won, the state becomes the "restoration possibility state". If you win the resurrection lottery in the ``resurrection availability state'', you can return to the ``AT state'' again. On the other hand, if the player does not win the resurrection lottery in the "resurrection possibility state", the state shifts to the "low probability state" and changes from the "advantageous section" to the "normal section".

If you win a BB with no setting difference (1st type BB-A or 1st type BB-C) in the "high probability state", the BB with no setting difference activates, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, you will be in the "AT in progress state". ”. Also, if you win a BB with no setting difference (1st type BB-A or 1st type BB-C) in the "AT state", the BB with no setting difference is activated, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, the " Shifts to "AT in progress state". In addition, when you win BB with no setting difference (1st type BB-A or 1st type BB-C) in the ``resurrection possibility state'', BB with no setting difference activates, and the ``advantageous BB state'' ends. will also transition to the "AT state" (to win the revival lottery). In addition, if you win the BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) in the ``resurrection possibility state'', the BB with setting difference activates, and the ``advantageous BB state'' ends, the BB with setting difference will stand alone. If the winning number (winning number 20) is related to the BB role of If it is a winning number that overlaps with the winning combination (winning numbers 21 to 23), it will be in the "AT state" after the BB ends (because the rare winning combination will be used as an opportunity to win the revival lottery).

Also, if you win the BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) in the "advantageous section" and in the "high probability state", the BB with setting difference activates, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, Transition to "high probability state".

In addition, the states related to AT that transition after the end of the "advantageous BB state" are as follows: For both BB (with BB and BB with no setting difference), the state transitions to the state related to AT at the time of BB winning among the "AT state", "specialization precursor state", or "additional specialization state", and during non-AT ( After the winning BB with no setting difference in the "high probability state"), the state shifts to the "AT in progress state". Furthermore, after the winning BB with setting difference is completed during non-AT ("high probability state"), the state shifts to "high probability state".

Note that the state related to AT is not limited to that of the first embodiment. For example, an AT lottery is executed by winning a predetermined winning number in a "low probability state" or "high probability state", and the AT lottery It may be configured to shift to the "precursor state" by winning the lottery, and shift to the "AT state" after 16 to 32 games have elapsed, and if configured in such a way, the predetermined condition device If you win, an AT lottery will be executed, and if you do not win the AT lottery, you will enter a "fake precursor state", and after 16 to 32 games, the AT lottery will be executed, and after 16 to 32 games have passed, the AT lottery will be executed. It may be configured to migrate. In addition, a "standby section" that is different from the "advantageous section" and the "normal section" may be provided as a game section. For example, if the AT lottery is executed by winning a "cherry", the BB If "BB+Cherry" with duplicate cherries is won and the AT lottery is won, the state inside the BB until "BB" of "BB+Cherry" is won is a "standby section". You can. In this way, by providing a "waiting section," there are cases where a player wins BB in the "low probability state" and does not win the AT lottery, and a case where a player wins the BB in the "low probability state" and is AT lottery. In the case of winning the AT lottery, the advantageous section indicator YH is off during the period until the BB symbol combination is completed (until the advantageous section indicator lights up), so if you win the AT lottery. It is possible to incite the player as to whether or not there is a player. In addition, if a BB is won in the "additional specialization state", the "additional specialization state" may be restarted after the end of the BB, and in such a case, during the BB As the BB that won in the "addition specialization state", execute an AT additional lottery that is different from the BB that won in the "AT state" (for example, win the AT additional lottery than the BB that won in the "AT state") It may be configured such that it is easy to play, and the number of games per AT game addition is relatively large. In addition, if a BB is won in the "specialization precursor state", it may be configured to shift to the "additional specialization state" after the end of the BB, and in such a case, during the BB It may be configured such that the AT additional lottery is executed in the same way as for the winning BB in the “add-on specialization state”.

Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. 18 in the first embodiment. First, in the first embodiment, there is a game section as a section related to the state of the game, and the game section includes a "normal section" which is relatively low profit for the player, and a "normal section" which is relatively low profit for the player. It has two gaming sections: an "advantageous section" which is a high profit section. To explain the flowchart, first, in step 3508, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game section related to the game is a "normal section." If Yes in step 3508, in step 3510, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the game section for the next game and subsequent games to be the game section corresponding to the current AT-related state and the current game situation, and moves to step 3528. do. On the other hand, if No in step 3508, in other words, if the game period is the "advantageous period", then in step 3514, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the counter value of the advantageous period remaining games counter YKc-1 is 0. In other words, it is determined whether the "advantageous section" has reached the maximum number of games that can be continued. If Yes in step 3514, in step 3515, the CPU 100 of the main control board M clears all information related to AT (thereby, the AT counter value becomes 0, and the number of games staying in the "specialization precursor state" (things also become 0). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3514, in step 3518, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not any advantageous section end condition is satisfied. Here, an arbitrary advantageous section end condition is an end condition for an "advantageous section" other than when the counter value of the advantageous section remaining games counter YKc-1 becomes 0; for example, when the AT counter value becomes 0. or when push order navigation is executed a predetermined number of times. If No in step 3518, that is, if any advantageous section end condition is satisfied, the process moves to step 3515. As described above, in the first embodiment, when the "advantageous section" ends and the next game is set as the "normal section", information related to AT (the number of continuous AT games, the number of remaining AT games, etc.), the conditions for becoming an "advantageous section" again in the subsequent "normal section" will not be relaxed. The AT-related information cleared by the process of step 3515 (the process at the end of the advantageous section) includes the counter value of the advantageous section remaining games counter YKc-1, a flag indicating the gaming state, and the like. In addition, this information will also be cleared by clearing the RAM when changing the settings, but depending on the RAM clearing when changing the settings, "condition device related to accessory continuous operation device (BB)" and "RT status" , information related to the "number of stored coins", etc. are also cleared, but depending on the process in step 3515 (processing at the end of the advantageous section), the "condition device related to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)" and the "RT status" , information related to "number of stored coins", etc. is not cleared. In this way, the RAM clear range at the time of setting change and the clear range at the end of the "advantageous section" (for example, when executing the process of step 3515) are different. Note that the configuration may be such that the "condition device related to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)" or the "RT state" is maintained by clearing the RAM when changing the settings. Further, the addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the "advantageous section" are continuous. In this way, by making the addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the "advantageous section" consecutive, clearing can be done by a simple process of specifying the first address to be cleared and the range of addresses to be cleared at the time of clearing processing. Furthermore, when the "advantageous section" ends, a command to the effect that the "advantageous section" has ended is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub-control board S. However, even if the sub-control board S side receives the command, it is configured not to erase the gaming history, such as the fact that it was in an "advantageous section" and information on how many games were played in the "AT state". ing. However, if you clear the RAM when changing the settings, the game history on the sub-control board S side, such as the fact that it was an "advantageous section" and information on how many games were played in the "AT state" will also be deleted.

In addition, if the "advantageous section" ends because the counter value of the number of games remaining in the advantageous section counter YKc-1 becomes 0, (1) if the current state regarding AT is "high probability state"; (2) If the current state regarding AT is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the state regarding AT will be "low probability state" in the next game. (3) If the current AT-related state is "Advantageous BB state," the AT-related state will become "Normal BB state" in the next game. (4) Current If the AT-related state is "AT in progress", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state", or "resurrection possibility state", the AT-related state will be "low probability" in the next game. state" (because information related to the AT is cleared).

Next, in step 3516, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets the game period after the next game to the "normal period". Next, in step 3517, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off the advantageous section indicator YH because the "advantageous section" has ended, and proceeds to step 3528. Although the arrangement is such that the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off when the "advantageous section" ends and the "normal section" is set, the detailed timing of turning off the light is not limited to the timing of the first embodiment. First, for example, the advantageous section indicator YH may be configured to be turned off when a game medal related to a game that ends the "advantageous section" and enters the "normal section" is inserted. In other words, the advantageous section indicator YH may be configured to be turned off before the start lever D50 that enables the next game to be started is operated. On the other hand, in the case of YES in step 3518, in step 3520, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the game period after the next game to be an "advantageous period", and proceeds to step 3528.

Next, in step 3528, it is decided that the CPU 100 of the main control board M will be newly set to an "advantageous section" in the next game (it has been decided to be set from the "normal section" to the "advantageous section"). Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 3528, in step 3530, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value in the advantageous section remaining game counter YKc-1. The predetermined value set in the advantageous section remaining games counter YKc-1 is a fixed value (1500 in this example) that is common to all set values. Next, in step 3534, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns on the advantageous section indicator YH, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1293). Note that even in the case of No in step 3528, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1293). In the first embodiment, the lighting process of the advantageous section indicator YH was executed at the timing of step 3534, but the lighting timing of the advantageous section indicator YH is not limited to this, and the lighting process of the advantageous section indicator YH is executed at the timing of step 3534. The lighting timing is from the start lever operation timing in the game before the new "advantageous section" (game in the "normal section") to the timing when game medals can be inserted in the game that becomes the new "advantageous section" (new If the game before entering the "advantageous section" is a game that involves replaying, set the period as appropriate until the start lever operation becomes effective in the game that becomes the new "advantageous section". You can.

Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing related to the subroutine of step 1600 in the first embodiment. The processing of the subroutine is started when a timer interrupt is started in the processing of step 1040 or step 1104, and is thereafter executed for a predetermined period of time (T in this example, for example, about 2 ms). The program is configured to be executed periodically with a period of

First, in step 1602, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes processing at the time of starting an interrupt (for example, saving data held in a register in the CPU 100, checking the input port of a power-off detection signal, etc.). Next, in step 1604, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a power-off is currently detected (in the current interrupt process). If No in step 1604, in step 1900, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a power-off process, which will be described later. On the other hand, if YES in step 1604, the CPU 100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (update processing of various timers managed by software) in step 1606. Next, in step 1608, the CPU 100 of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updates the storage area of each input port data in the RAM area). Here, the input port data includes the payment button D60, start lever D50, stop button D40, door switch D80, setting key switch M20, setting/reset button M30, power failure detection signal, input reception sensor D10s, and first input sensor. D20s, second input sensor D30s, first dispensing sensor H10s, second dispensing sensor H20s, etc. (In other words, the presence or absence of operation of these operating members and the sensor detection state are sampled at interrupt intervals T. ).

Next, in step 1610, the CPU 100 of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area and turns on/off the door switch flag and setting key switch flag according to the sampling result of each input port data. switching (for example, if the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously on over multiple samplings, by turning on the door switch flag, the front door DU will be in the open state without being affected by noise) ). Next, in step 6100, the CPU 100 of the main control board M performs a reel drive control process (a process related to controlling the drive of the reel M50) for all reels (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53), and details will be described later). Next, in step 1612, the CPU 100 of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60 and determines whether the counter value is greater than 0 or not. If Yes in step 1612, in step 1613, the CPU 100 of the main control board M displays the number of remaining AT games (number of AT games) on the AT counter value display device D280, and proceeds to step 1614. Note that even if the answer in step 1612 is No, the process moves to step 1614. Note that if the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, the processing of steps 1612 and 1613 is unnecessary. Next, in step 1614, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs the output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, blocker D100, etc. Next, in step 1616, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off all error flags (although not shown, the inserted medal backflow error flag, the inserted number of medals error flag, the inserted medal retention error flag, the inserted abnormal error flag, It is determined whether flags related to errors such as a payout abnormality error flag, a payout medal retention error flag, a door switch flag, etc. are all off). If Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets an error-undetected command (a command to the sub side, which indicates that no error has been detected) (for example, a register (set within the area), and the process moves to step 1622. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets an error detection command (a command to the sub side, which indicates that an error has been detected) (for example, (set in the register area), and the process moves to step 1622. In step 1620, the configuration is such that information regarding the error (currently occurring error) corresponding to the error flag that is turned on is transmitted to the sub side. In addition, the error undetected command may be set only when the error is cleared from the error state (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off), or when the error is not detected, the It is not necessary to perform the information setting process (step 1618 may not be necessary). Furthermore, the error detection command may execute the set process only when an error occurs from a state where no error has occurred, or from a state where the first error (for example, inserted medal retention error) has occurred. The set process may be executed when the type of error changes, such as a second error (for example, a paid-out medal retention error).

Next, in step 1622, the CPU 100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (sub-side command) (for example, if it is set in the register area in step 1618 or step 1620, the set control commands will be sent). Here, the commands sent to the sub-control board S include a command related to the start lever operation timing (sent immediately after the start lever is operated), a command related to the first reel stop reception timing (sent when the stop button is operated as the first stop) Commands related to the second reel stop reception timing (sent immediately after operating the stop button as the second stop), Commands related to the third reel stop reception timing (sent immediately after operating the stop button as the third stop) (sent immediately after operation), commands related to the stop timing of stop display symbols (sent immediately after operating the stop button to stop display symbols), commands related to stop display symbols (sent immediately after operating the stop button to stop display symbols), winning/return Commands related to game winning information (sent immediately after operating the start lever (limited to advantageous sections)), commands related to bonus winning information (sent immediately after operating the start lever), commands related to RT status (sent when all reels are Commands related to AT status (sent between when all reels stop and when the next game starts); High security failure counter value command (sent immediately after operating the start lever), command related to the number of remaining AT games (from when all reels stop until the next game starts, or immediately after operating the start lever) (transmitted), commands related to the game section (transmitted from the time all reels stop until the next game starts), and so on. Next, in step 1624, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the reel-type gaming machine P to an external hall computer, etc.). Although not shown, the information related to the error outputted by the external signal includes a door opening error, a loading abnormality error, a dispensing abnormality error, a loading reception sensor retention error, and the like. Note that the door open error is configured to occur when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on, and the input reception sensor retention error occurs when the input reception sensor detects that game medals are retained. It is configured so that an error will occur. Next, in step 1626, the CPU 100 of the main control board M outputs the output data of the LED (7-segment LED lamp, etc.) (for example, lights up a predetermined 7-segment LED unit among the plurality of 7-segment LED units, and A predetermined segment of the segment is lit (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, in step 1628, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes the lighting mode of the LED (for example, changes the lighting color of the LED). Note that step 1628 does not have to be executed. Next, in step 1630, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes soft random number management processing (updating processing of random numbers managed by software, etc.). Next, in step 1632, the CPU 100 of the main control board M obtains internal information register data (the internal information register has an area where an abnormality flag bit is set when an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit). . Next, in step 1634, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether the abnormality flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is not set). Specifically, when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value, the abnormality flag bit is set. If Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the update state of the built-in random number is normal (whether or not the abnormality flag bit indicating an abnormality in the update state is set) Determine. If YES in step 1636, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes interrupt termination processing in step 1638, and moves to the next processing (the processing in step 1602). On the other hand, if No in step 1634 or step 1636, in step 1640, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a built-in random number error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the above-mentioned unrecoverable error processing.

Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the rotating drum drive control process according to the subroutine of step 6100 in FIG. 32 in the first embodiment. Note that in this process, the process for one reel is illustrated, but it should be noted that processes corresponding to each of the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53 are executed. First, in step 6102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the reel rotation start standby state start timing (for example, the timing after execution of the process of step 1564 in FIG. 25) has been reached. If Yes in step 6102, in step 6104, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to a reel rotation start standby state, and proceeds to step 6106. On the other hand, if No in step 6102, the process also moves to step 6106.

Next, in step 6106, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the reel acceleration state start timing (the timing when the reel rotation start standby state ends and the execution of reel acceleration processing starts, for example, in step 1260 of FIG. 18). It is determined whether the processing execution timing has been reached. If Yes in step 6106, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel acceleration state in step 6108. Next, in step 6110, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes reel acceleration processing, and proceeds to step 6112. Note that if the reels are stopped, the reels will start rotating through this process. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 6106, the process moves to step 6112.

Next, in step 6112, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the current reel drive state is a reel acceleration state. If Yes in step 6112, in step 6114, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes all interrupt processing for the end timing of the reel acceleration state (for example, the number of interrupt executions in the reel acceleration state in FIG. 35, which will be described later). Determine whether the timing has been reached. If Yes in step 6114, in step 6116, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel constant speed state. Next, in step 6118, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes reel constant speed maintenance processing, and proceeds to step 6120. Incidentally, even if the answer is No in step 6112 or step 6114, the process moves to step 6120.

Next, in step 6120, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the current reel drive state is a constant reel speed state. If Yes in step 6120, in step 6122, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the reel sensor is connected to the reel (corresponding to the process of this subroutine) after the reel is in a constant speed state (after executing the process of step 6116). It is determined whether the index provided on the reel) has been detected. Although not shown, each reel is provided with one (or two or more) index. The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the circumferential side of the reel, and is used to detect whether the reel has passed a predetermined position, whether it has rotated once, etc. Each index is then detected by a reel sensor. The reel sensor signal is electrically connected to the main control board M. When the reel sensor detects (cuts) the index, the input signal is input to the main control board M, and it is configured to detect that the reel has passed a predetermined position. If Yes in step 6122, it is determined that the rotational speed of the reel has become constant, and the process moves to step 6130. On the other hand, if No in step 6122, in step 6124, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether a predetermined time (for example, a time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) has elapsed since the reel drive state became the reel constant speed state. Determine whether or not. If No in step 6124, it is determined that the rotational speed of the reel has become constant, and the process moves to step 6130. In this way, in this example, it is possible to determine whether the reel rotational speed is normally constant by having the reel sensor detect the index within a predetermined time after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state. It is configured. In this example, the predetermined time is a time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times (the configuration is such that 400 steps can be rotated by 400 interrupt processing), and when the reel rotation speed is constant, This is longer than the time it takes for the reel to make one rotation (for example, one rotation of the reel is 336 steps, and the time value for executing interrupt processing 336 times). With this configuration, the distance between the index and the reel sensor (distance from when the reel rotates until the index is detected by the reel sensor) at the timing when the reel drive state becomes constant speed state is determined. However, if the reel rotation speed is constant, the reel sensor detects the index within the predetermined time (the time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state. It is configured so that it can be done.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if YES in step 6124, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel acceleration state in step 6126. Next, in step 6128, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a reel reacceleration process, and proceeds to the process of step 6130. In this way, in this example, if the reel sensor does not detect the index within a predetermined time (for example, the time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state, , the reel drive state is updated again to the reel acceleration state, and the reel re-acceleration process (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as the reel acceleration process) is executed. Note that even in the case of No in step 6120, the process moves to step 6130. Note that the reel re-acceleration processing does not have to be the same as the reel acceleration processing described above, and the reel re-acceleration processing and reel acceleration processing can be used to perform interrupt processing for each combination of excitation phases of the stepping motor and for each combination of excitation phases. The number of executions may be made different.

Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of reel rotation stop processing according to the subroutine of step 6200 in FIG. 32 in the first embodiment. First, in step 6106, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the reel deceleration standby state start timing (this is the timing at which the reel constant speed state ends; for example, when the stop button is operated, the reel deceleration standby state start timing is reached). ) is reached. If YES in step 6130, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to a reel deceleration standby state in step 6132, and proceeds to step 6134. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 6130, the process moves to step 6134.

Next, in step 6134, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the current reel drive state is a reel deceleration standby state. If Yes in step 6136, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel deceleration standby state end timing (timing to start execution of the reel deceleration process) has been reached. If Yes in step 6136, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts decelerating the reel (reel deceleration process) in step 6138. Next, in step 6140, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state, and proceeds to the process of step 6142. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 6134 or step 6136, the process moves to step 6142.

Next, in step 6142, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the current reel drive state is a reel deceleration state. If Yes in step 6142, in step 6144, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel deceleration state end timing (timing to end execution of the reel deceleration process) has been reached. If Yes in step 6144, in step 6146, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel stop state, and moves to the next process (the process in step 1612). Note that even in the case of No in step 6142 or step 6144, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1612).

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the rotating operation of the reel M50 of the reel type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. The reel-type gaming machine according to this example starts the rotation of the stepping motor based on the operation of the start lever D50, and when the rotational speed of the reels reaches a constant speed, the constant speed is maintained thereafter (the reel When the driving state becomes a reel constant speed state, a reel constant speed maintenance process is executed, but the rotational speed may not actually reach the constant speed). When any stop button is operated, stop control is performed for the reel (stepping motor) corresponding to the operated stop button. Here, the stepping motor is a 4-phase stepping motor (there is no problem even if it is not a 4-phase stepping motor) having four phases of Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, and Φ3. Rotation is controlled by phase excitation. That is, by cyclically changing the drive pulse data (combination of phases to be excited), the stepping motor can be rotated in the forward direction. In the figure, the "phase to be excited" column indicates which phase among Φ0 to Φ3 is to be excited (details will be described later).

In addition, as shown in the "reel rotation speed image" at the top of the figure, the driving states from when the stepping motor starts rotating until it stops are divided into six, and the stepping motor is operated according to the drive pattern corresponding to each driving state. Drive control. Here, the driving states include "reel stop state", "reel rotation start standby state", "reel acceleration state", "reel constant speed state", "reel deceleration standby state", and "reel deceleration state". In addition, in the "Reel rotation speed image", the vertical axis is the reel rotation speed, and the speed increases in the upward direction, and the horizontal axis is the time, and the time is illustrated so that time passes in the right direction. There is. In addition, the example shown in the same figure is an example of a case where no reel rotation failure occurs, and this applies only when reel rotation failure occurs due to factors such as holding the reel by hand or losing synchronization. (The case where reel rotation failure occurs will be described later).

"Reel stop state" indicates a state in which the reel is stopped. When the reel is in the "reel stop state", the reel is in a stationary state, and all four phases of the stepping motor are activated. is not excited.

Next, in the "reel stop state", the reel drive state is updated to the "reel rotation start standby state" based on the start lever D50 being operated at timing (1) in the figure. . Here, the "reel rotation start standby state" indicates a state of waiting from when the start lever D50 is operated until the stepping motor acceleration process (reel acceleration process) is started. This standby period is a period until the reel drive state shifts from the "reel stop state" to the "reel acceleration state." For example, the time from when the reel drive state became "reel acceleration state" in the previous game is measured, and the start lever D50 for the current game is operated before the minimum playing time (about 4.1 seconds) has elapsed. If it is, it will be in a "wait state to start reel rotation".

Next, at timing (2) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel rotation start standby state" to the "reel acceleration state". Here, the "reel acceleration state" is a state in which the reel is accelerated from a stationary state to reach a constant speed. In this example, the acceleration state ends when the timer interrupt process is executed 220 times ("100+60+30+15+8+4+2+1=220", see the number of interrupt executions in the reel acceleration state in the bottom left of the figure) (the reel drive state is changed to "reel constant speed"). is configured to update the status). Next, the reel rotational speed reaches a constant speed at the timing (3) in the figure, in other words, at the timing when the "reel acceleration state" ends by executing one more timer interrupt process. Note that at this timing, the reel drive state remains in the "reel acceleration state". Next, at timing (4) in the figure, after the reel drive state is updated from "reel rotation start standby state" to "reel acceleration state", the timer interrupt process has been executed 220 times, and the reel drive state is updated. The state is updated to "reel constant speed state". In this way, in this example, after the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed, the reel drive state remains in the "reel acceleration state" for one timer interrupt process. The combination of excited phases "φ3, φ0" is configured to execute interrupt processing only once, similar to the "reel constant speed state" where interrupt processing is executed once for each combination of excited phases. (If no abnormal rotation of the reel occurs). With this configuration, it is possible to stably execute the acceleration process until the reel rotational speed reaches a constant speed.

Here, the lower part of the figure is a "step motor excitation image". In the figure, a step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is a "reel acceleration state" and a step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is a "reel constant speed state" are illustrated. First, a step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the "reel acceleration state" will be described in detail with reference to the lower left of the figure. Note that the "phase to be excited" is a combination of phases to be excited, and the "number of times of interrupt execution" indicates the number of times that an interrupt process is executed to be excited by the combination of phases to be excited. In this example, when executing the reel acceleration process, the step motor is excited for 220 timer interrupt processes, and (KA) interrupt process is executed 100 times at "φ0" → ( KB) Interrupt processing is performed 60 times with "φ0, φ1" → (KC) Interrupt processing is performed 30 times with "φ1" → (KD) Interrupt processing is performed 15 times with "φ1, φ2" → (KE) "φ2" ” interrupt processing 8 times → (KF) “φ2, φ3” interrupt processing 4 times → (KG) “φ3” interrupt processing 2 times → (KH) “φ3, φ0” interrupt processing The interrupt processing is executed once to excite the step motor (stepping motor) (the number of executions of the interrupt processing is just an example, and there is no problem in changing it). In this way, in this example, when executing the reel acceleration process, the configuration is such that the number of times the interrupt process is executed for one combination of excited phases is gradually reduced.

Next, a step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the "reel constant speed state" will be described in detail with reference to the lower right part of the figure. In this example, when the reel is in constant speed state (when executing reel constant speed maintenance processing), interrupt processing is performed once at (TA) "φ0" → (TB) "φ0, φ1" Interrupt processing once → (TC) Interrupt processing once on “φ1” → (TD) Interrupt processing once on “φ1, φ2” → (TE) Interrupt processing once on “φ2” → (TF) Interrupt processing is performed once on "φ2, φ3" → (TG) Interrupt processing is performed once on "φ3" → (TH) Interrupt processing is performed once on "φ3, φ0" → (TA) " Interrupt processing is performed once at "φ0" → (TB) Interrupt processing is performed once at "φ0, φ1" →..., repeating (TA) to (TG) one interrupt processing at a time. The motor is configured to excite a step motor (stepping motor). In this way, in this example, when the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed, the number of times that the interrupt process is executed for one excitation phase combination is all one time.

Next, in a situation where the reel drive state is "reel constant speed state", the stop button corresponding to one of the reels is operated at the timing (5) in the figure, and the reel drive state changes to "reel deceleration standby state". ” will be updated. Here, the "reel constant speed state" is a state in which the rotational speed of the reel is constant (the combination of excitation phases is switched for each interrupt processing), and the "reel deceleration standby state" ” indicates the state from when the stop button is operated by the player until the start of stop control (in the reel deceleration standby state, the reels are slipping in proportion to the number of slipping frames). . The period of this driving state is determined based on the operation timing of the stop button.

Next, at timing (6) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration standby state" to the "reel deceleration state", and deceleration of the reel is started. When the reel drive state is updated from "reel deceleration standby state" to "reel deceleration state", a specific phase of the stepping motor will continue to be excited for a predetermined period of time in order to stop the rotation of the reel. Perform four-phase excitation to excite everything. Then, when the excitation is performed for a predetermined period of time, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration state" to the "reel stop state" at the timing (7) in the figure, and the reel comes to a stop.

As described above, in the reel-type gaming machine according to this example, the reel sensor detects the index within a predetermined time (for example, the time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel drive state changes to the reel constant speed state. If it is not detected, the reel drive state is updated to the reel acceleration state again, and the reel re-acceleration process (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as the reel acceleration process) is executed. If the reel drive state is the reel acceleration state, in other words, it is not determined whether or not the reel acceleration has been normally performed while the reel acceleration process is being executed. In addition, whether the reel acceleration has been performed normally, in other words, whether the reel is at a constant speed (or whether a reel rotation failure has occurred) is determined by the process in step 6124 (when the reel drive state changes to the reel constant speed state). However, in the process of step 6124, the reel sensor does not detect the index, so the reel is not at a constant speed (determination is made after a predetermined period of time has passed since the update). If it is determined that the reel acceleration process has occurred, the reel acceleration process is executed again, that is, the reel acceleration process is executed again from the beginning. In this way, by configuring the system so that it is not determined whether or not the reel acceleration has been normally executed while the reel acceleration process is being executed, even if a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the , if the reel rotation failure is resolved and the reel rotation speed can reach a constant speed through the remaining reel acceleration processing until the reel acceleration processing is finished, the reel drive state changes to the reel constant speed state. If the reel sensor detects the index before a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the index was updated, the reel constant speed maintenance process will be executed without executing the re-acceleration process. A situation in which the player cannot proceed with the game (the stop button cannot be operated) can be made less likely to occur. In addition, by configuring the reel acceleration process so that the process for determining whether or not the reel acceleration has been normally executed is not executed, it is possible to reduce the amount of data required for the process related to the rotation of the reels. Furthermore, because of this configuration, if a reel rotation failure occurs while the reel-type gaming machine according to this example is executing reel acceleration processing, the following actions will occur. becomes.

<Effect 1>
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration process is executed → Reel acceleration process is finished → Reel drive state is updated to reel constant speed state → Reel constant speed maintenance process is executed → Reel constant Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of speed maintenance processing → detection of reel rotation failure → execution of reel re-acceleration processing The reel is configured to operate as described above.
In addition, reel rotation failure refers to reel rotation being obstructed by a member provided near the reel such as the reel window D160 (reel rubbing against the reel window D160, etc.), loss of synchronization, etc., resulting in acceleration of the reel. This refers to the case where the process is not executed normally. In this way, by configuring the reel re-acceleration process to be executed even if a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel constant speed maintenance process, the game can be smoothly played.

<Effect 2>
The reel starts rotating → the reel drive state is updated to the reel acceleration state → the reel acceleration process is executed → a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process → the reel acceleration process continues to be executed → the execution of the reel acceleration process ends → Update the reel drive state to the reel constant speed state → Execute reel constant speed maintenance process → Detect reel rotation failure → Execute reel re-acceleration process The system is configured to operate as described above. In this way, even if a reel rotation failure occurs during execution of the reel acceleration process, the game can proceed smoothly by configuring the reel re-acceleration process to be executed when the reel rotation failure is subsequently detected. will be possible. In addition, as described above, even if a rotation failure occurs during execution of the reel acceleration process, the reel acceleration process will continue to be executed and the same interrupt as when the rotation failure has not occurred will be issued. When the reel acceleration process has been executed for the number of times, the execution of the reel acceleration process ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure the reel rotation speed to easily reach a constant speed without executing the reel re-acceleration process when a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the start of execution of the reel acceleration process. can.

<Effect 3>
The reel starts rotating → the reel drive state is updated to the reel acceleration state → the reel acceleration process is executed → the power is cut off during the execution of the reel acceleration process → the power is recovered from the power cut → the reel acceleration process is continued (if not Execute reel acceleration processing for processing) → Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing → Continue execution of reel acceleration processing (execute unprocessed reel acceleration processing) → End of execution of reel acceleration processing → Reel drive Update the state to the reel constant speed state → Execute reel constant speed maintenance process → Detect reel rotation failure → Execute reel reacceleration process It is configured to operate as described above. In this way, even if the power is cut off while the reel acceleration process is being executed, the reel acceleration process will continue after the power is restored, and then the reel drive state will be updated to the reel constant speed state for a predetermined period of time. By executing the reel re-acceleration process when the reel sensor does not detect the index within the time limit, the game can be smoothly played. In addition, if a power-off process is executed while the reel acceleration process is being executed, the reel acceleration process will continue after the power is restored, and the reel drive status will be updated within a predetermined time after the reel drive status is updated to the reel constant speed status. The reel re-acceleration process is configured not to be executed when the sensor detects the index, and this configuration prevents a situation where the player is unable to proceed with the game (inability to operate the stop button) due to the reel re-acceleration process. can be made less likely to occur. Note that the power-off processing may be referred to as power-off processing.

<<Operation after final stop button operation>>
In the reel-type gaming machine according to this example, after the final stop button (third stop button) is operated, the final reel (the reel that is rotating to the end, also referred to as the third reel) stops, and the winning combination is Although the system is configured such that the payout of game medals can be executed when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, it may be configured as follows as an effect regarding the payout of game medals.

<Effect 1>
The reels start rotating as a game in which the winning combination is won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes valid → the first stop is performed as the stop operation of the first reel Operate the button → Display the first reel stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → Display the second reel stop → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (Third stop button ) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Power outage occurs → 3rd reel moves (rotates) to the stop display position → Power outage is detected → Execute power outage processing → Power is restored → Reel The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination may be stopped and displayed → processing related to payout of game medals may be executed. With this configuration, in a game where a player wins a small prize, such as the common bell described above, which can be won regardless of the timing of the stop button operation, the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted. Even if a power outage occurs due to a power outage at the gaming parlor immediately after the power outage occurs, regardless of the planned stop position of the third reel (even if the number of sliding pieces is the maximum), the relevant power outage will occur before the power outage is detected. It can be configured so that the movement (rotation) to the scheduled stop position is completed. In addition, if the symbol combinations that make up the winning combination (for example, the common bell) are stopped and displayed after the power is restored, the game medals can be paid out normally, and the player is unlikely to be disadvantaged. Can be configured.

<Effect 2>
The reels start rotating as a game in which the winning combination is won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes valid → the first stop is performed as the stop operation of the first reel Operate the button → Display the first reel stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → Display the second reel stop → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (Third stop button ) → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → A reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The reel's winning combination from the player's perspective Although the symbol combination corresponding to is not displayed in a stopped state, the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269 (this is a case where it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally, For example, in a game where the winning combination of bells is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination of bells is not displayed on the reels from the player's perspective, but the gaming machine responds to the player's operation of the stop button. When the internal processing successfully executes the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination) -> Execute the process related to the payout of game medals It may be configured to work as described above. With this configuration, even if a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed on the reels as seen from the player, , when a winning combination is won in the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed, the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted. If the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is normally executed, the game medals can be paid out, and the system is configured so that no disadvantage is likely to occur to the player. can do. Note that the timing at which the reel rotation failure occurs is not limited to the above example, and the reel rotation failure occurs during the period from when the second reel stops displaying until the processing related to the payout of game medals is executed, and as a result, the reel rotation failure occurs at the second reel. This is applicable to all cases where the reel corresponding to the three stops cannot be stopped at the expected stop position (it is also applicable to the effects related to reel rotation failure, as exemplified below). In addition, in the above-mentioned effect 2, the effect in a game in which a winning combination is won is exemplified. In other words, if a reel rotation failure does not occur, the following effects will occur (if other effects do not cause rotation failure or power outage, the system is configured so that the same effect will occur) good).
The reels start rotating as a game in which the winning combination is won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes valid → the first stop is performed as the stop operation of the first reel Operate the button → Display the first reel stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → Display the second reel stop → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (Third stop button ) → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the expected stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player. In the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal → the process related to the payout of game medals is executed.In addition, as a winning combination in the above-mentioned or later-described operation, the symbol combination is determined to be normal at the timing of pressing the stop button in the winning game. It may be a winning combination (for example, a common bell) that allows you to win regardless of the timing, or a winning combination that may or may not win depending on the timing of pressing the stop button in the winning game (for example, Watermelon A, Watermelon B, Cherry) may also be used. In addition, in a game where a predetermined winning combination is won in a predetermined gaming state, if the reel rotation failure or power outage does not occur and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed, the reel backlight ( In the case where a back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is executed as a flashing effect (sometimes referred to as a back lamp effect), the predetermined gaming state is In a game in which the predetermined winning combination is won, a reel rotation failure occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination does not stop displaying. It may be configured to perform a lamp effect. In addition, in this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the third stop could not stop at the scheduled stop position was exemplified, but the case is not limited to this, and the reel corresponding to the first stop is scheduled to stop due to defective reel rotation. It may be applied when the reel corresponding to the second stop cannot be stopped at the expected stop position due to poor reel rotation (the same applies to other actions as well). applicable).

<Effect 3>
The reels start rotating as a game in which the winning combination is won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes valid → the first stop is performed as the stop operation of the first reel Operate the button → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → Display that the second reel is stopped → A power outage occurs and the stable supply of power to the gaming machine stops → The second reel stops. Operate the third stop button as a stop operation for the 3 reels (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power outage → Execute power outage process → 3rd reel plays the game From the player's perspective, the symbol combination cannot be moved (rotated) to the expected stop position → From the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination on the reel is not stopped and displayed, but the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269. (This is a case where it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been successfully completed. For example, in a game where the Bell winning combination is won, the reel corresponds to the Bell winning combination, which is the winning combination from the player's perspective. (If the symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination was not stopped and displayed, but the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the player's operation of the stop button successfully executed the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the bell winning combination) → Execution of processing related to payout of game medals may be configured to operate as described above. Furthermore, the timing at which a power outage is detected, the timing at which the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped due to a power outage, the timing at which the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269, and the timing at which the power is restored are as follows. , the timing is not limited to the above timing, but the timing of detecting a power outage during the period from when the second reel stops displaying until the processing related to payout of game medals is executed, or when a power outage occurs and the power to the gaming machine is It is sufficient that there exists a timing at which the supply of the symbols stops, a timing at which the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269, and a timing at which the power is restored. This is applicable to all cases in which the vehicle cannot stop at the scheduled stop position (the same applies to the actions including power cut-off as exemplified below). With this configuration, a power outage occurred immediately before (or immediately after) the stop operation of the third stop button was received, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination on the reels could not be stopped and displayed from the player's perspective. In this case, the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is pressed at the timing when a winning combination is won in the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed. If the operation has been accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has been successfully executed, the game medals will be paid out after the power is restored. (This includes not only the payout from the outlet, but also the increase in the display (number of credits) on the credit number display device), and the structure is such that it is unlikely to cause any disadvantage to the player. Can be done. Note that the timing at which the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped due to the occurrence of a power outage may be referred to as the timing at which the power outage occurs. In addition, in a game where a predetermined winning combination is won in a predetermined gaming state, if the reel rotation failure or power outage does not occur and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed, the reel backlight ( In the case where a back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is executed as a flashing effect (sometimes referred to as a back lamp effect), the predetermined gaming state is Even if a power outage occurs in a game in which the predetermined winning combination is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not stopped and displayed, the back lamp corresponding to the predetermined winning combination It may be configured to perform a performance. In addition, in this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the third stop could not be stopped at the scheduled stop position was exemplified, but the case is not limited to this. It may be applied when the reel corresponding to the second stop cannot be stopped at the scheduled stop position due to a power outage (applicable to other actions as well). ). Note that in this example, "the supply of power to the gaming machine has stopped" and "the stable supply of power to the gaming machine has stopped" does not mean that the power supplied to the gaming machine is 0, but rather that the power supply to the gaming machine has stopped. This may also be the case when the power supplied to the game machine becomes less than the power supplied during operation of the game machine due to a power outage or the like, or when the supply of power to the game machine is cut off.

<Effect 4>
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → 1st reel stops display → 2nd reel stops display → 2nd reel stops display → 3rd reel stops and displays 3rd stop button (3rd stop button) (receives operation) → Updates the reel drive state to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → From the player's perspective, the reel becomes a winning combination Although the corresponding symbol combination is displayed in a stopped state, the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269 (this is a case where it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been successfully completed, for example , in a game that resulted in a loss, the symbol combination corresponding to the loss did not stop displayed on the reels from the player's perspective, but the symbol combination corresponding to the loss was displayed due to processing within the gaming machine corresponding to the player's operation of the stop button. When the stop control for stopping and displaying the combination is normally executed) → the payout of game medals is not executed. It may be configured to work as described above. With this configuration, in a game where the lottery result is a loss, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and from the player's perspective, the reels correspond to the winning combination. Even if the symbol combination to be played is stopped and displayed, it will be a loss due to the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be dealt with at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the stop button is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is successfully executed, game medals will be issued even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. It is possible to configure the game machine so that no payout is performed, and thus the game machine can be made fair, and it can be made a game machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the game parlor. Note that the above effect 4 is not limited to losing only; for example, in a game where the bell is not won (a game where the replay winning combination is won, a game where the watermelon is won, etc.), the reel rotation failure may occur. It should be noted that this can also be applied when the symbol combination corresponding to the bell is stopped and displayed. In addition, in such a case, the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed from the player's perspective is a symbol combination that is inconsistent with the internal lottery result due to the rotation failure, but in the determination process of step 1269, Since the symbol combination is determined to be normal, the configuration is such that a display determination error (unrecoverable error) does not occur (it is not determined that a display determination error has occurred).

<Effect 5>
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → The power supply is interrupted and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → Third reel Operate the 3rd stop button as a stop operation (accepts the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detects power outage → Executes power outage processing → The 3rd reel is stopped by the player Unable to move (rotate) to the expected stop position → From the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination on the reel is displayed in a stopped state, but in the determination process of step 1269, the symbol combination is determined to be normal (stopped) This is a case where it is determined that the reel stop control based on the button operation has been successfully completed. For example, in a game that resulted in a loss, the symbol combination corresponding to the loss did not stop and display on the reels from the player's perspective. , when the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is successfully executed by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the player's operation of the stop button) → Power is restored → Game medal payout is not executed. It may be configured to function as follows. By configuring this way, in a game where the lottery result is a loss, the power-off process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reels correspond to the winning combinations from the player's perspective. Even if the symbol combination to be played is stopped and displayed, it will be a loss due to the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be dealt with at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the stop button is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is successfully executed, game medals will be issued even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. It is possible to configure the game machine so that no payout is performed, and thus the game machine can be made fair, and it can be made a game machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the game parlor. Note that the above effect 5 is not limited to losing only; for example, in a game where the bell is not won (a game where the replay winning combination is won, a game where the watermelon is won, etc.), the reel rotation failure may occur. It should be noted that this can also be applied when the symbol combination corresponding to the bell is stopped and displayed. In addition, in such a case, the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed from the player's perspective is a symbol combination that is inconsistent with the internal lottery result due to the rotation failure, but in the determination process of step 1269, Since the symbol combination is determined to be normal, the configuration is such that a display determination error (unrecoverable error) does not occur (it is not determined that a display determination error has occurred).

<Effect 6>
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → 1st reel stops display → 2nd reel stops display → 2nd reel stops display → 3rd reel stops and displays 3rd stop button (3rd stop button) (receives operation) → Updates reel drive state to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → Third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → Bonus winning ( For example, the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is displayed in a stopped state, but the determination process in step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal (determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been successfully completed). For example, in a game in which the player did not win the bonus role and the game ended in a loss, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is stopped and displayed on the reels from the player's perspective, but the player presses the stop button. (If the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is successfully executed by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation) → The bonus does not start and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. It may be configured to function as follows. With this configuration, in a game where the lottery result is a loss, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reels correspond to the bonus role from the player's perspective. Even if the symbol combination to be played is stopped and displayed, it will be a loss due to the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be dealt with at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the stop button is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to a loss is executed normally, the bonus will be played even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed. It is possible to configure the game machine so that it does not start, thereby making it a fair gaming machine, and also making it possible to create a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the gaming parlor. Note that the above-mentioned effect 6 is not limited to losing only; for example, in a game in which the bonus role is not won (not in the bonus), and the bonus role is not won (the re-playing role is won). It should be noted that the present invention can also be applied when a reel rotation failure occurs in a game in which a watermelon is won, and the symbol combination corresponding to a bonus combination is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the above-mentioned effect 6, the effect in a game in which the bonus combination is not won is exemplified. That is, when no reel rotation failure occurs, the following effects occur (this is also applicable to other operations when no rotation failure or power cutoff occurs).
The reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first reel is stopped → operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → display the second reel stopped → operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not displayed stopped on the reel from the player's perspective, and in step 1269 In the determination process, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal.→The bonus is not started, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. On the other hand, if the reel rotation failure does not occur in the game in which the bonus combination is won or during the bonus, the following effects occur.
The reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first reel is stopped → operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → display the second reel stopped → operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the expected stop position as seen from the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player, and in the determination process of step 1269 For example, the symbol combination is determined to be normal, the bonus is started, and a freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. In addition, in the above example, the case where the freeze is executed at the start of the bonus is illustrated, but depending on the type of bonus (type of bonus combination), there may be a bonus where the freeze is executed and a bonus where the freeze is not executed. , execution or non-execution of the freeze may be made different depending on the game state in which the bonus combination is won.

<Effect 7>
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → The power supply is interrupted and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → Third reel Operate the 3rd stop button as a stop operation (accepts the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detects power outage → Executes power outage processing → The 3rd reel is stopped by the player Unable to move (rotate) to the expected stop position → From the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role (for example, BB role) is displayed on the reels, but the symbol combination is normal in the judgment process of step 1269. (This is a case where it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been successfully completed. For example, in a game where the player has not won the bonus role and has lost, The symbol combination that corresponds to the bonus combination was stopped and displayed on the reels when I looked at it, but the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination that corresponds to the loss was successfully performed by the processing inside the gaming machine that corresponds to the player's operation of the stop button. If executed)→power return→bonus does not start, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. With this configuration, in a game where the winning lottery result is a loss, the power-off processing is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the bonus winning combination is displayed on the reels from the player's perspective. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the internal processing of the gaming machine results in a loss, and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is displayed on each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the corresponding stop button is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is successfully executed, the game will not be played even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed. It is possible to configure the game machine so that the bonus of medals is not started, and it is possible to make the game machine fair and not to cause unintended disadvantages to the game parlor. Note that the above-mentioned effect 6 is not limited to losing only; for example, in a game in which the bonus role is not won (not in the bonus), and the bonus role is not won (the re-playing role is won). It should be noted that the present invention can also be applied when a reel rotation failure occurs in a game in which a watermelon is won, and the symbol combination corresponding to a bonus combination is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the above-mentioned effect 6, the effect in a game in which the bonus combination is not won is exemplified. That is, if a power outage does not occur, the following effects occur (this can also be applied to other actions if no rotation failure or power outage occurs).
The reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first reel is stopped → operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → display the second reel stopped → operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not displayed stopped on the reel from the player's perspective, and in step 1269 In the determination process, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal.→The bonus is not started, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. On the other hand, if the reel power has not been cut off during the game in which the bonus combination has been won or during the bonus, the following effects will occur.
The reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first reel is stopped → operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → display the second reel stopped → operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the expected stop position as seen from the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player, and in the determination process of step 1269 For example, the symbol combination is determined to be normal, the bonus is started, and a freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. In addition, in the above example, the case where the freeze is executed at the start of the bonus is illustrated, but depending on the type of bonus (type of bonus combination), there may be a bonus where the freeze is executed and a bonus where the freeze is not executed. , execution or non-execution of the freeze may be made different depending on the game state in which the bonus combination is won.

<Effect 8>
The reels start rotating as a game executed during a bonus or as a game in which a bonus role is won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Display the 3rd reel to stop Operate the third stop button (accepts operation of the third stop button) → Updates reel drive state to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → Third reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player Not possible → Although the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role (for example, BB role) is not stopped and displayed on the reels from the player's perspective, the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269 → The bonus starts, In addition, it may be configured to operate as described above, in which the freeze is executed at the start of the bonus. With this configuration, in a game executed in a situation where a bonus is won or a game where a bonus combination is won, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not stopped and displayed on the reels from the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role will be displayed on each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the corresponding stop button is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus winning combination is executed normally, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus winning combination is not being stopped and displayed. The system can also be configured to start the bonus and execute a freeze that is executed at the start of the bonus, which is a significant problem for players whose bonus is prevented from starting due to poor reel rotation when the bonus should have started. The system can be configured so as not to cause any disadvantages, and the player can proceed with the game without feeling any discomfort by freezing the start of the bonus in the same way as if the reel rotation failure had not occurred. Become.

<Effect 9>
The reels start rotating as a game executed during a bonus or as a game in which a bonus role is won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → stop button reception is enabled → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Play the game due to a power outage Power supply to the machine stops → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → Reel drive state is updated to reel deceleration state → Power outage detected → Power off Execute processing → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination (for example, BB combination) is not displayed on the reel as seen from the player. However, in the determination process of step 1269, the symbol combination may be determined to be normal → the power is restored → the bonus starts, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. With this configuration, in a game executed in a situation where a bonus is won or a game where a bonus combination is won, the power-off process is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button. , Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not stopped and displayed on the reels from the player's perspective, each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is moved at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the stop button corresponding to the bonus combination is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is successfully executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination will not be stopped and displayed. However, the bonus can be configured to start the bonus and execute a freeze that is executed at the start of the bonus, which can be a significant problem for players where a power outage prevents the bonus from starting in a situation where the bonus should have started. The system can be configured so as not to cause any disadvantages, and the player can proceed with the game without feeling any discomfort by freezing the bonus at the start, just as if the reel rotation failure had not occurred. Become.

<Effect 10>
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → 1st reel stops display → 2nd reel stops display → 2nd reel stops display → 3rd reel stops and displays 3rd stop button (3rd stop button) (receives operation) → Updates the reel drive state to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The reel is replayed from the player's perspective Although the symbol combination corresponding to is displayed in a stopped state, the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269 (this is a case where it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been successfully completed, For example, in a game that resulted in a loss, the symbol combination that corresponds to the replay combination is stopped and displayed on the reels from the player's perspective, but the loss is handled by processing within the gaming machine that corresponds to the player's operation of the stop button. (If the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combinations is executed normally) → The automatic bet corresponding to the stop display of the re-gaming combination will not be made and the re-gaming lamp D290 will not light up again. may be configured. With this configuration, in a game where the lottery result is a loss, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and from the player's perspective, the reel does not appear as a replayable winning combination. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the internal processing of the gaming machine results in a loss, and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is displayed on each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the corresponding stop button is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination is stopped and displayed. An automatic bet will not be made, and the replay lamp D290 will not be lit again. In addition, in effect 10, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination to which the RT state will change if it is displayed in a stopped state in the current RT state is displayed in a stopped state from the player's perspective, the gaming machine When the internal processing results in a loss and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed, the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is accepted. If the stop control for stopping and displaying is executed normally, the RT state will not shift (the symbol combination corresponding to the role to which the RT state other than the re-gaming role will change is stopped and displayed) ). With this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the gaming parlor. Note that the above-mentioned effect 10 is not limited to losing only, but is applied, for example, in a game where the replay combination has not been won, a reel rotation failure occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stopped and displayed. Please add what you can do. That is, when no reel rotation failure occurs, the following effects occur (this is also applicable to other operations when no rotation failure or power cutoff occurs).
The reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first reel is stopped → operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → display the second reel stopped → operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's perspective, and the symbol combination is changed in the determination process of step 1269. The combination is determined to be normal, and the automatic bet is not made and the replay lamp D290 does not light up again.
Furthermore, automatic bet means that the specified number (for example, 3) of game medals that were bet on in the game where the replay combination was won will be pressed by the bet button (max bet button) when the replay combination is stopped and displayed. Bets are automatically placed without any operation or insertion of game medals from the medal slot.
On the other hand, if the reel rotation failure does not occur in the game in which the replay combination has been won, the following effects will occur.
The reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first reel is stopped → operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → display the second reel stopped → operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the expected stop position as seen from the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player, and the determination process in step 1269 The symbol combination is determined to be normal → automatic bet is executed, and the replay lamp D290 lights up anew (if you won the replay combination in the previous game, the replay lamp D290 lights up) )
The following effects can be exemplified.

<Effect 11>
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → The power supply is interrupted and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → Third reel Operate the 3rd stop button as a stop operation (accepts the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detects power outage → Executes power outage processing → The 3rd reel is stopped by the player It is not possible to move (rotate) to the expected stopping position → From the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is displayed on the reel in a stopped state, but the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269 ( This is a case where it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been successfully completed. For example, in a game that resulted in a loss, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stopped and displayed on the reels from the player's perspective. (If the game machine successfully executes the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the loss due to the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the player's operation of the stop button) → Power is restored → Stop display of the re-gaming combination It may also be configured so that the corresponding automatic bet is not made and the replay lamp D290 does not light up again as described above. With this configuration, in a game where the lottery result is a loss, the power-off processing is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the re-game winning combination is displayed on the reels from the player's perspective. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, it will be a loss due to the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be moved at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the stop button corresponding to the winning combination is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is executed normally, the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination will be stopped and displayed. Also, no automatic bet will be made and the replay lamp D290 will not be lit again. In addition, in effect 10, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination to which the RT state will change if it is displayed in a stopped state in the current RT state is displayed in a stopped state from the player's perspective, the gaming machine When the internal processing results in a loss and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed, the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is accepted. If the stop control for stopping and displaying is executed normally, the RT state will not shift (the symbol combination corresponding to the role to which the RT state other than the re-gaming role will change is stopped and displayed) ). With this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the gaming parlor. Note that the above-mentioned effect 11 is not limited to losing only, but can be applied, for example, in a game where the replay combination has not been won, when a power outage occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stopped and displayed. Let me add what you can do. That is, if a power outage does not occur, the following effects occur (this can also be applied to other actions if no rotation failure or power outage occurs).
The reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first reel is stopped → operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → display the second reel stopped → operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's perspective, and the symbol combination is changed in the determination process of step 1269. The combination is determined to be normal -> the automatic bet is not made and the replay lamp D290 does not light up again. On the other hand, if a power outage does not occur in a game in which a replay combination has been won, the following effects will occur.
The reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first reel is stopped → operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → display the second reel stopped → operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the expected stop position as seen from the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player, and the determination process in step 1269 The symbol combination is determined to be normal → automatic bet is executed, and the replay lamp D290 lights up again (if you won the replay combination in the previous game, the replay lamp D290 lights up) )
The following effects can be exemplified.

<Effect 12>
The reels start rotating as a winning game for replay → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Stop button reception becomes valid → First stop as stop operation of the first reel Operate the button → Display the first reel stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → Display the second reel stop → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (Third stop button ) → Reel drive state is updated to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → Third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → Replay the reel from the player's perspective Although the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed in a stopped state, the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269.→An automatic bet corresponding to the stopped display of the replaying combination is made, and the replaying lamp D290 is turned on. It may be configured to function as described above when the light is newly lit. With this configuration, in a game where the winning combination result is a replay, a reel rotation failure will occur immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel will be replayed from the player's perspective. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is not displayed in a stopped state, each reel (left reel , middle reel, right reel), and if the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the replayed role is successfully executed, the replayed role is supported. An automatic bet is made even if the symbol combination to be played is not stopped and displayed, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit. With this configuration, it is possible to create a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and since the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay combinations are not displayed in a stopped state, replays cannot be played even if the reels are visually checked. Even if it is not possible to determine whether or not a winning combination has been won, it is possible to make it difficult to misunderstand the game situation by visually confirming whether or not an automatic bet has been made and whether the replay lamp D290 is lit. In addition, in action 12, if a re-gaming combination has been won that would cause the RT state to change if it is displayed in a stopped state in the current RT state, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination will be stopped and displayed. Even if it is not, the RT state will be shifted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which problems are unlikely to occur in the progress of the game, and it is possible to configure a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Effect 13>
The reels start rotating as a winning game for replay → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Stop button reception becomes valid → First stop as stop operation of the first reel Operate the button → 1st reel stops display → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → 2nd reel displays stop → Power cut occurs and power supply to the gaming machine stops → 3rd reel Operate the third stop button as a reel stop operation (accepts operation of the third stop button) → Updates reel drive state to reel deceleration state → Detects power outage → Executes power outage processing → Third reel is activated by player It is not possible to move (rotate) to the expected stop position when viewed from the player → Although the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is not displayed on the reel in a stopped state from the player's perspective, the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269. →Power return→Automatic bet corresponding to stop display of re-gaming combination is made, and re-gaming lamp D290 is newly lit.It may be configured to work as described above. With this configuration, in a game where the result of the winning combination lottery is a replay, the power-off process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the replay is displayed on the reels from the player's perspective. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed in a stopped state, each reel (left If the stop button operation corresponding to the reel, middle reel, right reel is accepted, and the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the replayed role is executed normally, the replayed role is An automatic bet is made even if the corresponding symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit. With this configuration, it is possible to create a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and since the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay combinations are not displayed in a stopped state, replays cannot be played even if the reels are visually checked. Even if it is not possible to determine whether or not a winning combination has been won, it is possible to make it difficult to misunderstand the game situation by visually confirming whether or not an automatic bet has been made and whether the replay lamp D290 is lit. In addition, in action 13, if a re-gaming combination is won that will cause the RT state to change if it is displayed in a stopped state in the current RT state, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination will be stopped and displayed. Even if it is not, the RT state will be shifted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which problems are unlikely to occur in the progress of the game, and it is possible to configure a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Effect 14>
The reels start rotating as a game in which the player wins a role in which the RT state changes (sometimes referred to as an RT transition role) → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the stop button is accepted. Enabled → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Display the 3rd reel Operate the third stop button as a stop operation (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel moves to the expected stop position as seen from the player. (Rotation) not possible → From the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is not displayed in a stopped state, but in the determination process of step 1269, the symbol combination is determined to be normal → RT state transitions As described above It may be configured to work. By configuring this way, in a game in which an RT transition combination has been won, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and from the player's perspective, the reels will display symbols corresponding to the RT transition combination. Even if the combination is not stopped and displayed, the RT transition combination has been won by the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel , right reel), and if the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is successfully executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is accepted. Even if it is not displayed in a stopped state, the RT state will shift. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to players, and it is also possible to proceed with the game according to the transition of the gaming state that the gaming machine inherently has, thereby improving the performance of the gaming parlor. The administrator can also operate the gaming machine with peace of mind. Note that the RT transition combination is a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed in a predetermined RT state, thereby transitioning to an RT state different from the predetermined RT state. The difference may be whether or not this happens. That is, in RT state A, the predetermined combination A is an RT transition role, but in RT state B, the predetermined combination A may not be an RT transition role, and in RT state A, the predetermined combination A is an RT transition role. However, in RT state B, there may be cases where the prescribed winning combination A is not won.

<Effect 15>
The reels start rotating in a game in which the player wins a role in which the RT state changes (sometimes referred to as an RT transition role) → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the stop button is not accepted. Enabled → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Power outage occurs and power supply to the gaming machine stops → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detects power outage → Execute the power-off processing → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is not displayed stopped from the player's perspective, but step 1269 In the determination process, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal → the RT state shifts (the RT state may shift after the power is restored, or the RT state may shift before the power is restored)
It may be configured to function as described above. By configuring this way, in a game in which an RT transition combination has been won, the power-off process is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reels correspond to the RT transition combination from the player's perspective. Even if the symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, the RT transition combination has been won by the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, center reel) is If the operation of the stop button corresponding to the reel (reel, right reel) is accepted, and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is successfully executed, the symbol corresponding to the RT transition combination is The RT state will shift even if the combination is not displayed in a stopped state. With this configuration, it is possible to create a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to players, and it is also possible to proceed with the game according to the transition of gaming states that the gaming machine inherently has, and to improve the performance of the gaming parlor. The administrator can also operate the gaming machine with peace of mind.

<Effect 16>
The reels start rotating in a game in which the RT state transition role (sometimes referred to as the RT transition role) has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the stop button is pressed. Reception becomes valid → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → 3rd Operate the third stop button to stop the reels (accepts the operation of the third stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel is at the expected stop position from the player's perspective cannot be moved (rotated) until → From the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is displayed in a stopped state, but in the determination process of step 1269, the symbol combination is determined to be normal → The RT state does not transition It may be configured to function as follows. With this configuration, in a game where the RT transition combination has not been won, a reel rotation failure will occur immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and from the player's perspective, the reels will not correspond to the RT transition combination. Even if the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the RT state will not shift. With this configuration, for example, when a push order navigation is executed to prevent the player from transitioning to an RT state that is disadvantageous to the player in the AT state, the player can operate the stop button according to the push order navigation. Nevertheless, even if a symbol combination that causes the RT state to shift (falls) due to a reel rotation failure appears to be stopped, the RT state will not shift, causing unintended inconvenience to the player. To provide a game machine that does not generate profits, allows the game to proceed along the transition of the game state inherent in the game machine, and allows the manager of a game parlor to operate the game machine with peace of mind.

<Effect 17>
The reels start rotating in a game in which the RT state transition role (sometimes referred to as the RT transition role) has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the stop button is pressed. Reception becomes valid → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Power off occurs and power supply to the gaming machine stops → Operate the 3rd stop button to stop the 3rd reel (accepts operation of the 3rd stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Power off Detected → Execute power-off processing → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is displayed stopped from the player's perspective, In the determination processing in step 1269, the symbol combination is determined to be normal.→RT state does not shift.It may be configured to operate as described above. With this configuration, in a game where the RT transition winning combination has not been won, the power-off processing is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reels are changed to the RT transition winning combination from the player's perspective. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the RT state will not shift. With this configuration, for example, when a push order navigation is executed to prevent the player from transitioning to an RT state that is disadvantageous to the player in the AT state, the player can operate the stop button according to the push order navigation. Nevertheless, even if a symbol combination that causes the RT state to shift (falls) due to a reel rotation failure appears to be stopped, the RT state will not shift, causing unintended inconvenience to the player. To provide a game machine that does not generate profits, allows the game to proceed along the transition of the game state inherent in the game machine, and allows the manager of a game parlor to operate the game machine with peace of mind.

<Effect 18>
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → A reel rotation failure occurs → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → Game From the perspective of the user, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed stopped on the active line on the first and second reels → Tenpai sound is not output from the speaker.
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → A reel rotation failure occurs → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination does not stop and display on the active line on the first and second reels when viewed from the user (if the second reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the symbol combination on the first and second reels The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the active line) → Tenpai sound is output from the speaker. It may be configured to work as described above. In addition, the effect when reel rotation failure does not occur is as follows.
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → The first reel as seen from the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed in a stopped state on the active line on the second reel → Tenpai sound is output from the speaker.
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → The first reel as seen from the player The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the active line on the second reel → the tenpai sound is not output from the speaker It may be configured to work as described above.
By configuring this way, in a game where the winning combination result is a loss, a reel rotation failure will occur immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination that makes up the bonus symbol will be changed to the first stop. In other words, even if the bonus symbol reaches tenpai, if the bonus symbol stops at the scheduled stop position in this example, the tenpai sound will not be output if the bonus symbol was not scheduled to become tenpai. Therefore, even if the apparent stopping position of the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of a reel rotation failure, the player can quickly sense that the reel rotation failure has occurred based on the output from the speaker. Similarly, in a game where the winning lottery result was a loss, a reel rotation failure occurred immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combinations that constitute the bonus symbol were changed to the first stop and second stop button. Even if the bonus symbol does not reach full stop, in other words, the bonus symbol does not reach tenpai, the tenpai sound is output if the bonus symbol was scheduled to reach tenpai if the bonus symbol stops at the scheduled stop position in this example. Therefore, even if the apparent stop position of the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of defective reel rotation, the player can quickly sense that defective reel rotation has occurred through the output from the speaker.

<Effect 19>
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → 1st reel stops display → Power outage occurs and power supply to the gaming machine stops → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Detect power outage → Process in case of power outage Execution → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the active line on the first and second reels from the player's perspective → Power supply Recovery → Tenpai sound is not output from the speaker,
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → 1st reel stops display → Power outage occurs and power supply to the gaming machine stops → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Detect power outage → Process in case of power outage Execution → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination does not stop and display on the active line on the first and second reels from the player's perspective ( When the second reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination will be stopped and displayed on the active line on the first and second reels) → Power is restored → Tenpai sound will be output from the speaker. It may be configured to function as described above. In addition, the effect in the case where a power outage does not occur is as follows.
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → The first reel as seen from the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed in a stopped state on the active line on the second reel → Tenpai sound is output from the speaker.
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → The first reel as seen from the player The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the active line on the second reel → the tenpai sound is not output from the speaker It may be configured to work as described above. Note that the timing for outputting the tenpai sound from the speaker may be before the completion of the power-off processing, or after the power is restored after the power-off has occurred.
By configuring this way, in a game where the winning lottery result is a loss, the power-off processing is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination that makes up the bonus symbol is the first one. In other words, even if the bonus symbol is at tenpai, if the bonus symbol is stopped at the scheduled stop position in this example, the tenpai sound is output if the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tenpai. Even if the apparent stop position of the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of defective reel rotation, the player can quickly sense that defective reel rotation has occurred through the output from the speaker. Similarly, in a game where the winning lottery result was a loss, a reel rotation failure occurred immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combinations that constitute the bonus symbol were changed to the first stop and second stop button. Even if it did not stop as a stop, in other words, the bonus symbol did not reach tenpai, if it stopped at the scheduled stop position in this example, the tenpai sound is output if the bonus symbol was scheduled to become tenpai. Therefore, even if the apparent stop position of the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of defective reel rotation, the player can quickly sense that defective reel rotation has occurred through the output from the speaker. In addition, in this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position was exemplified, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position (when the first stop operation was executed) The reel rotation failure may occur immediately after the reel rotation occurs.

<Effect 20>
The reels start rotating as a game that is not inside the bonus and is a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The reception of the stop button is enabled → The first reel Operate the first stop button as a stop operation → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation for the second reel → A reel rotation failure occurs → The second reel reaches the expected stop position as seen from the player Unable to move (rotate) → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the active line on the first and second reels from the player's perspective → The bonus confirmation tenpai sound is not output from the speaker.
The reels start rotating when the bonus is inside or the game has won the bonus → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first reel Operate the first stop button as a stop operation → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation for the second reel → A reel rotation failure occurs → The second reel reaches the expected stop position as seen from the player Unable to move (rotate) → From the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination does not stop and display on the active line on the first and second reels (when the second reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the symbol combination The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the active line on the first reel and the second reel)→The bonus confirmation tenpai sound is output from the speaker.It may be configured to work as described above. In addition, the effect when reel rotation failure does not occur is as follows.
The reels start rotating when the bonus is inside or the game has won the bonus → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first reel Operate the first stop button as a stop operation → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation for the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → Game From the perspective of the user, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed in a stopped state on the active line on the first and second reels → The bonus confirmation tenpai sound is output from the speaker.
The reels start rotating as a game that is not inside the bonus and is a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The reception of the stop button is enabled → The first reel Operate the first stop button as a stop operation → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation for the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → Game It may be configured so that the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the active line on the first reel and the second reel when viewed from the user -> the bonus confirmation tenpai sound is not output from the speaker. In addition, the bonus confirmation ten-pai sound is the ten-pai sound that can be output from the speaker when the symbols constituting a predetermined bonus symbol are stopped and displayed (ten-pai) on the active line, and the predetermined bonus symbol can be stopped and displayed. It's a sound.
With this configuration, in a game where the winning lottery result is a loss and the bonus is not in progress, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbols forming the bonus symbol Even if the combination stops as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbols reach tenpai, if the combination stops at the scheduled stop position in this example, the bonus symbols would not be tenpai. Since the bonus confirmation tenpai sound is not output, even if the stopping position of the reels does not appear to be normal due to a reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect that the reel rotation failure has occurred due to the output from the speaker. can do.
Similarly, in a game where the winning combination result is a bonus winning combination or a game executed during a bonus, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the bonus symbol is not configured. Even if the symbol combination does not stop as the first stop and second stop, in other words, the bonus symbol does not reach tenpai, if the symbol combination stops at the scheduled stop position in this example, the bonus symbol is expected to become tenpai. In this case, the bonus confirmation tenpai sound will be output, and even if the reel's apparent stopping position is not normal due to the occurrence of a reel rotation failure, the player will be able to hear the output from the speaker. You can quickly detect what is going on. In addition, in this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position was exemplified, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position (when the first stop operation was executed) The reel rotation failure may occur immediately after the reel rotation occurs.

<Effect 21>
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → 1st reel stops display → Power outage occurs and power supply to the gaming machine stops → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Detect power outage → Process in case of power outage Execution → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the active line on the first and second reels from the player's perspective → Power supply Recovery → Tenpai sound is not output from the speaker,
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → 1st reel stops display → Power outage occurs and power supply to the gaming machine stops → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Detect power outage → Process in case of power outage Execution → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination does not stop and display on the active line on the first and second reels from the player's perspective ( When the second reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination will be stopped and displayed on the active line on the first and second reels) → Power is restored → Tenpai sound will be output from the speaker. It may be configured to function as described above. In addition, the effect in the case where a power outage does not occur is as follows.
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → The first reel as seen from the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed in a stopped state on the active line on the second reel → Tenpai sound is output from the speaker.
As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is used as the stop operation for the first reel → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → The first reel as seen from the player The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the active line on the second reel → the tenpai sound is not output from the speaker It may be configured to work as described above. Note that the timing for outputting the tenpai sound from the speaker may be before the completion of the power-off processing, or after the power is restored after the power-off has occurred.
By configuring this way, in a game where the winning lottery result is a loss, the power-off processing is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination that makes up the bonus symbol is the first one. In other words, even if the bonus symbol is at tenpai, if the bonus symbol is stopped at the scheduled stop position in this example, the tenpai sound is output if the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tenpai. Even if the stopping position of the reels does not appear to be normal due to a power outage, the player can quickly sense through the output from the speaker that an abnormality has occurred in the reels due to the power outage. Can be done. Similarly, in a game where the lottery result is a loss, the power is cut off immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combinations that make up the bonus symbol are changed to the first stop and the second stop. In other words, even if the bonus symbol did not reach tenpai, if the bonus symbol was scheduled to become tenpai when it stopped at the scheduled stop position in this example, the tenpai sound is output. Therefore, even if the apparent stopping position of the reels is not normal due to a power outage, the player can quickly detect that an abnormality has occurred in the reels due to the power outage through the output from the speaker. can. In addition, in this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position was exemplified, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position (when the first stop operation was executed) (The power-off process may be executed immediately after the power-off process is executed.)

<Effect 22>
The reels start rotating as a game that is not inside the bonus and is a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The reception of the stop button is enabled → The first reel As a stop operation, operate the first stop button → The first reel is displayed as stopped → A power outage occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine stops → As a stop operation for the second reel, operate the second stop button → Turn off the power Detection → Execute power-off processing → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The bonus combination corresponds to the active line on the first and second reels from the player's perspective The symbol combination is stopped and displayed → The bonus confirmation tenpai sound is not output from the speaker.
The reels start rotating when the bonus is inside or the game has won the bonus → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first reel As a stop operation, operate the first stop button → The first reel is displayed as stopped → A power outage occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine stops → As a stop operation for the second reel, operate the second stop button → Turn off the power Detection → Execute power-off processing → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The bonus combination corresponds to the active line on the first and second reels from the player's perspective The symbol combination does not stop and display (If the second reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination will stop and display on the active line on the first and second reels) → Bonus confirmed from the speaker It may be configured to function as described above in which the tenpai sound is output. In addition, the effect in the case where a power outage does not occur is as follows.
The reels start rotating when the bonus is inside or the game has won the bonus → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first reel Operate the first stop button as a stop operation → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation for the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → Game From the perspective of the user, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed in a stopped state on the active line on the first and second reels → The bonus confirmation tenpai sound is output from the speaker.
The reels start rotating as a game that is not inside the bonus and is a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The reception of the stop button is enabled → The first reel Operate the first stop button as a stop operation → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation for the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → Game It may be configured so that the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the active line on the first reel and the second reel when viewed from the user -> the bonus confirmation tenpai sound is not output from the speaker. In addition, the bonus confirmation ten-pai sound is the ten-pai sound that can be output from the speaker when the symbols constituting a predetermined bonus symbol are stopped and displayed (ten-pai) on the active line, and the predetermined bonus symbol can be stopped and displayed. It's a sound.
With this configuration, in a game where the winning lottery result is a loss and the bonus is not in progress, the power-off process is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the second stop button, and the bonus symbol is created. Even if the symbol combination stops as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol is at tenpai, if the symbol combination stops at the scheduled stop position in this example, the bonus symbol will not be at tenpai. will not output the bonus confirmation tenpai sound, and even if the stopping position of the reels does not appear to be normal due to a power outage, the player will be able to hear the output from the speaker indicating that there is an abnormality in the reels due to the power outage. can be detected quickly.
Similarly, in a game in which the winning combination result is a bonus winning combination or in a game executed during a bonus, the power-off process occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the bonus symbols are not displayed. Even if the constituent symbol combinations do not stop as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, the bonus symbols do not reach tenpai, the bonus symbols will become tenpai if they stop at the scheduled stopping position in this example. If it was scheduled, the bonus confirmation tenpai sound will be output, and even if the stopping position of the reels does not appear to be normal due to a power outage, the output from the speaker will alert the player to an abnormality in the reels due to a power outage. It is possible to quickly detect that something is occurring. In addition, in this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position was exemplified, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position (when the first stop operation was executed) (The power-off process may be executed immediately after the power-off process is executed.)

<Effect 23>
The number of credits is 1 or more and the reels start rotating as a game in which a predetermined replay combination has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes valid → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Display the 3rd reel to stop Operate the third stop button (accepts operation of the third stop button) → Updates reel drive state to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → Third reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player Not possible → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined replay combination does not stop and display → The max bet lamp does not light up.
The reels start rotating in a game where the number of credits is 1 or more and the replay role has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes valid → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Display the 3rd reel to stop Operate the third stop button (accepts operation of the third stop button) → Updates reel drive state to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → Third reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player It may be configured to work as described above, in which the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined replay combination is stopped and displayed and the max bet lamp is lit. In addition, the effect when reel rotation failure does not occur is as follows.
The number of credits is 1 or more and the reels start rotating as a game in which a predetermined replay combination has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes valid → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Display the 3rd reel to stop Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → The predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the role is stopped and displayed → The max bet lamp does not light up.
The reels start rotating in a game where the number of credits is 1 or more and the replay role has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes valid → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Display the 3rd reel to stop Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → The predetermined replay It may be configured so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination does not stop and display → the max bet lamp lights up.
By configuring this way, in a game where you win a replay, if a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay does not stop and display. Similarly to the case where the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay are stopped and displayed, the max bet lamp does not light up, allowing the player to quickly sense that the operation of the max bet button is not valid. In addition, in a game where you have not won a replay, if a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination that corresponds to the replay is stopped and displayed, the replay is also possible. As in the case where the symbol combinations corresponding to the game are not displayed in a stopped state, the max bet lamp lights up, allowing the player to quickly sense that the operation of the max bet button is valid.

<Effect 24>
The number of credits is 1 or more and the reels start rotating as a game in which a predetermined replay combination has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes valid → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Play the game due to a power outage Power supply to the machine stops → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → Reel drive state is updated to reel deceleration state → Power outage detected → Power off When processing is executed → the third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined replay combination does not stop and display → the max bet lamp does not light up.
The reels start rotating in a game where the number of credits is 1 or more and the replay role has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes valid → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Play the game due to a power outage Power supply to the machine stops → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → Reel drive state is updated to reel deceleration state → Power outage detected → Power off Execute processing → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-gaming combination is stopped and displayed → The max bet lamp lights up. It works as above. It may be configured to do so. In addition, the effect in the case where a power outage does not occur is as follows.
The number of credits is 1 or more and the reels start rotating as a game in which a predetermined replay combination has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes valid → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Display the 3rd reel to stop Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → The predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the role is stopped and displayed → The max bet lamp does not light up.
The reels start rotating in a game where the number of credits is 1 or more and the replay role has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes valid → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Display the 3rd reel to stop Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → The predetermined replay It may be configured so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination does not stop and display → the max bet lamp lights up.
By configuring this way, in a game in which a replay has been won, the power-off processing is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not stopped and displayed. Similarly to the case where the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay are stopped and displayed, the max bet lamp does not light up, so that the player can quickly sense that the operation of the max bet button is not valid. In addition, in a game that has not been won for replay, if the power-off process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to replay is stopped and displayed, As in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to replay is not displayed in a stopped state, the max bet lamp lights up, allowing the player to quickly sense that the operation of the max bet button is valid.

<Effect 25>
This is a game in which a bonus is being executed, a winning combination is won, and the bonus termination conditions are satisfied by the player being awarded gaming medals corresponding to the winning of the winning combination. Rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → First reel is stopped by operating the first stop button → First reel stops Display → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → Display that the second reel is stopped → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → Reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The symbol combination corresponding to the entered winning combination does not stop and display → The bonus ends, It may also be configured to function as described above in which the freeze is executed at the end of the bonus. In addition, the effect when reel rotation failure does not occur is as follows.
This is a game in which a bonus is being executed, a winning combination is won, and the bonus termination conditions are satisfied by the player being awarded gaming medals corresponding to the winning of the winning combination. Rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → First reel is stopped by operating the first stop button → First reel stops Display → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → Display that the second reel is stopped → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → Reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → the third reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the entered winning combination is stopped and displayed → the bonus ends, and a freeze is executed at the end of the bonus It may be configured to function as described above.
With this configuration, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after winning a winning combination in the final bonus game and accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination does not stop and display. Even in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed, when the bonus ends, the freeze at the end of the bonus is executed, so that the player can immediately know that the bonus has ended normally. It is possible to provide a game machine that can sense the progress of the game and does not make people feel uncomfortable about the progress of the game.

<Effect 26>
This is a game in which a bonus is being executed, a winning combination is won, and the bonus termination conditions are satisfied by the player being awarded gaming medals corresponding to the winning of the winning combination. Rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → First reel is stopped by operating the first stop button → First reel stops Display → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → Display that the second reel is stopped → Power outage occurs and power supply to the gaming machine stops → Press the third stop button to stop the third reel (Accepts operation of the third stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detects power outage → Executes power outage processing → The third reel moves to the expected stop position as seen from the player ( Rotation) is not possible → The symbol combination corresponding to the entered winning combination is not stopped and displayed → The bonus ends and a freeze is executed at the end of the bonus It may be configured to work as described above. In addition, the effect in the case where a power outage does not occur is as follows.
This is a game in which a bonus is being executed, a winning combination is won, and the bonus termination conditions are satisfied by the player being awarded gaming medals corresponding to the winning of the winning combination. Rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → First reel is stopped by operating the first stop button → First reel stops Display → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → Display that the second reel is stopped → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → Reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → the third reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the entered winning combination is stopped and displayed → the bonus ends, and a freeze is executed at the end of the bonus It may be configured to function as described above.
With this configuration, immediately after winning the winning combination in the final bonus game and accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, the power-off process is executed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. Even in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed, the bonus ends and the freeze at the end of the bonus is executed, allowing the player to know that the bonus has ended normally. It is possible to provide a game machine that can be detected quickly and that does not make people feel uncomfortable about the progress of the game.

In addition, from the configuration regarding the reel acceleration process in the reel type gaming machine according to the present example described above,
Execution period of reel acceleration processing when no defective drum rotation occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing = A
If a rotation failure occurs during execution of the reel acceleration process, the execution period of the reel acceleration process until the rotation failure occurs = B
Execution period of the reel acceleration process after the rotation failure occurs when the rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process=C
If
A=B+C
It is configured so that
Also,
Number of executions of interrupt processing for reel acceleration processing when no defective drum rotation occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing = D
When a reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing, the number of times the reel acceleration processing interrupt processing is executed until the reel rotation failure occurs = E
When a reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing, the number of times the reel acceleration processing interrupt processing is executed after the reel rotation failure occurs = F
If
D=E+F
It is configured so that

Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of power-off processing related to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. First, in step 1901, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes output port clearing processing. By executing the process of step 1901, if the power-off process is executed while the hopper H40 is being driven (while paying out game medals), the hopper H40 will no longer be driven and the blocker D100 will be on. When the power-off process is executed, the blocker D100 is turned off. Next, in step 1902, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M saves the stack pointer. Next, in step 1904, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns on the power-off processing completed flag (for example, updates the power-off processing completed flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 1906, the CPU 100 of the main control board M calculates a checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area, and calculates error detection information based on the calculated checksum (for example, The lower 1 byte of the checksum or its complement) is set in the checksum area. Next, in step 1912, the CPU 100 of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM, and proceeds to step 1914. Next, in step 1914, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process for waiting for reset.

Next, FIG. 37 shows an example of an image diagram of the push order display of the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. The table in the figure shows the reel stop order and instruction number indicated by the executed push order navigation (information related to the push order; in this example, the main control board M determines it and sends it to the sub control board S) This is a table showing the correspondence. For example, when the pressing order is "middle→right→left", the instruction number is "A5". Next, on the left side of the figure, when the push order is "left → middle → right" (the corresponding instruction number is "A1"), the push order display device D270, the advantageous section display YH, and the effect display device S40 The image shown is shown in the figure. Here, the push order display device D270 of this example has a 7-segment display system and also serves as a payout number display device. Further, when the medals are paid out, the number of medals paid out is displayed as a two-digit number on the press order display device D270. Here, when executing the push order navigation, if the display on the push order display device D270 is displayed as a 2-digit number, the display on the push order display device D270 may be the number of medals to be paid out or the push order. It becomes difficult to determine whether it is a navigation display or not. Therefore, in order to distinguish between the number of medals to be paid out and the push order navigation display, the push order display device D270 displays "=" in the left digit, such as "=1". By configuring this, when the display on the push order display device D270 is a two-digit number, it is a display of the number of medals to be paid out, and the display on the push order display device D270 is "=" on the left side and a number on the right side. If there is, it is configured to be able to determine that it is a push order navigation display, so as to prevent the player from misperceiving it. Further, in the advantageous section display YH provided at the lower right of the push order display device D270, a lamp indicating that the current game section is the "advantageous section" is lit. At the same time, a display of "40 games remaining" indicating the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" (or "AT state") is displayed on the effect display device S40. In addition, the right side of the figure shows an image displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 when the push order is "middle → left → right" (the corresponding instruction number is "A3"). There is. In addition, since the current game section is an "advantageous section," the advantageous section display YH lights up, and a display of "25 games remaining" indicating the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" is displayed on the effect display device S40. is displayed. Furthermore, among the conditional devices in which the winnings that are stopped and displayed differ depending on the reel stop order, there are conditional devices that involve payout of medals, such as a bell, and replayable combinations that have the push order (depending on the reel stop order). Among the conditional devices with different winnings to be stopped and displayed, the segment display of the instruction number of the conditional device related to the replayed winning combination may be different, and the display method of the push order display device D270 is limited to 7 segments. Instead, for example, an LED display may be used to issue instructions by lighting a plurality of LEDs according to a lighting pattern corresponding to the instruction number. Note that an advantageous section display YH may be provided at the lower right portion of the credit number display device D200. In this case, it is preferable that the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on until the operation of the settlement button D60 becomes valid. When the player stops playing, he or she visually checks the credit number display device D200 to check whether there are any medals left. If there are medals remaining, the payment button D60 is operated. In other words, by lighting up the payment button D60 before it becomes effective, it is possible to prevent the user from accidentally quitting the game even though it is an "advantageous period" from the next game. be able to.

Furthermore, the notification mode of the game section on the advantageous section display YH is not limited to this example, and a section display similar to the advantageous section display YH is provided at the lower right of both of the two 7 segments (the section display In such a configuration, when the left section indicator lights up, it will notify that the current gaming section is the "normal section", and on the other hand, the right section When the section indicator lights up, it may be configured to notify that the current game section is an "advantageous section." In addition, "normal sections" and "advantageous sections" are distinguished by the color and lighting mode of the section indicator (for example, "normal sections" are marked "green" and "advantageous sections" are marked "red"). Alternatively, the light may be turned on during the "normal section" and "flashing" during the "advantageous section"). Furthermore, the display mode of the section display is configured to change depending on "BB internal game during AT", "BB state during AT", "AT precursor state", "state during AT", etc. in the "advantageous section". You can. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the fact that the current gaming section is a "standby section" can be recognized separately from the "normal section" and the "advantageous section." However, the distinction between the "normal section" and the "advantageous section" will be made easy to distinguish, such as by using different section indicators, so that the player can recognize whether the current gaming section is the "advantageous section" or not. It is preferable to make it easier.

Furthermore, regarding the display on the effect display device S40 that indicates the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section", for example, in the "AT precursor state" or "AT preparation", the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" is not displayed. (In a state where the player has a relatively low profit, the player may not be notified of the disadvantage that the remaining number of games in the "advantageous section" is being subtracted.) However, even with this configuration, it is preferable to turn on the zone indicator to inform the player that the game is in the "advantageous zone." At the same time, it is preferable that the section indicator be configured to be controlled by the main control board M side, and that the section indicator be installed at a position where the display is easily visible to the player.

Next, the control processing executed on the sub-control board S side will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 57.

<Sub-side program start processing>
First, FIG. 38 is a subroutine showing sub-side program start processing. This sub-side program start process is called and executed when the power is turned on.

First, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub control board S disables interrupts. Next, in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes various initialization processes such as initializing the CPU and RAM and calculating a checksum.

Next, in step 2008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the checksum value calculated at power-on matches the checksum value calculated and stored at power-off. If Yes in step 2008, in other words, if it is determined in the determination process in step 2008 that both checksum values match, in step 2010, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the 1-command process to be described later. It is determined whether the state has been recovered from the state in which the power supply was interrupted, that is, whether the state has been completely recovered.

If Yes in step 2010, in other words, if it is determined that a complete recovery has occurred, then in step 2012, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S allows interrupts and is executed when the power is turned off. Return processing to 1 command processing.

On the other hand, if No in step 2008, in other words, if it is determined in the judgment process in step 2008 that the two checksum values do not match, in step 2014 CPUSC of the sub control board S clears the RAM. Execute. Note that after executing the process in step 2014, or in the case of No in step 2010, the process shifts to sub-main loop process.

<Submain loop processing>
Next, FIG. 39 is a subroutine showing sub-main loop processing. The sub-main loop process is called and executed after the sub-side program start process shown in FIG. 38 is executed.

First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts operating the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub control board S allows an interrupt. Next, in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes command reception processing. This command reception process is a process of receiving various commands transmitted from the main control board M.

Next, in step 2250, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes one-command processing, which will be described later. This one-command process is a process executed based on a control command from the main control board M. Specific processing will be described later. In step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a predetermined period of time, for example 16 ms, has elapsed, and if it is determined that it has not elapsed, the process returns to step 2108. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process returns to step 2102. Note that the predetermined time is not limited to 16 ms, and can be changed as appropriate depending on the process.

<Sub-side power-off processing>
Next, FIG. 40 is a subroutine showing sub-side power-off processing executed on the sub-control board S side. The sub-side power-off process is a process that is started when the sub-control board S detects a power-off.

First, in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the watchdog timer. In step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the sub-side program start process is being executed. If YES in step 2204, the process moves to step 2210. On the other hand, if No in step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calculates a checksum in step 2206. Next, in step 2208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S saves various data (checksum calculation results, the address of the program being executed, etc.), and proceeds to step 2210.

Next, in step 2210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether 500 ms have elapsed. Here, when it is determined that 500 ms has elapsed, the power-off process is ended. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2210, in step 2212, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the power has been restored. If Yes in step 2212, in step 2214, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S updates the number of instantaneous power outages. Next, in step 2216, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts operating the watchdog timer and returns to the process that was being executed when the power was turned off. If it is determined in step 2212 that the power has not been restored, the process returns to step 2210 described above.

<1 command processing>
Next, FIG. 41 is a subroutine showing one-command processing that is called and executed in the process of step 2250 in FIG. 39.

Next, in step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is time to operate the start lever. In the case of No in step 2252, in other words, when it is determined that it is the timing to operate the start lever, in step 3000, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes the subroutine of the production-related determination process when operating the start lever, which will be described later. do. Next, in step 2300, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a start lever operation process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2252, in other words, if it is not the timing to operate the start lever, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2254 whether or not it is the timing to accept the first reel stop. If No in step 2254, in other words, if it is the first reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2500, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes the subroutine of the process when the first reel stop is accepted, which will be described later. Then, the process moves to step 7100.

Next, if Yes in step 2254, in other words, if it is not the first reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2258, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is the second reel stop acceptance timing. . If No in step 2258, in other words, if it is the second reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2550, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes the subroutine of the second reel stop acceptance process, which will be described later. Then, the process moves to step 7100.

Next, if Yes in step 2258, in other words, if it is not the second reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2262, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is the third reel stop acceptance timing. . If No in step 2262, in other words, if it is the third reel stop acceptance timing, in step 3200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls a subroutine for the third reel stop effect related determination process, which will be described later. and execute it. Next, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a third drum stop acceptance process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2262, in other words, if it is not the third reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2266, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the stop timing of the stop display symbol. . If Yes in step 2266, in other words, if it is the stop timing of the stop display symbol, in step 2268, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a process (not shown) at the time of stop display symbol, and in step 7100 to move to. On the other hand, if No in step 2266, in other words, if it is not the stop timing of the stop display symbol, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S immediately moves to step 7100.

Next, in step 7100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a menu screen display control process to be described later. Next, in step 7200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a standby screen display control process to be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, FIG. 42 is a subroutine showing a process for determining performance related to start lever operation, which is called and executed in the process of step 3000 in FIG. 41. First, in step 3002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the state related to the AT of the game is a "high probability state." If Yes in step 3002, in step 3004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the number of high-security failure games remaining at the moment (high-probability state How many more games are guaranteed? Next, in step 3050, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine for deciding whether or not to execute a battle effect, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 3006. Next, in step 3006, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether it has been determined that a battle effect will be executed in the game. If Yes in step 3006, in step 3008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is configured based on the current stay stage, the AT-related state of the game, the AT-related state of the next game, and the current number of high secured obstacle games. Based on this, a stay stage transition lottery (a lottery to decide whether or not to change the stay stage) is executed with reference to the stay stage determination table (see FIG. 44), and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2300). Note that even in the case of No in step 3006, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3002, in step 3010, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the state related to the AT of the game is a "low probability state". If Yes in step 3010, in step 3012, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S uses the stay stage determination table (see FIG. ), a stay stage transition lottery is executed, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3010, in step 3014, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the state related to AT of the game is "AT in progress". In the case of Yes in step 3014, in step 3100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of an AT performance determination process, which will be described later, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3014, in step 3016, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT of the game is the "resurrection possibility state". In the case of Yes in step 3016, in step 3150, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of a restoration propriety effect determination process, which will be described later, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3016, in step 3018, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the preview performance and the stay stage based on the current stay stage, the state regarding the AT of the game, and the state regarding the AT of the next game. It is determined, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2300). It should be noted that the stay stage is an effect mainly consisting of a background effect displayed on the effect display device S40, and is configured such that one of the stay stages is always set. Note that if the stay stage is different, the tendencies of various effects such as background effects, preview effects, etc. will be different.

Next, FIG. 43 is a subroutine showing a process for determining whether or not to execute a battle effect, which is called and executed in the process of step 3050 in FIG. 42. First, in step 3052, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the number of high guaranteed obstacle games is 4 or more. In the case of Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a BB combination. If Yes in step 3054, CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether to execute a battle performance execution lottery (battle performance (win)) that has a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/2) of winning. (lottery) will be held. Next, in step 3058, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the battle performance execution possibility lottery executed in step 3056 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3058, in step 3060, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be a battle effect (win), and moves to the next process (the process in step 3006). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3058, in step 3062, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be an effect other than the battle effect, and moves to the next process (the process in step 3006). Here, the battle performance is a continuous performance that is performed over multiple games, and by winning the battle performance, that is, by executing the battle performance (victory), you can win the BB role and enter the AT lottery. It is structured so that it is certain that you have won. The configuration regarding battle production is not limited to this, but if the player wins the BB role even if he or she does not win the AT lottery (after the BB ends, the player will move to a "low probability state" or "high probability state") ) may be configured to perform a battle performance (victory).

Further, in the case of No in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a rare combination. Here, in this example, the rare roles are Winning-C (Cherry), Winning-D (Watermelon A), and Winning-E (Watermelon B), and these are the winning hands that can overlap with the BB winning combination. It has become. That is, the player has a sense of expectation that the rare winning combination has been won at the same time as the BB winning combination because the rare winning combination is stopped and displayed.If Yes in step 3064, in step 3066, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is , a lottery to determine whether or not to execute a fake battle performance (a lottery to determine whether or not to perform a battle performance (defeat)) with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/3, which is a lower probability than the predetermined probability in step 3056). ). Next, in step 3068, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the fake battle effect execution possibility lottery executed in step 3066 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3068, in step 3070, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect of the game to be a battle effect (defeat), and moves to the next process (the process of step 3006). Further, in the case of No in step 3052, step 3064, or step 3068, in step 3072, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be an effect other than the battle effect, and performs the next process (the process in step 3006). ). Here, the battle effect (defeat) may be configured to be performed even in the "normal section".

In this way, when the number of high-guarantee obstacle games is a predetermined number or more, for example, when it is 4 or more, it is possible to execute a continuous performance such as a battle performance over multiple games, while the number of high-guarantee obstacle games is a predetermined number or more. If the number is less than a number, for example, if it is less than 4, the system is configured so that continuous effects such as battle effects will not be executed, so even if the continuous effect is in the middle of execution, it will go to the "low probability state" The battle production can be performed only if it is possible to prevent the advantageous section indicator YH from going out due to the transition (setting the "normal section") and ensure that the advantageous section indicator YH remains lit until the battle production ends. By implementing this, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine without damaging the player's expectation of winning the BB.

In addition, when winning a rare role, the system is configured so that continuous effects such as battle effects (defeat) can be performed, so the frequency of battle effects can be guaranteed and the game can always be played with a sense of anticipation. Can be done.

Next, FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table. Note that only a portion of the stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 is extracted. The stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 is a table used when the game is in a "low probability state" and a table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of high secured obstacle games is 4 or more. There are three types of tables: a table, and a table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of high guaranteed obstacle games is 3 or less.

The stay stage determination table used when the game is in a "low probability state" shows the relationship between the current stay stage, the AT-related state of the next game, the stay stage of the current corpse game, and the corresponding set number. stipulated. If it is in a "low probability state", the current stay stage consists of two types of production stages: a desert stage and a town stage, and the transition stages are a desert stage, a town stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage. It consists of four types of production stages. There are three states regarding the AT of the next game: "low probability state", "normal BB internal medium game", and "high probability state".

If the current stay stage is a desert stage and the next game moves to "low probability state" or "normal BB internal medium game", a number from 0 to 979 is assigned as the number if the desert stage is maintained in the game. ing. In addition, if the current stay stage is a desert stage and the next game is to transition to a "low probability state" or "normal BB internal medium game", the number to be set when transitioning from the desert stage to the town stage in that game is 980 ~ 999 is assigned.

Furthermore, if the current stage of stay is a town stage and the next game is to shift to "low probability state" or "normal BB internal medium game", the number to be set when moving from the town stage to the desert stage in that game is 0~ 19 has been assigned. If the current stay stage is the town stage and the next game moves to "low probability state" or "normal BB internal medium game", a number between 20 and 999 is assigned as the number if the town stage is maintained in the game. ing.

Further, when the current stage of stay is a desert stage and the next game is to shift to a "high probability state", a number from 0 to 249 is assigned as a number when the desert stage is maintained in the game. If the current stage of stay is a desert stage and the next game is to transition to a "high probability state", 250 to 499 are assigned as numbers for transitioning from the desert stage to the town stage in the game. When the current stage of stay is the desert stage and the next game is to shift to the "high probability state", 500 to 749 are assigned as the numbers for shifting from the desert stage to the conference room stage in that game. When the current stay stage is a desert stage and the next game is to transition to a "high probability state", 750 to 999 is assigned as a number for transitioning from the desert stage to the cave stage in the game.

If the current stage of stay is a town stage and the next game is to transition to a "high probability state", a number from 0 to 249 is assigned as a number when the game shifts from the town stage to the desert stage. 250 to 499 are assigned as numbers when the current stay stage is a town stage and the town stage is maintained in the next game when the town stage is maintained. If the current stage of stay is the town stage and the next game is to shift to the "high probability state", 500 to 749 is assigned as the number for shifting from the town stage to the conference room stage in that game. If the current stage of stay is the town stage and the next game is to transition to the "high probability state", a number from 750 to 999 is assigned as the number for transitioning from the town stage to the cave stage in the game.

In the stay stage determination table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of high guaranteed obstacle games is 4 or more, the relationship between the current stay stage, the stay stage of the current skeleton game, and the number of placements is specified. has been done. The current stay stage and transition stage are comprised of four types of production stages: a desert stage, a town stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage.

If the current stage of stay is a desert stage and the desert stage is maintained in the game, a number from 0 to 879 is assigned. 880 to 929 are assigned as numbers when the current stay stage is a desert stage and the game shifts from the desert stage to the town stage. 930 to 959 are assigned as numbers when the current stay stage is a desert stage and the game shifts from the desert stage to the conference room stage. 960 to 999 are assigned as numbers when the current stay stage is a desert stage and the game shifts from the desert stage to the cave stage.

0 to 879 are assigned as numbers when the current stay stage is a town stage and the game shifts from the town stage to the desert stage. If the current stay stage is a town stage and the town stage is maintained in the game, 880 to 929 are assigned as numbers. 930 to 959 are assigned as numbers when the current stay stage is the town stage and the game shifts from the town stage to the conference room stage. 960 to 999 are assigned as numbers when the current stay stage is a town stage and the game shifts from the town stage to the cave stage.

The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 0 to 49 are assigned as numbers when the game shifts from the conference room stage to the desert stage. If the current stage of stay is the conference room stage and the game shifts from the conference room stage to the town stage, 50 to 99 are assigned as numbers. If the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the conference room stage is maintained in the game, 100 to 949 are assigned as numbers. If the current stage of stay is the conference room stage and the game shifts from the conference room stage to the cave stage, 950 to 999 are assigned as numbers.

If the current stage of stay is a cave stage and the game shifts from the cave stage to the desert stage, 0 to 49 are assigned as numbers. If the current stage of stay is a cave stage and the game shifts from the cave stage to the town stage, 50 to 99 are assigned as numbers. 100 to 199 are assigned as numbers when the current stay stage is a cave stage and the game shifts from the cave stage to the conference room stage. If the current stay stage is a cave stage and the cave stage is maintained in the game, a number from 200 to 999 is assigned.

The stay stage determination table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of high guaranteed obstacle games is 3 or less, the current stay stage, the AT-related state of the next game, and the stay stage of the current corpse game. , the relationship with the position number is specified. The current stay stage and transition stage are comprised of four types of production stages: a desert stage, a town stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage. There are three states regarding the AT of the next game: "high probability state", "advantageous BB internal medium game", and "low probability state".

If the current stay stage is a desert stage and the next game moves to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", a number from 0 to 979 is assigned as the number if the desert stage is maintained in the game. ing. If the current stay stage is a desert stage and the next game is to move to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number to be set when moving from the desert stage to the city stage in the game is 980 to 999. Assigned.

If the current stay stage is a town stage and the next game is to move to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number 0 to 19 is set when moving from the town stage to the desert stage in that game. Assigned. If the current stay stage is the town stage and the next game moves to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", a number from 20 to 999 is assigned as the number if the town stage is maintained in the game. ing.

If the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game is to move to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number to be set is 0 to 0 when the game shifts from the conference room stage to the desert stage. 29 has been assigned. If the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game is to transition to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number to be set when transitioning from the conference room stage to the town stage in that game is 30 ~ 59 has been assigned. If the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game moves to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal game", the number to be set is 60 to 999 if the conference room stage is maintained in the game. Assigned.

If the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game is to move to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number 0 to 29 is set when moving from the cave stage to the desert stage in the game. Assigned. If the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game is to move to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number to be set when moving from the cave stage to the town stage in that game is 30 to 59. Assigned. If the current stay stage is the cave stage and the next game is to move to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number to be set when moving from the cave stage to the conference room stage in that game is 60 to 99. is assigned. If the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game moves to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", a number of 100 to 999 is assigned as the number if the cave stage is maintained in the game. ing.

If the current stage of stay is a desert stage and the next game is to shift to a "low probability state", a number from 0 to 499 is assigned as a number if the desert stage is maintained in the game. If the current stage of stay is a desert stage and the next game is to transition to a "low probability state", a number from 500 to 999 is assigned as the number for transitioning from the desert stage to the city stage in the game.

If the current stage of stay is a town stage and the next game is to transition to a "low probability state", a number from 0 to 499 is assigned as a number for transitioning from the town stage to the desert stage in that game. 500 to 999 are assigned as numbers when the current stay stage is a town stage and the town stage is maintained in the next game when the town stage is maintained.

If the current stage of stay is the conference room stage and the next game is to transition to the "low probability state", a number from 0 to 499 is assigned as a number for transitioning from the conference room stage to the desert stage in the game. If the current stage of stay is the conference room stage and the next game is to transition to the "low probability state", 500 to 999 is assigned as a number for transitioning from the conference room stage to the town stage in the game.

If the current stage of stay is a cave stage and the next game is to transition to a "low probability state", a number from 0 to 499 is assigned as a number for transitioning from the cave stage to the desert stage in the game. If the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game is to transition to a low probability state, a number from 500 to 999 is assigned as the number for transitioning from the cave stage to the town stage in the game.

In this way, when the state is in the "low probability state", two stages, the desert stage or the city stage, can be selected (step 3012 in FIG. 42). On the other hand, when the state is in the "high probability state", four stages can be selected: a desert stage, a town stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage (step 3008 in FIG. 42). In other words, four stay stages can be selected in the "advantageous section", while two stay stages can be selected in the "normal section", and two stay stages can be selected in the "normal section". Stay stage 2 can also be selected in the "advantageous section". With this configuration, even in the "normal section" where there is no hope of winning the AT lottery, by selecting a stay stage that can be a stay stage in the "advantageous section", the player will not get bored even in the "normal section". You can advance the game machine. In addition, when transitioning from a "high probability state" to a "low probability state", that is, when changing from an "advantageous section" to a "normal section", the "normal section" is selected at the "advantageous section" stage. By selecting the production stage in advance, it is difficult for the player to discern the transition from the "advantageous section" to the "normal section" and it is possible to maintain a sense of anticipation and continue playing the game.

Note that some of the production stages selected in the "normal section" overlap with the production stages selected in the "advantageous section" (some production stages that can be selected in the "normal section" but are not selected in the "advantageous section") may have).

In addition, the stay stage determination table used when the number of high guaranteed obstacle games is 4 or more is different from the stay stage determination table used when the number of high guaranteed obstacle games is 3 or less, and the number of high guaranteed obstacle games is changed. If the number of games decreases (less than 3 games), avoid moving to a highly anticipated stay stage that is an "advantageous section" than the current stay stage (for example, desert stage → conference room stage). By configuring this structure, it is possible to prevent players from becoming disappointed due to being stuck in a "normal section" with a small number of games even though they have moved to a stay stage with higher expectations. The stay stages are arranged in the order of ``desert stage, city stage, cave stage, and conference room stage'' from the ``advantageous section'' with low expectations (hard to be selected in the ``advantageous section'').

The structure of the stay stage is not limited to this example, and what can be suggested by the stay stage is the expectation level of the "advantageous section", the expectation level of winning the AT lottery, and the expectation level of winning the BB. It may be configured to indicate the level of expectation. As an example, the stay stage can be changed in a game where the BB role or the rare role is won (when the AT lottery is won by the BB role, and when the AT lottery is not executed after winning a single rare role). ), the level of expectation of winning the AT lottery differs depending on the stage of stay to which the player has transitioned, and the level of expectation is arranged in the order of ``desert stage, city stage, cave stage, conference room stage'' in descending order of expectation level. Alternatively, the level of expectation for winning the BB role can be configured to differ depending on the stage of stay, and the level of expectation can be arranged in descending order of ``Desert Stage, City Stage, Cave Stage, and Conference Room Stage.'' Good (for example, when moving to the conference room stage, it is certain that the BB internal lottery has been won or the AT lottery has been won, etc.).

Next, FIG. 45 is a subroutine showing an AT effect determination process that is called and executed in the process of step 3100 in FIG. 42. First, in step 3102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the number of remaining AT games is 3 or less. If YES in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the final AT game. In the case of Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the continuous lottery has been won. If Yes in step 3106, in step 3108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs AT continuation of the production related to the game (success) (AT continues and the initial value is set in the AT counter M60, in other words Then, a production that notifies that the state related to AT in the next game will be "AT in progress") or a production that encourages AT continuation (failure) (It is certain that AT continues and the initial value is set in the AT counter M60) Instead, it is determined that the next game's AT-related state will be an "AT in progress state" or a "resurrection possibility state", and the process moves to step 3126. Here, if the continuation lottery is won, the AT continuation provocation performance (success) versus the AT continuation provocation performance (failure) is determined at a ratio of 4:1. That is, in the first embodiment, even if the continuous lottery is won, the AT continuous incitement effect (failure) may be executed, and in such a case, the first game of the next set will be played. In the corresponding next game, a revival effect (success) will be executed, and the player is configured to feel as if he or she has won the revival lottery (in reality, he has won the continuation lottery, and the main control board The control on the M side is the same as when the AT continuation incitement effect (success) is executed). With this configuration, although it is rare to win the resurrection lottery in the "resurrection availability state" {2320/65536 lottery wins in one game (in case of setting 1)}, it is possible to win the continuation performance. By configuring the system so that the resurrection effect (success) can be executed even when the resurrection effect is executed, it is possible to increase the rate of execution of the resurrection effect (success) when the resurrection effect is executed, and the player can expect more from the resurrection effect. It can enhance the feeling.

If the result in step 3106 is No, in step 3110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect of the game to be an AT continuation promotion effect (failure), and proceeds to step 3126. If the result in step 3104 is No, in step 3112 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect of the game to be the AT final effect, and proceeds to step 3126. Further, in the case of No in step 3102, in step 3114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not this is the next game in which the AT continuation promotion effect (failure) was executed. If Yes in step 3114, in step 3116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the effect related to the game as a revival effect (success) (same as the resurrection effect (success) executed in the "revival possibility effect state"). In this process, it is determined that the effect is the effect that the "AT state" has continued, and the process moves to step 3126. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 3114, the process moves to step 3126.

Next, in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of AT games has been added to the game. If Yes in step 3126, in step 3028, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S adds an additional effect related to the game (an effect notifying that the number of remaining AT games has been added, for example, "+50 GET", etc.) ) and moves to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the performance related to the game to be a performance during AT (a performance executed during AT such as "AT state"), and performs the next process ( The process moves to step 2300 (processing in step 2300).

Next, FIG. 46 is a subroutine illustrating a process for determining whether or not a revival is possible, which is called and executed in the process of step 3150 in FIG. First, in step 3152, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the revival lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3152, in step 3154, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S restores the performance related to the game (success) (successfully) (the same performance mode as the performance executed in step 3116 described above), This is a performance that notifies you that you have won the resurrection lottery in the "resurrection possibility state", and in the next game, it will transition to the "AT state" and the initial value will be set in the AT counter M60). It is determined, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3152, in step 3156, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the performance related to the game to a revival performance (failed) (in the "resurrection possibility state", the CPUSC did not win the revival lottery) This is an effect that notifies the user that the game will be moved to a "low probability state" in the next game), and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2300).

In addition, as mentioned above, the "resurrection possibility state" is also an advantageous section, that is, the continuation lottery is won in the AT final game (the final game of the "AT middle state") which is the "advantageous section". Even if it is not, the "advantageous section" is configured to be extended in the next game, the "resurrection possibility state", so the player should check whether the advantageous section indicator YH is lit or not. If only this is done, it will be difficult to determine whether or not the resurrection performance will be successful, and attention will be paid to the result of the resurrection performance. Furthermore, as described above, the manner in which the AT-related lottery is executed is different between the "AT in progress state" and the "restoration possibility state". In other words, the manner in which the AT-related lottery is executed will be different between the next game in which the player wins the continuous lottery in which a revival effect (success) is executed and the game in which the player wins in the revival lottery in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed. .

In the first embodiment, in the next game after the AT state ends, the system shifts to the "resurrection possibility production state" for one game, and the revival lottery is executed in the "resurrection possibility production state". By configuring this, both the execution game of the revival effect (success) and the execution game of the revival effect (failure) are in the "advantageous section", that is, by configuring the advantageous section indicator YH to light up, the effect In this embodiment, it is possible to prevent it from being possible to determine whether or not AT ends without checking the result of , but such a configuration may be configured as follows.
(1) The AT-related state is set to "AT in progress" even in one game in which a revival lottery is executed, the revival flag is turned on in one game in which a revival lottery is executed, and the resurrection flag is turned on in the game before the revival lottery is executed. By turning off the flag, a different lottery mode regarding AT is obtained.
(2) It is configured so that the revival lottery is not executed, and the control on the main control board M side is configured so that whether or not the "AT state" ends is determined solely by whether or not the player wins the continuation lottery, and The execution timing of the continuous lottery is set to a game before the final AT game (one game before the final AT game, the first game of the set being executed, etc.). With such a configuration, a revival effect (success) and a revival effect (failure) can be executed as effects on the sub-control board S side in the AT final game. Examples of productions include "The game before the final AT game: Production to incite AT continuation (successful) → Final game at AT: Production to indicate that the next set of AT will start", "The game before the final AT game: Production to incite AT continuation" Production (continues to next game) → AT final game: AT continuation promotion production (success)", "Previous game of AT final game: AT continuation promotion production (failure) → AT final game: revival production (success)", "AT It may be configured such that the previous game before the final game: AT continuation promotion effect (failure) → AT final game: revival effect (failure), etc. are executed. That is, the main control board M side determines whether or not the "AT state" continues (the next set is executed) depending on whether or not the continuation lottery is won. It may also be configured to perform an AT continuation inciting performance or a revival performance.
(3) In a game where a resurrection effect (success) is executed, the effect is executed in the same manner as the resurrection effect (failure) until a predetermined timing, and from that predetermined timing, the resurrection effect (success) is announced. In other words, it may be configured to notify the player that AT will continue at the predetermined timing. In the case of such a configuration, the predetermined timing is as follows:
(1) This is the bet button operation timing (gaming medal insertion timing) related to the game where the revival effect (success) is executed, and it can be executed if the successive lottery is won.
(2) This is the start lever operation timing for the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, and when the start lever operation timing is reached, the effect that has the same effect as the resurrection effect (defeat) will not be executed;
(3) The timing of pressing the stop button that becomes the first stop for the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed (timing that the first stop is turned on),
(4) Timing of releasing the stop button after pressing the stop button which is the first stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed (timing of first stop turning on → off),
(5) Timing of pressing the stop button which is the second stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed (timing when the second stop is turned on);
(6) Timing when the stop button is pressed and released after pressing the stop button, which is the second stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed (timing when the second stop turns from on to off);
(7) Timing of pressing the stop button which is the third stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed (timing of turning on the third stop),
(8) Timing when the stop button is pressed and released after pressing the stop button, which is the third stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed (timing when the third stop turns from on to off);
etc., or
(9) bet button operation timing (gaming medal insertion timing) for the game following the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed;
(10) Start lever operation timing for the next game after the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed;
etc. In addition, if the configuration is such that the timing is determined by lottery among the various timings as in (1) to (10) above, after the timing when the stop button that is the first stop is pressed, , even if the player has not won either the continuation lottery or the revival lottery, the advantageous section indicator YH continues to light up, so the player presses the stop button which is the third stop, and then presses the stop button. The player can play the game with a sense of expectation that the AT will continue until the timing when the player releases the key or the timing when the start lever is operated for the next game after the game in which the revival effect is executed.

<Processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 47 is a subroutine showing a process when the start lever is operated, which is called and executed in the process of step 2300 in FIG.

Next, in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the AT-related state is the AT-in-progress state. If Yes in step 2302, in other words, if the AT-related state is in the AT state, in step 2350, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads and executes the AT-in-progress process when the start lever is operated, which will be described later. , to proceed to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, if No in step 2302, in other words, if the AT-related state is not the AT-in-progress state, in step 2304, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the AT-related state is a specialization precursor state or not. Determine whether If Yes in step 2304, in other words, if the AT-related state is a specialization precursor state, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out specialization precursor processing when operating the start lever, which will be described later. The process is executed and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2304, in other words, if the state related to AT is not the "specialization precursor state", in step 2306, CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the state related to AT is "additional specialization state". ”. If Yes in step 2306, in other words, if the state related to AT is "additional specialization state", in step 2450, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs additional specialization processing when operating the start lever, which will be described later. It is read and executed, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2306, in other words, if the state related to AT is not "additional specialization state", in step 2307, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the state related to AT is "advantageous BB internal It is determined whether or not it is a game. If Yes in step 2307, in other words, if the state related to AT is "advantageous BB internal medium game", in step 2700, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the subroutine of advantageous BB internal medium processing when the start lever is operated. is called and executed, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2110).

If No in step 2307, in other words, if the state related to AT is not "advantageous BB internal medium game", in step 2308 CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the RT state is "RT1" or not. Determine. If Yes in step 2308, in other words, if the RT state is "RT1", in step 2310, the CPUSC of the sub-control board It is determined whether the state is related to an AT that does not occur and is a "low probability state," "normal BB internal medium game," "normal BB state," etc.). If Yes in step 2310, in other words, if the state regarding the AT is without push order navigation, then in step 2312 the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. Note that, as described above, the configuration is not such that the sub-control board S side can execute effects related to push-order navigation when the sub-control board S side receives a reverse-press instruction command, a reverse-press avoidance command, a forward-press instruction command, and a forward-press avoidance command. If you win the AT add-on lottery, the main control board M side sends a command to the sub-control board S to the effect that you have won the AT-add lottery and the number of AT add-on games, and the sub-control board S receives the command. Furthermore, the sub-control board S may be configured to determine the execution timing and presentation mode of the effects related to the push order navigation.

If Yes in step 2312, in other words, if the avoidance command is received, then in step 2314, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects the image to be avoided as a press order navigation display to the first number display mode group. is displayed on the effect display device S40, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2110). In this way, in the first embodiment, when the number of games passes and the AT counter value becomes 0 from the state of "RT1" and "AT in progress state", the state shifts to "RT1" and "low probability state". If you win the reverse push white 7 set replay or the forward push black 7 match replay (before replay 04 is stopped and displayed), the number of AT games will not be increased, so the number of AT games will not be increased. It is configured so that the order of presses that are not in a straight line is navigated. In addition, if the AT counter value becomes 0 after the number of games has passed from the state of "RT1" and "AT in progress" and the state shifts to "RT1" and "low probability state", the state is still in the "advantageous section". '', the push order navigation can be generated in a game where the push order bell is won, but the push order navigation may not be generated in a game where the push order replay is won.

In the case of No in step 2308, in the case of No in step 2310, and in the case of No in step 2312, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the effect image and the background image based on the state related to AT in step 2316, and then displays the next image. (step 2110).

<Processing during AT when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 48 is a subroutine showing a process during AT when the start lever is operated, which is called and executed in the process of step 2350 in FIG.

Next, in step 2352, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out the information regarding the conditional device related to the game, in step 2354, checks the winning/replay winning information related to the game, and in step 2356, the instruction number Check the related commands. In this way, in the AT-related state where the push order navigation can be executed, such as the "AT in progress state", the main control board M sends commands related to winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, and When transmitting the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation is not executed such as "probability state" (this also applies when the game section is "normal section"), it is not necessary to send a command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, even if the main control board M is in a state related to an AT where push order navigation can be executed, it transmits the presentation group number in the same manner as in a state related to an AT where press order navigation is not executed, and uses the presentation group number and instruction number. Based on such commands, the player may be configured to be able to know that the push order bell (or push order replay) has been won and the correct push order. For example, the push order navigation display when executing the push order bell and the push order navigation display when replaying the push order are placed in the same display mode group (for example, the push order is notified by numbers, and the display color for the numbers is the same). ) can be applied when configured to be displayed. In addition, in such a configuration, the effect display device S40 is configured to display an effect image (for example, a character image) different from the press order navigation display when the press order navigation is executed, and a press order bell is displayed. It may be configured to display different performance images when executing the push order navigation and when executing the push order navigation related to the push order replay.

Next, in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device of the game is a push order bell. Here, the pressing order bell is one of the aforementioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

If Yes in step 2358, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell, then in step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays 6 choices of push order bells as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group. The pressing order is information that makes each of the first stop button, second stop button, and third stop button correspond to the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43. For example, if you win the push order bell, Winning Prize - A1, the numbers that indicate the push order corresponding to "Left → Middle → Right", which is the push order that can obtain the maximum number of payouts, are enclosed in a circle. Display in display mode.

Next, in the case of No in step 2358, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not the push order bell, in step 2362, the CPUSC of the sub control board S indicates that the condition device of the game is the push order re-game. Determine whether or not. Here, the re-game in the push order is one of re-games-D1 to D3.

If Yes in step 2362, in other words, if the condition device of the game is push order replay, then in step 2364, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays push order replay as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three options is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, since there are three options for the pressing order, this is information that makes the first stop button correspond to either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41, only the number 1 is displayed as a push order navigation display.

If No in step 2362, in other words, if the condition device for the game is push-order replay, in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. . Here, the forward press avoidance command and the reverse press avoidance command are collectively referred to as an avoidance command. If Yes in step 2366, in other words, if the avoidance command is received, then in step 2368, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image for avoiding establishment in the first numerical display mode as a press order navigation display. The group is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, in the case of No in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the process of steps 2360, 2364, or 2368 described above, and then displays the AT background image on the effect display device S40 in step 2370.

Next, in step 2372, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the number of remaining AT games is 3 or less. If Yes in step 2372, in other words, if the number of AT remaining games is 3 or less, in step S2374, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the number of AT remaining games in display mode B (display mode to be described later). It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in a display mode that is less conspicuous than A).

Next, in step 2376, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a forward push instruction command has been received. If the result in step 2376 is Yes, in other words, if the order push instruction command is received, then in step 2378 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the first image to avoid the occurrence as a push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in a number display mode group.

If the result in step 2376 is No, or if the process in step 2378 is executed, in step 2380, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a reverse push instruction command has been received. If the result in step 2380 is Yes, in other words, if the reverse push instruction command is received, then in step 2382, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the first image to avoid the occurrence as a push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in a number display mode group.

If the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines No in step 2380, or if the process in step 2382 is executed, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2110).

If No in step 2372, in other words, if the number of remaining AT games is 4 or more, then in step S2384, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the number of remaining AT games in display mode A (display mode described above). (display mode more conspicuous than B) on the effect display device S40. Here, if there are four or more games, display mode A is displayed, and if there are three games or less, display mode B is displayed.

Next, in step 2386, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a forward push instruction command has been received. If the result in step 2386 is Yes, in other words, if the order push instruction command is received, then in step 2388, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S supports "left → middle → right" as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order to be pressed is displayed as an image of an arrow on the effect display device S40.

If the result in step 2386 is No, or if the process in step 2388 is executed, in step 2390 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a reverse push instruction command has been received. If the result in step 2390 is Yes, in other words, if the reverse push instruction command is received, then in step 2392, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S supports "right → middle → left" as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order to be pressed is displayed as an image of an arrow on the effect display device S40.

If the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines No in step 2390, or if the process in step 2392 is executed, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2110). In this way, when the number of AT remaining games is small, in other words, when the AT remaining number of games is displayed in display mode B, which is more conspicuous than display mode A, the forward press instruction command or the reverse Even if a push instruction command is received, the effect that displays "Aim for 7!" with an arrow image is not executed, and the white seven and black seven are not stopped and displayed on the invalid line.The middle reel, which is the push order, is moved to the first stop reel. It was configured to execute push-order navigation. With this configuration, in a situation where the number of AT remaining games is small, when the number of AT remaining games is displayed in display mode B, which is a display mode that encourages the player that the number of AT remaining games is small. In this case, the display of the arrow image or the message "Aim for 7!" can be configured so as not to obstruct the visibility of the display of the number of AT remaining games in display mode B. Similarly, continuous effects (for example, , battle effects), the configuration is configured so that the arrow image and "Aim for 7!" are not displayed while the battle effects are being executed, so as not to impede the visibility of the battle effects. be able to. Moreover, by configuring in this way, even if the number of remaining AT games on the effect display device S40 becomes 0 and the battle effect is defeated and the "AT in progress state" is displayed to be terminated, the battle effect during the battle effect is displayed. If a forward push instruction command or reverse push instruction command is received, the forward push instruction command or reverse push instruction command is received at the operation timing of the bet button D220 after the “AT status” is displayed. Notify the number of AT additional games based on the instruction command (based on the winning of forward press black 7 replay or reverse press white 7 replay), that is, notify that the number of AT games has been added in the game where the AT additional lottery was won. First, it can be configured to notify that the number of AT games has been added at a later timing, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

<Specialized warning sign processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 49 is a subroutine showing a start lever operation specialization precursor process that is called and executed in the process of step 2400 in FIG.

Next, in step 2402, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information regarding the condition device related to the game, in step 2404, confirms winning/replay winning information related to the game, and in step 2406, the instruction number Check the related commands. In this way, in the AT-related state where the push order navigation can be executed, such as the "AT in progress state", the main control board M sends commands related to winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, and When transmitting the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation is not executed such as "probability state" (this also applies when the game section is "normal section"), it is not necessary to send a command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, even if the main control board M is in a state related to an AT where push order navigation can be executed, it transmits the presentation group number in the same manner as in a state related to an AT where press order navigation is not executed, and uses the presentation group number and instruction number. Based on such commands, the player may be configured to be able to know that the push order bell (or push order replay) has been won and the correct push order.

Next, in step 2408, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device of the game is a push order bell. Here, the pressing order bell is one of the aforementioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

If Yes in step 2408, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell, then in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays 6 choices of push order bells as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the pressing orders is displayed in the second number display mode group on the effect display device S40. The pressing order is information that makes each of the first stop button, second stop button, and third stop button correspond to the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43. For example, if you win the push order bell, Winning - A2, the number indicating the push order corresponding to "Left → Right → Middle", which is the push order that can obtain the maximum number of payouts, is surrounded by stars. Display in display mode. The first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above may display numbers indicating the pressing order in mutually different display mode groups. may be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group may display numbers in red.

Next, in the case of No in step 2408, in other words, when the condition device of the game is not a push order bell, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the condition device of the game is a push order replay Determine whether or not. Here, the re-game in the push order is one of re-games-D1 to D3.

If Yes in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device of the game is push-order replay, then in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays push-order replay as a push-order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three options is displayed on the effect display device S40 in a second number display mode group. Here, since there are three options for the pressing order, this is information that makes the first stop button correspond to either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct pressing order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In this case, the number "1" is displayed at the lower center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the number "1" is displayed at the lower right side from the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, press order information is displayed at a position close to the stop button D40 corresponding to the reel to be stopped on the effect display device S40.

Next, in the case of No in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not a push-order replay, in step 2416, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the push-in-order instruction command has been received or not. to judge. If Yes in step 2416, in other words, if the order push instruction command is received, then in step 2418, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "left → middle → right" as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow.

Next, if No in step 2416, in other words, if a forward push instruction command has not been received, then in step 2420, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a reverse push instruction command has been received. to decide. If Yes in step 2420, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command is received, then in step 2422, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "right → middle → left" as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed as an arrow image on the effect display device S40.

Next, in the case of No in step 2420, in other words, if the reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2424, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. . Here, the forward press avoidance command and reverse press avoidance command are collectively referred to as the avoidance command. If Yes in step 2424, in other words, if the avoidance command is received, then in step 2426, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image for avoiding the establishment in the second numerical display mode as a press order navigation display. The group is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processing in steps 2410, 2414, 2418, 2422, and 2426, or in the case of No in step 2424, in step 2428, the CPUSC displays the background image during AT. In step S2430, the number of AT remaining games is displayed in display mode A on the effect display device S40, and the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2110).

<Additional special processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 50 is a subroutine showing an additional specialization process when the start lever is operated, which is called and executed in the process of step 2450 in FIG.

Next, in step 2452, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information regarding the condition device related to the game, in step 2454, confirms winning/replay winning information related to the game, and in step 2456, the instruction number Check the related commands. In this way, in the AT-related state where the push order navigation can be executed, such as the "AT in progress state", the main control board M sends commands related to winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, and When transmitting the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation is not executed such as "probability state" (this also applies when the game section is "normal section"), it is not necessary to send a command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, even if the main control board M is in a state related to an AT where push order navigation can be executed, it transmits the presentation group number in the same manner as in a state related to an AT where press order navigation is not executed, and uses the presentation group number and instruction number. Based on such commands, the player may be configured to be able to know that the push order bell (or push order replay) has been won and the correct push order.

Next, in step 2458, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell. Here, the pressing order bell is one of the aforementioned winning-A1 to winning-A6 and winning-B.

If Yes in step 2458, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, then in step 2460, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the six options is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group. The pressing order is information that makes each of the first stop button, second stop button, and third stop button correspond to the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43. For example, if you win the push order bell, Winning - A4, the numbers that indicate the push order that corresponds to "Right → Left → Middle", which is the push order that can obtain the maximum number of payouts, are surrounded by stars. Display in the specified display mode. The first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above may display numbers indicating the pressing order in mutually different display mode groups. may be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group may display numbers in red.

Next, in the case of No in step 2458 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is neither the press order bell nor the common bell, in step 2462, CPUSC of the sub control board S is set as the condition device of the game. The device determines whether it is a push order replay. Here, the re-game in the push order is one of re-games-D1 to D3.

If Yes in step 2462, in other words, if the condition device of the game is push-order replay, then in step 2464, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push-order replay as a push-order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three options is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group. Here, since there are three options for the pressing order, the information is that the first stop button corresponds to either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct pressing order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In this case, the number "1" is displayed at the lower center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the number "1" is displayed at the lower right side from the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, press order information is displayed near the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

Next, in the case of No in step 2462 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not a push-order replay, in step 2466, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives the push-order instruction command. Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 2466, in other words, if the order push instruction command is received, then in step 2468, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "left → middle → right" as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed as an arrow image on the effect display device S40. That is, since the pressing order is sequential, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are, in order, the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43, and from left to right. The pressing order can be suggested by an image of an arrow pointing toward .

Next, in the case of No in step 2466 described above, in other words, if the forward push instruction command has not been received, in step 2470, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the backward push instruction command has been received. Determine whether If Yes in step 2470, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command is received, then in step 2472, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "right → middle → left" as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow. That is, since the pressing order is reverse pressing, the first stop button, second stop button, and third stop button are, in order, right stop button D43, middle stop button D42, and left stop button D41, and from right to left. The pressing order can be suggested by an image of an arrow pointing toward .

Next, in the case of No in step 2470 described above, in other words, if the reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2474, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. judge. If Yes in step 2474, in other words, if the avoidance command is received, then in step 2476, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image for avoiding establishment in the first numerical display mode as a press order navigation display. The group is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, the avoidance command collectively refers to both the forward press avoidance command and the reverse press avoidance command. Therefore, the process of step 2476 is executed regardless of whether a forward press avoidance command is received or a reverse press avoidance command is received. For example, when a sequential press avoidance command is received, in order to avoid sequential presses "left → middle → right", the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side from the center of the effect display device S40, and Information as if the one stop button is the right stop button D43 is displayed as a press order navigation display.

Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processes in steps 2460, 2464, 2468, 2472, and 2476 described above, or in the case of No in 2474, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs an effect display of the background image during AT in step 2480. In step 2482, the number of AT remaining games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in display mode A, and the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2110).

<Advantageous BB internal processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 51 is a subroutine showing the internal process of the advantageous BB when the start lever is operated, which is called and executed in the process of step 2700 in FIG.

Next, in step 2702, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out the information regarding the condition device related to the game, in step 2704, confirms the winning/replay winning information related to the game, and in step 2706, the instruction number Check the related commands. In this way, in the AT-related state where the push order navigation can be executed, such as the "AT in progress state", the main control board M sends commands related to winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, and When transmitting the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation is not executed such as "probability state" (this also applies when the game section is "normal section"), it is not necessary to send a command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, even if the main control board M is in a state related to an AT where push order navigation can be executed, it transmits the presentation group number in the same manner as in a state related to an AT where press order navigation is not executed, and uses the presentation group number and instruction number. Based on such commands, the player may be configured to be able to know that the push order bell (or push order replay) has been won and the correct push order.

Next, in step 2708, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined game (5 games) has not elapsed since the transition to the advantageous BB internal medium game. If Yes in step 2708, in other words, if the predetermined game (5 games) has not elapsed since the shift to the advantageous BB internal medium game, in step 2710, CPUSC of the sub-control board S The condition device determines whether the bell is a pressing order bell or a common bell. Here, the pressing order bell is one of the aforementioned winning-A1 to winning-A6 and winning-B.

If Yes in step 2710, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, then in step 2712, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the six options is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group. The pressing order is information that makes each of the first stop button, second stop button, and third stop button correspond to the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43. For example, if you win the push order bell, Winning - A4, the numbers that indicate the push order that corresponds to "Right → Left → Middle", which is the push order that can obtain the maximum number of payouts, are surrounded by stars. Display in the specified display mode. The first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above may display numbers indicating the pressing order in mutually different display mode groups. may be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group may display numbers in red.

Next, in the case of No in step 2710 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is neither a press order bell nor a common bell, in step 2714, CPUSC of the sub-control board S is set as the condition device of the game. The device determines whether it is a push order replay. Here, the re-game in the push order is one of re-games-D1 to D3.

If Yes in step 2714, in other words, if the condition device of the game is push order replay, then in step 2716, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order replay as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three options is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group. Here, since there are three options for the pressing order, the information is that the first stop button corresponds to either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct pressing order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In this case, the number "1" is displayed at the lower center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the number "1" is displayed at the lower right side from the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, information on the push order is displayed near the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

Next, in the case of No in step 2714 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not a press order replay, in step 2718, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives a command regarding 7 replays. Determine whether or not. Here, the forward press instruction command, reverse press instruction command, forward press avoidance command, and reverse press avoidance command are collectively referred to as 7 replay commands. If Yes in step 2718, in other words, if a command related to 7 replay is received, in step 2720, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image to avoid occurrence as a push order navigation display with the first number. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in display mode groups.

Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processes of steps 2712, 2716, and 2720 described above, or in the case of No in step 2718, in step 2722, the CPUSC displays the background image during AT on the effect display device S40. In step S2724, the number of AT remaining games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2110).

In the case of No in step 2708, in other words, if a predetermined game (5 games) has passed since the transition to the advantageous BB internal medium game, in step 2726, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is , it is announced that BB has been won (in this process, the push order navigation is not displayed), and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Processing when receiving the first cylinder stoppage>
Next, FIG. 52 is a subroutine illustrating the first drum stop reception process that is called and executed in the process of step 2500 in FIG. 41.

Next, in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. If Yes in step 2502, in other words, if the push order navigation is being displayed, then in step 2504, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S operates the stop button based on the correct push order as the first stop. Determine whether or not.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2504, in other words, if there is a stop button operation based on the correct press order as the first stop, in step 2506, CPUSC of the sub control board S is set in the press order navigation display. The display related to the first stop is erased, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2504, in other words, if there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, in step 2508, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is It is determined whether the push order navigation related to the push navigation is being displayed. Here, the 7 replay is a general term for the forward press black 7 set replay and the reverse press white 7 set replay. In the case of Yes in step 2508, in step 2510, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation in a dark color (it continues to be displayed in a dark color during the game), and proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2110). Migrate.

If No in step 2508, in other words, if the push order navigation related to 7 replays is not being displayed, then in step 2512, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases all the push order navigation displays and the push order fails. The effect is executed and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Processing when receiving the second cylinder stoppage>
Next, FIG. 53 is a subroutine illustrating the second drum stop reception process that is called and executed in the process of step 2550 in FIG. 41.

Next, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. If Yes in step 2552, in other words, if the push order navigation is being displayed, then in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. judge. If Yes in step 2554, in other words, if the conditional device related to the game is a push order bell, then in step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects a stop button based on the correct push order as a second stop. Determine whether there is an operation.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2556, in other words, if there is a stop button operation based on the correct press order as the second stop, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is The display related to the 2-stop is erased, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2556, in other words, if there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct press order as the second stop, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays all the press order navigation displays. It is erased, a press order failure effect is executed, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, if No in step 2552, in other words, the push order navigation is not displayed, or if No in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is not the push order bell, immediately , to proceed to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Decision process related to performance when the 3rd barrel stops>
Next, FIG. 54 is a subroutine showing the third drum stop performance related determination process that is called and executed in the process of step 3200 in FIG. 41.

Next, in step 3202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the BB combination has won. If Yes in step 3202, in other words, if the BB winning combination is won, then in step 3204 CPUSC of the sub control board It is determined whether or not it is a BB role. If Yes in step 3204, in other words, if it is a BB role won during non-AT, then in step 3206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the BB start effect determination table during non-AT, and determines the AT of the game. Based on the related state and the BB role, a BB start performance (a performance executed when the BB role is won) is determined and executed, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2600).

Next, if No in step 3204, in other words, the winning BB role during AT (“AT in progress state”, “additional specialization state”, “specialization preparation state” or “resurrection possibility state”) If so, in step 3208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the BB start effect determination table during AT, determines and executes the BB start effect based on the AT-related state of the game and the BB role, and executes the BB start effect, and executes the BB start effect in step 3208. The process proceeds to step 2600.

Next, in the case of No in step 3202, in other words, if the BB role does not win, in step 3210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines and executes the performance based on the performance executed in the game, The process moves to the next process (the process of step 2600).

The non-AT BB start effect determination table shown on the lower left of FIG. 54 is a table for determining the effect at the start of BB in the non-AT state. The non-AT BB start performance determination table is a table for defining the relationship between the type of BB role, the state related to AT, the type of BB start performance, and the probability (distribution). There are two types of BB combinations: BB with a setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and BB without a setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C). There are two types of states regarding AT: "normal BB internal medium game" and "advantageous BB internal medium game." There are three types of BB start performances: normal performance, high expectation performance, and premiere performance. Furthermore, depending on the type of BB start performance for a BB won during non-AT, the level of expectation for transitioning to the "AT state" after the BB ends is different, and the level of expectation for the transition to the "AT state" is different from the one with the lowest level of expectation to the "normal performance". → Highly anticipated production → Premier production.”

When the BB role is BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and the AT-related state of the game is normal BB internal medium game, the probability that the BB start performance will be the normal performance is 179/256. . When the BB role is BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and the AT-related state of the game is "Normal BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start performance will be a high expectation performance is 77. /256. If the BB role is BB with setting differences (Type 1 BB-B) and the AT status of the game is "Normal BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start performance will be the premium performance is 0/256. It is.

When the BB role is BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and the AT-related state of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start performance will be the normal performance is 179/256 It is. When the BB role is BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and the AT-related state of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start performance will be a high expectation performance is 77. /256. When the BB role is BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and the AT-related state of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start performance will be the premier performance is 0/256 It is.

If the BB role is BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) and the state related to AT of the game is "Normal BB internal medium game", the BB start effect will be the normal effect. The probability is 179/256. If the BB role is BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) and the AT-related state of the game is "Normal BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is a high expectation level effect. The probability of this is 77/256. If the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C) and the AT status of the game is "Normal BB internal medium game", the BB start performance will be the premier performance. The probability is 0/256.

If the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C) and the AT-related state of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start performance will be the normal performance. The probability is 67/256. If the BB role is BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) and the state related to AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is a high expectation level effect. The probability of this is 157/256. If the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C) and the AT status of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start performance will be the premium performance. The probability is 32/256.

When in the "normal section", even if you win BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) or BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B), the premium performance will not be applied. is never selected, and the normal performance is set to be more likely to be selected than the high expectation performance.

Even if it is an advantageous section, if you win BB with setting differences (Type 1 BB-B), the premium presentation will not be selected, and there is a possibility that the regular presentation will be selected over the high expectation presentation. It is destined to rise.

If it is an "advantageous section" and you win BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C), there is a possibility that the premium performance will be selected. With this configuration, it is certain that by selecting the premier performance and winning the BB with no setting difference, the transition to the "AT state" will occur after the BB with no setting difference ends. can be shown to the player. In addition, if you win BB with no setting difference (1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C), which is an "advantageous section", there is a higher possibility that the high expectation performance will be selected than the normal performance. (The probability that the normal performance will be selected is low). By doing so, the player can guess whether or not the AT will start after the BB ends by checking the BB start effect, and can feel a sense of anticipation for winning the AT. In addition, the distribution of the BB start performance related to the BB with a setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) that won in the "Normal BB internal medium game" and the BB without the setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) that won in the "Normal BB internal medium game" The distribution is the same as the distribution of BB start effects related to Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C). However, this is not limited to this, and the distribution of BB start effects related to BBs with different settings (Type 1 BB-B) won in the "regular BB internal medium game" and the "regular BB internal medium game" The allocation of the BB start effects for the winning BBs with no setting difference (1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C) may be different, and by configuring this way, the BB start effect for the BBs with a setting difference may be distributed differently. The distribution can be configured to be different depending on whether it is a performance or a BB start performance related to a BB with no setting difference.

The BB start effect determination table during AT shown in the lower right of FIG. 54 is a table for determining the effect at the start of BB during AT. The BB start effect determination table during AT is also a table for defining the relationship between the type of BB role, the state related to AT, the type of BB start effect, and the probability (distribution). There are two types of BB combinations: BB with a setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and BB without a setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C). There is one type of state regarding AT: "advantageous BB internal medium game". There are two types of BB start effects: effects that can be added on and effects that cannot be added on. The add-on possible performance is a performance that suggests that an AT add-on lottery may be executed during the execution of the BB, and the add-on impossible performance is a performance that suggests that the AT add-on lottery may not be executed during the execution of the BB. As for the BB that is won during AT, there is no factor as to whether or not it will win the AT lottery, and whether or not the AT additional lottery will be executed may differ depending on the type of BB. In addition, during AT, game medals can be obtained even in BB with a setting difference in which the AT additional lottery is not executed, and after the BB ends, the AT is advantageous to the player, so that the BB that is executed is the AT additional lottery. It is configured to clearly notify whether or not it will be executed. Specific examples will be described in detail below.

When the BB role is BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and the AT-related state of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start performance will be an additional performance is 0/ 256, and no additional effects are executed. When the BB role is BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and the AT-related state of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start performance will be a non-additional performance is 256/ 256, and the no-addition effect is always executed. If the BB role is BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) and the state related to AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is an add-on effect. The probability of this is 256/256, and the add-on effect will definitely be executed. If the BB role is BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) and the state related to AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is a non-addition effect. The probability that this will happen is 0/256, and the effect that cannot be added on will not be executed.

<Processing at the time of receiving the 3rd cylinder stoppage>
Next, FIG. 55 is a subroutine showing the third drum stop reception process that is called and executed in the process of step 2600 in FIG. 41.

Next, in step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. If Yes in step 2602, in other words, if the push order navigation is being displayed, then in step 2604, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. judge. If Yes in step 2604, in other words, if the conditional device related to the game is a press order bell, then in step 2606, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects the stop button based on the correct press order as the third stop. Determine whether there is an operation.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2606, in other words, if there is an operation of the stop button based on the correct press order as the third stop, in step 2608, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the press order success effect. "GET!" is displayed on the display device S40. On the other hand, if No in step 2606, in other words, if there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct press order as the third stop, in step 2610, the CPUSC of the sub control board !” is not displayed.

In the case of No in step 2602 described above, in other words, when the push order navigation is not displayed, in the case of No in step 2604, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is not a push order bell, or in step 2608 or 2610 If the process is executed, in step 2612, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a command related to the number of AT additional games (command set in step 1517) has been received from the main side. As described above, the main control board M sends a command indicating the number of remaining AT games to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S calculates the difference from the previously received command indicating the number of remaining AT games. It is also possible to determine whether or not the number of AT games has been added and to determine the number of AT games, and to display the number of AT games.

Next, if Yes in step 2612, in other words, if a command related to the number of AT games is received from the main side, then in step 2614, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the AT additional game on the effect display device S40. The number is displayed and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2110). On the other hand, if No in step 2612, in other words, if the command related to the number of AT games has not been received from the main side, then in step 2616, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs AT addition on the effect display device S40. The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110) without displaying the number of games. In addition, the number of AT add-on games can be notified as follows: (1) All of the number of add-on games will be announced in the relevant game, (2) A portion of the number of add-on games will be announced in the relevant game, and the remaining number of games will be announced after the relevant game. (3) The number of add-on games is not announced for the game, and the number of add-on games is not announced for the game after the game (for example, when winning 7 replays, when winning a common bell (when winning a combination that does not normally have an add-on), or when playing multiple games. After executing a game (continuous performance), a game where the number of remaining games on the performance display device S40 becomes "0", or operation of the bet button D220 for the next game after the game where the number of remaining games becomes "0", operation of the start lever D50. ) can be used to notify.

In addition, if you win the common bell in the "add-on special state", the number of AT add-on games will not be displayed even if you stop it according to the push order navigation (the AT add-on lottery is not performed for the common bell). do not have).

By configuring as described above, the reel-type gaming machine according to the first embodiment is advantageous for the player in a gaming machine configured such that the advantageous section indicator YH lights up in the "advantageous section". It is possible to configure the period so that it can be appropriately notified. In addition, by providing a "resurrection propriety state", when a continuation performance is won and the revival performance (success) is subsequently executed, the state regarding the AT of the game in which the revival performance (success) is executed is Since it is in the "AT state", the advantageous section indicator YH is lit, and on the other hand, even if the continuation performance is not won and the revival performance (failure) is executed afterwards, the revival performance (failure) will be executed. By setting the state related to the AT of the game to be a "resurrection possibility state" and the state related to the AT to be an "advantageous section," the advantageous section indicator YH will light up. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to configure such a structure that it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the resurrection effect is successful or unsuccessful by visually recognizing the advantageous section indicator YH in the game in which the resurrection effect is executed. In a gaming machine that is configured to be able to appropriately notify a period that is advantageous to the player, it is possible to ensure a highly entertaining gaming machine.

In addition, in this example, if the BB combination is won in the "high probability state", it is configured so that the AT lottery can be won, and after the end of the BB, it is possible to shift to the "AT in progress state". The configuration related to this is not limited to the one in this example. For example, it is configured so that a rare hand such as cherry can win the AT lottery (it can also be won even if it is not a BB role), and if the player wins the AT lottery, It may be configured such that the state related to AT shifts to an "AT precursor state", and then shifts to the "AT in progress state" by playing a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games) in the "AT precursor state".

<<<Second embodiment>>>
Next, a second embodiment will be described. In the description, the same reference numerals and words will be used for the same parts as in the above-described embodiment, and the description will be omitted or simplified. Note that all configurations of this second embodiment can be applied to other embodiments, and all configurations of other embodiments can be applied to the second embodiment.

In addition, although the second embodiment is a drum-type game machine that uses game medals, all the configurations detailed in the second embodiment are different from medalless game machines that do not use game medals (enclosed type game machines). It should be noted that it can also be applied to machines (sometimes referred to as machines, managed gaming machines, smart slots, etc.).

In the second embodiment, only the differences from the first embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the game progress control process related to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. The difference from the first embodiment is step 3700 and step 3800. That is, in step 1293, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes the game end process, and then in step 3700, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes an abort monitoring process, which will be described later. Next, in step 3800, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a MY counter monitoring process, which will be described later, and moves to the next process (the process of step 1202).

The configuration of the game progress control process is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 56, and may be configured such that the MY counter monitoring process in step 3800 is executed and then the abort monitoring process in step 3700 is executed. Further, the game section transition control process in step 3500 may be configured to be executed after the game end process in step 1293.

Note that when applied to a medalless drum-type gaming machine, processes related to paying out gaming medals outside the gaming machine, such as steps 1275 to 1288, are not executed.

Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the abort monitoring process related to the subroutine of step 3700 in FIG. First, in step 3702, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the cancellation reservation flag is off. The cancellation reservation flag is a flag related to the cancellation state, which will be described later, and the details will be described later.

If Yes in step 3702, in step 3704, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the stopped symbol combination is not a replay symbol (a symbol combination corresponding to a replay combination is sometimes referred to as a replay symbol). Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 3704, in step 3706, the CPU 100 of the main control board M reads and sets the counter value of the difference counter. The details will be described later, but the difference counter is a counter that measures the number of differences since the gaming machine was powered on. The number of differences from the reference point to the timing when the number of differences is the largest (referred to as the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on), with the timing at which the number of differences is the smallest as the reference point. It is configured so that it can measure

Note that the value obtained by subtracting the number of game medals put into the game machine from the number of game medals paid out from the game machine from a predetermined reference timing is referred to as the difference number. For example, if the highest number of differences is 5000 and the lowest number of differences is -2000 based on when the gaming machine is powered on, then the timing is when the number of differences after the power is turned on is the smallest. The maximum number of differences based on is "5000-(-2000)=7000".

Next, in step 3708, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the number of bets related to the game that has been executed is smaller than the number of payouts. If Yes in step 3708, in other words, if the number of differences increases due to the game, then in step 3710, the CPU 100 of the main control board M calculates the number of differences in the game that has been executed. Note that the difference number for the game can be calculated by subtracting the number of bets from the number of payouts for the game, for example. Note that the number of payouts may be referred to as the number of coins to be paid out, and in either case, it is applicable to both a drum-type game machine using medals and a drum-type game machine without medals.

Next, in step 3712, the CPU 100 of the main control board M updates the counter value of the difference counter, and proceeds to the process of step 3720. More specifically, the difference number calculated in step 3710 is subtracted from the counter value of the difference counter.

In the second embodiment, the difference counter is a decrement counter, the initial value of the counter value is 19000, the upper limit value of the counter value is 19000, and the lower limit value of the counter value is 0. When the calculation result when updating the counter value exceeds 19000, 19000 is reset, and when the calculation result when updating the counter value is less than 0, the cancellation reservation flag is turned on. Further, although the details will be described later, the difference counter may also be an increment counter. When configured in this way, the initial value of the counter value is 0, the upper limit of the counter value is 19000, and the counter value of the counter value is 0. The lower limit value is 0, and when the calculation result when updating the counter value is less than 0, it is reset to 0, and when the calculation result when updating the counter value exceeds 19000, the cancellation reservation flag is turned on. becomes.

Further, in the case of No in step 3708, in step 3714, the CPU 100 of the main control board M calculates the number of differences of the game that has been executed. Next, in step 3716, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the calculation result related to the counter value of the difference counter exceeds the upper limit value. That is, it is determined whether or not the result of subtracting the difference number calculated in step 3714 from the counter value of the difference counter becomes a value larger than 19,000. If Yes in step 3716, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets the upper limit value (19000 in this example) to the counter value of the difference counter in step 3718, and proceeds to step 3720. On the other hand, if No in step 3716, the process moves to step 3712.

Note that the configuration regarding the difference counter is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 57, and may be configured as follows as a modification.
(1) In step 3712, the difference number calculated in step 3710 or step 3714, which is the difference number in the current game, is subtracted (calculated) from the counter value of the difference counter stored in the previous game.
(2) If the calculation result in (1) above is 0 or more, save the calculation result as the counter value of the difference counter.
(3) If the calculation result in (1) above is less than 0, the abort reservation flag is turned on in step 3722 without executing the saving process in (2) above.

As a specific example of the processing in steps 3708 to 3718, the following actions can be exemplified.

<When executing the process of step 3710 1>
(1) The number of bets of the game that has been completed is 3, the number of payouts is 10, and in step 3710, "10-3=7" is calculated as the difference number of the game.
(2) If the number of differences calculated in step 3710 is 7 and the counter value of the difference counter is 10010, in step 3712, the number of differences calculated in step 3710 is subtracted from the counter value of the difference counter. Then, "10010-7=10003", and the counter value of the difference counter becomes 10003.

<When executing the process of step 3710 2>
(1) The number of bets of the game that has been completed is 3, the number of payouts is 10, and in step 3710, "10-3=7" is calculated as the difference number of the game.
(2) If the number of differences calculated in step 3710 is 7 and the counter value of the difference counter is 5, in step 3712, the number of differences calculated in step 3710 is subtracted from the counter value of the difference counter. Then, "5-7=-2", and the lower limit of the counter value of the difference counter is 0, and since it is below the lower limit, the counter value of the difference counter remains 5.
Note that in (2) above, if the calculation result is less than the lower limit value of 0, the counter value of the difference counter may be configured to be reset to the lower limit value of 0, or 0 may be reset to the lower limit value of 0. It may be configured such that the lower calculation result (-2 in the case of (2) above) is used as the counter value of the difference counter.

<If the upper limit value is exceeded in step 3716>
(1) The number of bets in the game that has been completed is 3, the number of payouts is 0, and in step 3714, "0-3=-3" is calculated as the number of differences in the game.
(2) If the difference number calculated in step 3714 is -3 and the counter value of the difference counter is 18998, "18998-(-3) = 19001", and the calculation result is greater than 19000. As a result, the determination in step 3716 is Yes.
(3) At step 3718, the upper limit value of 19000 is set to the counter value of the difference counter.

<If the upper limit value is not exceeded in step 3716>
(1) The number of bets for the game that has been completed is 3, the number of payouts is 0, and in step 3714, "0-3=-3" is calculated as the difference number for the game.
(2) If the difference number calculated in step 3714 is -3 and the counter value of the difference counter is 15100, then "15100-(-3)=15103" and the calculation result is greater than 19000. Since no result is obtained, the determination in step 3716 is No.
(3) In step 3712, the difference number calculated in step 3714 is subtracted from the counter value of the difference counter, resulting in "15100-(-3)=15103", and the counter value of the difference counter becomes 15103.

Next, in step 3720, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the calculation result related to the counter value of the difference counter is less than zero. In other words, in step 3712, the result of subtracting (calculating) the difference number calculated in step 3710 or step 3714, which is the difference number of the current game, from the counter value of the difference counter saved in the previous game is less than 0. Determine whether or not it was. If YES in step 3720, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns on the cancellation reservation flag in step 3722, and proceeds to step 3724. Note that even in the case of No in step 3702, the process moves to step 3724. Moreover, in the case of No in step 3720, since the conditions for transition to the aborted state are not satisfied, the process moves to the next process (the process of step 3800).

Next, in step 3724, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the next game is not a bonus game. Incidentally, the "during bonus" in step 3724 corresponds to type 1 BB, type 2 BB, RB, etc. If YES in step 3724, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off the cancellation reservation flag in step 3726. Next, in step 3728, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns on the termination flag and moves to the next process (the process of step 3800). Note that even in the case of No in step 3724, since the conditions for transition to the aborted state are not satisfied, the process moves to the next process (the process of step 3800).

In this way, the process of updating the counter value of the difference counter is configured to be executed at a later timing than the game end process of step 1293, and regarding the number of bets, the counter value of the difference counter is executed at a timing when the bet is placed. The value is not updated, and the counter value of the difference counter is updated based on the number of bets and the number of payouts after the game ends.

Note that in FIG. 57, the configuration is such that the cancellation reservation flag is turned off in step 3726, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the following configuration may be used. In addition, only one of the following configurations may be applied, or a plurality of them may be applied.
(1) The power supply to the game machine is cut off when the cancellation reservation flag is on, and then the power is restored with the RAM cleared (for example, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch on and the machine shifts to setting change mode) If a different power supply recovery is performed, the abort reservation flag is turned off.
(2) The power supply to the game machine is cut off when the cancellation reservation flag is on, and then the power is restored without clearing the RAM (for example, the normal power is restored when the power is turned on when the setting key switch is off). If this happens, the abort reservation flag will not be turned off.
(3) If the advantageous section ends with the discontinuation reservation flag on, and predetermined information regarding the advantageous section (details will be described later) is initialized, the discontinuation reservation flag will not turn off.

In the second embodiment, when the abort flag is turned on, the abort state is established. The discontinued state will be described later.

Here, the difference counter according to the second embodiment illustrated in FIG. 57 will be described in detail below.

<Configuration related to difference counter>
(1) When the calculation result related to the counter value of the difference counter becomes less than 0, the cancellation reservation flag is turned on, and if the next game is not in the bonus period, the cancellation flag is turned on and the game is in a cancellation state.
(2) Since the counter value of the difference counter is designed not to be larger than the initial value of 19000 (see step 3718), the calculation result related to the counter value of the difference counter is less than 0. In this case, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on exceeded 19,000.
(3) If the calculation result related to the counter value of the difference counter becomes less than 0 during the bonus, the cancellation reservation flag will be turned on, but the cancellation flag will not be turned on, and after that, when the bonus ends (next (if the game is not in the bonus period), the stoppage flag is turned on and the game becomes a stoppage state.
(4) When the power is restored after a power outage occurs (both in the case of power restoration without RAM clearing and in the case of power restoration with RAM clearing), the counter value of the difference counter is initialized and set as the initial value. 19000 is set.

Note that a power return that involves clearing the RAM corresponds to, for example, a power return that occurs when the power is turned on with the setting key switch turned on and the device enters the setting change mode, and a power return that does not involve clearing the RAM refers to , corresponds to a normal power return where the power is turned on when the setting key switch is off. Note that the situation where the setting key switch is off may be referred to as a predetermined situation.

Furthermore, as described above, the condition for turning on the discontinuation flag according to the second embodiment is not that the number of differences from when the power is turned on exceeds a predetermined number (19,000 in this example), but that the The maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences exceeds 19,000.

Next, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the MY counter monitoring process related to the subroutine of step 3800 in FIG. First, in step 3802, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the game that has been executed is a game in an advantageous section. If Yes in step 3802, the CPU 100 of the main control board M reads and sets the counter value of the MY counter in step 3804. Although the details will be described later, the MY counter is a counter for measuring the number of differences from the start of the advantageous section.

Next, in step 3806, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M calculates the number of differences in the game. Note that the number of differences in the game can be calculated, for example, by subtracting the number of bets from the number of payouts for the game. Next, in step 3808, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M updates the counter value of the MY counter. More specifically, the difference number calculated in step 3806 is subtracted from the counter value of the MY counter.

In the second embodiment, the MY counter is a decrement counter, the initial value of the counter value is 2400, the upper limit value of the counter value is 65535, and the lower limit value of the counter value is 0.

Next, in step 3810, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the calculation result related to the counter value of the MY counter is less than 0. In other words, in step 3810, whether or not the result of subtracting (calculating) the difference number calculated in step 3806, which is the difference number of the current game, from the counter value of the MY counter saved in the previous game was less than 0. Determine. In the case of Yes in step 3810, in step 3812, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the game period after the next game to be the normal period. Next, in step 3814, the CPU 100 of the main control board M stores predetermined information regarding the advantageous section (sometimes referred to as information regarding AT, the counter value of the MY counter, the counter value of the advantageous section remaining games counter, and the gaming state). The flags shown in FIG. Note that also in the case of No in step 3802 or step 3810, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1202).

Note that when the process of step 3814 is executed, the counter value of the MY counter will be initialized, but the counter value of the difference counter is configured not to be initialized.

Here, the MY counter according to the second embodiment illustrated in FIG. 58 will be described in detail below.

<Configuration related to MY counter>
(1) When the calculation result related to the counter value of the MY counter becomes less than 0, the game section after the next game becomes a normal section, and predetermined information regarding the advantageous section is initialized.
(2) Even if the power is restored after a power-off occurs (power is restored without clearing the RAM), the counter value of the MY counter is not initialized.
(3) When a new advantageous section is started, an initial value of 2400 is set in the MY counter.
(4) Since the counter value of the MY counter can be a value larger than the initial value of 2400, if the calculation result related to the counter value of the MY counter is less than 0, from the start of the advantageous section This means that the number of differences exceeds 2,400.

Furthermore, when the power is restored with RAM clearing after a power-off occurs, the counter value of the MY counter will be initialized.

<<Diagram related to MY counter and difference counter>>
Next, FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating a specific example regarding the counter values of the MY counter and the difference counter from the time the power is turned on. In the figure, when the number of differences increases, the counter value of the difference counter and the counter value of the MY counter decrease, and when the number of differences decreases, the counter value of the difference counter and the counter value of the MY counter decrease. This will result in an increase. Note that the counter value of the MY counter increases or decreases in an advantageous section.

The upper part of the figure is a graph regarding the change in the number of differences, with the vertical axis showing the number of differences and the horizontal axis showing the number of games. Note that the number of differences after the power is turned on may be simply referred to as the number of differences.

First, at timing (1) in the figure, the power is turned on to the gaming machine, and initial processing at power-on is executed. The game section is a normal section. Thereafter, the game progresses in the normal section, the difference number decreases, and at the timing (2) in the figure, the normal section becomes an advantageous section. Since the period from timing (1) in the figure to timing (2) in the figure is a normal interval, the counter value of the difference counter is updated, but the counter value of the MY counter is not updated.

After that, the game progresses in the advantageous section (for example, AT state), the number of differences increases, and at the timing (3) in the figure, an arbitrary condition is satisfied (for example, the number of AT remaining games is 0), the advantageous section ends, and the advantageous section becomes a normal section. Since the period from timing (2) in the figure to timing (3) in the figure is an advantageous period, the counter value of the difference counter and the counter value of the MY counter are updated. Note that the timing (2) in the figure is the timing with the smallest difference after the power is turned on.

Here, the initial processing at power-on corresponds to, for example, the processing described above with reference to FIG.

Thereafter, the game progresses in the normal section, the difference number decreases, and at the timing (4) in the figure, the normal section becomes an advantageous section. Since the period from timing (3) in the figure to timing (4) in the figure is a normal interval, the counter value of the difference counter is updated, but the counter value of the MY counter is not updated. After that, the game progresses in an advantageous section (for example, high probability state) and the number of differences decreases, and the timing (5) in the diagram is when the number of differences in the advantageous section is the smallest. . Further, at the timing (5) in the figure, the state related to AT is transitioned (for example, from the high probability state to the AT in progress state). After that, the game progresses in the advantageous section (for example, AT state) and the number of differences increases, and at the timing (6) in the figure, the number of differences from the start of the advantageous section (from (4) onwards) When the difference number) exceeds a specific value (in this example, 2400), the advantageous section ends, and the advantageous section becomes a normal section. Note that the configuration is such that the calculation result related to the counter value of the MY counter becomes less than 0 at the timing (6) in the figure. Since the period from timing (4) in the figure to timing (6) in the figure is an advantageous period, the counter value of the difference counter and the counter value of the MY counter are updated.

In this way, when the calculation related to the counter value of the MY counter falls below 0 (sometimes referred to as becoming less than 0) and the advantageous section ends, the number of differences from the start of the advantageous section becomes a specific value (the main value). In the example, it is a case where the number exceeds (sometimes referred to as exceeded) 2400). In other words, even if the number of differences decreases from the start of the advantageous section, such as timing (5) in the figure, the timing (5) is not the reference, and the advantageous section at timing (4) in the figure The configuration is such that it is determined whether the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied based on the number of differences based on the starting time.

Further, after the timing (6) in the figure, the game progresses in the normal section and the difference number decreases, and at the timing (7) in the figure, the normal section changes to the advantageous section. Since the period from timing (6) in the figure to timing (7) in the figure is a normal interval, the counter value of the difference counter is updated, but the counter value of the MY counter is not updated.

After that, as the game progresses in the advantageous section (for example, AT state) (while also staying in the normal section on the way), the number of differences increases, and at the timing (8) in the figure, after the power is turned on, When the maximum number of differences based on the timing when the number of differences is the smallest exceeds a predetermined value (19000 in this example), the discontinuation flag is turned on, and the discontinuation state is entered. Note that the configuration is such that the calculation result related to the counter value of the difference counter becomes less than 0 at the timing (8) in the figure. Since the period from timing (7) in the figure to timing (8) in the figure is an advantageous period, the counter value of the difference counter and the counter value of the MY counter are updated.

In this way, if the calculation result related to the counter value of the difference counter becomes less than 0 and the gaming machine is discontinued, the timing shown in the figure is when the difference number is the smallest compared to when the gaming machine was powered on. This is a case where the number of differences from the timing in (2) exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example). In other words, when the number of differences decreases from when the power is turned on, as at timing (2) in the figure, the number of differences based on the time when the power is turned on does not exceed a predetermined value (19,000 in this example). is also configured to be in a suspended state. Note that the number of differences between the timing (2) in the figure and the timing (8) in the figure is approximately 19,000. Note that the difference number is set at approximately 19,000 because the timing (8) in the figure is the timing at which the difference number based on the timing (2) in the figure exceeds 19,000 for the first time.For example, If a small winning combination with a payout number of 11 pieces is won, the difference between timing (2) in the figure and timing (8) in the figure will be any value from 19001 to 19011.

By configuring in this way, even if the manager of the game hall reduces the number of differences by proceeding with the game before the game starts business, the number of differences until the game is discontinued after the start of business is a predetermined number. The value (in this example, 19,000) is not significantly exceeded, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent management such as appealing to players by making it difficult for the game to become suspended, and to appropriately bring the game to the suspended status. Can be done.

In addition, if the calculation result related to the counter value of the MY counter becomes less than 0 and the advantageous section ends, the number of differences from the start of the advantageous section (the number of differences based on the start of the advantageous section) becomes a specific value (the main value). In the example, the number of differences between the timing (4) in the figure and the timing (6) in the figure is about 2400. Note that the difference number is set at approximately 2400 because the timing (6) in the figure is the timing at which the difference number based on the timing (4) in the figure exceeds 2400 for the first time.For example, If a small winning combination with a payout number of 11 pieces is won, the difference between the timing (4) in the figure and the timing (6) in the figure will be any value from 2401 to 2411.

<<Effects when various conditions are satisfied>>
Next, the lower part of the figure is a table summarizing the effects when various conditions regarding the MY counter and the difference counter are satisfied. "End condition" is a condition for the advantageous section to end or for the game to end by transitioning to a discontinued state, "end condition (counter value)" is the counter value when the above end condition is satisfied, "Normal section" is whether the counter value is updated in the normal section, "At the end of advantageous section" is whether the counter value is initialized at the end of the advantageous section, and "When power is turned on" is RAM clear. Whether or not to initialize the counter value when the power is turned on without ``setting change'' is to initialize the counter value when the power is turned on to transition to the setting change mode (when changing the setting with RAM clear). "When the counter value is less than 0" means whether or not the game can proceed after the calculation result related to the counter value becomes less than 0. "When the counter value exceeds the upper limit" means that the counter value It is whether or not it is possible to proceed with the game after the value exceeds the upper limit.

<MY counter>
End condition: End when the difference from the start of the advantageous section exceeds 2400 End condition (counter value): The calculation result related to the counter value of the MY counter is less than 0. Normal section: The counter value of the MY counter is not updated. At the end of advantageous period: Initialize the counter value of MY counter When power is turned on: Do not initialize the counter value of MY counter When changing settings: Initialize the counter value of MY counter When counter value is less than 0: Playable counter value When the upper limit is exceeded: Can be played

<Difference counter>
Termination condition: When the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest difference after power-on exceeds 19000 Termination conditions (counter value): The calculation result related to the counter value of the difference counter becomes less than 0. Normal interval: Update the counter value of the difference counter At the end of the advantageous interval: Do not initialize the counter value of the difference counter At power-on: Initialize the counter value of the difference counter When changing settings: Update the counter of the difference counter Initialize the value When the counter value is less than 0: The game is stopped and the game cannot be played When the counter value exceeds the upper limit: The game is possible

In this way, in addition to the MY counter that can be updated in the advantageous section, a difference counter that can be updated in every game after the power is turned on is provided, and by making it possible to shift to the discontinued state based on the difference counter, The gambling element can be suppressed compared to other gaming machines.

Note that when the configuration of the second embodiment is applied to a medalless drum-type gaming machine, "gaming medals" can be replaced with "gaming value".

<Stopped state>
In the second embodiment, when the calculation result related to the counter value of the difference counter is less than 0, the abort flag is turned on and the abort state is established. , game medals stored as credits and game medals that have been bet are automatically settled without operating the settlement button (such automatic settlement is sometimes referred to as automatic settlement), and new game medals are generated. Inputting, operating the bet button, and operating the start lever will be disabled.

In addition, if the power is turned off and then the power is turned on without clearing the RAM (sometimes referred to as normal power-on), the power will remain in the suspended state even after the power is turned on. (the abort flag is on), turn off the power, and then turn on the power with RAM clear (such as turning on the power while operating the RAM clear button or turning on the setting key switch) If this is done, it will no longer be in the aborted state after the power is turned on (the abort flag will be off). Note that the notification mode regarding the discontinued state will be described later.

With this configuration, even if a difference in the number of game medals (awarded to players) occurs that is unintended by the designer of the game parlor or game machine, the system can be moved to a discontinued state. , it is possible to configure the system so that no further difference in number occurs, and it is possible to prevent the gaming hall from suffering unintended losses, and it is possible to configure the system so that it does not excessively arouse the gambling spirit of the players. can.

Further, the fact that the calculation result related to the counter value of the difference counter becomes less than 0, which satisfies the condition for transitioning to the aborted state, may be referred to as satisfying the second condition. Further, the fact that the calculation result related to the counter value of the MY counter is less than 0, which satisfies the condition for initializing predetermined information regarding the advantageous section, may be referred to as satisfying the first condition.

<Example of change regarding difference counter>
Note that the difference counter in the second embodiment is a decrement counter, and when the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number after power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19000 in this example) In the previous example, the calculation result related to the counter value was configured to be less than 0, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the following configuration may be used. Note that the various numerical values shown below are just examples, and there is no problem in changing them.

(Configuration 1)
The difference counter is a decrement counter, and has an initial value of 19,000, an upper limit of 65,535, and a lower limit of 0. When the difference number from when the power is turned on exceeds a predetermined value (19000 in this example), the calculation result related to the counter value of the difference counter becomes less than 0, and the process is stopped. In other words, the configuration is configured such that the discontinuation state occurs when the number of differences from when the power is turned on reaches a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), and even if there is a period in which the number of differences decreases from when the power is turned on, the power is turned on. The system is configured to be in a discontinued state when the difference number based on the time exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example).

(Configuration 2)
The difference counter is an increment counter, and has an initial value of 0, an upper limit of 19000, and a lower limit of 0. When the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the calculation result related to the counter value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000, It will be in a discontinued state. In other words, the configuration is such that the discontinuation state occurs when the maximum number of differences based on the timing when the number of differences since the power is turned on is the smallest reaches a predetermined value (19000 in this example), and the number of differences from the time the power is turned on is If there is a period in which the number of differences decreases, the configuration is configured such that the process is stopped when the number of differences based on the timing when the number of differences decreased the most from when the power was turned on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example). has been done.

(Configuration 3)
The difference counter is an increment counter, and has an initial value of 11,000, an upper limit of 30,000, and a lower limit of 0. The counter value of the difference counter becomes aborted when the difference from when the power is turned on exceeds 30,000, which is a predetermined value (19,000 in this example). In other words, if the number of differences from when the power is turned on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the system is configured to be in an aborted state. The system is configured to be in a discontinued state when the difference number based on the time exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example). In addition, when configured in this way, if the calculation result related to the counter value of the difference counter is less than the lower limit value, the counter value will not become a value less than 0, so after that, the counter value of the difference counter If the arithmetic result regarding the value exceeds 30,000 and the process is aborted, the process will be aborted if the difference from when the power was turned on is less than or equal to a predetermined value (19,000 in this example). Further, by adjusting the initial value of the counter value of the difference counter (for example, to a value larger than 11000), the counter value of the difference counter can be made difficult to fall below 0.

Note that the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on is sometimes referred to as the number of differences after the predetermined timing after power-on, and is the number of differences from power-on in Configuration 1 above. may be referred to as the number of differences after the predetermined timing after the power is turned on.

<Example of changes related to MY counter>
Note that the MY counter in the second embodiment is a decrement counter, and when the difference number from the start of the advantageous section exceeds a specific value (2400 in this example), the calculation result related to the counter value becomes less than 0. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and may be configured as follows. Note that the various numerical values shown below are just examples, and there is no problem in changing them.

(Configuration 1)
The MY counter is a decrement counter, and has an initial value of 2400, an upper limit of 2400, and a lower limit of 0. When the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after the start of the advantageous section exceeds a specific value (2400 in this example), the calculation result related to the counter value of the MY counter becomes less than 0, The advantageous section ends and becomes the normal section. In other words, the advantageous section is configured to end and become a normal section when the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest difference after the start of the advantageous section exceeds a specific value (2400 in this example). If there is a period in which the number of differences decreases from the start of the advantageous section, the maximum number of differences based on the timing when the number of differences from the start of the advantageous section is the smallest is a specific value (2400 in this example). The configuration is such that when the number is exceeded, the advantageous section ends and becomes a normal section.

(Configuration 2)
The MY counter is an increment counter, and has an initial value of 0, an upper limit of 2400, and a lower limit of 0. When the number of differences from the start of the advantageous section exceeds a specific value (2400 in this example), the calculation result related to the counter value of the MY counter exceeds 2400, and the advantageous section ends and becomes a normal section. In other words, when the number of differences from the start of the advantageous section exceeds a specific value (2400 in this example), the advantageous section ends and becomes a normal section, and the period in which the number of differences decreases from the start of the advantageous section. Even if there is, the advantageous section is configured to end and become a normal section when the number of differences based on the start of the advantageous section exceeds a specific value (2400 in this example).

(Configuration 3)
The MY counter is an increment counter, and has an initial value of 5600, an upper limit of 8000, and a lower limit of 0. When the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number after the start of the advantageous section exceeds a specific value (in this example, 2400), the calculation result related to the counter value of the MY counter exceeds 8000, The advantageous section ends and becomes the normal section. In other words, the advantageous section is configured to end and become a normal section when the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest difference after the start of the advantageous section exceeds a specific value (2400 in this example). If there is a period in which the number of differences decreases from the start of the advantageous section, the maximum number of differences based on the timing when the number of differences from the start of the advantageous section is the smallest is a specific value (2400 in this example). The configuration is such that when the number is exceeded, the advantageous section ends and becomes a normal section. In addition, when configured in this way, if the calculation result related to the counter value of the MY counter falls below the lower limit value, the counter value will not become a value less than 0. If the calculation result exceeds 8000 and the advantageous section ends, the advantageous section ends in a situation where the number of differences from the start of the advantageous section is less than a specific value (2400 in this example). Further, by adjusting the initial value of the counter value of the MY counter, it is possible to make it difficult for the counter value of the MY counter to fall below 0.

Note that in this specification, exceeding a predetermined value (19000 in this example) may be referred to as being equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 19001), and being less than or equal to a predetermined value (19000 in this example) This is sometimes referred to as being less than a predetermined value (for example, 19001). In addition, exceeding a specific value (2400 in this example) is sometimes referred to as exceeding a specific value (for example, 2401), and being below a specific value (2400 in this example) is referred to as a specific value. (for example, 2401).

<<Illustration regarding the state of prior notification of discontinuation>>
Next, FIG. 60 is a diagram regarding the discontinuation advance notification state. As described above, in the second embodiment, when the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the process is stopped; It is configured so that the game cannot be played.

If a player is in the middle of playing a game and suddenly the game is stopped, the player suddenly becomes unable to continue playing the game, even though he or she would have finished the game if he had known in advance. A situation may occur where the player continues playing the game because he or she is not aware of it, and is unable to obtain the profit that he or she expected to obtain. Therefore, in the second embodiment, by notifying the player that the discontinuation state is near at a stage before the discontinuation state occurs, in other words, with a smaller number of differences than the discontinuation state, the player is informed that the discontinuation state is near. The system is designed to prevent disadvantageous situations from occurring.

In addition, in FIG. 60, the configuration is such that the counter value of the difference counter can be updated every time a game is executed.

First, at timing (1) in the figure, the power is turned on to the gaming machine, and initial processing at power-on is executed. Thereafter, for example, as the game progresses in the normal section, the number of differences decreases, and at the timing (2) in the figure, the timing when the number of differences after the power is turned on is the smallest is reached. After that, the number of differences increases while transitioning between the advantageous section and the normal section, and at the timing (3) in the figure, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on is reached. It is equal to or greater than the first value (16950 in this example). Note that, at the timing (3) in the figure, the effect display device S40 does not display a discontinued state suggestion display, which will be described later.

After that, for example, as the game progresses in the advantageous section, the number of differences increases, and at the timing (4) in the figure, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on is reached. , the second value (in this example, 17000) or more, and the discontinuation advance notification state is entered.

In this way, in the second embodiment, when the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on becomes equal to or greater than the second value (17,000 in this example), the sub-control board The S side is configured to shift to a discontinued advance notification state. Note that the pre-termination notification state is a state for informing the player that the game is about to be discontinued, and there is no change in the gaming situation. In other words, even if the game is in the discontinuance advance notification state, the game can continue. In addition, when the state of discontinuation advance notification is reached, a discontinuation state suggestion display will be displayed on the sub-control board S side. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that when the pre-discontinuation notification state is entered, the speaker S20 outputs a voice such as "The discontinuation state will soon occur." Further, the decorative lamp unit D150 or the like may be configured to notify that the state is in the discontinued advance notification state.

Furthermore, the configuration in which the sub-control board S side shifts to the termination advance notification state may be configured as follows.
(1) Whether or not information regarding the counter value of the difference counter is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side shifts to the discontinuation advance notification state based on the information regarding the counter value. to judge.
(2) Send the number of bets and the number of payouts from the main control board M side to the sub-control board S side for each game, calculate the difference number on the sub-control board S side, and enter the cancellation advance notification state based on the difference number. Decide whether to migrate or not.

Further, the second value (17,000 in this example) is smaller than the predetermined value (19,000 in this example) that is the difference number that causes the discontinuation state. Although not shown, if the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on is equal to or greater than the second value (17,000 in this example), the main control It may be configured such that a predetermined flag on the board M side is turned on.

At the timing (4) in the figure, after entering the discontinued advance notification state, for example, the game progresses in the advantageous section, and after the number of differences increases for a while, the game progresses in the normal section, for example. The number of differences decreases, and at timing (5) in the figure, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on is the second value (17,000 in this example). However, the discontinuation advance notification state is configured not to end.

After that, for example, as the game progresses in the normal section, the number of differences decreases, and at the timing (6) in the diagram, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on is reached. , becomes less than the first value (16950 in this example), the discontinuation advance notification state ends, and the discontinuation state suggestion display on the sub-control board S side is also hidden.

In the figure, from the timing (4) in the figure to the timing (6) in the figure, the state is in the discontinued advance notification state.

After that, for example, after the game progresses in the normal section and the number of differences decreases for a while, the game progresses in the advantageous section and the number of differences increases, and the timing (7) in the figure In this case, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after the power is turned on becomes greater than or equal to the first value (16950 in this example), but the system is configured so as not to shift to the discontinuation advance notification state. ing.

After that, for example, as the game progresses in the advantageous section, the number of differences increases, and at the timing (8) in the figure, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on is reached. , the second value (in this example, 17000) or more, the state shifts to the discontinuation advance notification state again, and a discontinuation state suggestion display is displayed on the sub-control board S side.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number after power-on is a value smaller than the predetermined value (19000 in this example) at which the discontinuation state is reached. 2 (in this example, 17,000) or more, the system is configured such that the state shifts to a pre-discontinuation notification state, and a discontinuation state suggestion display is executed on the sub-control board S side. With this configuration, the player can recognize that the game is about to be stopped before the game is stopped, and can decide whether or not to continue playing the game.

In addition, after transitioning to the cancellation advance notification state, even if the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference after power-on is less than the second value (17000 in this example), The first value (main value) whose maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number after power-on without ending the notification state is smaller than the second value (17000 in this example). In the example, the discontinuation advance notification state is configured to end when it becomes less than 16950). With this configuration, in a situation where the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on is close to the second value (17,000 in this example), the common bell etc. It often happens that when you win a small prize, the maximum difference number based on the timing when the difference number is the smallest after the power is turned on is higher or lower than the second value (in this example, 17000). Even in such a case, the discontinuation advance notification state does not end, so the discontinuation state suggestion display does not repeat being displayed and hidden on the sub-control board S side, so that the player does not feel bothered. be able to.

In addition, in the second embodiment, as described above at timing (6) in the figure, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on is the first value (in this example, . ) or more, it does not move to the discontinuation advance notification state, and the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number after power-on is equal to or more than the second value (17000 in this example). As a result, the system is configured to shift to the discontinued advance notification state again. With this configuration, the condition for transitioning to the discontinued advance notification state is such that the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on is equal to or greater than the second value (17,000 in this example). It is possible to unify the following, and it is possible to simplify the processing related to the discontinuation advance notification state. In addition, the stop state suggestion display does not repeat being displayed and hidden on the sub-control board S side, so that it is possible to configure the system so that the player does not feel bothered.

Further, the difference between the second value (17000 in this example) and the first value (16950 in this example), which is illustrated as "A" in FIG. 60, is 50 in the second embodiment. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the maximum number of coins paid out in one small winning combination (winning combination) is 11 coins (for example, "winning prize 01" shown in FIG. 8), and the second value The difference between the first value (17000 in this example) and the first value (16950 in this example) is greater than the maximum number of coins paid out in one small winning combination (winning combination).

In addition, the gaming machine shown in FIG. 60 is capable of executing push order navigation in a 3-piece bet game within a bonus won in a 2-piece bet game, and is also capable of executing an AT lottery in a 3-piece bet game. When applying the configuration related to "A", the maximum number of coins to be paid out of the number of minor winning combinations (winning combinations) that can be won in a 3-card bet game, which is the specified number that allows AT lottery to be executed. It may also be configured such that "A" in FIG. 60 becomes larger. In other words, in this gaming machine, in games other than betting 3 coins, which is the specified number that allows the AT lottery to be executed, a small winning combination (winning winning combination) with a payout number greater than "A" in FIG. 60 is won. You can.

In addition, in gaming machines (sometimes referred to as A type) that do not execute AT and acquire game medals (gaming value) by executing bonuses, at least one predetermined number (for example, when playing a game, the main It may be configured such that "A" in FIG. 60 is larger than the maximum number of coins to be paid out of the number of coins to be paid out for small winning combinations (winning combinations) that can be won in a 3-card bet applied to . In other words, in the gaming machine, in a game with a specified number other than the above-mentioned one specified number, a small winning combination (winning combination) that has a larger number of payout coins than “A” in FIG. 60 may be won.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the counter value of the difference counter can be updated every time a game is executed after the power is turned on, regardless of the specified number or the gaming state. It is configured. With this configuration, even if the game progresses while changing the prescribed number or the game state changes multiple times, the counter value of the difference counter can be updated appropriately, suppressing the gambling nature. can do.

Note that the difference counter is configured so that the counter value can be updated each time a game is executed, regardless of the specified number, so in the case of a gaming machine that can execute games with multiple specified numbers, It may be configured such that "A" in FIG. 60 is larger than the maximum number of coins to be paid out among the number of coins to be paid out for small winning combinations (winning combinations) that can be won for each number.

With this configuration, even when the game is progressed using multiple types of specified numbers, the stop state suggestion display will not be repeatedly displayed and hidden on the sub-control board S side. It can be configured so that the player does not feel bothered.

With this configuration, in the next game after the discontinuation advance notification state has ended (for example, at the timing (6) in FIG. It can be configured so that the sub control board S side does not display and hide the abort status suggestion display repeatedly.

Note that the maximum number of coins paid out by winning one small winning combination (winning combination) may be referred to as the maximum number of gaming values given to the player in one game. The payout number includes not only the number of game medals that are paid out outside the gaming machine, but also the gaming medals that are stored as credits. It may also be the number of medals.

In addition, in the second embodiment, "becomes more than the first value (in this example, 16950)" is replaced with "exceeds the first value (in this example, 16950)", and "becomes the first value (in this example, 16950)" In this example, "less than 16950)" may be replaced with "less than or equal to the first value (16950 in this example)". Also, replace "becomes the second value (in this example, 17,000) or more" with "exceeds the second value (in this example, 17,000)", and replace "the second value (in this example, 17,000)". "less than" may be replaced with "less than or equal to the second value (17000 in this example)".

<Configuration related to discontinuation advance notification status>
One or more of the following configurations may be applied as the configuration regarding the discontinuation advance notification state.
(1) After transitioning to the discontinuation advance notification state, if the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference after power-on becomes less than the second value (17000 in this example), the discontinuation advance notice will be issued. The state ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the capacity used regarding the cancellation advance notification state.
(2) Even in a situation where a standby demonstration is being displayed on the performance display device S40, the discontinuation state suggestion display is displayed in a visible manner.
(3) When a predetermined operation is performed on the sub-input button SB etc. in a situation where the discontinuation state suggestion display is displayed on the effect display device S40, a menu screen can be displayed on the effect display device S40, and the menu screen is displayed. Inside, the discontinuation state suggestion display is not displayed (it may be invisible or the visibility may be reduced).
(4) In the discontinuation advance notification state, it is possible to output a voice related to the remaining difference number until the discontinuation state, such as "○○ sheets remaining until the discontinuation state" from the speaker S20.
(5) In the discontinuation advance notification state, the timing for outputting audio regarding the remaining difference until the discontinuation state is only once, at the timing when the discontinuation advance notice state is entered.
(6) In the pre-cancellation notification state, the timing to output the audio regarding the remaining difference until the cancellation state is the timing when the remaining difference until the cancellation state reaches a predetermined value, and the timing is set to 1 or 1. I have had it multiple times.
(7) When displaying the discontinuation state suggestion display on the effect display device S40, it is displayed in a blinking display that switches at predetermined intervals (for example, every 0.5 seconds), and the display area overlaps with the discontinuation state suggestion display. (or the image displayed on the rear surface) is visible.
(8) The discontinuation state suggestion display has a higher display priority than the AT acquisition number display, etc. (see FIG. 66).
(9) The discontinuation state suggestion display has a higher display priority than the push order navigation display.
(10) The discontinuation state suggestion display has a lower display priority than the AT acquisition number display, etc. (see FIG. 66).
(11) The discontinuation state suggestion display has a lower display priority than the push order navigation display.

<<Figure 1 regarding the case where the difference number condition is exceeded during the bonus>>
Next, FIG. 61 shows that during a bonus (for example, while RB is operating), the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example). FIG. In the figure, "running" for "bonus" indicates that the bonus is being executed, and "not running" for "bonus" indicates that the bonus is not being executed. In addition, "in a discontinued state" of "discontinued state" indicates that the discontinued flag is on and is in a discontinued state, and "not in a discontinued state" indicates that the discontinued flag is off and the discontinued state is in a discontinued state. This shows that it is not.

First, at the timing (1) in the figure, a new bonus is started to be executed. Since the maximum sheet difference after the power is turned on does not exceed a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the process is not stopped. After that, at timing (2) in the diagram, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), but the bonus is still being executed. Therefore, it does not move to the discontinued state. Note that after the timing (2) in the figure, the abort reservation flag is on and the abort flag is off (see FIG. 57).

Note that a state where the abort reservation flag is on and the abort reservation flag is off may be referred to as a abort reservation state. Although not shown, when the reservation status is canceled, a command indicating that the reservation status is canceled is sent from the main control board M side to the sub-control board S side, and the performance display on the sub-control board S side is performed. The device S40 is configured to display a cancellation reservation display stating, "After the bonus ends, the game will be in a cancellation state." Note that the notification on the sub-control board S side is just an example, and the notification means may be added or changed, or the notification mode may be changed.

After the timing (2) in the diagram, the game during the bonus progresses, and at the timing (3) in the diagram, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest difference after power-on is set to a predetermined value. (in this example, 19000), the bonus termination condition is satisfied, the bonus is terminated, and the state shifts to a discontinued state.

In addition, in the same figure, although the case where RB is operating as a bonus is illustrated, the same structure can be applied to 1st type BB and 2nd type BB. Further, in the case where the present invention is applied to a type 1 BB and has a type 1 BB general medium in which the type 1 BB is operating and the RB is not operating, the following configuration may be used.
(1) In a situation where Type 1 BB is operating and RB is operating, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on is a predetermined value (in this example, 19000 ), the state shifts to a discontinued state at the timing of the exceedance.
(2) In a situation where Type 1 BB is operating and RB is operating, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on is a predetermined value (in this example, 19000 ), the game does not move to the stopped state at the timing when the game exceeds the limit, but moves to the stopped state at the timing when the RB in progress ends and the next game becomes a type 1 BB general game.
(3) In a situation where Type 1 BB is operating and RB is operating, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on is a predetermined value (in this example, 19000 ), the process does not shift to the discontinued state at the timing of the exceedance, but shifts to the discontinued state at the timing when the type 1 BB being executed ends.

Note that such a configuration is also applicable to configurations illustrated in FIGS. 62 and 63, which will be described later.

<<Figure 2 regarding the case where the difference number condition is exceeded during the bonus>>
Next, FIG. 62 shows that during the bonus (for example, while RB is operating), the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example). FIG. In the figure, "running" for "bonus" indicates that the bonus is being executed, and "not running" for "bonus" indicates that the bonus is not being executed. In addition, "in a discontinued state" of "discontinued state" indicates that the discontinued flag is on and is in a discontinued state, and "not in a discontinued state" indicates that the discontinued flag is off and the discontinued state is in a discontinued state. This shows that it is not.

First, at the timing (1) in the figure, a new bonus is started to be executed. Since the maximum sheet difference after the power is turned on does not exceed a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the process is not stopped. After that, at timing (2) in the diagram, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), but the bonus is still being executed. Therefore, it does not move to the discontinued state. Note that after the timing (2) in the figure, the abort reservation flag is on and the abort flag is off (see FIG. 57).

After the timing (2) in the diagram, the game during the bonus progresses, and at the timing (3) in the diagram, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest difference after power-on is set to a predetermined value. (19000 in this example) or less. After that, at timing (4) in the diagram, the bonus end condition is satisfied in a situation where the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on is less than or equal to a predetermined value (19,000 in this example) and the bonus ends. At the timing (4) in the figure, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on is less than the predetermined value (19,000 in this example), but the state shifts to the aborted state. That will happen. In addition, at the timing (4) in the figure, the system is configured to shift to the cancellation state based on the fact that the cancellation reservation flag is on at the end of the execution of the bonus.

With this configuration, at any timing during bonus execution, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example). In this case, it is possible to shift to a discontinued state after the execution of the bonus is completed, thereby making it possible to provide a gaming machine with suppressed gambling elements.

In addition, in (2) of FIG. 62, the bonus ends after the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19000 in this example). The counter value of the difference counter may be configured not to be updated until the end of the bonus, or may be configured such that the counter value of the difference counter is updated even until the bonus ends.

Also, if the maximum number of differences after the power is turned on during the bonus exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example) based on the timing with the smallest difference after the power is turned on, at the end of the bonus, If the maximum number of differences based on the timing at which the number of differences is the smallest is less than or equal to a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the system may be configured not to shift to the discontinued state.

In addition, even if the bonus is in progress, if the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the state will be canceled at that timing. It may be configured to move to In the case of such a configuration, there is no need to provide the cancellation reservation flag shown in FIG. 57 or the process like step 3724 in FIG. 57 regarding whether or not the game is a bonus game.

<<Figure 3 regarding the case where the difference number condition is exceeded during the bonus>>
Next, FIG. 63 shows that during a bonus (for example, while RB is operating), the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example). FIG. In the figure, "running" for "bonus" indicates that the bonus is being executed, and "not running" for "bonus" indicates that the bonus is not being executed. In addition, "in a discontinued state" of "discontinued state" indicates that the discontinued flag is on and is in a discontinued state, and "not in a discontinued state" indicates that the discontinued flag is off and the discontinued state is in a discontinued state. This shows that it is not.

First, at the timing (1) in the figure, a new bonus is started to be executed. Since the maximum sheet difference after the power is turned on does not exceed a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the process is not stopped. After that, at timing (2) in the diagram, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), but the bonus is still being executed. Therefore, it does not move to the discontinued state. Note that after the timing (2) in the figure, the abort reservation flag is on and the abort flag is off (see FIG. 57).

After the timing (2) in the diagram, the game during the bonus progresses, and at the timing (3) in the diagram, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest difference after power-on is set to a predetermined value. (19000 in this example) or less. Thereafter, at timing (4) in the diagram, the power to the gaming machine is turned on in a situation where the maximum number of differences is less than a predetermined value (19,000 in this example) based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after the power was turned on. The supply is cut off, the gaming machine detects the power outage, and executes the power outage process. Note that when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off and the gaming machine detects the power off and executes the power off process, this may be referred to as the occurrence of a power off.

Thereafter, the power is turned on without clearing the RAM, and at the timing (5) in the figure when the initial processing at power-on is executed, the bonus that was being executed before the power was turned off is resumed from where it left off. In addition, when the power is turned off and the power is turned on without clearing the RAM, the counter value of the difference counter is initialized (the initial value 19000 is set to the counter value of the difference counter), and the power is turned on without clearing the RAM. The maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after the introduction is 0, and the game is not in a discontinued state. Note that at the timing (5) in the figure, the cancellation reservation flag is on.

After that, the game during the bonus progresses, and at the timing (6) in the diagram, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on is set to a predetermined value (in this example, 19000) In the following situations, the bonus termination conditions are met and the bonus ends. At timing (6) in the figure, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on is less than or equal to the predetermined value (19,000 in this example), but the state shifts to the aborted state. That will happen. In addition, at the timing (6) in the figure, the system is configured to shift to the cancellation state based on the fact that the cancellation reservation flag is on at the end of the execution of the bonus. That is, even if the power is cut off, the information regarding the turning on of the cancellation reservation flag is restored after the power is restored.

With this configuration, at any timing during bonus execution, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example). In this case, even if the power is cut off while the bonus is being executed, the power can be restored and the state can be stopped when the bonus ends, making it possible to create a gaming machine with less gambling elements. can do.

Note that after the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest difference after the power is turned on in (2) of FIG. 63 exceeds a predetermined value (19000 in this example), (4) of FIG. The counter value of the difference counter remains unchanged until the power-off process is executed in (5) of FIG. 63 and/or until the bonus ends in (6) of FIG. may be configured not to update, or may be configured so that the counter value of the difference counter is updated. When configured not to update the counter value of the difference counter, the determination may be made based on whether the cancellation reservation flag is on.

<<If you win a replay in the final bonus game>>
Note that when the configurations shown in FIGS. 60 to 62 are applied during execution of RB, the configuration may be configured to have the following effects.

<Configuration 1>
(1) RB is being executed.
(2) During execution of RB, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example).
(3) In a situation where the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after the power is turned on is greater than a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the final game of RB is executed and the replay winning combination is is won, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stopped and displayed.
(4) The transaction is suspended and automatic payment is executed. Automatic bets corresponding to re-gaming combinations are not executed.

<Configuration 2>
(1) RB is being executed.
(2) During execution of RB, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example).
(3) During execution of RB, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on becomes less than or equal to a predetermined value (19,000 in this example).
(4) In a situation where the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after the power is turned on is less than or equal to a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the final game of RB is executed and the replay winning combination is won. Then, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stopped and displayed.
(5) The transaction is suspended and automatic payment is executed. Automatic bets corresponding to re-gaming combinations are not executed.

<Configuration 3>
(1) RB is being executed.
(2) During execution of RB, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example).
(3) During execution of RB, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on becomes less than or equal to a predetermined value (19,000 in this example).
(4) Power outage occurs.
(5) When the power is restored and the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences since the power was turned on is less than or equal to a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the final game of RB is executed and restarted. The symbol combination corresponding to the winning winning of the game winning combination and the replaying winning combination is stopped and displayed.
(6) The transaction is suspended and automatic payment is executed. Automatic bets corresponding to re-gaming combinations are not executed.

<Configuration 4>
(1) RB is being executed.
(2) During execution of RB, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example).
(3) In a situation where the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after the power is turned on is greater than a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the final game of RB is executed and the replay winning combination is is won, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stopped and displayed.
(4) The automatic bet corresponding to the re-gaming combination is executed, but since the bet is stopped, the operation of the start lever is invalid and automatic settlement is executed. Note that the automatically betted game medals (gaming value) may be configured not to be automatically settled.

<Configuration 5>
(1) RB is being executed.
(2) During execution of RB, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example).
(3) During execution of RB, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on becomes less than or equal to a predetermined value (19,000 in this example).
(4) In a situation where the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after the power is turned on is less than or equal to a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the final game of RB is executed and the replay winning combination is won. Then, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stopped and displayed.
(5) The automatic bet corresponding to the re-gaming combination is executed, but since the bet is stopped, the operation of the start lever is invalid and automatic settlement is executed. Note that the automatically betted game medals (gaming value) may be configured not to be automatically settled.

<Configuration 6>
(1) RB is being executed.
(2) During execution of RB, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example).
(3) During execution of RB, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on becomes less than or equal to a predetermined value (19,000 in this example).
(4) Power outage occurs.
(5) When the power is restored and the maximum number of differences is less than or equal to a predetermined value (19,000 in this example) based on the timing with the smallest number of differences since the power was turned on, the final game of RB is executed and restarted. The symbol combination corresponding to the winning winning of the game winning combination and the replaying winning combination is stopped and displayed.
(6) The automatic bet corresponding to the re-gaming combination is executed, but since the bet is stopped, the operation of the start lever is invalid and automatic settlement is executed. Note that the automatically betted game medals (gaming value) may be configured not to be automatically settled.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62, in the second embodiment, during bonus execution, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on is set to a predetermined value (main value). In the example, even if the number exceeds 19000), automatic payment is not executed at that timing. On the other hand, if the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example) even once during execution of the bonus, the bonus ends. When the final game is executed, automatic settlement is executed after the payout of game medals corresponding to the final game is completed (this configuration is shown in FIGS. 60 to 62). ).

In addition, in the case that the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number after power-on during the bonus exceeds a predetermined value (19000 in this example), and then the bonus is discontinued when the bonus ends. may be configured as follows. Furthermore, when the bonus ends, the end screen will be displayed regardless of whether or not it goes into the stopped state, and you will not be able to place bets for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) after the start of the end screen. There is a bonus end wait period in which lever operations are also disabled.
(1) The game that is the final game of the bonus ends → The bonus end wait period begins, and the effect display device S40 displays the end screen as well as a display indicating that the cancellation is in progress → The bonus end wait period ends and automatic settlement is executed (2) The game that is the final game of the bonus ends → The bonus end wait period begins, and the end screen is displayed on the effect display device S40 → The bonus end wait period ends and automatic settlement is executed → After the automatic payment is completed, a discontinued status display is displayed on the performance display device S40.

<<Operation chart regarding the game that won the small role>>
Next, when a game in which a small winning combination is won is executed and game medals are paid out based on the small winning combination, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest difference after the power is turned on is set as a predetermined value. The case where the value exceeds the value (19000 in this example) will be explained in detail using FIGS. 64 and 65. In addition, in FIGS. 64 and 65, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on is 18995, and a game in which the 10-card winning bell was won is being executed. , a case is illustrated in which two reels are stopped and one reel, which is the final reel, is rotating.

In addition, the "rotating" state of the "last reel" shown in the figure indicates that two reels are stopped and one reel, which is the final reel, is rotating. "Stopped" indicates that all reels are stopped. In addition, "while being pressed" for the "stop button" indicates that the stop button corresponding to the last reel is being physically pressed, regardless of whether the stop button operation is valid or not. "Not pressed" indicates that the stop button is not physically pressed. In addition, "in progress" of "payout process" indicates that the process of adding to credits or paying out game medals outside the gaming machine is being executed, and the payout process includes, for example, This corresponds to steps 1232 to 1248 in No. 17 and steps 1275 to 1290 in FIG. "Not in progress" of "Payout process" indicates that the process of adding to credits and the process of paying out game medals outside the gaming machine is not being executed. Note that the payout process may be referred to as the grant process. Furthermore, when applied to a medalless reel-type gaming machine, "execution" of "payout process" indicates that the process of adding points to the total score display device is being executed. In addition, the "stop flag" is a graphical representation of the status of the stop flag controlled on the main control board M side (or during execution of power-on processing), and the "status on the sub control board side" is , which illustrates the state of the sub-control board S side.

Furthermore, timings in FIGS. 64 and 65 that have the same numbers are the same or substantially the same timings. In addition, in the gaming machines illustrated in FIGS. 64 and 65, when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is displayed in a stopped state, the final stop button (stop button corresponding to the final reel) is pressed. When the final stop button is not pressed (the final stop button is released), the payout process is executed.

<A: When the payout process ends before the power outage process>
First, under the situation where the final reel is rotating, the stop button corresponding to the final reel has not been pressed, the payout process has not been executed, the stoppage flag is off, and the stoppage advance notification state is in progress. At the middle (1) timing, the final stop button is pressed and the final reel stops. It should be noted that although it takes a short time from when the final stop button is pressed until the final reel stops, the timing is shown as being the same for the sake of simplification of explanation.

Thereafter, at timing (2) in the figure, the final stop button is not pressed and the symbol combination corresponding to the bell of the 10-card winning combination is stopped and displayed, so that the payout process is executed. Thereafter, at timing (4) in the figure, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Thereafter, at timing (6) in the figure, the gaming machine detects a power outage. Thereafter, at the timing (7) in the figure, which is the timing before the gaming machine executes the power-off process, the payout process ends and the maximum difference is reached based on the timing with the smallest difference after the power-on. Since the difference number exceeds a predetermined value (in this example, 19000) (became 19005), the abort flag is turned on and the process shifts to the abort state. Thereafter, at timing (8) in the figure, the gaming machine executes the power-off process.

Thereafter, at timing (10) in the figure, power is turned on without RAM clearing, and initial processing at power-on (sometimes referred to as power-on processing) is started. Thereafter, at timing (12) in the figure, the initial processing at the time of power-on is completed, the abort flag is turned on, and the system shifts to the abort state again.

<B: When the payout process does not end before the power-off process 1>
First, under the situation where the final reel is rotating, the stop button corresponding to the final reel has not been pressed, the payout process has not been executed, the stoppage flag is off, and the stoppage advance notification state is in progress, At the middle (1) timing, the final stop button is pressed and the final reel stops. It should be noted that although it takes a short time from when the final stop button is pressed until the final reel stops, the timing is shown as being the same for the sake of simplification of explanation.

Thereafter, at timing (3) in the figure, the final stop button is not pressed and the symbol combination corresponding to the bell of the 10-card winning combination is stopped and displayed, so the payout process is executed. Thereafter, at timing (4) in the figure, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Thereafter, at timing (6) in the figure, the gaming machine detects a power outage. Thereafter, at timing (8) in the figure, the gaming machine executes the power-off process in a situation where the payout process is not completed.

Thereafter, at timing (10) in the figure, the power is turned on without RAM clearing, and the initial processing at power-on starts to be executed. Thereafter, at the timing (12) in the figure, the initial processing at the time of power-on is completed, the payout process is restarted from the middle, the discontinuation flag is turned off, and the discontinuation advance notification state is entered. Note that when the power is turned off and the power is turned on without clearing the RAM, the difference counter is initialized (the counter value of the difference counter is set to the initial value 19000), ), the maximum difference number is 0 based on the timing with the smallest difference after the power is turned on, but after the power is turned on, the difference counter update process (for example, the step in FIG. 57) 3712) has not been executed, the discontinuation advance notification state before the power is turned off will be restored.

Thereafter, at timing (13) in the diagram, the payout process ends, and the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on does not exceed a predetermined value (19,000 in this example). Therefore, it does not shift to the stopped state, but shifts to the normal state. In addition, in the figure, a state in which the game can proceed, which is neither a discontinued state nor a discontinued advance notification state, is referred to as a normal state. In addition, in (B), the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets related to the executed game from the game medals paid out corresponding to the bell of the 10-card winning combination is configured to be subtracted from the counter value of the difference counter. has been done. In addition, in FIGS. 64 and 65, subtracting the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets related to the executed game from the game medals paid out after the power is turned on from the counter value of the difference counter is the update process regarding the number of differences. Sometimes called execution. Note that even in the event of a power outage, when the power is restored, the information regarding the number of bets that was stored before the power was turned off is restored, so that the counter value of the difference counter can be updated after the power is restored.

In the second embodiment, the initial value of the counter value of the difference counter (in this example, 19000) and the counter value of the difference counter that will transition to the discontinuation advance notification state (in this example, 2000) The difference is larger than the maximum number of coins paid out (11 in this example) due to one small winning combination (winning combination), so the difference in (13) in the diagram in (B) The timing is configured so as not to shift to the discontinued advance notification state.

In addition, the difference between the initial value of the counter value of the difference counter and the counter value of the difference counter that will shift to the discontinued advance notification state is the maximum number of coins that will be paid out in one small winning combination (winning combination). When configured to be smaller than , the discontinuation advance notification state may be maintained at the timing (13) in the diagram (B).

<C: If the payout process does not end before the power-off process 2>
First, under the situation where the final reel is rotating, the stop button corresponding to the final reel has not been pressed, the payout process has not been executed, the stoppage flag is off, and the stoppage advance notification state is in progress, At the middle (1) timing, the final stop button is pressed and the final reel stops. It should be noted that although it takes a short time from when the final stop button is pressed until the final reel stops, the timing is shown as being the same for the sake of simplification of explanation.

Thereafter, at timing (4) in the figure, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Thereafter, at timing (5) in the figure, the final stop button is not pressed and the symbol combination corresponding to the bell of the 10-card winning combination is stopped and displayed, so that the payout process is executed. Thereafter, at timing (6) in the figure, the gaming machine detects a power outage. Thereafter, at timing (8) in the figure, the gaming machine executes the power-off process in a situation where the payout process is not completed.

Thereafter, at timing (10) in the figure, the power is turned on without RAM clearing, and the initial processing at power-on starts to be executed. Thereafter, at the timing (12) in the figure, the initial processing at the time of power-on is completed, the payout process is restarted from the middle, the discontinuation flag is turned off, and the discontinuation advance notification state is entered. Note that when the power is turned off and the power is turned on without clearing the RAM, the difference counter is initialized (the counter value of the difference counter is set to the initial value 19000), ), the maximum difference number is 0 based on the timing with the smallest difference after the power is turned on, but after the power is turned on, the difference counter update process (for example, the step in FIG. 57) 3712) has not been executed, the discontinuation advance notification state before the power is turned off will be restored.

Thereafter, at timing (14) in the diagram, the payout process ends, and the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on does not exceed a predetermined value (19,000 in this example). Therefore, it does not shift to the stopped state, but shifts to the normal state. In addition, in (C), the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets related to the executed game from the game medals paid out corresponding to the bell of the 10-card winning combination is configured to be subtracted from the counter value of the difference counter. has been done.

In the second embodiment, the initial value of the counter value of the difference counter (in this example, 19000) and the counter value of the difference counter that will transition to the discontinuation advance notification state (in this example, 2000) Since the difference is configured to be larger than the maximum number of coins (11 in this example) that can be paid out in one small winning combination (winning combination), the difference in (14) in the diagram in (C) The timing is configured so as not to shift to the discontinued advance notification state.

In addition, the difference between the initial value of the counter value of the difference counter and the counter value of the difference counter that will shift to the discontinued advance notification state is the maximum number of coins that will be paid out in one small winning combination (winning combination). When configured to be smaller than , the discontinuation advance notification state may be maintained at the timing (14) in the diagram (C).

<D: If the payout process does not end before the power-off process 3>
First, under the situation where the final reel is rotating, the stop button corresponding to the final reel has not been pressed, the payout process has not been executed, the stoppage flag is off, and the stoppage advance notification state is in progress. At the middle (1) timing, the final stop button is pressed and the final reel stops. It should be noted that although it takes a short time from when the final stop button is pressed until the final reel stops, the timing is shown as being the same for the sake of simplification of explanation.

Thereafter, at timing (4) in the figure, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Thereafter, at timing (6) in the figure, the gaming machine detects a power outage. Thereafter, at timing (7) in the figure, the final stop button is not pressed and the symbol combination corresponding to the bell of the 10-card winning combination is stopped and displayed, so that the payout process is executed. Thereafter, at timing (8) in the figure, the gaming machine executes the power-off process in a situation where the payout process is not completed.

Thereafter, at timing (10) in the figure, the power is turned on without RAM clearing, and the initial processing at power-on starts to be executed. Thereafter, at the timing (12) in the figure, the initial processing at the time of power-on is completed, the payout process is restarted from the middle, the discontinuation flag is turned off, and the discontinuation advance notification state is entered. Note that when the power is turned off and the power is turned on without clearing the RAM, the difference counter is initialized (the counter value of the difference counter is set to the initial value 19000), ), the maximum difference number is 0 based on the timing with the smallest difference after the power is turned on, but after the power is turned on, the difference counter update process (for example, the step in FIG. 57) 3712) has not been executed, the discontinuation advance notification state before the power is turned off will be restored.

Thereafter, at timing (15) in the figure, the payout process ends, and the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on does not exceed a predetermined value (19,000 in this example). Therefore, it does not shift to the stopped state, but shifts to the normal state. Further, in (D), the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets related to the executed game from the game medals paid out in response to the bell of the 10-card winning combination is configured to be subtracted from the counter value of the difference counter. has been done.

In the second embodiment, the initial value of the counter value of the difference counter (in this example, 19000) and the counter value of the difference counter that will transition to the discontinuation advance notification state (in this example, 2000) Since the difference is configured to be larger than the maximum number of coins paid out (11 in this example) by winning one small winning combination (winning combination), the difference in (15) in the diagram in (D) The timing is configured so as not to shift to the discontinued advance notification state.

In addition, the difference between the initial value of the counter value of the difference counter and the counter value of the difference counter that will shift to the discontinued advance notification state is the maximum number of coins that will be paid out in one small winning combination (winning combination). When configured to be smaller than , the discontinuation advance notification state may be maintained at the timing (15) in the diagram (D).

<E: If you release the stop button while the power is off>
First, under the situation where the final reel is rotating, the stop button corresponding to the final reel has not been pressed, the payout process has not been executed, the stoppage flag is off, and the stoppage advance notification state is in progress. At the middle (1) timing, the final stop button is pressed and the final reel stops. It should be noted that although it takes a short time from when the final stop button is pressed until the final reel stops, the timing is shown as being the same for the sake of simplification of explanation.

Thereafter, at timing (4) in the figure, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Thereafter, at timing (6) in the figure, the gaming machine detects a power outage. Thereafter, at timing (8) in the figure, the gaming machine executes the power-off process in a situation where the payout process is not being executed. After that, at the timing (9) in the figure, when the gaming machine is not powered on (sometimes referred to as power off), the final stop button is not pressed, but the gaming machine is powered on. Therefore, the payout process will not be executed at this timing.

Thereafter, at timing (10) in the figure, the power is turned on without RAM clearing, and the initial processing at power-on starts to be executed. Thereafter, at the timing (12) in the figure, the initial processing at the time of power-on is completed, the payout process is started, the discontinuation flag is turned off, and the discontinuation advance notification state is entered. Note that when the power is turned off and the power is turned on without clearing the RAM, the difference counter is initialized (the counter value of the difference counter is set to the initial value 19000), ), the maximum difference number is 0 based on the timing with the smallest difference after the power is turned on, but after the power is turned on, the difference counter update process (for example, the step in FIG. 57) 3712) has not been executed, the discontinuation advance notification state before the power is turned off will be restored.

Thereafter, at timing (16) in the figure, the payout process ends, and the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on does not exceed a predetermined value (19,000 in this example). Therefore, it does not shift to the stopped state, but shifts to the normal state. In addition, in (E), the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets related to the executed game from the game medals paid out in response to the bell of the 10-card winning combination is configured to be subtracted from the counter value of the difference counter. has been done.

In the second embodiment, the initial value of the counter value of the difference counter (in this example, 19000) and the counter value of the difference counter that will transition to the discontinuation advance notification state (in this example, 2000) Since the difference is configured to be larger than the maximum number of coins (11 in this example) that will be paid out in one small winning combination (winning combination), the difference in (16) in the diagram in (E) The timing is configured so as not to shift to the discontinued advance notification state.

In addition, the difference between the initial value of the counter value of the difference counter and the counter value of the difference counter that will shift to the discontinued advance notification state is the maximum number of coins that will be paid out in one small winning combination (winning combination). When configured to be smaller than , the discontinuation advance notification state may be maintained at the timing (16) in the diagram (E).

<F: When the stop button is released after the power is turned on>
First, under the situation where the final reel is rotating, the stop button corresponding to the final reel has not been pressed, the payout process has not been executed, the stoppage flag is off, and the stoppage advance notification state is in progress, At the middle (1) timing, the final stop button is pressed and the final reel stops. It should be noted that although it takes a short time from when the final stop button is pressed until the final reel stops, the timing is shown as being the same for the sake of simplification of explanation.

Thereafter, at timing (4) in the figure, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Thereafter, at timing (6) in the figure, the gaming machine detects a power outage. Thereafter, at timing (8) in the figure, the gaming machine executes the power-off process in a situation where the payout process is not being executed.

Thereafter, at timing (10) in the figure, the power is turned on without RAM clearing, and the initial processing at power-on starts to be executed. Thereafter, at timing (11) in the figure, the final stop button is not pressed, but since the initial process at power-on is being executed, the payout process is not executed. Thereafter, at the timing (12) in the figure, the initial processing at the time of power-on is completed, the payout process is started, the discontinuation flag is turned off, and the discontinuation advance notification state is entered. Note that when the power is turned off and the power is turned on without clearing the RAM, the difference counter is initialized (the counter value of the difference counter is set to the initial value 19000), ), the maximum difference number is 0 based on the timing with the smallest difference after the power is turned on, but after the power is turned on, the difference counter update process (for example, the step in FIG. 57) 3712) has not been executed, the discontinuation advance notification state before the power is turned off will be restored.

Thereafter, at timing (16) in the figure, the payout process ends, and the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on does not exceed a predetermined value (19,000 in this example). Therefore, it does not shift to the stopped state, but shifts to the normal state. In addition, in (F), the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets related to the executed game from the game medals paid out corresponding to the bell of the 10-card winning combination is configured to be subtracted from the counter value of the difference counter. has been done.

In the second embodiment, the initial value of the counter value of the difference counter (in this example, 19000) and the counter value of the difference counter that will transition to the discontinuation advance notification state (in this example, 2000) Since the difference is configured to be larger than the maximum number of coins paid out (11 in this example) due to one small winning combination (winning combination), the difference in (16) in the diagram in (F) The timing is configured so as not to shift to the discontinued advance notification state.

In addition, the difference between the initial value of the counter value of the difference counter and the counter value of the difference counter that will shift to the discontinued advance notification state is the maximum number of coins that will be paid out in one small winning combination (winning combination). When configured to be smaller than , the discontinuation advance notification state may be maintained at the timing (16) in the diagram (F).

As illustrated in FIGS. 64 and 65 (B) to (F), a predetermined game in which a predetermined number of game medals (which may also be referred to as game value) is awarded is executed, and a predetermined number of If the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on exceeds a predetermined value (in this example, 19,000) by awarding game medals, the corresponding If the power-off process is executed before a predetermined number of game medals are awarded, and then the power is turned on without clearing the RAM, and the predetermined number of game medals are awarded, the system does not shift to the discontinued state. The value obtained by subtracting the number of bets for the predetermined game from the predetermined number is subtracted from the initial value of the difference counter.

With this configuration, even if the power is cut off in the middle of a game, the counter value of the difference counter is the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets before the power cut from the gaming medals awarded after the power is turned on again. Since the value of the difference counter can be subtracted from , the counter value of the difference counter can be updated accurately regardless of whether or not a power outage has occurred.

In addition, in FIG. 64 and FIG. 65, the case where the payout process is executed after the final stop button is pressed and not pressed is illustrated, but if the execution start timing of the payout process is the same, the final stop button is not pressed. There is no problem even if you change the button press timing. Further, even in the case where the payout process is configured to be started by pressing the final stop button anew, the same configuration can be applied as long as the payout process is performed at the same timing.

Note that after the power is turned on in (10) in FIGS. 64 and 65, a predetermined storage area containing information regarding the discontinuation advance notification state on the sub-control board S side may be initialized (for example, After the payout process is completed, information regarding the counter value of the difference counter is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side). When configured in this way, the period in which the power is turned on in (10) in FIGS. 64 and 65 is in the "pre-discontinuation notification state" is not the "pre-discontinuation notification state" (e.g. , may also be referred to as the "normal state"). With this configuration, the discontinuation advance notification state is not passed after the power is turned on, so the player may mistakenly think that the counter value of the difference counter has not been initialized even though the power has been turned off. This can be prevented.

<<Image diagram when a power outage occurs during a game in AT mode>>
Next, FIG. 66 is an image diagram of a case where a power outage occurs during a game in the AT state. First, in (a) of the figure, the counter value of the difference counter is 2500, the game is being executed in the AT state, the push order navigation is being executed, and the effect display device S40 shows: A push order navigation display (displayed as "123" in the figure), an AT acquisition number display, etc. are displayed.

Here, the AT acquisition number display, etc. refers to the AT acquisition number display ("GET883" in the figure), which is a display corresponding to the number of gaming medals that the player has acquired in the current AT state (or advantageous section); The AT game number display corresponds to the number of games played in the current AT state (or advantageous section), the payout number display shows the number of game medals paid out in the current game, and the current number of credits ( This is a general term for the credit number display that displays the number of game medals (sometimes referred to as the number of game medals displayed on the credit number display device D200).

After (a) in the figure, the game is executed in the AT state, and in (b) in the figure, the counter value of the difference counter is 1998, and the game is executed in the AT state. The push order navigation is executed, and the push order navigation display, the AT acquisition number display, etc. are displayed on the effect display device S40. In addition, when the counter value of the difference counter becomes less than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 2000), in other words, the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number after the power is turned on becomes the second value ( In this example, since the number exceeds 17,000), the effect display device S40 displays a message indicating the discontinuation state: "The discontinuation state will be reached with 1998 sheets left." In this way, the discontinuation state suggestion display is configured to notify the remaining number of differences until the discontinuation state is reached. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect display device S40 may be configured to display, as a display suggesting the discontinuation state, a message such as "The discontinuation state will soon occur."

After that, in (c) of the figure, while a game is being executed in which the push order navigation is being executed, and an abort state suggestion display is being displayed on the effect display device S40, a power outage occurs and the game machine is power supply is cut off.

Thereafter, at (d) in the figure, the power is turned on without clearing the RAM, and the effect display device S40 displays the push order navigation display, the AT acquisition number display, etc. again. In addition, since the power was turned on without clearing the RAM after the power was cut off, the counter value of the difference counter was initialized to 19000, and a discontinued state suggestion display was displayed on the effect display device S40. It has not been. Note that the timing shown in (d) in the figure may be referred to as a specific timing after the power is turned on.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the AT is in progress and the effect display device S40 is displaying the discontinuation state suggestion display, the AT acquisition number display, etc., a power outage occurs and the gaming machine is interrupted. If the power supply is cut off and then the power is turned on without clearing the RAM, the effect display device S40 is configured so that the discontinuation state suggestion display is not displayed, but the AT acquisition number display, etc. ing.

With this configuration, even if the power is turned on again after a power outage occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the discontinuation state suggestion display is displayed again on the effect display device S40. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously believing that he or she is close to stopping the game and ending the game.

Although FIG. 66 shows an example of a case in which a power outage occurs while the reels are rotating, the same configuration as in FIG. 66 can also be applied when a power outage occurs while the reels are stopped. can. The difference from the configuration in FIG. 66 in this case is that the push order navigation display is not displayed, and the configurations of the acquisition number display, etc. and the discontinued state suggestion display are the same.

In addition, in FIG. 66(d) (if a power outage occurs in the situation where the reels are stopped as described above, the reels are stopped after the power is turned on), a discontinued state suggestion display is displayed. It may be configured as follows. In addition, when configured in this way, after the power is turned on, operation members such as the bet button, stop button, start lever, and sub-input button (only some of the operation members may be applied, or all operations may be The suspension state suggestion display may be configured to be hidden when the user (or member may be applied) is operated.

In addition, as shown in (d) in FIG. 66, if a power outage occurs in an advantageous section and then the power is turned on without clearing the RAM, the gaming section after the power is turned on will be an advantageous section. Become.

In addition, as shown in (c) in FIG. 66, when the power is turned on to shift to the setting change mode after the power is turned off (for example, the power is turned on with the setting key switch turned on), the RAM Since the power is turned on with clearing, the game section after the power is turned on becomes a normal section, AT will not be executed in the next game, and the effect display device S40 will not display the push order navigation display or the number of acquired coins display, etc. (The discontinuation status suggestion display is also not displayed).

Furthermore, even if the power is turned on with RAM clearing, the counter value of the difference counter is initialized after the power is turned on. Furthermore, if the power is cut off while the system is in the shutdown state, and then the power is turned on with the RAM cleared, the system is configured such that the system will no longer be in the shutdown state after the power is turned on.

<Display indicating discontinuation status during bonus>
Incidentally, in a case where the discontinuance state suggestion display is displayed on the performance display device S40 during the bonus (for example, during the operation of RB), the following configuration may be adopted.
(1) During the bonus, the effect display device S40 displays the message "The game will be stopped with 4 more cards left" as a stop state indication. → The game during the bonus is executed, and the number of differences since the power is turned on is the highest. The maximum difference number based on a small timing exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example) → On the effect display device S40, the discontinuation state suggestion display is hidden, and the discontinuation reservation display shows "The discontinuation state will occur after the bonus ends." ” is displayed.
(2) During the bonus, the effect display device S40 displays the message "The game will be stopped with 4 more cards left" as a stop state suggestion display. → The game during the bonus is executed, and the number of differences after the power is turned on is the highest. The maximum number of differences based on a small timing exceeds a predetermined value (19000 in this example) → On the effect display device S40, the message ``The cancellation state will be reached with 0 sheets remaining'' is displayed as a stop status indication, and the cancellation is stopped. ``The bonus will be discontinued after the bonus ends'' will be displayed as a reservation display.
(3) During the bonus, the effect display device S40 displays the message "The game will be stopped with 4 more cards left" as a stop state indication. → The game during the bonus is executed, and the number of differences since the power is turned on is the highest. The maximum difference number based on a small timing exceeds a predetermined value (19000 in this example) → On the effect display device S40, a discontinuation state suggestion display and a discontinuation reservation display are displayed, but the discontinuation state suggestion display Since the display priority of the cancellation reservation is higher than that of the cancellation reservation display, only the display that says "The game will be canceled after the bonus ends", which is the display of the cancellation reservation, is visible.

In this way, during execution of the bonus, if the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the effect display device S40 By configuring to display a cancellation reservation display, even if the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example) By not shifting to the discontinued state, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game machine is mistakenly thought to have malfunctioned.

Note that the configuration regarding the abort state suggestion display is not limited to this, and for example, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on is equal to the predetermined value (19000 in this example). If a predetermined bonus (all bonuses or a predetermined type of bonus) is started in a situation where the value exceeds a third value (for example, 18800) that is a close value, at the start of the bonus In this case, the effect display device S40 may be configured to display "The state will be canceled after the bonus ends" as a discontinuation suggestion display at the start. (The display will switch to a discontinuation suggestion display.) It should be noted that the configuration may be such that when the starting-time cancellation suggestion display is displayed, the speaker S20 outputs a voice saying "After the bonus ends, it will become a cancellation state", or when the bonus starts, the starting-time cancellation suggestion display It may be configured such that the speaker S20 outputs a voice saying "After the bonus ends, the game will be in a discontinued state" without displaying this.

In addition, when the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after the power is turned on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), a message indicating the cancellation state will be displayed saying "Stopping with 0 sheets remaining." Instead of displaying ``This will be the same,'' it may be configured to display a negative value such as ``The remaining -3 cards will result in a halt.''

<<Image diagram 1 regarding medal empty error>>
Next, FIG. 67 is an image diagram 1 regarding the medal empty error. First, in (a) of the figure, the counter value of the difference counter is 4, the game is being executed in the AT-related state, the push order navigation is being executed, and the effect display device S40 shows: A push order navigation display (display of "123" in the figure), an AT acquisition number display, etc. are displayed. Also, if the counter value of the difference counter is less than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 2000), in other words, the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number after power-on is the second value. (in this example, 17,000), the performance display device S40 displays a message indicating the stop state, ``With 4 more cards left, the stop state will occur.'' Further, 47 is displayed as the number of credits on the credit number display device D200, and 00 is displayed on the payout number display device D270. Note that 00 on the payout number display device D270 in FIGS. 67 and 68 may not be displayed.

After (a) in the figure, the player performs a stop operation of the stop button, the symbol combination corresponding to the push order bell, which is an 11-card combination, is stopped and displayed, and the effect display device S40 displays the number of AT acquisition pieces, etc. is updated (for example, the AT acquisition number display is displayed as "GET 1536"), and the discontinuation state suggestion display is updated to "the discontinuation state will be reached with 0 coins left". Further, "GET11!!" is displayed on the performance display device S40 as an acquisition display. Further, the display on the credit number display device D200 is 50, and the number 11 is displayed on the payout number display device D270.

In addition, if the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after the power is turned on exceeds a predetermined value (in this example, 19,000), the process will be discontinued with the message "The state will be canceled when there are 0 copies remaining." It may be configured such that the status suggestion display is not displayed (it is hidden when the payout process is executed), or it is displayed and then immediately hidden.

After (b) in the figure, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest difference after power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), so the state transitions to a discontinued state, and ( In c), the counter value of the difference counter is 0, and the effect display device S40 displays "During a stopped state, the game will be stopped. Please call the staff" as a display indicating that the game is in a stopped state. is displayed. In addition, after the discontinued state display is displayed on the performance display device S40, automatic payment is executed and the display on the credit number display device D200 is subtracted, but the game medals in the game machine (stored in the hopper) are Since there are no more game medals, the display on the credit number display device D200 remains at 14. Further, Ed is displayed on the payout number display device D270 as a display corresponding to the discontinued state.

In addition, in FIG. 67(c), the payout number display device D270 may be configured to display 00.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the discontinuation state occurs (the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19000 in this example)) case), the system is configured such that automatic payment is executed after a discontinued state indication is displayed on the performance display device S40. In addition, the execution start timing of the automatic payment may be substantially the same as the timing when the display of the canceled state is displayed on the effect display device S40.

In addition, at the timing when the display indicating that the game is stopped is displayed on the production display device S40 (or at approximately the same time), a predetermined voice regarding the game stop state (for example, "Please end the game and call the staff") is emitted from the speaker S20. The output of the audio may be configured to end after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds), or the output of the audio may be configured to be output at all times during the aborted state. good.

Furthermore, the display start timing of the acquisition display such as "GET11!!" described above may be set to any one of the following. Note that the following timings do not mean completely the same timing, but may be approximately the same timing. For example, even if there is a short time lag between the timing below and the display start timing of the acquisition display due to sending a command from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, the timing will be almost the same. can do.
(1) The timing when the stop button corresponding to the final stop operation is no longer pressed (the stop button is released) (2) The timing when the payout process starts (3) The timing when the payout process ends ), even if the configuration is configured so that the acquisition display related to a game in which the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on exceeds a predetermined value is not displayed. Good (to move to aborted state).

After (c) in the figure, at (d) in the figure, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the subtraction stopped on the display of the credit number display device D200, a medal empty error occurs (a medal empty error occurs), and the effect display device S40 A display corresponding to the medal empty error is displayed on the payout number display device D270. Specifically, the effect display device S40 displays “Medal empty error, please call the staff”, and the payout number display device D270 displays “HE”. Further, 14 is displayed on the credit number display device D200.

Note that the state of the medal empty error shown in (d) in the figure may be referred to as the medal empty error state. Furthermore, the display corresponding to the medal empty error may be referred to as medal empty error information.

Further, as shown in the figure, when a display corresponding to an empty medal error is displayed on the performance display device S40, the display during the discontinued state becomes invisible.

With this configuration, even if an empty medal error occurs during automatic payment when transitioning to a discontinued state (sometimes referred to as automatic payment related to a discontinued state), the medals will be displayed as empty rather than during the discontinued state. Since the display corresponding to the error is displayed with priority, it is possible to prevent the player from ending the game with game medals stored as credits remaining, and it is possible to prevent the player from ending the game with game medals stored as credits remaining. can immediately recognize that it is an error.

Note that the discontinued state flag may be configured to turn on at the timing (c) in FIG. 67, or the discontinued state flag may be turned on after the medal empty error is canceled and the automatic settlement is completed after (d) in the figure. The flag may be configured to be turned on.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 67, the configuration when a display corresponding to an empty medal error is displayed on the effect display device S40 under a situation where the display indicating that the effect is in a discontinued state is displayed on the effect display device S40 is as follows. The following configuration may be applied.
(1) When the effect display device S40 displays a display corresponding to the medal empty error, the effect display device S40 hides the display during the aborted state.
(2) When a display corresponding to an empty medal error is displayed on the production display device S40, the display indicating that the medal is empty is displayed on the production display device S40, but the error that the medal is empty is more than the display indicating that the medal is empty. The display corresponding to the medal empty error has a higher display priority, so the display corresponding to the medal empty error becomes invisible, and only the display corresponding to the medal empty error becomes visible (the display area of the display corresponding to the medal empty error is in the canceling state. (larger than the display area of medium view).
(3) When a display corresponding to an empty medal error is displayed on the production display device S40, although the display indicating that the medal is empty is displayed on the production display device S40, the medal empty error is displayed rather than the display that the display is in a discontinued state. The display corresponding to the medal empty error has a higher display priority, so all the displays corresponding to the medal empty error are visible.However, regarding the display during the discontinued state, the display area overlaps with the display corresponding to the medal empty error. Only a part of the display that is not displayed becomes visible.
(4) Even when the display corresponding to the medal empty error is displayed on the effect display device S40, the display area of the display in the discontinued state on the effect display device S40 and the display corresponding to the medal empty error do not overlap, so the discontinuation is stopped. Both the status display and the display corresponding to the medal empty error become visible.
Note that in the above configuration, the display during the discontinued state can be replaced with a display suggesting the discontinued state, and the display during the discontinued state can be replaced with a display of the number of AT acquisitions, etc.

<<Image diagram 2 regarding medal empty error>>
Next, FIG. 68 is an image diagram 2 regarding the medal empty error. In the same figure, as an example of a change from the second embodiment, a configuration related to a stopped state applicable to the second embodiment will be described in detail. The configuration shown in FIG. 68 is configured when the discontinued state occurs (when the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example)). is configured such that automatic payment is executed, and when the execution of automatic payment is completed, a discontinued state indication is displayed on the effect display device S40. In addition, in the configuration of FIG. 68 as well, at the timing (or approximately at the same time) when the display indicating that the game is in a stopped state is displayed on the performance display device S40, a predetermined sound regarding the stopped state (for example, "End the game" is heard from the speaker S20). It may also be configured to output a voice message saying, "Please call an attendant."

First, in (a) of the figure, the counter value of the difference counter is 4, the game is being executed in the AT-related state, the push order navigation is being executed, and the effect display device S40 shows: A push order navigation display (display of "123" in the figure), an AT acquisition number display, etc. are displayed. In addition, if the counter value of the difference counter is less than a predetermined value (for example, 2000), in other words, the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference after power-on is the second value. (in this example, 17,000), the performance display device S40 displays a message indicating the stop state, ``With 4 more cards left, the stop state will occur.'' Further, 47 is displayed as the number of credits on the credit number display device D200, and 00 is displayed on the payout number display device D270.

After (a) in the figure, the player performs a stop operation of the stop button, the symbol combination corresponding to the push order bell, which is an 11-card combination, is stopped and displayed, and the effect display device S40 displays the number of AT acquisition pieces, etc. is updated (for example, the AT acquisition number display is displayed as "GET 1536"), and the discontinuation state suggestion display is updated to "the discontinuation state will be reached with 0 coins left". Further, "GET11!!" is displayed on the performance display device S40 as an acquisition display. Further, the display on the credit number display device D200 is 50, and the number 11 is displayed on the payout number display device D270.

After (b) in the figure, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), so the state shifts to aborted state and automatic payment is stopped. When the automatic settlement is completed (when all the game medals stored as credits are settled), the counter value of the difference counter is 0, as shown in (c) in the figure, and the effect display device S40 shows is displayed as a display indicating that the game is in a suspended state, ``During a suspended state, the game will be stopped. Please call the staff.'' Further, the display on the credit number display device D200 becomes 00, and the display on the payout number display device D270 shows Ed as a display corresponding to the discontinued state.

In addition, as shown in (c) in the figure, in a situation where automatic payment has been completed and the number of credits is 0, Ed may be displayed on the number of credits display device D200 as a display corresponding to the discontinued state. When configured in this way, the payout number display device D270 may be configured to display Ed as a display corresponding to the stopped state, or may be configured not to be displayed.

On the other hand, after (b) in the figure, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), so the state shifts to the abort state and the automatic The payment is executed and the display on the credit number display device D200 is subtracted, but as shown in (d) in the figure, if the game medals in the game machine (game medals stored in the hopper) run out, , the display on the credit number display device D200 stops at 14. Further, the effect display device S40 displays a discontinuation state suggestion display, an AT acquisition number display, and the like. Further, 00 is displayed on the payout number display device D270.

After (d) in the figure, at (e) in the figure, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the subtraction stopped on the display of the credit number display device D200, a medal empty error occurs (a medal empty error occurs), and the effect display device S40 A display corresponding to the medal empty error is displayed on the payout number display device D270. Specifically, the effect display device S40 displays “Medal empty error, please call the staff”, and the payout number display device D270 displays “HE”. Further, 14 is displayed on the credit number display device D200.

Further, as shown in the figure, when a display corresponding to the empty medal error is displayed on the effect display device S40, the discontinuation state suggestion display, the AT acquisition number display, etc. are no longer visible.

After that, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, and after the power-off processing is executed, the power is turned on without clearing the RAM, and if the medal empty error is canceled, as shown in (f) in the figure, After the automatic payment that was stopped midway is executed from where it left off and the display on the credit number display device D200 becomes 0, the effect display device S40 displays a message indicating that the payment is in a stopped state, ``In the stopped state.'' "The game is stopped. Please call the staff." is displayed. Further, the display on the credit number display device D200 becomes 00, and the display on the payout number display device D270 shows Ed as a display corresponding to the discontinued state.

In addition, as shown in (f) in the figure, in a situation where automatic payment has been completed and the number of credits is 0, Ed may be displayed on the number of credits display device D200 as a display corresponding to the discontinued state. When configured in this way, the payout number display device D270 may be configured to display Ed as a display corresponding to the stopped state, or may be configured not to be displayed.

In addition, in (f) in the figure, the counter value of the difference counter is initialized to 19,000.

In this way, in FIG. 68, if a medal empty error occurs during automatic payment when transitioning to the canceled state, while the medal empty error occurs, the effect display device S40 displays a message indicating that the medal is in the canceled state. is configured not to display.

With this configuration, in a situation where the automatic payment related to the canceled state is not completed, notifications indicating that the canceled state is in effect, such as displaying the display during the canceled state, will not be executed, so game medals stored as credits will not be displayed. It is possible to prevent a player from ending a game with a remaining error, and a game parlor manager can immediately recognize an error.

In addition, in FIG. 68, an empty medal error occurs during automatic payment when the state shifts to the canceled state, and before the empty medal error is cleared, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, and the power-off process is executed. After that, if the power is turned on without clearing the RAM and the medal empty error is canceled, the automatic payment that was stopped midway will be executed from where it left off, the display on the credit number display device D200 will be 0, and the difference number will be Although the counter value of the counter is an initial value (19000 in this example), the effect display device S40 is configured to display an indication that the game is in a discontinued state.

With this configuration, even if an error occurs during the automatic payment related to cancellation and the power is cut off, when the error is canceled after the power is restored and the automatic payment is completed, the effect display device S40 Since a no-stop status message is displayed on the machine, the gambling experience can be suppressed more than in conventional gaming machines.

Note that in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 68, when the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on exceeds a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the state shifts to the discontinued state. , In other words, although the configuration is configured such that the state transitions to the discontinued state (or the discontinued flag is turned on) before the automatic settlement related to the discontinued state is executed, the configuration is not limited to this, and after the automatic settlement related to the discontinued state is executed. It may be configured such that the process transitions to a discontinued state (or the discontinued flag is turned on).

<<Applicable configurations related to the discontinued state>>
Here, in a drum-type gaming machine using game medals, one or more of the following configurations may be applied as a configuration regarding the stopped state.
(1) When the game is stopped, the game medals stored as credits and the game medals bet are automatically settled without operating the settlement button.
(2) In the case of cancellation, game medals stored as credits and game medals bet on are not automatically settled unless the settlement button is operated.
(3) When the game is canceled, the game medals stored as credits and the game medals that have been bet are settled by the player operating the settlement button.
(4) When the game is stopped, the insertion of new game medals, the operation of the bet button, and the operation of the start lever are disabled.
(5) When the discontinued state is reached, the effect display device S40 displays the message "The menu screen will be displayed by operating the sub-input button", and by operating the sub-input button SB, the menu screen is displayed, and the menu By performing a predetermined operation (for example, a predetermined operation of the sub-input button SB) while the screen is displayed, it is possible to perform information communication with the player's mobile information terminal (smartphone, etc.) via communication with the Internet server. , displays a two-dimensional code for providing information to the player.
(6) Even if a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the game was stopped (even if the predetermined period of time has elapsed during which no game was played), the standby demo is not displayed on the effect display device S40 (it does not shift to the standby demo) ).
(7) When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the game was stopped (when the time during which the game was not played reaches a predetermined period), a standby demo is displayed on the effect display device S40 (this may be referred to as a transition to a standby demo). be).
(8) In the aborted state, it is possible to shift to the setting confirmation mode (for example, by turning on the setting key switch).
(9) In the aborted state, it is not possible to shift to the setting change mode.
(10) When transitioning to the discontinued state, output a predetermined external signal (output an on signal) for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds).
(11) When transitioning to the discontinued state, a predetermined external signal is always output (outputs an on signal) during the discontinued state.

In addition, when the above (2) is applied, for example, by the sound of "Please operate the payment button" from the speaker S20 or the display of "Please operate the payment button!" on the effect display device S40. It is preferable to configure the system to notify the user of the payment of the number of credits, etc. Furthermore, the notification may be configured to end when the number of credits etc. becomes 0 and the payment is completed.

In addition, in a medalless reel-type gaming machine, the points on the total score display device (sometimes referred to as game medals or game value) are transferred to the rental machine (sometimes referred to as rental unit) in the stopped state. The operation of the counting button that is operated for this purpose may be enabled. With this configuration, even if the game is discontinued, the scores on the total score display device can be returned to the player. In the case of such a configuration, counting may be prompted by, for example, a voice saying "Please operate the counting button" from the speaker S20 or a display saying "Please operate the counting button!" from the effect display device S40. It is preferable to configure the system to notify the user. Furthermore, the notification may be configured to end when the score on the total score display device becomes 0.

Further, in a medalless drum-type gaming machine, a lending button that is operated in order to transfer points from the lending machine to the total score display device may be enabled in the stopped state. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player mistakenly believes that the rental machine is out of order.

In addition, in a medalless drum-type game machine, the operation of a lending button that is operated to transfer points from the lending machine to the total score display device may be disabled in the stopped state. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent points from being transferred to the gaming machine despite the stopped state.

Further, in the discontinued state, monitoring of some errors may be continued. For example, in the discontinued state, one or more errors including a door opening error may be monitored, and one or more errors including an empty medal error may not be monitored. That is, in the discontinued state, the medal empty error state does not occur (notification corresponding to the medal empty error (for example, displaying a display corresponding to the medal empty error on the effect display device S40) is not performed), while the front door is closed. If the door is opened, a door opening error state will occur, and a notification corresponding to the door opening error will be executed.

Examples of errors to be monitored in the stopped state include the door opening error, the abnormal payout error, the inserted medal retention error, and the abnormal insertion error among the above-mentioned errors.

<<Applicable configuration regarding display during suspension state>>
Furthermore, one or more of the following configurations may be applied as a configuration regarding the display during the suspension state.
(1) If a game is executed in which the maximum number of differences is greater than a predetermined value (in this example, 19,000) based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after the power is turned on, it corresponds to the final stop operation of the game. At the timing when the stop button is finished being pressed (released), a stop state indication is displayed on the effect display device S40.
(2) If a game is executed in which the maximum number of differences is greater than a predetermined value (in this example, 19,000) based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after the power is turned on, correspond to the final stop operation of the game. At the timing when the stop button is pressed, a stop state indication is displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) If a game is executed in which the maximum number of differences is greater than a predetermined value (in this example, 19,000) based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after the power is turned on, the final stop operation for the game is performed. Thereafter, automatic payment is executed, and when the automatic payment is completed, a discontinued state indication is displayed on the effect display device S40.
(4) During the setting confirmation mode, a discontinued state display is displayed on the effect display device S40.
(5) During the setting confirmation mode, the effect display device S40 does not display the aborted state indication.
(6) While the menu screen is being displayed, a discontinued state indication is displayed on the effect display device S40.
(7) While the menu screen is being displayed, the effect display device S40 does not display an indication that the process is in a discontinued state.
(8) The display during the stopped state has a higher display priority than the effect image displayed during the game.
(9) The display during the aborted state has a lower display priority than the display corresponding to a predetermined error.

<<Time required to reach the discontinued state>>
A gaming machine having a suspended state may be designed so that the following equation holds true.
(Predetermined value that is the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after the power is turned on that causes the transition to the discontinued state/expected number of increases per game in the most advantageous state for the player) x Minimum gaming time (s) / 3600 < Hours during which amusement halls can operate as stipulated by the Entertainment Business Act (h)

Note that 3600 in the above formula is a constant for converting seconds into hours, and 1 hour = 60 minutes x 60 seconds = 3600 seconds. In addition, the Entertainment Business Act is sometimes referred to as the Act on Regulation of Entertainment Businesses, etc. and Appropriate Business Operations.

Further, the "expected increase number" is the average number of game medals paid out per game in a certain state minus the (average) number of bets in the certain state. For example, in a situation where a loss is determined at 1/2, a common bell for a 10-card hand is determined at 1/2, and the game is played with a 3-card bet, 0 x 1/2 + 10 x 1/2 - 3 = 2 is " "Expected increase in number".

In addition, in a game where the number of coins paid out differs depending on the operation mode of the stop button such as the push order bell, in a game state where the push order navigation is executed, if the stop operation is performed according to the push order navigation. If you are in a gaming state where push order navigation is not performed, the "expected number of increases" is calculated using The number of increases will be calculated.

Furthermore, "the most advantageous state for the player" corresponds to the most advantageous bonus among bonuses, the most advantageous AT (press order navigation) among the states in which to execute AT, and the like. Furthermore, in a gaming machine that can execute bonuses and AT (sometimes referred to as an A+AT machine), any of the following may be set as the "most advantageous state for the player".
(1) The most advantageous bonus for the player out of all the bonuses (2) A state in which the most advantageous AT for the player can be executed among all the ATs (3) All bonuses and all ATs (4) The most advantageous state for the player among all the states in which AT can be performed, from when the player becomes able to perform the AT that is most advantageous to the player until the end of the state. , including bonus

Furthermore, according to the Entertainment Business Law, the operating hours for amusement halls are 18 hours. Furthermore, Article 13 of the Entertainment Business Act states that ``Entertainment business operators must not operate their business late at night (meaning the hours from midnight to 6 a.m.; the same shall apply hereinafter). ” is written.

Note that the above equation can also be expressed as follows.
(Predetermined value that is the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after the power is turned on that causes the transition to the discontinued state/expected number of increases per game in the most advantageous state for the player) x Minimum gaming time (s) < Hours during which gaming halls can operate as stipulated by the Entertainment Business Act (h) x 3600

In addition, in the second embodiment, the minimum playing time, which is the shortest time from the start of reel rotation in one game to the start of reel rotation in the next game, is 4.1 seconds, and the maximum number of coins paid out per game is 4.1 seconds. is 11 pieces, and the maximum number of differences (predetermined value) is 19,000, based on the timing when the number of differences is the smallest after turning on the power, which is when the game enters the stop state, and is the most advantageous for the player. Since the expected number of increases per game in the state is 3, applying the numerical values of the second embodiment to the above formula, we get
(19000/3)×4.1÷3600<18(h)
7.21<18(h)
Therefore, the above formula is established.

In addition, in the above formula, "predetermined value which is the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after the power is turned on that causes the transition to the discontinued state/one game in the most advantageous state for the player" "Expected increase in number of games per game" is the design value of the shortest number of games required from power-on to discontinued state, and is the left side of the above equation "((expected increase in number of games after power-on to enter discontinued state) A predetermined value that is the maximum number of differences based on the timing when the number of differences between This is the design value of the shortest time (h) required from the time to the stop state.

From this, if the above formula holds true, then the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences since the power was turned on during business hours stipulated by the Entertainment Business Law is the maximum number of differences. It is possible to exceed a predetermined value (19,000 in this example). In other words, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest difference after the power was turned on during business hours of one day is the predetermined value (19000 in this example). In this example, it is possible to exceed 19000) and enter the discontinued state.

By configuring the above-mentioned formula to hold as in the second embodiment, the most advantageous condition for the player will be immediately after the start of business at the game parlor, and even if the most advantageous condition continues, even on the same day. The gaming machine can be placed in a suspended state, and the gambling nature of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

As mentioned above, the operating hours for amusement centers stipulated by the Entertainment Business Act are 18 hours, but the shortest operating hours stipulated by each prefecture are: is 13 hours, so it is more preferable to replace 18(h) on the right side of the above equation with 13(h) so that the above equation holds true.

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine with a low "expected increase in the number of cards per game in the most advantageous situation for the player" (for example, 1 coin), the above formula does not hold. , it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the gambling nature is suppressed without shifting to the stopped state.

<<Configuration regarding reel-type gaming machine not having effect display device S40>>
Even in a drum-type gaming machine that does not have a performance display device S40 (sometimes referred to as a liquid crystal) (or a drum-type game machine that has only a performance display device S40 with a small display area), the second embodiment can be used. It is possible to apply the configuration related to the stopped state described above. Note that a reel-type gaming machine that does not have the effect display device S40 is sometimes referred to as a non-liquid crystal machine.

Although the configuration related to a non-liquid crystal machine will be described in detail below, it is possible to apply a similar configuration to a reel-type gaming machine having only the effect display device S40 with a small display area, and It is also possible to apply the present invention to a reel-type gaming machine having the effect display device S40 described in the second embodiment.

Note that the configuration detailed below applies the same difference counter configuration as in the second embodiment. That is, the difference counter is a decrement counter, and the upper limit of the counter value is 19,000 and the lower limit is 0. Note that all of the above-mentioned configurations are applicable to the configuration of the difference counter. In addition, in the following, "when the counter value of the difference counter becomes 500 or less" means "the number of differences remaining until the maximum number of differences exceeds a predetermined value based on the timing when the number of differences is the smallest after power-on." can be replaced with "When the value becomes 500 or less." Further, other counter values can be replaced in the same manner.

A non-LCD device may be configured to output a sound such as "The discontinuation state will soon occur" from the speaker S20 when the discontinuation advance notification state is entered. However, in this configuration, if the speaker S20 constantly outputs audio after the state of discontinuance advance notification is entered, there is a risk that the player's desire to play may decrease.

<Configuration 1 in which audio notification regarding the discontinued state is executed multiple times>
Therefore, a non-liquid crystal device may be configured as follows.
(1) When the counter value of the difference counter becomes 500 or less, a voice is output from the speaker S20 saying "The process will be stopped when 500 sheets remain."
(2) When the counter value of the difference counter becomes 250 or less, a voice is output from the speaker S20 saying, "The process will be stopped when 250 sheets remain."
(3) When the counter value of the difference counter becomes 100 or less, a voice is output from the speaker S20 saying, "The process will be stopped when 100 sheets remain."
(4) When the counter value of the difference counter becomes 50 or less, a voice is output from the speaker S20 saying, "The process will be stopped when 50 sheets remain."
(5) When the counter value of the difference counter becomes 15 or less, a voice is output from the speaker S20 saying, "The process will be stopped when 15 sheets remain."

In this way, it may be configured such that as the discontinuation state approaches, the interval of notification by the speaker S20 (interval of difference numbers) becomes shorter, such as "500→250→100→50→15". By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent trouble from occurring at the game parlor due to the game transitioning to the no-stop state without recognizing that the no-go state is near. Note that the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after the power is turned on, which is the pre-discontinuation notification state, may be set to 17,000, which is the same as in the second embodiment, or may be changed to an arbitrary value such as 18,500. No problem.

In addition, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on, which causes the discontinuation advance notification state, and the maximum difference, based on the timing with the smallest number of differences, after power-on, which causes the discontinuation state. The difference between the number and the number may be configured to be larger than the maximum number of coins paid out by winning one small winning combination (winning combination). By configuring in this way, the next game that is in the pre-cancellation notification state will not be in the cancellation state, and it is possible to appropriately notify the player that the game is about to be canceled, and improve the relationship between the player and the gaming hall manager. It is possible to prevent troubles from occurring between the parties.

<Configuration 2 in which audio notification regarding the discontinued state is executed multiple times>
Regarding the threshold values of the difference counter shown in (1) to (5) above, when the counter value of the difference counter becomes equal to or less than the threshold value for the first time, the speaker S20 outputs a sound related to the discontinued state, and When the counter value of the difference counter becomes equal to or less than the threshold value for the first time or later, the speaker S20 may be configured not to output the audio related to the discontinuation state (similar to the configuration described above in FIG. 60). As described above, the system is configured to subtract "number of payouts - number of bets" from the counter value of the difference counter after the end of the game.

As a specific example, it may be configured to have the following effect.
(1) In a situation where the counter value of the difference counter is 255, a 3-card bet game is executed, a 10-card winning common bell is won, and the symbol combination corresponding to the common bell is stopped and displayed.
(2) The counter value of the difference counter becomes 248, and since the counter value becomes 250 or less, a voice is output from the speaker S20 saying, "The process will be stopped when 250 sheets remain."
(3) A three-coin bet game is executed, and the result of the internal lottery for the game is a loss, so no game medals are paid out, and the counter value of the difference counter becomes 251.
(4) A 3-card bet game is executed, and the common bell, which is a 10-card winning combination, is won, and the symbol combination corresponding to the common bell is stopped and displayed, and the counter value of the difference counter becomes 244. Since this is the second time that the value has fallen below 250, the speaker S20 does not output the voice message "The process will be stopped when 250 sheets remain."

<Configuration 3 in which audio notification regarding the discontinued state is executed multiple times>
Further, even if the counter value of the difference counter becomes equal to or less than the above-mentioned threshold value from the second time onward, the speaker S20 may be configured to output a sound related to the discontinued state. When the counter value of the difference counter becomes equal to or less than the above threshold value for the second time or later in a situation where a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the payment of game medals was executed or the audio regarding the discontinued state was output from the speaker S20. In this case, the speaker S20 may be configured to output audio related to the aborted state (sometimes referred to as audio related to the threshold value).

(Configuration 1)
As a specific example, it may be configured to have the following effect.
(1) In a situation where the counter value of the difference counter is 255, a 3-card bet game is executed, a 10-card winning common bell is won, and the symbol combination corresponding to the common bell is stopped and displayed.
(2) The counter value of the difference counter becomes 248, and since the counter value becomes 250 or less, a voice is output from the speaker S20 saying, "The process will be stopped when 250 sheets remain."
(3) A three-coin bet game is executed, and the result of the internal lottery for the game is a loss, so no game medals are paid out, and the counter value of the difference counter becomes 251.
(4) Settlement of game medals by the player is executed.
(5) After that, the next player starts playing, a 3-card bet game is executed, the common bell, which is a 10-card winning combination, is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the common bell is stopped, and the difference is The counter value becomes 244, and since the counter value has become 250 or less, the speaker S20 outputs a voice saying "The process will be stopped when 250 sheets remain."

(Configuration 2)
As another specific example, it may be configured to have the following effect.
(1) In a situation where the counter value of the difference counter is 255, a 3-card bet game is executed, a 10-card winning common bell is won, and the symbol combination corresponding to the common bell is stopped and displayed.
(2) The counter value of the difference counter becomes 248, and since the counter value becomes 250 or less, a voice is output from the speaker S20 saying, "The process will be stopped when 250 sheets remain."
(3) A three-coin bet game is executed, and the result of the internal lottery for the game is a loss, so no game medals are paid out, and the counter value of the difference counter becomes 251.
(4) A predetermined period of time passes from the timing of (3).
(5) After that, the next player starts playing, a 3-card bet game is executed, the common bell, which is a 10-card winning combination, is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the common bell is stopped, and the difference is The counter value becomes 244, and since the counter value has become 250 or less, a voice is output from the speaker S20 saying, "With 250 sheets left, the process will be stopped."

With this configuration, even if the player is replaced, the new player who starts the game can reliably recognize that the game is about to be stopped. It is possible to prevent trouble from occurring at the game parlor due to the game changing to a stopped state without being recognized.

Note that it is also possible to apply only one of the above configurations 1 and 2, or it is also possible to apply both.

<Configuration 4 in which audio notification regarding the discontinued state is executed multiple times>
Furthermore, even if the counter value of the difference counter becomes equal to or less than the threshold value from the second time onward, the speaker S20 can output a sound related to the discontinued state. or when the first game is executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the audio related to the aborted state was output from the speaker S20 (e.g., when the game is finished, when the final stop operation is completed, etc.) Among the thresholds for which the counter value of the difference counter is below the threshold value (among the thresholds for which the counter value of the difference counter is already below), the counter value of the difference counter is the most The speaker S20 may be configured to output audio related to the discontinued state corresponding to a close threshold value.

As a specific example, it may be configured to have the following effect.
(1) In a situation where the counter value of the difference counter is 255, a 3-card bet game is executed, a 10-card winning common bell is won, and the symbol combination corresponding to the common bell is stopped and displayed.
(2) The counter value of the difference counter becomes 248, and since the counter value becomes 250 or less, a voice is output from the speaker S20 saying, "The process will be stopped when 250 sheets remain."
(3-1) In a situation where more than a predetermined amount of time has elapsed since (2), a 3-card bet game is executed as the first game by the next player and the common bell, which is a 10-card winning combination, is won. , after the execution of the game ends, the counter value of the difference counter becomes 241, and the thresholds below which the difference counter value is below are 250 and 500, so the value closest to the current difference counter value is 250 and 500. The speaker S20 outputs a sound saying "The printout will be stopped when 250 sheets remain" as a sound related to the printout status corresponding to the threshold value of 250.
(3-2) In a situation where more than a predetermined time has passed since (2), if a 3-bet game is executed as the first game by the next player and the internal lottery result is a loss, then After the game ends, the counter value of the difference counter becomes 251, and the only threshold below which the difference counter value is 500 is the closest threshold to the current difference counter value. The speaker S20 outputs a voice that says, "When 500 sheets remain, the printout will be stopped."

In addition, in (3-1) and (3-2) above, the timing at which the audio related to the canceled state is output is when the player pays off the game medals, or when the speaker S20 outputs the audio related to the canceled state. The timing is defined as the timing when the execution of the first game ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the game, but the timing is not limited to this, and the timing when the operation of the start lever related to the first game is accepted, It may be configured such that the audio regarding the stopped state is output at the timing when the rotation of the reels related to the first game starts.

With this configuration, even if the player is replaced, the new player who starts the game can reliably recognize that the game is about to be stopped. It is possible to prevent trouble from occurring at the game parlor due to the game changing to a stopped state without being recognized.

<<Configuration related to the stop state in non-liquid crystal machines>>
In a non-liquid crystal machine, the following configuration may be applied as a configuration related to the stopped state. Note that it is possible to apply only one of the configurations described in detail below, or it is also possible to apply a plurality of configurations in combination. Further, the configuration described in detail below can also be applied to a reel-type gaming machine having only the effect display device S40 with a small display area.

<If the counter value of the difference counter becomes 0 during the bonus>
During the execution of bonuses (for example, 1st type BB, 2nd type BB, RB, etc.), the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest difference after the power is turned on reaches a predetermined value (19000 in this example). If the game is exceeded (when the counter value of the difference counter becomes 0), after the execution of the game in which the game exceeded is completed (the final stop operation is completed), the speaker S20 will say "After the bonus ends, the game will be stopped." (This sound is sometimes referred to as a standby notification).

After the standby notification is executed once during the execution of the bonus, the standby notification is basically not executed until the bonus ends, and if the player settles the game medals or , if a situation in which a new game is not executed (or a situation in which the game does not progress) continues for a predetermined period of time, or if the power is turned on again after a power outage occurs, after the first subsequent game has finished running. Then, the standby notification may be executed again.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure the system so that the player does not feel troubled by executing the waiting notification many times during the execution of the bonus, and also to prevent the player from feeling troubled even if the player is replaced. However, a player who starts a new game can recognize that the game will be stopped after the bonus ends.

Note that there are two conditions for executing the standby notification again during the above-mentioned bonus: when the player settles the game medals, and when a new game is not executed (this may also be a situation where no game progresses). For the case where the power continues for a predetermined period of time and the case where the power is turned on again after the power is cut off, only one or a plurality of cases may be applied.

<Configuration related to volume in non-liquid crystal devices>
A non-liquid crystal machine may be configured to output a voice (sometimes referred to as a suspension notification) from the speaker S20 saying "The game will be stopped. Please call the staff" when the game shifts to the suspension state. In such a configuration, the following magnitude relationship may be established for the following voices (or sounds).
A: Volume of sounds other than the standby notification (sometimes referred to as BGM, performance sounds, etc.) when the standby notification is output in a predetermined gaming state B: The volume of the standby notification in a predetermined gaming state Volume C of sounds other than the standby notification when not outputting: When set as the volume of the standby notification when the standby notification is output in a predetermined gaming state,
Formula 1: A<C
Formula 2: B<C
Formula 3: A<B
The configuration may be such that one or more of the above equations 1 to 3 are satisfied. In addition, in the above A to C, the case where the same effect is being executed (other than the standby notification) is illustrated.

With this configuration, even if a predetermined effect is being performed in addition to the standby notification while the standby notification is being executed, the volume of the standby notification is relatively high, The notification becomes easier to hear, and even when, for example, the performance of a game before the standby notification is executed is performed across the game in which the standby notification is executed, the notification is made easier to hear. In addition, by making the volume of the effect sound of the game in which the standby notification is executed different from the volume of the effect sound of the game in which the standby notification is not executed, the effect of the game before the standby notification is executed is Even when the intermediate notification is executed across games in which the waiting notification is being executed, the player feels strange that the volume of the performance sound has become low and can notice that the waiting notification is being executed.

Furthermore, when standby notification or threshold-related audio is being output, the volume of sounds other than the standby notification or threshold-related audio may be lowered; One or more of the sounds related to the demonstration and the sounds related to a predetermined error may be configured so that the volume does not decrease even if the standby notification or the sound related to the threshold is output. Furthermore, the volume of sounds related to some errors may be reduced, but the volume of sounds related to other errors may be configured not to be reduced.

Note that all the configurations in this specification can also be applied to a medalless reel-type gaming machine (sometimes referred to as a medalless gaming machine, gaming machine, managed gaming machine, or enclosed gaming machine), and a medalless gaming machine is In general, game medals (including physical medals and metal pieces for detection by sensors) are not used, but points are used.

A medal-less reel-type game machine is generally not provided with game medal-related items such as a medal slot D170, a medal tray D230, a medal selector DS, a hopper H40, a medal payout device H, a medal auxiliary tank HS, etc. It differs from a drum-type gaming machine that uses gaming medals in that it can communicate with rental machines. In this case, since there is no need to physically insert and pay out game medals, the effect of preventing unauthorized access to the inside of the game machine can be increased (for example, by not having a game medal insertion opening or a payout opening, By integrating the front door and the back box, etc., it seals the gap where foreign objects are inserted), reduces the risk of unauthorized game medals being used, and prevents fraudulent acts (so-called goto acts). It can also be configured to improve security. Note that it does not have the credit and credit number display device D200, but instead has a payout control board H (also sometimes referred to as a gaming value control board, a gaming value control means, a medal number control board, or a medal number control means). , the total score increase/decrease process may be executed, and the total score display device (also referred to as a medal number display device) may execute the display process.

Note that the counting process is executed by operating a counting button provided on the medalless drum-type gaming machine. When the counting process is executed, the total score in the medalless drum-type gaming machine is transferred to the lending machine. Further, the lending process is executed by operating a lending button provided on the medalless drum-type game machine. When the lending process is executed, the points will be transferred from the lending machine side to the total points in the medalless reel-type gaming machine (to the total score display device).

In addition, it corresponds to the physical game medals used in a general drum-type game machine P, and has "scores" as a pseudo game medium used for playing games in a medalless drum-type game machine. Can be configured. Note that "scores" may also be referred to as "score information," "points," "points information," "gaming value," "gaming value information," or "gaming medals." Physically real game medals can be directly held and handled by the player. On the other hand, in a medalless reel-type gaming machine, a player can play a game without directly handling physical gaming medals. The points are not actual game medals, but pseudo game media converted into data so that the CPU of the main control board or the like can perform arithmetic processing. Further, the "total score" refers to all the scores that can be input into the medalless reel-type gaming machine, and may be data managed by the main control board or the payout control board. The "total score" corresponds to the number of game medals placed on the medal tray of a general drum-type game machine P that uses physical game medals. In addition, when applying the above-described configuration of the reel-type gaming machine P to this embodiment, what is referred to as "gaming medals" in this specification may be replaced with "scores", "score information", and "possession medals". There is no problem in treating it as "points", "points information", "gaming value", "gaming value information", etc., and as appropriate, "scores", "score information", "points", "points information", etc. There is nothing wrong with calling it "gaming value" or "gaming value information." It should be noted that there is no problem in not having "credits" and instead replacing the credit number display device with a total score display device.

<<<Production applicable to the reel-type gaming machine in this specification>>>
Next, an example of a performance applicable to the reel-type gaming machine in this specification will be explained. Note that the examples of effects described below can be combined as appropriate with the configurations of the first and second embodiments.

<<Significance of terms>>
First, the meaning of each term will be explained in detail below, but configurations related to the terms can be applied to other embodiments and can be combined with other configurations.

<Normal section>
The normal section is a game section in which AT-related processing is not executed and is not an advantageous section.

<Advantageous section>
The advantageous section is a game section in which AT-related processing can be executed, and includes an advantageous section (AT) and an advantageous section (normal). The advantageous section (AT) is an advantageous section and is a gaming section during the stay in the AT state (sometimes referred to as the AT state) described in the previous embodiment. The advantageous section (normal) is an advantageous section and is a gaming section during the stay in the non-AT state described in the previous embodiment.

<Production stage>
The production stage is also referred to as a stay stage, production mode, etc., and is a production mode shown on the production display device S40 by a background image. Although the production stage is displayed over multiple games, it may end in one game. In the example of the performance described below, each game section has at least one performance stage. The production stage is controlled by a sub-control board S, and can be changed to a different production stage by stage change production.

<<Example of production>>
Next, an example of presentation will be explained. Hereinafter, production examples 1 to 5 will be illustrated, but each production example can be appropriately combined, and it is also possible to suitably combine with the production described in the previous embodiment.

In examples 1 to 5 of the effects shown below, explanations will be made using advantageous sections (AT), advantageous sections (normal), and normal sections, but it should be noted that they can also be read as follows: . The advantageous section (AT) can be read as the first state. The first state is the AT state explained in the previous embodiment, the additional specialization state, the specialization precursor state, and the BB state (actually it is an AT state, but the so-called pseudo-bonus that looks like a big bonus is in effect) ) etc. are applicable. The advantageous section (normal) can be read as the second state. The second state corresponds to the normal state (normal state in the advantageous section), high probability state, AT precursor state, etc. described in the previous embodiment. The normal section can be read as the third state. The third state corresponds to the low probability state described in the previous embodiment. Furthermore, the game section can be read as a state or a game state.

<Example 1 of production>
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing example 1 of the performance, and is a diagram showing a command performance (mission performance) that is completed in one game (the game) in an advantageous section (normal). The command performance (mission performance) illustrated here is one command performance (mission performance) selected from a plurality of command performances (mission performances) based on the player's operation of the start lever D50.

First, in (a), when the player operates the start lever D50, a lever effect display for notifying the lottery result is started. The lever performance display is a performance that is continuously displayed for a first period of time after the player operates the start lever D50. If the first stop operation is performed during execution of the lever effect display, the lever effect display is interrupted midway and the first effect display corresponding to the first stop operation is executed. Here, a lever effect display A in which characters "Fight off the shark!" is displayed on the effect display device S40 is executed, and a command effect is started. Although only one type of lever effect display is shown in response to the operation of the start lever D50, multiple types of lever effect displays are provided, and when the start lever D50 is operated, one of the lever effect displays is displayed. It may be configured to perform a performance display.

Note that if the first stop operation is performed in a situation where the first time has not elapsed, the first effect display is executed, but the first stop operation is not performed in a situation where the first time has not elapsed. In this case, the lever effect display is continuously executed. In addition, the lever effect display is configured so that the last screen that makes up the lever effect display is continuously displayed after the first time has elapsed, but the lever effect display is configured so that it is displayed in a loop. may be configured.

Next, in (b1), when a first stop operation is performed, a first effect display corresponding to the first stop operation is performed. The first performance display is a performance that is continuously displayed for a second time (the same or different time as the first time) after the player performs the first stop operation. If the second stop operation is performed during execution of the first effect display, the first effect display is interrupted midway, and the second effect display corresponding to the second stop operation is executed. Here, the left stop button D41 is operated as the first stop operation, and as the first effect display A, an effect display of a shark swimming from right to left is performed.

Further, as shown in (b2), when the first stop operation is performed after the lever effect display in (a), a first effect display corresponding to the first stop operation and different from the first effect display A is displayed. It is configured so that effect display B may be performed. In other words, the effect display is configured to branch to (b1) or (b2) based on the first stop operation. In other words, two effect displays based on the first stop operation are provided, and one effect display is selected and executed based on the first stop operation. Here, the left stop button D41 is operated as the first stop operation, and as the first effect display B, an effect display showing that the shark is surprised is performed.

The number of branches in the first effect display is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, it may be configured such that the first effect display does not branch based on the first stop operation, for example, it may be configured such that only the first effect display A of (b1) is executed. Further, it may be configured such that the effect display that is being executed continues to be executed without any reaction to the first stop operation. Note that if the second stop operation is performed in a situation where the second time has not elapsed, the second effect display is executed, but the second stop operation is not performed in a situation where the second time has not elapsed. In this case, the first effect display is continuously executed. Further, the first effect display is configured such that the last screen constituting the first effect display is continuously displayed after the second time has elapsed, but the first effect display is displayed in a loop. It may be configured so that

Next, in (c), when the second stop operation is performed, a second effect display corresponding to the second stop operation is performed. The second performance display is a performance that is continuously displayed for a third time (the same or different time as the first time and the second time) after the player performs the second stop operation. If a third stop operation is performed during execution of the second effect display, the second effect display is interrupted midway, and a third effect display corresponding to the third stop operation is executed. Here, the middle stop button D42 is operated as the second stop operation, and as the second effect display A, an effect display is performed in which a person is trying to defeat a shark by throwing a spear.

Although the second effect display in (c) shows a second effect display in which the effect display does not branch, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of effect displays (second effect displays) so that the effect display branches. Good too. Even with this configuration, if the second effect display has fewer types of executable effect displays (fewer branches of effect displays) than the first effect display, third effect display, and lever effect display, good. In this way, by configuring the second performance display to have the least number of types (the number of branches of the performance display to be the least), it is possible to make the performances of the first performance display and the third performance display look interesting to the player.

Note that if the third stop operation is performed in a situation where the third time has not elapsed, the third effect display is executed, but the third stop operation is not performed in a situation where the third time has not elapsed. In this case, the second effect display is continuously executed. Further, the second effect display is configured such that the last screen constituting the second effect display is continuously displayed after the third time has elapsed, but the second effect display is displayed in a loop. It may be configured so that Further, it may be configured such that the effect display that is being executed continues to be executed without any reaction to the second stop operation.

Next, in (d1), when the third stop operation is performed, a third effect display corresponding to the third stop operation is performed. The third performance display is a performance that is continuously displayed for a fourth time (the same or different time as the first time, second time, and third time) after the player performs the third stop operation. be. If the start lever D50 is operated to start the next game while the third effect display is being executed, the third effect display is interrupted midway and the lever effect display corresponding to the operation of the start lever D50 is executed. It is configured so that Here, the right stop button D43 is operated as the third stop operation, and as the third effect display A, an effect is displayed indicating that the command effect in which the shark continues to swim has failed. Note that the third effect display may be interrupted in the middle by operating the bet button D220 while the third effect display is being executed. Furthermore, if the third effect display is interrupted midway due to the operation of the bet button D220 while the third effect display is being executed, the effect display that is displayed in a situation where no game is being executed is configured to be performed. Good too. In other words, if the third effect display is interrupted in the middle by operating the bet button D220 while the third effect display is being executed, and if the third effect display is interrupted in the middle by operating the start lever D50 while the third effect display is being executed. The subsequent performance display may be configured to be different depending on when the game is interrupted.

Further, as shown in (d2), when the third stop operation is performed after the second effect display in (c), the effect display corresponding to the third stop operation and different from the third effect display A is displayed. 3 effect display B may be performed. Here, the third performance display B is a performance display in which the thrown spear did not hit the shark, and a performance display indicating that the command performance has failed.

Further, as shown in (d3), when the third stop operation is performed after the second effect display in (c), the effect display corresponding to the third stop operation is displayed, and the third effect display A, the third effect display The configuration is such that a third effect display C different from the effect display B may be performed. In other words, the effect display is configured to branch to any one of (d1), (d2), and (d3) based on the third stop operation. In other words, three effect displays based on the third stop operation are provided, and one effect display is selected and executed based on the third stop operation. Here, as the third effect display C, the words "Repulse!" are displayed to indicate that the shark has been repelled, and an effect display is performed to indicate that the player has won.

The number of branches in the third effect display is not limited to three, and may be four or more. Further, the third effect display may be configured not to branch based on the third stop operation, for example, it may be configured such that only the third effect display A of (d1) is executed. Further, it may be configured such that the effect display that is being executed continues to be executed without any reaction to the third stop operation. Note that if the bet button D220 is operated or the start lever D50 is operated to start the next game in a situation where the fourth time has not elapsed, the third effect display is interrupted, but the fourth time has not elapsed. If the bet button D220 is not operated or the start lever D50 for starting the next game is not operated in a situation where the period has not yet elapsed, the third effect display is continuously executed. Further, the third effect display is configured such that the last screen constituting the third effect display is continuously displayed after the fourth time period has elapsed, but the third effect display is displayed in a loop. It may be configured so that As mentioned above, the third effect display may be interrupted in the middle by operating the bet button D220 while the third effect display is being executed. Preferably, it is configured to be uninterrupted.

In example 1 of such a performance, the number of branches of the performance display based on the first stop operation is greater than the number of branches of the performance display based on the second stop operation. Further, the number of branches in the effect display based on the third stop operation is greater than the number of branches in the effect display based on the second stop operation. Furthermore, the number of branches in the effect display based on the third stop operation is greater than the number of branches in the effect display based on the first stop operation. In other words, the relationship is that the number of branches in the effect display based on the second stop operation<the number of branches in the effect display based on the first stop operation<the number of branches in the effect display based on the third stop operation. The number of branches of the effect display based on the third stop operation is larger than the number of branches of the effect display based on the stop operation and the number of branches of the effect display based on the first stop operation. Since the third stop operation is the last operation required by the player for one game, by configuring it in this way, it is possible to concentrate the performance on the player after the timing when all of the one game is completed. Can be done.

Furthermore, when the lever effect display branches based on the operation of the start lever D50, the number of branches of the effect display based on the second stop operation<the number of branches of the effect display based on the first stop operation<the number of branches of the effect display based on the operation of the start lever D50 The relationship is that the number of branches in the effect display<the number of branches in the effect display based on the third stop operation. With this configuration, multiple patterns of performance display can be shown to the player at the beginning timing and end timing of one game, so the game experience is rich in the variety of performances at the beginning timing and end timing. It can be done.

Note that the number of branches in the effect display based on the second stop operation<the number of branches in the effect display based on the first stop operation<the number of branches in the effect display based on the third stop operation<the effect display based on the operation of the start lever D50. It may also be a relationship with the number of branches. Even with this configuration, multiple patterns of performance display can be shown to the player at the beginning timing and end timing of one game, so the game experience is rich in the variety of performances at the beginning timing and end timing. It can be done.

Further, a sub-input button effect display based on the operation of the sub-input button SB may be provided, and the number of branches of this effect display may be configured to have the following relationship.
(1) Number of branches in the effect display based on the second stop operation<Number of branches in the effect display based on the operation of the sub input button SB<Number of branches in the effect display based on the first stop operation<Number of branches in the effect display based on the operation of the start lever D50 The number of branches of the effect display based on the third stop operation<the number of branches of the effect display based on the third stop operation (2) The number of branches of the effect display based on the second stop operation<the number of branches of the effect display based on the first stop operation<Sub Number of branches in the effect display based on the operation of the input button SB<Number of branches in the effect display based on the operation of the start lever D50<Number of branches in the effect display based on the third stop operation (3) Effect based on the second stop operation Number of branches in the display<Number of branches in the effect display based on the first stop operation<Number of branches in the effect display based on the operation of the start lever D50<Number of branches in the effect display based on the operation of the sub input button SB<Third Number of branches in the effect display based on the stop operation (4) Number of branches in the effect display based on the second stop operation<Number of branches in the effect display based on the first stop operation<Branch in the effect display based on the operation of the start lever D50 Number <Number of branches of effect display based on third stop operation<Number of branches of effect display based on operation of sub-input button SB By configuring the sub-input button effect display to branch in this way, sub-input It is possible to make the button effect display interesting.

In addition, in the example 1 of the performance, an example of the performance in the advantageous section (normal) was shown, but it is not limited to the advantageous section (normal), and can be used in other game sections (for example, the normal section or the advantageous section (AT)), It may be a first state, a second state, a third state, etc.

Further, although the command performance is shown as an example 1 of the performance, other performances may be used as long as the relationship of the number of branches is similar even in the case of other performances. Further, although a presentation that can be completed in one game has been shown, a continuous presentation that can be completed in multiple games as shown in FIG. 71 may also be used.

<Example 2 of production>
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing example 2 of the performance, and is a diagram showing a command performance (mission performance) for executing a premium display that can be completed in one game in an advantageous section (normal). 70 shows that the lever effect display A in (a) of FIG. 69, the first effect display A in (b1), the second effect display A in (c), and the third effect display D corresponding to the third stop operation are executed. Including example 2 of the performance, the command performance (mission performance) is such that the performance display branches into four (executes any one of d1 to d4) based on the third stop operation. It is configured. Example 2 of presentation uses a confirmation presentation (premier presentation) that indicates to the player that the transition to the advantageous section (AT) is confirmed by performing a premium display as shown in the third cut of (d4). Described below, but not limited to. There are a plurality of types of confirmed performances, and one confirmed performance is selected from among the plurality of confirmed performances based on the player's operation of the start lever D50. In addition, the confirmed performance is not limited to a performance that confirms the transition to the advantageous section (AT), but may also be a performance that confirms the transition to the additional specialized state in the advantageous section (AT), which is advantageous for the player. It is sufficient if it is an effect that notifies that it has been determined (determined).

First, in (a) of FIG. 70, although not shown, when the player operates the start lever D50 as shown in (a) of FIG. 69, a lever effect display A for notifying the lottery result is started. .

Next, in (b1), when a first stop operation is performed, a first effect display corresponding to the first stop operation is performed. Here, the left stop button D41 is operated as the first stop operation, and as the first effect display A, an effect display of a shark swimming from right to left is performed. The effect display in (b1) is a effect display consisting of three cuts, and the one shown on the far left (b1) is the first effect display A of the first cut. After the first effect display A of the first cut is executed, the first effect display A of the second cut is performed on the condition that the second stop operation is not performed. (b1) shown second from the left is the first effect display A of the second cut, in which an underwater effect display is performed in which no shark is displayed. After the first effect display A of the second cut is executed, the first effect display A of the third cut is performed on the condition that the second stop operation is not performed. (b1) shown third from the left is the first effect display A of the third cut, in which a shark is shown swimming from left to right. In other words, the first performance display A is configured as a performance display with three cuts (the number of cuts is three). Note that although the third cut is an image from the same viewpoint as the first cut, it may be an image from a different viewpoint from the first cut.

Note that the first effect display A is not limited to three cuts, but may be composed of a plurality of cuts. In addition, the first effect display A is such that after the first effect display A of the third cut is executed, the first effect display A of the third cut is continuously displayed (for example, a still image is displayed, a shark, etc. is shaking) However, the first effect display A of the first to third cuts may be displayed in a loop.

Here, a cut is an individual fragment of a video created by connecting videos taken with multiple cameras. Also, a section of a video that is obtained by cutting or deleting a video to extract a necessary section from the video material is called a cut, and a video where the camera angle does not change is one cut. For example, in the first cut (b1) of FIG. 70, the video in which the shark is swimming from the right end to the left end of the effect display device S40 is the first cut, and the underwater video in the next second cut (b2) is also the first cut. This is the first cut. Further, the number of cuts refers to the number of cuts. For example, if one performance is composed of two cuts, the number of cuts in one performance is two.

Next, in (c), when the second stop operation is performed, a second effect display corresponding to the second stop operation is performed. Here, the middle stop button D42 is operated as the second stop operation, and as the second effect display A, an effect display is performed in which a person is trying to defeat a shark by throwing a spear. The effect display in (c) is a effect display consisting of two cuts, and the one shown on the far left (c) is the second effect display A of the first cut. After the second effect display A of the first cut is executed, the second effect display A of the second cut is performed on the condition that the second stop operation is not performed. (c) shown second from the left is the second effect display A of the second cut, in which an effect display is performed in which the screen of the effect display device S40 explodes. In other words, the second performance display A is configured as a performance display with two cuts (the number of cuts is 2).

Note that the second effect display A is not limited to two cuts, but may be composed of a plurality of cuts. In addition, the second effect display A is such that after the second effect display A of the second cut is executed, the second effect display A of the second cut is continuously displayed (for example, a still image is displayed, a character, etc. is displayed). In this case, the characters, etc. are displayed shaking), but the second effect display A of the first cut to the second cut may be displayed in a loop.

Next, in (d4), when the third stop operation is performed, a third effect display corresponding to the third stop operation is performed. Here, the right stop button D43 is operated as the third stop operation, and a performance display showing the result of the command performance is performed as the third performance display D. The effect display (d4) is a effect display consisting of four cuts, and (d4) shown on the far left is the third effect display D of the first cut. After the third effect display D of the first cut is executed, the third effect display D of the second cut is performed on the condition that the start lever D50, which is the trigger for executing the next game, is not operated. (d4) shown second from the left is the third effect display D of the second cut, in which an effect display is performed in which the screen of the effect display device S40 explodes. After the third effect display D of the second cut is executed, the third effect display of the third cut is performed on the condition that the bet button D220 is not operated or the start lever D50, which is the trigger for executing the next game, is not operated. D is performed. The third effect (d4) shown from the left is the third effect display D of the third cut, and as a premiere display (confirmed display), an effect display in which the premium character fox smiles is performed. After the third effect display D of the third cut is executed, the third effect display of the fourth cut is displayed on the condition that the bet button D220 is not operated or the start lever D50, which is the trigger for executing the next game, is not operated. D is performed. The fourth one from the left (d4) is the third production display D of the fourth cut, and the words "Repulse!" are displayed to indicate that the shark has been repelled, indicating that the command production was successful. Display is taking place. In other words, the third performance display D is configured as a performance display with four cuts (the number of cuts is four).

Note that the third effect display D is not limited to four cuts, but may be composed of a plurality of cuts. In addition, the third effect display D is such that after the execution of the third effect display D of the fourth cut, the third effect display D of the fourth cut is continuously displayed (for example, a still image is displayed, a character, etc. is shaking). However, the third effect display D of the first to fourth cuts may be displayed in a loop.

In example 2 of such a performance, the number of cuts in the third performance display D corresponding to the third stop operation (4 cuts) is greater than the number of cuts (3 cuts) in the first performance display A corresponding to the first stop operation. ). Also, the configuration is such that the number of cuts in the third effect display D corresponding to the third stop operation is greater (4 cuts) than the number of cuts in the second effect display A corresponding to the second stop operation (2 cuts). are doing. Furthermore, the configuration is such that the number of cuts in the first effect display A corresponding to the first stop operation (3 cuts) is greater than the number of cuts in the second effect display A corresponding to the second stop operation (2 cuts). are doing. In other words, the relationship is that the number of cuts in the second effect display<the number of cuts in the first effect display<the number of cuts in the third effect display, which is greater than the number of cuts in the first effect display and the number of cuts in the second effect display. , the number of cuts in the third effect display is relatively larger. With this configuration, since the third stop operation is at the timing when the player's operations necessary for one game are completed, the performance display after the third stop operation can be shown to the player in a focused manner. In addition, it improves the tempo of the game (does not make it worse), and since the effect is displayed after the third stop operation, there is no chance of accidentally skipping the effect display that the player wants to see during the flow of the stop operation, so the effect display can be controlled by the player. It can be shown by focusing on.

Note that the relationship may be such that the number of cuts in the first effect display<the number of cuts in the second effect display<the number of cuts in the third effect display. As a result, the number of cuts in the third effect display may be relatively larger than the number of cuts in the first effect display and the number of cuts in the second effect display, and by configuring it in this way, Since the third stop operation is the timing when the player's operations necessary for one game are completed, the effect display after the third stop operation can be shown to the player in a way that allows the player to concentrate, improving the tempo of the game ( In addition, since the effect display that the player wants to see will not be erroneously skipped due to the flow of the stop operation, the player can concentrate on the effect display.

In addition, in the example 2 of the performance so far, an example of the performance in the advantageous section (normal) has been shown, but it is not limited to the advantageous section (normal), and can be used in other game sections (for example, the normal section or the advantageous section (AT). )), a first state, a second state, a third state, etc.

Further, the lever effect display based on the operation of the start lever D50 may be configured as a effect display consisting of a plurality of cuts. When configured in this way, the number of cuts in the second effect display<the number of cuts in the first effect display< The number of cuts in the lever effect display<the number of cuts in the third effect display is established. With such a relationship, it is possible to improve the tempo of the game at the beginning and end of one game.

Note that the relationship may be such that the number of cuts in the second effect display<the number of cuts in the first effect display<the number of cuts in the third effect display<the number of cuts in the lever effect display. Even with such a relationship, it is possible to improve the tempo of the game at the beginning and end of one game.

In addition, in a production display in which the number of cuts in the lever production display is made to be greater (for example, 7 cuts) than the number of cuts in the third production display (for example, 4 cuts), the number of cuts in the third production display (for example, 4 cuts), the number of cuts of the lever effect display that is displayed from the time the display of the lever effect display starts until the first stop operation becomes possible (from the timing when the display of the lever effect display starts) It may be configured such that the number of cuts in the lever effect display that is displayed in the period up to the timing when the first stop operation becomes possible in the shortest time is greater (for example, 5 cuts). . With this configuration, by improving the tempo at the start of the game, it is possible to make the player look forward to the development of the performance in the future.

Further, a sub-input button effect display based on the operation of the sub-input button SB may be provided, and the number of cuts in this effect display may be configured to have the following relationship.
(1) Number of cuts in the second effect display < Number of cuts in the sub input button effect display < Number of cuts in the first effect display < Number of cuts in the lever effect display < Number of cuts in the third effect display (2) Number of cuts in the second effect display Number of cuts < Number of cuts in the first effect display < Number of cuts in the sub input button effect display < Number of cuts in the lever effect display < Number of cuts in the third effect display (3) Number of cuts in the second effect display < Number of cuts in the first effect display Number of cuts < Number of cuts on the lever effect display < Number of cuts on the sub input button effect display < Number of cuts on the third effect display (4) Number of cuts on the second effect display < Number of cuts on the first effect display < Cuts on the lever effect display Number<Number of cuts in the third effect display<Number of cuts in the sub-input button effect display (5) Number of cuts in the second effect display<Number of cuts in the sub-input button effect display<Number of cuts in the first effect display<Number of cuts in the third effect display Number of cuts < Number of cuts on the lever effect display (6) Number of cuts on the second effect display < Number of cuts on the first effect display < Number of cuts on the sub input button effect display < Number of cuts on the third effect display < Number of cuts on the lever effect display Number of cuts (7) Number of cuts in the second effect display < Number of cuts in the first effect display < Number of cuts in the third effect display < Number of cuts in the sub input button effect display < Number of cuts in the lever effect display (8) Second effect Number of cuts in the display < Number of cuts in the first effect display < Number of cuts in the third effect display < Number of cuts in the lever effect display < Number of cuts in the sub-input button effect display The number of cuts in the sub-input button effect display is configured in this way. By doing so, it is possible to make the sub-input button performance display a fast-paced performance display.

Although the final performance is shown as the second example of the performance, other performances different from the final performance may be used as long as they have the same cut number relationship. For example, in the case of other effects (for example, one game story effect, etc.), the number of cuts in the lever effect display = 9, the number of cuts in the first effect display = 3, the number of cuts in the second effect display = 2, and the third effect display The number of cuts is 5, and the total number of cuts is 19. On the other hand, in the case of the above-mentioned confirmed effect, the number of cuts in the lever effect display = 7, the number of cuts in the first effect display = 3, the number of cuts in the second effect display = 2, and the number of cuts in the third effect display = 4. The total number of cuts is 16. In other words, the configuration is such that the number of cuts for other performances is relatively greater than the number of cuts for the final performance. Here, in a reel-type gaming machine in which the number of production stages in the advantageous section (normal) is larger than the number of production stages in the advantageous section (AT), the number of production stages in the advantageous section (normal) is larger than the number of production stages in the advantageous section (AT). The number of cuts of other performances in a predetermined game section is relatively larger than the number of cuts of confirmed performances in the section (normal) and advantageous section (AT). In this way, by increasing the number of cuts of other performances in a predetermined game section and increasing the amount of information, it is possible to make the predetermined game section a game section with a good tempo performance. Moreover, by increasing the variations of performances in a predetermined game section in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored, and by deliberately reducing the number of cuts in the definite performance, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the definite performance.

In addition, in a reel type gaming machine where the number of production stages in the advantageous section (normal) is larger than the number of production stages in the advantageous section (AT), the number of cuts of the confirmed production in the advantageous section (normal) It is also preferable that the number of cuts for other effects is relatively larger than that for other effects. In this way, by increasing the number of cuts of other performances in the advantageous section (normal) and increasing the amount of information, the advantageous section (normal) can be made into a game section with a good tempo performance. In addition, by increasing the variation of performances in the advantageous section (normal) in this way, it is possible to prevent players from getting bored, and by deliberately reducing the number of cuts in fixed performances, it is possible to draw players' attention to fixed performances. .

Although it has been explained that the number of production stages in the normal section < the number of production stages in the advantageous section (AT) < the number of production stages in the advantageous section (normal), the relationship is not limited to this. It can also be a relationship.
(1) Number of production stages in advantageous section (AT) < number of production stages in normal section < number of production stages in advantageous section (normal) (2) Number of production stages in normal section < production in advantageous section (normal) Number of stages < Number of production stages in advantageous section (AT) (3) Number of production stages in advantageous section (normal) < Number of production stages in normal section < Number of production stages in advantageous section (AT) (4) Advantageous Number of production stages in the section (normal) < Number of production stages in the advantageous section (AT) < Number of production stages in the normal section (5) Number of production stages in the advantageous section (AT) < Production stages in the advantageous section (normal) Number of <Number of production stages in the normal section

If the configuration is such that the number of production stages in the advantageous section (AT) is the largest, by increasing the number of cuts of other productions in the advantageous section (AT) and increasing the amount of information, the number of production stages in the advantageous section (AT) can be increased. ) can be made into a game section with a good tempo performance. In addition, by increasing the variations of performances in the advantageous section (AT) so that the player does not get bored, by deliberately reducing the number of cuts in the definite performance, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the definite performance.

If the normal section is configured so that the number of production stages is the largest, by increasing the number of cuts of other productions in the normal section and increasing the amount of information, the normal section can be changed into a game section with a fast-paced production. It can be done. In addition, by increasing the variations of performances in the normal section so that the player does not get bored, by deliberately reducing the number of cuts in the definite performance, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the definite performance.

In addition, when providing a production stage exclusively for the normal section, it is preferable to configure the number of production stages for the normal section to be the smallest. Furthermore, even in the case where there are performance stages that are commonly used in the normal section and the advantageous section (normal), it is preferable to configure the normal section so that the number of performance stages is the smallest. By reducing the number of performance stages in the normal section in this way, the data capacity in the normal section can be reduced, so it is possible to increase the variation of performances in other game sections, and prevent players from getting bored. Can be done.

In addition, if the game section configured such that the number of cuts of other performances is relatively greater than the number of cuts of confirmed performances is an advantageous interval (normal), the player will stay in the AT precursor state during the advantageous interval (normal). The period during which the player is staying in the advantageous section (normal) and the period during which he/she stays in the opportunity zone (for example, the chance zone where it is easy to transition to the advantageous section (AT)) cannot be included in the advantageous section (normal). preferable. In addition, when providing a continuous performance that can be executed during the advantageous section (normal), it is preferable that the period during which the continuous performance is executed during the advantageous section (normal) is not included in the advantageous section (normal). By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a reel-type gaming machine in which the number of cuts of the confirmed performance in the advantageous section (normal) and the number of cuts of other performances are balanced.

In addition, if a game section configured such that the number of cuts of other effects is relatively greater than the number of cuts of the confirmed effect is an advantageous section (AT), during the execution of a pseudo bonus during the advantageous section (AT). It is preferable that the period of 1 and the period of stay in the additional specialization state during the advantageous section (AT) are not included in the advantageous section (AT). Furthermore, if continuous performances, chance zones (for example, chance zones where it is easy to win additional specialization states, etc.) or specialization precursor states are provided in the advantageous section (AT), during the execution of the continuous performance during the advantageous section (AT), , the period of stay in the opportunity zone during the advantageous section (AT), and the period of stay in the specialization precursor state during the advantageous section (AT) cannot be included in the advantageous section (AT). preferable. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to provide a reel-type gaming machine in which the number of cuts of the confirmed performance in the advantageous section (AT) and the number of cuts of other performances are balanced.

In addition, if the game section that is configured so that the number of cuts of other performances is relatively greater than the number of cuts of the confirmed performance is a normal section, the period during which continuous performances are being executed in the normal section and the normal section It is preferable that the period of stay in the middle chance zone is not included in the normal section. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a reel-type gaming machine in which the number of cuts of the fixed performance in the normal section and the number of cuts of other performances are balanced.

Further, the maximum volume of the sound of the confirmed performance is configured to be higher than the maximum volume of BGM related to the performance stage on which the user is staying. By configuring in this way, it is possible to widely announce that the confirmed performance is being executed, so it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the confirmed performance.

Further, the maximum volume of the sound for the confirmed performance may be configured to be louder than the maximum volume of the sound during the medal empty error notification. By configuring this way, even if a medal empty error occurs during execution of a confirmed effect, after the medal empty error is canceled, the BGM during the confirmed effect will be output at a louder volume than the sound that is notifying the medal empty error. Therefore, even if the medal empty error occurs, the game can be continued without losing the feeling of superiority during the confirmed performance after the medal empty error is canceled. Note that the display for notifying the medal empty error is composed of one cut, and the display for notifying other errors is similarly composed of one cut.

In addition, in the case of a reel-type gaming machine that has a normal section, an advantageous section (normal), and an advantageous section (AT) as game sections, the data capacity of the image data of the normal section is the same as that of the image data of the advantageous section (normal). The capacity is configured to be smaller than the data capacity of image data in the advantageous section (AT). In other words, the data capacity of the image data in the normal section is configured to be the smallest compared to the data capacity of the image data in the other game sections. In this way, by reducing the data capacity in the normal section and increasing the variation of effects in other game sections, we can increase the variation of effects in the advantageous section (normal) and the advantageous section (AT), which have a longer stay period than the normal section. Since the number of players can be increased, it is possible to prevent players from getting bored.

Further, it may be configured such that the data capacity of the image data in the normal section<the data capacity of the image data in the advantageous section (normal)<the data capacity of the image data in the advantageous section (AT). By doing this, in the case of reel-type gaming machines where you want to set a longer period of stay in the advantageous section (AT), it is possible to increase the variation of performances in the advantageous section (AT) and prevent players from getting bored. be able to.

Further, the data capacity of the image data in the normal section may be configured such that the data capacity of the image data in the advantageous section (AT) is less than the data capacity of the image data in the advantageous section (normal). By doing so, in the advantageous section (normal) before the advantageous section (AT), multiple production stages are provided from a production stage with low expectations to a production stage with high expectations that will transition to the advantageous section (AT). Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of performances and prevent players from getting bored.

Although FIG. 70 shows an effect that is completed in one game, it may be a continuous effect that is completed in a plurality of games as shown in FIG. 71, which will be described later.

<Example of production 3>
FIG. 71 and FIG. 72 are diagrams showing example 3 of the performance, and are diagrams showing a command performance (mission performance) that is completed with a plurality of games in an advantageous section (normal). The third example of performance is a continuous performance, and the continuous performance illustrated here is one continuous performance selected from a plurality of continuous performances based on the player's operation of the start lever D50.

First, in (a), when the player operates the start lever D50, the lever effect display of the continuous effect for notifying the lottery result is started, and the first game of the continuous effect is started. The lever performance display is a performance that is continuously displayed for a 1-1 time period (same as or different from the first time period) after the player operates the start lever D50. If the first stop operation is performed during execution of the lever effect display, the lever effect display is interrupted midway and the first effect display corresponding to the first stop operation is executed. Here, a lever effect display A in which characters "Fight off the shark!" is displayed on the effect display device S40 is executed, and a command effect is started. Although only one type of lever effect display is shown in response to the operation of the start lever D50, multiple types of lever effect displays are provided so that one of the plurality of types of lever effect displays is triggered by the operation of the start lever D50. It may be configured to execute a lever effect display.

In addition, if the first stop operation is performed in a situation where the 1-1 time has not elapsed, the first effect display will be executed, but if the first stop operation is performed in a situation where the 1-1 time has not elapsed. If not performed, the lever effect display is continuously executed. In addition, the lever effect display is configured so that the last screen that makes up the lever effect display is continuously displayed after the 1-1 time has elapsed, but the lever effect display is displayed in a loop. It may be configured as follows.

Next, in (b), when the first stop operation is performed, a first effect display corresponding to the first stop operation is performed. The first performance display is a performance that is continuously displayed for a 2-1 time period (the same or different time period as the second time period) after the player performs the first stop operation. If the second stop operation is performed during execution of the first effect display, the first effect display is interrupted midway, and the second effect display corresponding to the second stop operation is executed. Here, the left stop button D41 is operated as the first stop operation, and as the first effect display A, an effect display of a shark swimming from right to left is performed. In addition, in (b), the first effect display corresponding to the first stop operation shows only the first effect display A, but the effect is configured to be branched by providing a plurality of types of effect displays. In addition, in (b), as shown in (f) of FIG. 72, it may be configured to include a chance-up pattern of the first effect display corresponding to the first stop operation. When providing a chance up pattern, it is preferable to provide a plurality of chance up patterns.

In addition, if the second stop operation is performed in a situation where the 2-1 time has not elapsed, the second effect display will be executed, but if the second stop operation is performed in a situation where the 2-1 time has not elapsed. If this is not performed, the first effect display is continuously executed. Further, the first effect display is configured such that the last screen constituting the first effect display is continuously displayed after the 2-1 time has elapsed, but the first effect display is looped. It may be configured to be displayed.

Next, in (c), when the second stop operation is performed, a second effect display corresponding to the second stop operation is performed. The second performance display is a performance that is continuously displayed for a 3-1 time period (the same or different time period as the third time period) after the player performs the second stop operation. If a third stop operation is performed during execution of the second effect display, the second effect display is interrupted midway, and a third effect display corresponding to the third stop operation is executed. Here, the middle stop button D42 is operated as the second stop operation, and as the second effect display B, an effect display of a shark swimming from left to right is performed. In addition, in (c), the second effect display corresponding to the second stop operation shows only the second effect display B, but the effect is configured to be branched by providing a plurality of types of effect displays. The second effect display corresponding to the second stop operation has fewer types than the first effect display corresponding to the first stop operation, the third effect display corresponding to the third stop operation, and the lever effect display (branching of effect display). (few). In addition, in (c), it may be configured to include a chance-up pattern of the second effect display corresponding to the second stop operation, in which case, the first effect display corresponding to the first stop operation in (b) It is sufficient that the number of types is smaller than the number of chance up patterns in (d) or the number of chance up patterns in the third effect display corresponding to the third stop operation in (d).

In addition, if the third stop operation is performed in a situation where the 3-1 time has not elapsed, the third effect display will be executed, but if the third stop operation is performed in a situation where the 3-1 time has not elapsed. If this is not performed, the second effect display is continuously executed. In addition, the second effect display is configured such that the last screen constituting the second effect display is continuously displayed after the 3-1 time period has elapsed, but the second effect display is looped. It may be configured to be displayed.

Next, in (d), when the third stop operation is performed, a third effect display corresponding to the third stop operation is performed. The third performance display is a performance that is continuously displayed for a 4-1 time period (the same or different time period as the fourth time period) after the player performs the third stop operation. If the bet button D220 is operated or the start lever D50 is operated to start the next game while the third effect display is being executed, the third effect display is interrupted midway. Here, the right stop button D43 is operated as the third stop operation, and as the third effect display A, an effect display in which a shark continues to swim is performed. Here, in (d), the first game ends, but since the continuous effect continues in the next game, the characters "NEXT" indicating that the continuous effect continues to the next game are displayed at the bottom right of the effect display device S40. is displayed. In addition, in (d), the third effect display corresponding to the third stop operation shows only the third effect display A, but the effect display is configured to branch by providing multiple types of effect displays. . Further, in (d), as shown in (h) of FIG. 72, the third effect display corresponding to the third stop operation may be configured to be the effect display of the chance up pattern. When providing an effect display of a chance up pattern, it is preferable to provide an effect display of a plurality of chance up patterns.

In addition, if the bet button D220 is operated or the start lever D50 is operated to start the next game in a situation where the 4-1 time has not elapsed, the third effect display is interrupted, but the fourth effect display is interrupted. If the bet button D220 is not operated or the start lever D50 is not operated to start the next game in a situation where -1 time has not elapsed, the third effect display is continuously executed. There is. In addition, the third effect display is configured such that the last screen constituting the third effect display is continuously displayed after the 4-1 time has elapsed, but the third effect display is looped. It may be configured to be displayed.

Next, in (e), when the player operates the start lever D50, the next game is started, and the second game of the continuous performance is started. The lever performance display is a performance that is continuously displayed for a 1-2nd time (the same or different time as the first time) after the player operates the start lever D50. If the first stop operation is performed during execution of the lever effect display, the lever effect display is interrupted midway and the first effect display corresponding to the first stop operation is executed. Here, as lever effect display B, an effect display is performed in which a person is chasing a shark on a boat. In addition, in (e), the lever effect display shows only the lever effect display B, but the effect display may be configured to have a plurality of types of effect displays so that the effect display branches.

In addition, if the first stop operation is performed in a situation where the 1-2 time has not elapsed, the first effect display will be executed, but if the first stop operation is performed in a situation where the 1-2 time has not elapsed. If not performed, the lever effect display is continuously executed. In addition, the lever effect display is configured so that the last screen that makes up the lever effect display continues to be displayed after the 1-2 time period has elapsed, but the lever effect display is displayed in a loop. It may be configured as follows.

Next, in (f), when the first stop operation is performed, a first effect display corresponding to the first stop operation is performed. The first performance display is a performance that is continuously displayed for a 2-2 time period (the same or different time period as the second time period) after the player performs the first stop operation. If the second stop operation is performed during execution of the first effect display, the first effect display is interrupted midway, and the second effect display corresponding to the second stop operation is executed. Here, the left stop button D41 is operated as the first stop operation, and as the first effect display B, an effect display showing that the shark is surprised is performed. In addition, in (f), the first effect display corresponding to the first stop operation shows only the first effect display B, but the effect display is configured to branch by providing four types of effect displays. . Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 72(f), a telop is displayed in the first effect display corresponding to the first stop operation. The production display including the caption display is a production display of a chance-up pattern that suggests that there is a high possibility of winning (winning) the AT, BB role, additional specialization state, etc., and the continuous production is successful. This is a performance display that suggests the degree of expectation (possibility), and is configured to include three types of first performance display (performance display of a chance-up pattern) corresponding to the first stop operation. Then, in the first effect display corresponding to the first stop operation, the effect display of one chance up pattern is selected and displayed from the effect displays of a plurality of chance up patterns. Note that the performance display of the chance up pattern is not limited to a performance display including a telop display, but may be any performance display that includes an image or the like that can suggest that there is a chance.

In addition, if the second stop operation is performed in a situation where the 2-2 time has not elapsed, the second effect display will be executed, but if the second stop operation is performed in a situation where the 2-2 time has not elapsed. If this is not performed, the first effect display is continuously executed. Further, the first effect display is configured such that the last screen constituting the first effect display is continuously displayed after the 2-2 time period has elapsed, but the first effect display is looped. It may be configured to be displayed.

Next, in (g), when the second stop operation is performed, a second effect display corresponding to the second stop operation is performed. The second performance display is a performance that is continuously displayed for a 3-2 time period (the same or different time period as the third time period) after the player performs the second stop operation. If a third stop operation is performed during execution of the second effect display, the second effect display is interrupted midway, and a third effect display corresponding to the third stop operation is executed. Here, the middle stop button D42 is operated as the second stop operation, and as the second effect display A, an effect display is performed in which a person is trying to defeat a shark by throwing a spear. In addition, in (g), the second effect display corresponding to the second stop operation shows only the second effect display B, but the effect display is configured to have two types of effect displays so that the effect display branches. . The second effect display corresponding to the second stop operation has fewer types than the first effect display corresponding to the first stop operation, the third effect display corresponding to the third stop operation, and the lever effect display (branching of effect display). (few). In addition, in (g), the second effect display corresponding to the second stop operation may be configured to be the effect display of the chance up pattern, and in that case, the first effect display corresponding to the first stop operation may be configured to be the effect display of the chance up pattern. It is sufficient that the number of types is smaller than the number (the number of effect displays of the chance up pattern) or the number of third effect displays corresponding to the third stop operation (the number of effect displays of the chance up pattern).

In addition, if the third stop operation is performed in a situation where the 3-2 time has not elapsed, the third effect display will be executed, but if the third stop operation is performed in a situation where the 3-2 time has not elapsed. If this is not performed, the second effect display is continuously executed. Further, the second effect display is configured such that the last screen constituting the second effect display is continuously displayed after the lapse of the 3-2 time period, but the second effect display is looped. It may be configured to be displayed.

Next, in (h), when the third stop operation is performed, a third effect display corresponding to the third stop operation is performed. The third performance display is a performance that is continuously displayed for a 4-2 time period (the same or different time period as the fourth time period) after the player performs the third stop operation. If the bet button D220 is operated or the start lever D50 is operated to start the next game while the third effect display is being executed, the third effect display is interrupted midway. Here, the right stop button D43 is operated as the third stop operation, and the third effect display B is an effect display in which the thrown spear did not hit the shark. Here, the second game ends in (h), but since the continuous effect continues in the next game, the characters "NEXT" indicating that the continuous effect continues to the next game are displayed at the bottom right of the effect display device S40. is displayed. In addition, in (h), the third effect display corresponding to the third stop operation shows only the third effect display B, but the effect display is configured to branch by providing three types of effect displays. . Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 72(h), a telop is displayed in the third effect display corresponding to the third stop operation. It is configured to have two types of third effect display (effect display of chance up pattern) corresponding to the third stop operation.

Note that if the bet button D220 is operated or the start lever D50 is operated to start the next game in a situation where the 4-2 time has not elapsed, the third effect display will be interrupted, but the fourth effect display will be interrupted. If the bet button D220 is not operated or the start lever D50 is not operated to start the next game in a situation where -2 time has not elapsed, the third effect display is continuously executed. There is. Further, the third effect display is configured such that the last screen constituting the third effect display is continuously displayed after the 4-2 time period has elapsed, but the third effect display is looped. It may be configured to be displayed.

Next, in (i), when the player operates the start lever D50, the next game is started, and the third game of the continuous performance is started. The lever performance display is a performance that is continuously displayed for 1-3 times (same or different time as the first time) after the player operates the start lever D50. If the first stop operation is performed during execution of the lever effect display, the lever effect display is interrupted midway and the first effect display corresponding to the first stop operation is executed. Here, as lever effect display B, an effect display is performed in which a person is chasing a shark on a boat. In (i), the lever effect display shows only the lever effect display B, but it may be configured such that the effect display branches by providing a plurality of types of effect displays.

In addition, if the first stop operation is performed in a situation where the 1-3 time has not elapsed, the first effect display will be executed, but if the first stop operation is performed in a situation where the 1-3 time has not elapsed. If not performed, the lever effect display is continuously executed. In addition, the lever effect display is configured so that the last screen that makes up the lever effect display continues to be displayed after the 1st to 3rd time period has elapsed, but the lever effect display is displayed in a loop. It may be configured as follows.

Next, in (j), when the first stop operation is performed, a first effect display corresponding to the first stop operation is performed. The first performance display is a performance that is continuously displayed for a second to third time period (the same or different time period as the second time period) after the player performs the first stop operation. If the second stop operation is performed during execution of the first effect display, the first effect display is interrupted midway, and the second effect display corresponding to the second stop operation is executed. Here, the left stop button D41 is operated as the first stop operation, and as the first effect display B, an effect display showing that the shark is surprised is performed. In addition, in (j), the first effect display corresponding to the first stop operation shows only the first effect display B, but the effect display is configured to have multiple types of effect displays so that the effect display branches. . Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 72(f), the first performance display corresponding to a plurality of types of first stop operations may be configured to be a chance-up pattern performance display. When providing an effect display of a chance up pattern, it is preferable to provide an effect display of a plurality of chance up patterns.

In addition, if the second stop operation is performed in a situation where the 2-3 time has not elapsed, the second effect display will be executed, but if the second stop operation is performed in a situation where the 2-3 time has not elapsed. If this is not performed, the first effect display is continuously executed. Further, the first effect display is configured such that the last screen constituting the first effect display is continuously displayed after the 2-3 time period has elapsed, but the first effect display is looped. It may be configured to be displayed.

Next, in (k), when the second stop operation is performed, a second effect display corresponding to the second stop operation is performed. The second performance display is a performance that is continuously displayed for a 3-3 period of time (the same or different time as the third time) after the player performs the second stop operation. If a third stop operation is performed during execution of the second effect display, the second effect display is interrupted midway, and a third effect display corresponding to the third stop operation is executed. Here, the middle stop button D42 is operated as the second stop operation, and as the second effect display A, an effect display is performed in which a person is trying to defeat a shark by throwing a spear. In addition, in (k), the second effect display corresponding to the second stop operation shows only the second effect display B, but the effect display is configured to branch by providing multiple types of effect displays. . The second effect display corresponding to the second stop operation has fewer types than the first effect display corresponding to the first stop operation, the third effect display corresponding to the third stop operation, and the lever effect display (branching of effect display). (few). In addition, in (k), the second effect display corresponding to the second stop operation may be configured to be the effect display of the chance up pattern, and in that case, the first effect display corresponding to the first stop operation may be configured to be the effect display of the chance up pattern. It is sufficient that the number of types is smaller than the number (the number of effect displays of the chance up pattern) or the number of third effect displays corresponding to the third stop operation (the number of effect displays of the chance up pattern).

In addition, if the third stop operation is performed in a situation where the 3-3 time has not elapsed, the third effect display will be executed, but if the third stop operation is performed in a situation where the 3-3 time has not elapsed. If this is not performed, the second effect display is continuously executed. Furthermore, the second effect display is configured such that the last screen constituting the second effect display continues to be displayed after the lapse of the 3-3 time period, but the second effect display is looped. It may be configured to be displayed.

Next, in (l), the result of the continuous performance is displayed, and when the third stop operation is performed, the third performance display corresponding to the third stop operation is performed. The third performance display is a performance that is continuously displayed for a 4-3 time period (same or different time as the fourth time period) after the player performs the third stop operation. If the bet button D220 is operated or the start lever D50 is operated to start the next game while the third effect display is being executed, the third effect display is interrupted midway. It may be configured so that it is not performed. Here, the right stop button D43 is operated as the third stop operation, and the characters "Repel!" are displayed as the third effect display C, indicating that the shark has been repelled, and the effect display indicating that the shark has been won. is being carried out. In addition, in (l), the third effect display corresponding to the third stop operation shows only the third effect display C, but it is also possible to configure the effect display to branch by providing multiple types of effect displays. good.

Note that if the effect display is not interrupted in a situation where the 4-3rd time has not elapsed, the third effect display is continuously executed. In addition, the third effect display is configured such that the last screen constituting the third effect display is continuously displayed after the 4-3 time period has elapsed, but the third effect display is looped. It may be configured to be displayed.

In example 3 of such a performance, games other than the first game of the continuous performance, the first game, and the third game, the last game of the continuous performance, that is, the second game, which is a game in the middle of the continuous performance. In the game, the number of branches in the effect display based on the first stop operation (four) is greater than the number of branches in the effect display based on the third stop operation (three). Also, the number of first effect displays of the chance up pattern corresponding to the first stop operation (three) is greater than the number of third effect displays of the chance up pattern corresponding to the third stop operation (two). It is configured so that it increases. With this configuration, in a continuous performance, by increasing the number of branches of the performance display based on the first stop operation, it is possible to surprise the player at an early timing during one game and to make the performance successful. It is possible to create a sense of expectation.

In addition, in the example 3 of the performance, an example of the performance in the advantageous section (normal) was shown, but it is not limited to the advantageous section (normal), but can also be used in other game sections (for example, the normal section or the advantageous section (AT)) It may be a first state, a second state, a third state, etc.

In addition, although the commanded performance is shown as the continuous performance in Example 3, it may be any other continuous performance that is different from the commanded performance. In a game other than the last game of the continuous performance, that is, a game in the middle of the continuous performance, the number of branches of the performance display based on the first stop operation is greater than the number of branches of the performance display based on the third stop operation. configuration). In addition, although a continuous effect consisting of three games has been shown as a continuous effect, it is sufficient if the continuous effect consists of a plurality of games, and three or more games is preferable. Further, in the first game of continuous effects, the number of branches of effect display based on the first stop operation may be greater than the number of branches of effect display based on the third stop operation. With this configuration, by increasing the number of branches in the effect display based on the first stop operation in continuous effects, it is possible to surprise the player at an early timing during one game, and also to increase the likelihood that the effect will be successful. It is possible to create a sense of anticipation at an early timing in a continuous performance. Furthermore, (a) to (l) in FIGS. 71 and 72 are effects (videos) with different cuts.

Note that the effect display of the chance-up pattern is configured to have a greater number of cuts than the effect display of the normal pattern (effect display without telop display). With this configuration, by improving the tempo of the game, it is possible to suggest to the player that the expectation of winning is high.

In addition, in example 3 of the effect, an example of the effect that continues until the third game was explained, but it is not necessary to continue until the third game, and it is not necessary to continue until the third game. You can repel the shark and display the lottery result (winning/non-winning), or in the effect display corresponding to the third stop operation of the second game, the effect display that the spear thrown did not hit the shark is displayed, and the next It may be indicated that the lottery result is a non-winning result by returning to the background screen of the production stage of the advantageous section (normal) by operating the start lever D50 to start the game. Furthermore, the continuous performance may end in one game.

Further, in order to indicate the possibility that the continuous effect will continue to the next game, a plurality of patterns of continuous images may be provided. For example, in order to incite in the second game whether or not to continue to the third game, in the effect display corresponding to the third stop operation in the second game, the continuation image is not "NEXT" but "NEXT?" "NEXT!" ?" may be displayed. With this kind of structure, the expectation level for continuing into the third game is NEXT? <NEXT! ? <NEXT.

Although a case has been shown in which the third game has an effect display with the same progress as the second game, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second game and the third game may have different effect displays. For example, if the expectations for repelling the shark in the third game are higher than for repelling the shark in the second game, the performance display for the third game can be set to the performance display with higher expectations, and the start lever D50 The distance to the shark may be short during the operation, the shark displayed during the first stop operation may be small, the spear displayed during the second stop operation may be large, etc.

In this way, when displaying the continuation image on the effect display device S40, the player mainly moves the direction of the action to advance the game (start lever D50 → left stop button D41 → middle stop button D42 → right stop button D43). By displaying the continuous images in the same direction as (left to right), the player can recognize the continuous images without feeling uncomfortable.

After the third stop operation is performed in the first and second games, the effect display displayed by the third stop operation continues to be displayed until the start lever D50 is operated to start the next game. Ru. In other words, even if the bet button D220 is operated, the performance display displayed by the third stop operation will not be erased, and if there is an appropriate operation of the start lever D50 (bet operation → start lever operation), the effect display displayed by the third stop operation will not be erased. The effect display displayed by the stop operation is erased. Therefore, the continuous image is also erased when there is an appropriate operation of the start lever D50.

On the other hand, the display such as "Repulse!" indicating the lottery result may be configured to disappear when the bet button D220 is operated after the third stop operation, or it may be configured to disappear when the bet button D220 is operated after the third stop operation, or as with the continuous image, an appropriate display It may be configured such that it is erased when the start lever D50 is operated.

In addition, as for the display timing of the continuation image, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the timing when the stop button, which is the third stop, is turned off from on, the characters "NEXT" are displayed from the lower left to the lower right of the effect display device S40 in a manner that is difficult to visually recognize. The display may be configured such that a display that moves is started, or a mode that is difficult to visually recognize from the lower left to the lower right of the effect display device S40 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the timing when the stop button, which is the third stop, is turned on from off. It may be configured such that the display in which the characters "NEXT" move starts at . Further, the display timing (display trigger) of the continuous image may be different depending on the type of continuous effect.

It is also possible to change the BGM while the continuous performance is being performed. Specifically, by changing the BGM at any of the timings of lever effect display, first effect display, second effect display, third effect display, and sub input button effect display, it is confirmed that the continuous effect will be successful. It is configured so that it can notify you when it is done. The relationship between the frequency (probability) of the timing at which the BGM changes is the frequency at which the BGM changes at the timing of the lever effect display (hereinafter referred to as the frequency of the lever effect display) ≧ the frequency at which the BGM changes at the timing at which the third effect is displayed ( Hereinafter, the frequency of the third effect display) ≧ Frequency that the BGM changes at the timing of the first effect display (hereinafter, the frequency of the first effect display) ≧ Frequency that the BGM changes at the timing of the second effect display (hereinafter, the frequency that the BGM changes at the timing of the second effect display) The frequency of performance display) is configured to be as follows. With this configuration, it is possible to notify that the confirmed performance is being executed by a change in BGM, so it is possible to prevent the player from missing the confirmed performance.

Furthermore, it may be configured such that it is possible to notify that it is certain that the continuous performance will be successful by changing the BGM at the timing of displaying the sub-input button performance. The relationship between the frequency (probability) of the timing at which the BGM changes is configured as follows.
(1) Frequency at which BGM changes at the timing of sub-input button effect display (hereinafter referred to as frequency of sub-input button effect display) ≧ Frequency of lever effect display ≧ Frequency of third effect display ≧ Frequency of first effect display ≧ Second Frequency of effect display (2) Frequency of lever effect display ≧ Frequency of sub-input button effect display ≧ Frequency of 3rd effect display ≧ Frequency of 1st effect display ≧ Frequency of 2nd effect display (3) Frequency of lever effect display ≧ Frequency of third effect display ≧ Frequency of sub-input button effect display ≧ Frequency of first effect display ≧ Frequency of second effect display (4) Frequency of lever effect display ≧ Frequency of third effect display ≧ Frequency of first effect display ≧Frequency of sub input button effect display≧Frequency of second effect display (5) Frequency of lever effect display≧Frequency of third effect display≧Frequency of first effect display≧Frequency of second effect display≧Sub input button effect display Frequency By configuring in this way, it is possible to announce that the confirmed performance is being executed by a change in the BGM, so it is possible to prevent the player from missing the confirmed performance.

Note that the continuous performance is composed of a combination of performance displays that occur in response to predetermined game operations (operation of the bet button D220, operation of the start lever D50, first to third stop operations, operation of the sub input button SB, etc.). It is acceptable as long as it is a performance.

Note that the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation are merely examples, and are not limited to the illustrated order. In this example, the performance display of a continuous performance progresses by the first stop operation, second stop operation, and third stop operation.For example, if the first stop operation is performed, even if the left stop button is pressed, the right stop button is pressed. The stop button has the same effect.

<Example 4 of production>
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing example 4 of performance, and is a diagram showing a start performance display and an end performance display of a predetermined performance in an AT state, that is, an advantageous section (AT). (a) to (c), which are start effect displays for predetermined effects of the advantageous section (AT), are effect displays in which images such as "AT start" are displayed to notify that the advantageous section (AT) has started. Yes, this is the lever effect display mentioned above. The starting effect display in Example 4 of effects shows an example that is executed in the first game (first game) after the advantageous period (AT), but the initial number of games and the initial number of sheets in the advantageous period (AT) are In a reel-type gaming machine where the start effect display is determined before the start effect display, the start effect display is executed in a game several games after the advantageous section (AT) has been reached and the start effect display is executed. That's fine. (d) and (e), which are the end effect displays of a predetermined effect of the advantageous section (AT), are effect displays in which an image such as "AT End" is displayed to inform that the advantageous section (AT) has ended. This is the effect display of the third effect display described above. The end effect display in example 4 of the effect is executed in the final game of the advantageous section (AT) (the game in which the number of remaining games in AT becomes 0 or the game in which the number of coins acquired in the advantageous section (AT) reaches a predetermined number) Here is an example.

First, in (a) showing the start performance display, when the player operates the start lever D50, the lever performance display C is started as the lever performance display. Here, as the lever effect display C of the first cut, an effect display is performed in which an image of "AT start" is displayed to notify that AT has started.

(b) shows the lever effect display C of the second cut. After the lever effect display C for the first cut is executed, the lever effect display C for the second cut is performed on the condition that the first stop operation is not performed. Lever effect display C in the second cut shows a person holding a spear.

(c) shows the lever effect display C of the third cut. After execution of the lever effect display C of the second cut, the lever effect display C of the third cut is performed on the condition that the first stop operation is not performed. Lever effect display C in the third cut shows a shark sticking its head out to sea. As described above, the start effect display of the predetermined effect in the advantageous section (AT) shown in the example 4 of effect is a effect display with the number of cuts being three.

Next, in (d) showing the end effect display, when the player performs the third stop operation, the third effect display E is started as the third effect display. Here, as the third effect display E of the first cut, an effect display is performed in which an image of the "final game" is displayed to notify that the AT has ended.

(e) shows the third effect display E of the second cut. After the third performance display E of the first cut is executed, the third performance display E of the second cut is performed on the condition that the start lever D50 is not operated to start the next game. The third effect display E of the second cut displays an image indicating the end of AT, an image indicating the number of medals acquired in the advantageous section (AT), and an image indicating the number of games played in the advantageous section (AT). It is a staged display. In this way, the end performance display of the predetermined performance in the advantageous section (AT) shown in the example 4 of the performance is a performance display in which the number of cuts is two.

In example 4 of such a performance, the number of cuts (2 cuts) of the end performance display of the predetermined performance in the advantageous interval (AT) is greater than the number of cuts (2 cuts) of the end performance display of the predetermined performance in the advantageous interval (AT). 3 cuts). In this way, by displaying the start effect with a lot of movement (a large number of cuts), it is possible to excite the start of the advantageous section (AT) and create a sense of anticipation for the future development of the game. At the same time, by displaying the end effect in a relaxed manner, the result of the game can be clearly and appropriately informed to the player.

In addition, in the example 4 of the performance, an example of the performance of the advantageous section (AT) was shown, but it is not limited to the advantageous section (AT), but can also be used in other game sections (for example, normal section, advantageous section (normal), The state may be the first state, the second state, the third state, etc.

In addition, the start effect display displayed at the start game of a continuous effect, the end effect display displayed at the end game, the start effect display displayed at the start game of a chance zone, and the end effect displayed at the end game. Display may be the target.

Further, the average tempo of the BGM during the execution of the start effect display is configured to be faster than the average tempo of the BGM during the execution of the end effect display. With this configuration, it is possible to create a stronger sense of anticipation for the development of the game that is about to start.

Alternatively, the configuration may be as follows.
(1) The average tempo of BGM related to a predetermined production stage in the advantageous section (normal) is faster than the average tempo of BGM during execution of the start production display related to a predetermined production stage.
(2) The average tempo of BGM related to the predetermined production stage during the execution of the start production display related to the predetermined production stage is faster than the average tempo of BGM related to the predetermined production stage in the advantageous section (AT).
(3) The average tempo of the BGM during execution of the start performance display is faster than the average tempo of the BGM related to the performance stage in all the performance stages that can be set in the advantageous section (normal).
(4) The average tempo of the BGM during execution of the start performance display is faster than the average tempo of the BGM related to the performance stage in all the performance stages that can be set in the advantageous section (AT).
(5) The average tempo of the BGM during the execution of the start performance display related to the predetermined performance stage is faster than the average tempo of the predetermined stage change performance (the performance that becomes the predetermined performance stage after the stage change).
(6) The average tempo of the BGM during the execution of the start performance display is faster than the average tempo of all stage change performances.
With this configuration, it is possible to create a stronger sense of anticipation for the development of the game that is about to start.

Further, the maximum volume of BGM for displaying the start effect is configured to be higher than the maximum volume for BGM for displaying the end effect. Since the start effect display is thus configured to be widely announced, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of anticipation for the future development of the game.

<Example 5 of production>
FIG. 74 is a diagram showing example 5 of performance, and is a diagram showing a result performance display in continuous performance. The first cut (l1) to the second cut (l1) of the continuous performance result display are failure performance displays that notify failure of the continuous performance. The first cut (l2) to the third cut (l2) of the continuous performance result display are success performance displays that announce the success of the continuous performance. Note that the effect displays from the start effect display to the result effect display of the continuous effect are the same as those shown in FIGS. 71 and 72 (a) to (k). The failure performance display and success performance display in Production Example 5 are shown as an example of application in continuous production, but they may also be applied in a chance zone, for example, and can be applied to other productions showing the results of success or failure. Let me add something.

First, in (l1) showing the failure effect display, when the player performs the third stop operation, the third effect display B corresponding to the third stop operation is started. Here, the third performance display B of the first cut is a performance display in which the thrown spear did not hit the shark, and a performance display indicating that the command performance has failed. The next second cut (l2) shows the third effect display B of the second cut.

The second cut (l1) shows the third effect display B of the second cut. After the third performance display B of the first cut is executed, the third performance display B of the second cut is performed on the condition that the start lever D50 is not operated to start the next game. The third effect display B of the second cut is a effect display that displays an image of the word "unfortunate". In this way, the failure performance display shown in the example 5 of performance is a performance with two cuts.

Next, in (l2) showing a successful effect display, when the player performs a third stop operation, a third effect display C corresponding to the third stop operation is started. Here, as the third effect display C in the first cut, an image of the words "Repulse!" is displayed, indicating that the shark has been repelled, and a effect display indicating that the shark was successful (winning) is displayed. .

The second cut in (l2) shows the third effect display C of the second cut. After the third performance display C of the first cut is executed, the third performance display C of the second cut is performed on the condition that the start lever D50 is not operated to start the next game. The third effect display C of the second cut is an effect display of a human face.

The third cut in (l2) shows the third effect display C of the third cut. After the third effect display C of the second cut is executed, the third effect display C of the third cut is performed on the condition that the start lever D50 is not operated to start the next game. The third effect display C of the third cut is a effect display that displays an image of the words "Congratulations". In this way, the successful performance display shown in the example 5 of performance is a performance with three cuts.

In example 5 of such a performance, the number of cuts (3 cuts) in the success performance display that announces success as a result of a continuous performance indicating success or failure or a performance consisting of multiple games such as a chance zone is higher than the number of cuts (3 cuts) that indicates success. The number of cuts (2 cuts) is configured to be larger than the number of cuts (2 cuts) in the failure performance display that announces the failure effect. In this way, by making the performance display when successful a performance display with a lot of movement (a large number of cuts), it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the benefits that will be granted in the future, as well as a sense of expectation for the future development of the game. can be created.

In addition, in production example 5, the total number of cuts from the lever production display of the final game of the continuous production (i in Figure 71) to the success production display announcing success is greater than the lever production of the final game of the continuous production. It is configured so that the total number of cuts is greater than the total number of cuts from the display (i in FIG. 71) to the failure performance display that announces failure. In this way, by making the performance display when successful a performance display with a lot of movement (a large number of cuts), it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the benefits that will be granted in the future, as well as a sense of expectation for the future development of the game. can be created. In addition, although the number of cuts from (i) to (k) in FIG. 71 is the same number regardless of success or failure of the continuous performance, the number of cuts is greater in case of success than in failure. There may be many configurations.

Furthermore, in production example 5, the total number of cuts from the continuous production start production display (a in Fig. 71) to the success production display announcing success is greater than the continuous production start production display (Fig. 71 a). ) to the failure performance display that announces the failure. In this way, by making the performance display when successful a performance display with a lot of movement (a large number of cuts), it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the benefits that will be granted in the future, as well as a sense of expectation for the future development of the game. can be created. Note that the number of cuts from (a) to (k) in Figure 71 is the same regardless of success or failure of the continuous performance, but the number of cuts is greater for success than for failure. There may be many configurations.

In addition, in the example 5 of the performance, an example of the performance in the advantageous section (normal) was shown, but it is not limited to the advantageous section (normal), and it can be used in other game sections (for example, the normal section or the advantageous section (AT)), It may be a first state, a second state, a third state, etc.

Furthermore, in the fifth example of presentation, a successful presentation display of revival may be provided. The successful revival effect display consists of five cuts, which are executed in order: the first cut, the second cut in (l1) in FIG. 74, and the second, third, and fourth cuts in (d4) in FIG. This is a dramatic display. The number of cuts for displaying a successful revival performance (5 cuts) is larger than the number of cuts for displaying a successful performance (3 cuts) and the number of cuts for displaying a failure performance (2 cuts). In this way, by making the display display with a lot of movement (with a large number of cuts) when a revival is successful, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the benefits that will be granted in the future, as well as to create a sense of anticipation for the future development of the game. It can create a sense of expectation.

In addition, in the case where a successful resurrection effect display is provided, the total number of cuts from (i) in FIG. The total number of cuts from (i) in FIG. 71, which is the lever performance display of the final game of the continuous performance, to the success performance display that announces success, and from (i) of FIG. 71, which is the lever performance display of the final game of the continuous performance. It is configured so that the total number of cuts is greater than the total number of cuts up to the failure performance display that announces failure. In this way, by making the display display with a lot of movement (with a large number of cuts) when a revival is successful, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the benefits that will be granted in the future, as well as to create a sense of anticipation for the future development of the game. It can create a sense of expectation. Note that the number of cuts from (i) to (k) in Figure 71 is the same regardless of success or failure of continuous production, but success of revival is more successful than failure. It may also be configured with a large number of cuts.

Furthermore, when providing a successful revival display, the total number of cuts from (a) in FIG. 71, which is the start display of the continuous performance, to the success display announcing success, The total number of cuts from the display (a) in FIG. 71 to the success performance display announcing success, and the total number of cuts from FIG. It is configured so that the number is greater than the number of cuts. In this way, by making the display display with a lot of movement (with a large number of cuts) when a revival is successful, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the benefits that will be granted in the future, as well as to create a sense of anticipation for the future development of the game. It can create a sense of expectation. Note that the number of cuts from (a) to (k) in Figure 71 shows an example in which the number of cuts is the same regardless of the success or failure of continuous production, but a successful revival is more successful than a failure. It may also be configured with a large number of cuts.

Further, the average tempo of BGM during execution of a successful performance display is configured to be faster than the average tempo of BGM during execution of a failure performance display. With this configuration, it is possible to create a stronger sense of anticipation for the development of the game that will be started after the success effect is displayed.

Alternatively, the configuration may be as follows.
(1) The average tempo of BGM during execution of a successful performance display in a predetermined performance stage is faster than the average tempo of BGM related to a predetermined performance stage in an advantageous section (normal).
(2) The average tempo of the BGM during the execution of the successful performance display in the predetermined performance stage is faster than the average tempo of the BGM related to the predetermined performance stage in the advantageous section (AT).
(3) The average tempo of the BGM during execution of the successful performance display is faster than the average tempo of the BGM related to the performance stage in all the performance stages that can be set in the advantageous section (normal).
(4) The average tempo of the BGM during execution of the successful performance display is faster than the average tempo of the BGM related to the performance stage in all the performance stages that can be set in the advantageous section (AT).
(5) The average tempo of the BGM during the execution of the successful performance display in the predetermined performance stage is faster than the average tempo of the predetermined stage change performance (the performance that becomes the predetermined performance stage after the stage change).
(6) The average tempo of the BGM during execution of the success performance display is faster than the average tempo of all stage change performances.
With this configuration, it is possible to create a stronger sense of anticipation for the development of the game that will be started after the success effect is displayed.

Further, the maximum volume of BGM for displaying a successful performance is configured to be higher than the maximum volume for BGM for displaying a failure performance. With this configuration, it is possible to make a large announcement that the successful effect display is being executed, thereby increasing the sense of anticipation for the development of the game after the successful effect display.

Furthermore, the brightness of the successful effect display is configured to be higher than the brightness of the failed effect display. By making the presentation bright in the event of success in this way, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the benefits that will be granted in the future. Further, since brightness represents brightness in the psychological sense of color, it is possible to brighten the psychological sense of the player.

Further, the chroma of the successful effect display is configured to be higher than the chroma of the failed effect display. In this way, by making the performance at the time of success highly saturated, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the benefits that will be granted in the future. Furthermore, since saturation represents vitality, increasing the saturation of the success effect display can energize the player.

In addition, the advantageous section (normal) has a high probability state in the advantageous section (normal) and a normal state in the advantageous section (normal), and the brightness of the effect in the high probability state in the advantageous section (normal) is more favorable. The brightness is configured to be lower than the brightness of the normal state of the section (normal). In other words, the brightness of the performance in the normal state of the advantageous section (normal) is configured to be higher than the brightness of the performance in the high probability state of the advantageous section (normal). Since brightness represents brightness in the psychological sense of color, it is possible to create a sense of expectation for future developments even in the normal state of the advantageous section (normal), so players It can brighten your psychological sense.

Note that the normal state is, for example, a state in which the AT is not hit and the probability of hitting the AT is low. The high probability state is, for example, a state in which the AT has not been hit and the probability of hitting the AT is higher than the normal state. The normal state and high probability state are not limited to this.

Furthermore, the saturation of the performance in the high probability state in the advantageous section (normal) is configured to be lower than the saturation of the performance in the normal state in the advantageous section (normal). In other words, the saturation of the performance in the normal state in the advantageous section (normal) is configured to be higher than the saturation of the performance in the high probability state in the advantageous section (normal). In this way, by increasing the saturation of the performance in the normal state of the advantageous section (normal), it is possible to make it difficult to reduce the desire to play even in the normal state of the advantageous section (normal).

Also, it is easier to execute a continuous effect with low brightness when it develops into a continuous effect in a high probability state of an advantageous section (normal) than when it develops into a continuous effect in a normal state of an advantageous section (normal) ( It is structured in such a way that it is easy to develop. In other words, the brightness of the continuous performance in the normal state of the advantageous section (normal) is configured to be higher than the brightness of the continuous performance in the high probability state of the advantageous section (normal). Brightness represents brightness in the psychological sense of color, so even in the normal state of the advantageous section (normal), it is possible to create a success in the game by giving it a possibility of success, such as a continuous performance. It can brighten a person's psychological sense.

Additionally, it is easier to perform a continuous performance with low saturation when it develops into a continuous performance in a high probability state of an advantageous section (normal) than when it develops into a continuous performance in a normal state of an advantageous section (normal). (easy to develop). In other words, the saturation of the continuous performance in the normal state of the advantageous section (normal) is configured to be higher than the saturation of the continuous performance in the high probability state of the advantageous section (normal). In this way, by increasing the saturation of the continuous performance in the normal state of the advantageous section (normal), it is possible to make it difficult to reduce the desire to play even in the normal state of the advantageous section (normal).

Note that the brightness and saturation of UI images such as production stages, mini characters, and the number of credits are constant regardless of the game state. The UI image is an image that can be displayed on the performance display device S40 in the same (or the same system) display mode and the same display area across a plurality of performance stages.

In addition, as an advantageous section (normal), a high probability state of the advantageous section (normal) and a normal state of the advantageous section (normal) are provided, and an example of comparison of brightness and saturation in one production is shown. The same configuration is used when comparing the average brightness or the average chroma of all the performances that can be executed by the gaming machine and which are the targets of this example. The game section is not limited to the advantageous section (normal), and may be other game sections (for example, the normal section or the advantageous section (AT)). Further, the state is not limited to the high probability state and the normal state, and may be any other state as long as it is more advantageous than a certain state or a certain state.

In addition, in the examples 1 to 3 of the above-mentioned performances, we have explained what branches and what does not branch in one performance, but it should be noted that the same is true when comparing the average (total) of all performances. put. In other words, the following relationship applies when comparing one effect, but also when comparing the average (total) of all effects, the number of branches of the effect display based on the second stop operation < based on the first stop operation It is configured such that the relationship of the number of branches of the effect display<the number of branches of the effect display based on the third stop operation applies.

In addition, in Examples 1 to 5 of the above-mentioned performances, an example of comparison in one performance has been explained, but the comparison is not limited to this, and all performances that can be executed by the gaming machine and are subject to each example of performance. It should be noted that any comparison in performance (for example, average comparison or total comparison) may be used.

In example 1 of performance, when comparing all performances that can be performed by the gaming machine and are subject to example 1 of performance, the average (total) number of branches of the performance display based on the second stop operation and configured such that the average (total) number of branches in the effect display based on the third stop operation is relatively greater than the average (total) number of branches in the effect display based on the first stop operation. There is. In addition, in the example 1 of the effect, the number of branches of the effect display based on the second stop operation and the number of branches of the effect display based on the first stop operation are greater than the number of branches of the effect display based on the third stop operation. Although a large number of effects may be provided, even when such effects are provided, when comparing the overall effect, the average (total) number of branches of the effect display based on the second stop operation and the first If the configuration is such that the average (total) number of branches in the effect display based on the third stop operation is relatively greater than the average (total) number of branches in the effect display based on the stop operation. good.

In production example 2, when comparing all productions that are executable by the gaming machine and are subject to production example 2, the average (total) number of cuts in the first production display and the second production display The average (total) number of cuts in the third effect display is relatively larger than the average (total) number of cuts in the third effect display. In addition, the average (total) number of cuts for other productions that are subject to production example 2 is relatively larger than the average (total) number of cuts for the confirmed production that is subject to production example 2. It is composed of In addition, in the example 2 of the effect, the number of cuts in the first effect display and the number of cuts in the second effect display may be greater than the number of cuts in the third effect display. Even when a production is provided, when comparing the overall production, the average (total) number of cuts in the first production display and the average (total) number of cuts in the second production display are higher than the average (total) number of cuts in the third production display. The configuration may be such that the average (total) number of cuts is relatively large. In addition, in the example 2 of the production, there may be a case where the number of cuts in one confirmed production is greater than the number of cuts in one other production, but even in such a case, When comparing the overall production, the average (total) number of cuts for the final production that is subject to production example 2 is higher than the average (total) number of cuts for other productions that are subject to production example 2. It suffices if the configuration is such that the number is relatively large.

In example 3 of performance, when comparing all the performances that can be performed by the gaming machine and are the target of example 3 of performance, it is a continuous performance that can be executed by the gaming machine and is the target of example 3 of performance. Even when comparing all continuous performances, the average (total) number of branches of the performance display based on the third stop operation in the game in the middle of the continuous performance subject to example 3 of the performance is , the average (total) number of branches of the effect display based on the first stop operation is relatively larger, and the number of branches of the third effect display of the chance-up pattern corresponding to the third stop operation is It is configured such that the average (total) of the number of first performance displays of the chance up pattern corresponding to the first stop operation is relatively larger than the average (total) of the numbers. In addition, in the example 3 of the effect, in the game play in the middle of the continuous effect, the number of branches of the effect display based on the third stop operation is greater than the number of branches of the effect display based on the first stop operation. However, even when such a performance is provided, when comparing the overall performance, the effect display based on the third stop operation in the middle of the continuous performance may be The configuration may be such that the average (total) number of branches in the effect display based on the first stop operation is relatively larger than the average (total) number of branches. In addition, in example 3 of the effect, the number of third effect displays of the chance-up pattern corresponding to the third stop operation is greater than the number of first effect displays of the chance-up pattern corresponding to the first stop operation. However, even if such a performance is provided, when comparing the overall performance, the average (total) number of 3rd performance displays of the chance-up pattern corresponding to the 3rd stop operation However, it is sufficient that the average (total) number of first effect displays of the chance up pattern corresponding to the first stop operation is relatively larger.

In production example 4, when comparing all productions that can be executed by the gaming machine and are subject to production example 4, the number of cuts in the end production display of production that is subject to production example 4 is It is configured so that the average (total) of the number of cuts in the start effect display is relatively larger than the average (total). In addition, in example 4 of the effect, there may be a case where the number of cuts in the end effect display is greater than the number of cuts in the start effect display, but even in such a case, the comparison in the overall effect may be In this case, the average (total) number of cuts in the start effect display is configured to be relatively larger than the average (total) number of cuts in the end effect display of the target effect in example 4 of effect. All you have to do is stay there.

In production example 5, when comparing all productions that can be executed by the gaming machine and are subject to production example 5, the number of cuts in the failure production display of production that is subject to production example 5 is The configuration is such that the average (total) of the number of cuts in the successful performance display is relatively larger than the average (total). In addition, in example 5 of the production, there may be a case where the number of cuts for the failure production display is greater than the number of cuts for the success production display, but even in such a case, the comparison in the overall production In this case, the average (total) number of cuts in the successful performance display is configured to be relatively larger than the average (total) number of cuts in the failed performance display, which is the target of production example 5. All you have to do is stay there.

The performances in the examples 1 to 5 of the performances described above occur in response to predetermined game operations (operation of the bet button D220, operation of the start lever D50, first to third stop operations, operation of the sub input button SB, etc.). Any effect may be provided as long as it is a combination of effect displays.

In examples 1 to 5 of the effects described above, the case where the left stop button D41 is operated as the first stop operation, the middle stop button D42 is used as the second stop operation, and the right stop button D43 is operated as the third stop operation is illustrated, but this is just an example. However, the pressing order is not limited to the example shown. For example, in the case of the first stop, the left stop button, the middle stop button, and the right stop button may have the same effect.

Incidentally, examples 1 to 5 of performances can also be applied to a gaming machine equipped with a bonus combination.

In addition, the lever effect display A in (a) of FIG. 69, the first effect display A in (b1), the first effect display B in (b2), the second effect display A in (c), and the third effect display in (d1) The effect display A, the third effect display B in (d2), the third effect display C in (d3), and the third effect display D in (d4) in FIG. 70 are effects (videos) with different cuts. Let me add something.

In the above, the magnitude relationship of the number of cuts (relationship between a large number of cuts and a small number of cuts) has been described, but the magnitude relationship of the number of cuts may also be understood as the length of video time per cut. For example, one normal effect A (for example, the other effects mentioned above) is divided into a 3-second video A1, a 2.5-second video A2, a 2.5-second video A3, and a 2-second video A4. When the video is composed of four videos, the number of cuts is four. In the case of this normal performance A, since the 10 second performance is composed of four cuts, the length of the video per cut is 2.5 seconds. Further, for example, one confirmed performance B (for example, the above-mentioned premiere performance) is composed of three videos: a 4-second video B1, a 3.5-second video B2, and a 2.5-second video B3. In this case, the number of cuts is 3. In the case of this confirmed performance B, since the 10 second performance consists of three cuts, the length of the video per cut is approximately 3.3 seconds. In this way, the length of video per cut is shorter in regular performance A than in confirmed performance B, and the number of cuts in regular performance A is relatively higher than the number of cuts in confirmed performance B. Since the regular performance A has a higher tempo than the fixed performance B, it is possible to make the normal performance A a performance with a better tempo than the fixed performance B. Therefore, by intentionally reducing the number of cuts in the confirmed performance B while preventing the player from getting bored with the normal performance A, it is possible to draw attention to the confirmed performance B. Note that the number of cuts and the length of time of the normal performance A and the confirmed performance B are only examples, and are not limited thereto. Further, depending on the performance, there is a performance in which the number of cuts is the same in the normal performance A and the confirmed performance B, but it is sufficient that the length of the video per cut is such that the normal performance A<confirmed performance B.

<<Configuration 1>>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 to 79, a description will be given of a configuration 1 consisting of a medal selector DS, a coin shooter D90, a chute main body DSH, and a hopper H40 that can be applied to the drum-type game machine in this specification. Note that the coin shooter D90 described in configuration 1 will be described as a type 1 coin shooter D90, and the coin shooter D90 described in configuration 2 will be described as a type 2 coin shooter D90. To briefly explain the type 1 coin shooter D90 and the type 2 coin shooter D90, the type 1 coin shooter D90 is a coin shooter that has an entrance in the left and right direction that is smaller than the width in the left and right direction of the medal selector DS. The second coin shooter D90 is a coin shooter having an entrance in the left-right direction that is larger than the width in the left-right direction of the medal selector DS. Note that configuration 1 described below can be appropriately combined with the configurations of the first to twelfth embodiments.

FIG. 75 is a front view showing the medal selector DS, type 1 coin shooter D90, chute main body DSH, and hopper H40 inside the reel-type gaming machine P. Note that FIG. 75 shows a state in which the front door DU is closed. A medal selector DS is provided near the door board D and on the open end side of the front door DU, a chute main body DSH is provided on the right side of the medal selector DS, and a coin selector is provided below the medal selector DS. A shooter D90 is provided. Further, a hopper H40 is provided in the back box (see FIG. 2).

The medal selector DS is provided with an input reception sensor D10s, a first input sensor D20s, and a second input sensor D30s, which serve as a path for game medals (hereinafter referred to as medals) inserted from the medal input slot D170. The input acceptance sensor D10s has a function of sorting the medals inputted from the medal input slot D170 mainly based on dimensions and accepting only the medals that meet the standard dimensions (a function of the blocker D100 that can be driven between a permitted state and a disallowed state). If a medal (or other foreign object) is determined to be incompatible by this function, the blocker D100 will be in a disallowed state and will be ejected toward the coin shooter D90.

The coin shooter D90 is provided with two medal entrances, a coin shooter entrance D91 and a coin shooter entrance D92. The coin shooter entrance D91 is an entrance (opening) that receives medals paid out from the medal payout device H provided in the hopper H40, and the medals paid out from the medal payout device H are sent to the game from the discharge port D240 via the coin shooter entrance D91. It is designed to be returned to the public. The coin shooter entrance D92 is an entrance (opening) that receives non-conforming medals released when the blocker D100 is in a disallowed state, and is configured to receive medals (or other foreign objects) released from the medal selector DS. has been done. The medals received at the coin shooter entrance D92 are configured to be returned to the player from the discharge port D240 via the coin shooter D90.

The chute main body DSH is configured such that medals that have passed therein flow in when the blocker D100 of the medal selector DS is in the permission state. The chute main body DSH is located on the right side of the medal selector DS, and the left end of the chute main body DSH is located at a distance A (see FIG. 76) from the right end of the medal selector DS so as not to contact (do not combine with) the medal selector DS. It is attached to the front door DU via the attachment part DSH10 with a fixing member such as a screw SC so that Further, the chute main body DSH is provided with a flow path formed by the left and right walls and the bottom.

Note that the material of the screw SC is capable of being magnetically attached and conductive. For example, it is made of steel.

In addition, as shown by the dashed line, the center position of the screw SC is located on the right side of the right end of the uppermost part of the coin shooter D90 and the right end of the coin shooter entrance D92. Therefore, even if the screw SC falls vertically (falls vertically downward) during inspection or replacement of the chute body DSH, it is possible to prevent the screw SC from directly entering the coin chute entrance D92. There is.

The hopper H40 is configured to receive medals flowing down the chute body DSH and to store the received medals. As shown in FIG. 2, the hopper H40 has an entrance with a rectangular opening formed at its upper part, and is equipped with a medal dispensing device H at its lower part.

The coin shooter D90 and the chute body DSH are directly attached to the front door DU with fixing members such as screws SC, and the medal selector DS is indirectly attached to the front door DU. The medal selector DS may be attached indirectly to the front door DU, or the medal selector DS may be attached directly to the front door DU. In the case of an indirect attachment structure, the medal selector DS, coin shooter D90, and chute body DSH are attached to an indirect member attached to the front door DU. Alternatively, a structure may be adopted in which a portion of the medal selector DS, coin shooter D90, and chute body DSH are directly attached to the front door DU, and the remaining members are attached indirectly.

Next, various dimensions of the medal selector DS, type 1 coin shooter D90, and chute body DSH will be explained using FIGS. 76 and 77. FIG. 76 is a front view showing the medal selector DS, the type 1 coin shooter D90, and the chute body DSH. FIG. 77 is a plan view showing the medal selector DS, the type 1 coin shooter D90, and the chute body DSH.

The length of the medal selector DS in the left-right direction (the distance from the left end to the right end, the width in the left-right direction) is W1. The length of the coin shooter entrance D92 in the left-right direction (the distance from the left end to the right end of the opening, the width in the left-right direction) is W2, and W2 is shorter than W1. With this configuration, it is possible to reliably accept the medals released from the medal selector DS when the blocker D100 is in the disallowed state, so that non-conforming medals can be returned to the player. Further, the length in the left-right direction (the distance from the left end to the right end, the width in the left-right direction) of the right end D95 of the coin shooter D90 is W3. The right end portion D95 is a portion that forms the periphery of the coin shooter entrance D92.

A gap SM is provided between the right end of the medal selector DS and the left end of the chute body DSH, and the distance of this gap SM (distance from the right end of the medal selector DS to the left end of the chute body DSH) , the length of the gap in the left-right direction, and the gap interval) are A. A is set to a dimension larger than the thickness of one medal (e.g., the length of about two medals), but smaller than the thickness of one medal (e.g., the length of one medal). (The length may be set to half the thickness.) Note that even when A is set to a dimension equal to or less than the thickness of one medal, it may be configured such that one medal is caught in the gap (gap) SM by bending the medal selector DS and the chute body DSH. .

The length of the channel of the chute body DSH in the left-right direction (the distance from the left end of the channel to the right end, the width of the channel in the left-right direction) is D. In addition, in FIG. 76, the height of the left wall and the right wall that constitute the flow path is the same, and the length from the inside of the uppermost part of the left wall to the inside of the uppermost part of the right wall is the same. However, if the heights of the left wall and right wall that make up the flow path are different (see Figure 79), from the inside of one wall at the top of the low wall. The length to the inside of the other wall portion may be set as D.

Although not shown, the diameter of the medal is M1 (for example, 25 mm or 30 mm), and the thickness of the medal is M2 (for example, 1.6 mm when the diameter is 25 mm, and 1.7 mm when the diameter is 30 mm). be.

FIG. 76 shows a state in which medals (medals indicated by solid lines) are caught in the gap SM. Here, if the gap SM is smaller than the thickness of one medal, one medal will be caught in the gap SM, and if the gap SM is longer than the thickness of one medal, two medals will be caught in the gap. It is now possible for a situation where the user is caught in an SM situation to occur. Note that if the right end portion D95 has a shape or structure in which a medal can be placed, a state in which a medal is placed on the right end portion D95 is also referred to as a state in which the medal is caught in the gap SM. Note that the right end portion D95 has a shape or structure in which a medal can be placed, such as a structure in which the top surface of the right end portion D95 is sloped downward from the back to the front (see the direction in FIG. 77), or a structure in which the top surface of the right end portion D95 Examples include a flat structure and a concave upper surface of the right end portion D95. Such a situation in which medals are caught in the gap SM may occur during inspection work by a hall clerk, but it may also occur during a game for some reason. Note that the state in which a medal is inserted (positioned) between member A (e.g., medal selector DS) and member B (e.g., chute body DSH) may be referred to as a sandwiched state, or A state in which the medal is inserted (located) between the member A and the member A, and the member A and the medal are in contact with each other, and the member B and the medal are in contact with each other may be referred to as a pinched state. Furthermore, a state in which the medal is inserted (located) between member A and member B and in which member C (right end portion D95) and the medal are in contact may be referred to as a pinched state.

As shown in FIG. 76, the gap SM is located between the medal selector DS and the chute main body DSH, and is a gap formed by the right end of the medal selector DS and the left end of the chute main body DSH. In addition, when the medal selector DS is indirectly attached to the front door DU by an indirect member such as a mounting bracket, the gap SM is the unit of the medal selector DS (the combination of the medal selector DS and the indirect member such as the mounting bracket). This is a gap formed by the right end of the chute body DSH and the left end of the chute body DSH. In addition, when the chute main body DSH is indirectly attached to the front door DU with an indirect member such as a mounting bracket, the gap SM is between the right end of the medal selector DS (including the unit of the medal selector DS) and the unit of the chute main body DSH. This is the gap formed by the left end of the chute body DSH (a member that combines the chute body DSH and indirect members such as mounting fittings). In any case, the gap SM may be a gap located between the medal selector DS and the chute body DSH, and may be a gap in which a medal can be sandwiched.

The structure is such that the coin shooter entrance D92 of the coin shooter D90 is not located below the gap SM, but the right end portion D95 of the coin shooter D90 is located. With this structure, medals (medals that should not be returned to the player) that are caught during inspection or other work by hall clerks are not ejected into the medal tray D230 via the coin shooter D90. It is possible to prevent the hole from being disadvantaged.

In addition, a gap SM is provided between the medal selector DS and the chute body DSH, and in addition to the structure in which the coin shooter inlet D92 of the coin shooter D90 is not located below the gap SM, the gap SM is provided from the upper end of the entrance of the hopper H40. The structure is such that the upper part is also located on the upper side. With this structure, medals (medals that should not be returned to the player) that are caught during inspection or other work by the hall staff are not ejected into the medal tray D230 via the coin shooter D90, so that the hall is not left unused. It is possible to prevent profits from being incurred. In addition, if a hall clerk forgets to dispose of medals that are caught during an inspection or other work, the medals will fall into the hopper H40 when the front door DU is closed, so make sure that the medals do not get scattered inside the housing. be able to.

In addition, a gap SM is provided between the medal selector DS and the chute body DSH, and in addition to the structure in which the coin shooter inlet D92 of the coin shooter D90 is not located below the gap SM, the dimension A of the gap SM is the thickness of the medal. It has a structure that is approximately two pieces long. In other words, the structure is such that the dimension A is approximately twice (approximately twice) the thickness M2 of the medal. With this structure, medals (medals that should not be returned to the player) that are caught during inspection or other work by the hall staff are not ejected into the medal tray D230 via the coin shooter D90, so that the hall is not left unused. It is possible to prevent profits from being incurred. Furthermore, by creating a structure of the gap SM that prevents the medal from becoming stuck, the medal can be easily removed. Furthermore, if a hall clerk forgets to dispose of a medal that is caught during an inspection or other work, when the front door DU is closed, the medal will flow down the top surface of the right end D95, which slopes downward from the back to the front. Since the medals fall into the housing, the flow of the inserted medals can be prevented from being obstructed. In addition, if the structure is such that the gap SM is located above the upper end of the entrance of the hopper H40, the medals will fall into the hopper H40, so it is possible to prevent the medals from being scattered in the housing.

In addition, the structure is such that if a medal that was stuck falls vertically, it will collide with the right end D95, so even if a medal falls vertically during an inspection by a hall clerk, it will remain at the coin shooter entrance. This makes it possible to prevent it from entering D92. Additionally, if the inspection by the hall clerk ends with the medals placed on the right end D95, the medals will flow down over the right end D95 and be placed in the hopper H40 when the front door DU is closed. falls (the medals indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 77 flow down over the right end portion D95), so it is possible to prevent the medals from being scattered within the housing.

Furthermore, in addition to the structure in which the stuck medal collides with the right end D95 when it falls vertically, the distance (length) H2 from the lower end of the medal selector DS to the upper end of the right end D95 is Since the structure is such that the diameter is shorter than the diameter M1, it is possible to further suppress fallen medals from entering the coin shooter entrance D92 as they are. Further, if H2 is configured to be shorter than the radius M1/2 of the medal, it is possible to further suppress fallen medals from entering the coin shooter entrance D92 as they are.

Furthermore, since the distance (length) H3 from the lower end of the chute body DSH to the upper end of the right end D95 is shorter than the diameter M1 of the medal, the front door can be opened with the medal stuck. When the DU is closed, the medals can be easily guided to the hopper H40 on the rear side (see the rear direction in FIG. 77) by the right end of the medal selector DS and the left end of the chute body DSH. Furthermore, if H3 is structured to be shorter than the medal radius M1/2, the medals can be more easily guided to the rear hopper H40 by the right end of the medal selector DS and the left end of the chute body DSH. can do.

Further, in a state where the medals in FIG. 76 (medals indicated by solid lines) are caught in the gap SM, the medals inserted from the medal slot D170 cannot pass through the medal selector DS. In other words, the medals are not allowed to flow into the chute body DSH. In such a situation, it is not possible to detect the state (situation) in which the medal is caught, but it is possible to detect the error by causing an error in the medal selector DS, and to notify the error. Note that, regarding the error detection processing, by executing the processing of the ninth embodiment, it is possible to appropriately detect errors. Note that when a medal is caught in the gap SM, from the top of the medal to the connection part between the medal selector DS and the chute main body DSH (specifically, the lowest part of the right end of the flow path of the medal selector DS) and the lowest part of the left end of the channel of the chute main body DSH are connected by an imaginary line, and when the distance from the center part of this imaginary line is H1, the medals are completely inserted from the medal slot D170. The flow of the medal is obstructed, and in this state H1 is longer than the radius (M1/2) of the medal. Note that the state in which the medal is caught in this gap SM may be the state in which the medal is placed on the upper end of the right end portion D95.

On the other hand, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 76, there also exists a state (situation) in which the medal is caught in the gap SM. In this state, medals inserted from the medal slot D170 can pass through the medal selector DS. Specifically, if the bottom of the trapped medal is above the top of the wall of the chute main body DSH (wall on the side near the front door), the medal inserted from the medal slot D170 is It is now possible to pass through the selector DS. With such a structure, even if a medal gets caught during a game, it can be ensured that subsequent games will not be hindered.

Further, as shown in the plan view of FIG. 77, the coin shooter entrance D92 is composed of an opening D92-1 covered by the medal selector DS and an opening D92-2 not covered. The opening D92-1 is not visible to the hall clerk in plan view, and the opening D92-2 is visible to the hall clerk in plan view. Further, the distance between the front and back of the opening D92-2 is W5, which is longer than the thickness M2 of the medal and shorter than the diameter M1 of the medal. Therefore, when handling medals (medals to be returned to players) that are caught in the medal selector DS during inspection or other work by hall clerks, the medals must be returned to the medal tray D230 on the front door DU side. Instead, the medals can be easily returned to the medal tray D230 via the coin shooter D90 by inserting the medals into the opening D92-2. It should be noted that W5 may have a structure that is larger (longer) than the thickness M2 of one medal, and even with such a structure, by inserting a medal into the opening D92-2, it will be inserted into the medal tray through the coin shooter D90. You can easily return medals to D230. Further, W5 may have a structure that is shorter than half the diameter of the medal, that is, shorter than the radius M1/2. Even with such a structure, by inserting the medal into the opening D92-2, the coin shooter D90 The medals can be easily returned to the medal receiving tray D230 via. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent fallen medals (medals that should not be returned to the player) from being easily received by the opening D92-2.

Next, a modification of the chute body DSH will be described using FIGS. 78 and 79. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing the chute body DSH of Modification 1. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a chute main body DSH of modification 2.

<Chute body DSH of modification 1>
In Modification 1, as shown in FIGS. 78(a) and 78(b), a step DSH20 is formed in the middle of the flow path of the chute body DSH (substantially in the middle). The step DSH 20 is located approximately in the middle of the flow path, and is formed in a curved portion where the direction of the flow path is gently curved, as shown in FIG. B, which is the height (dimension) of the step DSH20, is less than half the diameter M1 of the medal, and the height of the wall forming the flow path (height H4 of the right wall, height H4 of the left wall) The height is smaller than the height H5). With this configuration, since the medals flowing down are accelerated by the step DSH 20, it is possible to prevent the medals from staying in the middle of the flow path.

Further, the height H4 of the right wall portion and the height H5 of the left wall portion are configured to be higher than the diameter M1 of the medal. With such a structure, it is possible to prevent medals from falling in the middle of the chute body DSH. Note that H4 and H5 may be configured to be lower than the diameter M1 of the medal and higher than the radius (M1/2) of the medal. Even with such a structure, it is possible to prevent medals from falling in the middle of the chute body DSH. Note that H4 and H5 may be the same height or may be different heights.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 75 and 77, when the front door DU is closed, the most downstream portion of the chute body DSH is configured to be located above the entrance of the hopper H40. may be configured so that it is not located above the entrance of the Specifically, in FIG. 77, the most downstream part of the chute body DSH may be located in front of the hopper H40 (for example, the position indicated by the two-dot chain line). Even with this configuration, the medals flowing down due to the step DSH20 are accelerated and discharged toward the hopper H40, so the medals can be collected by the hopper H40.

<Chute body DSH of modification 2>
In modification 2, as shown in FIG. 79(a), an engaging portion DSH30 that engages (combines) with the medal selector DS is provided in the chute main body DSH. The engaging portion DSH30 is integrally provided at the left end portion of the chute main body DSH and has a protruding shape, but the shape is not limited to this. The engaging portion DSH30 is configured to fit into a recess (not shown) provided on the back side of the medal selector DS (on the front side in FIG. 77), and the engaging portion DSH30 is inserted into the recess (engaged state). Since the chute main body DSH is configured not to rotate about the screw SC, it is possible to prevent the chute body DSH from being misaligned with the medal selector DS even if the screw SC becomes loose.

Further, in the second modification, as shown in FIG. 79(a), the height of the left wall portion and the height of the right wall portion constituting the flow path of the chute body DSH are configured to be different. Specifically, the height of the right wall is H4, the height of the left wall is H6, and H6 is configured to be lower than H4. Further, H6 is configured to be lower than the diameter M1 of the medal and higher than the radius (M1/2) of the medal. By configuring the wall so that the height is higher than the center position of the medals, the medals can be flowed down while supporting the medals reliably, so the medals will not fall midway through the chute body DSH. You can prevent this from happening.

In addition, when providing the step DSH20, B is a wall portion that is less than half the diameter M1 of the medal and that constitutes the flow path (height H4 of the right wall portion, height H6 of the left wall portion). It is preferable that the height is smaller than the height of . With this configuration, since the medals flowing down are accelerated by the step DSH 20, it is possible to prevent the medals from staying in the middle of the flow path.

Further, in the second modification, as shown in FIG. 79(a), a mounting portion DSH10 (for example, a screw hole) of the chute body DSH is provided in the flow path of the chute body DSH. When the mounting portion DSH10 (screw hole) is provided inside the flow path, it is preferable that the position of the mounting portion DSH10 (the position of the screw hole) be configured to be above the height H6 of the left wall portion. With this configuration, the chute main body DSH can be attached to the front door DU using a tool such as a screwdriver without worrying about the height of the flow path.

Next, a comparison between the dimensions of the screw SC and other dimensions will be explained using FIG. 79(b). The length (longitudinal dimension) of the screw SC is C. Further, the size (diameter) of the head (screw head) of the screw SC is E.

C, which is the longitudinal dimension of the screw SC, D, which is the dimension from the left wall to the right wall that constitutes the flow path of the chute body DSH, and E, which is the dimension of the head of the screw SC, are as follows: The structure is such that the relationships D<C and D>E hold true. By configuring such a relationship, when the screw SC comes off from the chute body DSH, it is possible to receive the screw SC in the flow path, so that the screw SC can be prevented from being lost.

Further, the configuration may be such that the relationships D<C and D<E hold true. By configuring such a relationship, if the screw SC comes off from the chute body DSH, the screw SC cannot be received in the channel, so the game can be continued without interfering with the flow of medals.

Note that although the relationship D<C has been illustrated, a structure may be adopted in which D>C. By configuring the system so that the relationships D>C and D>E hold, if the screw SC comes off the chute body DSH, the screw SC can be received in the flow path, so that the screw SC is not lost. It can be done.

Further, D may be configured to be smaller than half of the total thickness F of the number of medals that can be placed on the placing portion of the medal slot D170. With this structure, even if the medals placed on the placing part of the medal slot D170 are continuously thrown in, the medals will not accumulate in the chute body DSH and will be placed in the hopper H40 in an aligned state. It is possible to make the medals flow down toward the channel, and it is also possible to prevent the medals from overlapping in the channel.

Furthermore, the position (screw hole position) of the mounting portion DSH10 (screw hole) of the chute main body DSH of this example, including the chute main body DSH of FIGS. 78(a) and 79(a), is directly below the mounting portion DSH10. It is preferable to provide it at a position above the medal when the medal is present. For example, as shown in FIG. 79(a), the distance H7 from the bottom of the channel of the chute body DSH to the screw hole (the part below the hole in the figure) is set to be larger than the diameter M1 of the medal. It is configured. With this configuration, even if the screw SC that fixes the chute main body DSH is loosened, the flow of medals will not be hindered, so the game can be played without causing errors (for example, thrown medal retention error). can be executed.

<<Configuration 2>>
Next, configuration 2 consisting of the medal selector DS, type 2 coin shooter D90, chute body DSH, and hopper H40 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. In describing Configuration 2, components similar to those of Configuration 1 described above will be given the same name and/or the same reference numeral, so that the description thereof will be omitted or simplified. Note that configuration 2 described below can be combined with the configurations of the first to twelfth embodiments as appropriate.

FIG. 80 is a front view showing the medal selector DS, type 2 coin shooter D90, chute main body DSH, and hopper H40 inside the reel-type gaming machine P. Note that FIG. 80 shows a state in which the front door DU is closed. A medal selector DS is provided near the door board D and on the open end side of the front door DU, a chute main body DSH is provided on the right side of the medal selector DS, and a coin selector is provided below the medal selector DS. A shooter D90 is provided. Further, a hopper H40 is provided in the back box (see FIG. 2).

The medal selector DS is provided with an input reception sensor D10s, a first input sensor D20s, and a second input sensor D30s, which serve as a path for medals input from the medal input slot D170. The input reception sensor D10s has a function of sorting the medals input from the medal input port D170 mainly based on dimensions and accepting only those medals that conform to the standard dimensions.This function determines that the medals do not conform. The medals are released toward the coin shooter D90 when the blocker D100 enters the disallowed state.

The coin shooter D90 is provided with two medal entrances, a coin shooter entrance D91 and a coin shooter entrance D92. The coin shooter entrance D91 is an entrance (opening) that receives medals paid out from the medal payout device H provided in the hopper H40, and the medals paid out from the medal payout device H are sent to the game from the discharge port D240 via the coin shooter entrance D91. It is designed to be returned to the public. The coin shooter entrance D92 is an entrance (opening) that receives non-conforming medals released when the blocker D100 is in a disallowed state, and is configured to receive medals released from the medal selector DS. The medals received at the coin shooter entrance D92 are configured to be returned to the player from the discharge port D240 via the coin shooter D90.

The chute main body DSH is configured such that medals that have passed therein flow in when the blocker D100 of the medal selector DS is in the permission state. The chute main body DSH is located on the right side of the medal selector DS, and the left end of the chute main body DSH is located at a distance A (see FIG. 81) from the right end of the medal selector DS so as not to contact (do not combine with) the medal selector DS. It is attached to the front door DU via the attachment part DSH10 with a fixing member such as a screw SC so that

In addition, as shown by the dashed line, the center position of the screw SC is located on the right side of the right end of the uppermost part of the coin shooter D90 and the right end of the coin shooter entrance D92. Therefore, even if the screw SC falls vertically (falls vertically downward) during inspection or replacement of the chute body DSH, it is possible to prevent the screw SC from directly entering the coin chute entrance D92. There is.

The hopper H40 is configured to receive medals flowing down the chute body DSH. As shown in FIG. 2, the hopper H40 has an entrance with a rectangular opening formed at its upper part, and is equipped with a medal dispensing device H at its lower part.

Although the medal selector DS, the coin shooter D90, and the chute body DSH are directly attached to the front door DU by fixing members such as screws SC, they may have a structure in which they are indirectly attached to the front door DU.

Next, various dimensions of the medal selector DS, the type 2 coin shooter D90, and the chute body DSH will be explained using FIGS. 81 and 82. FIG. 81 is a front view showing the medal selector DS, the type 2 coin shooter D90, and the chute body DSH. FIG. 82 is a plan view showing the medal selector DS, the type 2 coin shooter D90, and the chute body DSH.

The length of the medal selector DS in the left-right direction (the distance from the left end to the right end, the width in the left-right direction) is W1. The length of the coin shooter entrance D92 in the left-right direction (the distance from the left end to the right end of the opening, the width in the left-right direction) is W21, and W21 is longer than W1. With this configuration, it is possible to accept medals released from the medal selector DS when the blocker D100 is in the disallowed state and medals caught in the gap SM described later, so it is possible to ensure that the medals to be returned to the player are received. can be returned to. Further, the length in the left-right direction (the distance from the left end to the right end, the width in the left-right direction) of the right end portion D95 of the coin shooter D90 is W31.

The distance of the gap SM from the right end of the medal selector DS to the left end of the chute body DSH is A, and A is a dimension larger than the thickness of one medal (for example, about 2 Although the length is set to the thickness of one medal (the length of the thickness of one medal), it may be set to a dimension that is less than or equal to the thickness of one medal (for example, a length that is half the thickness of one medal).

The length of the channel of the chute body DSH in the left-right direction (the distance from the left end of the channel to the right end, the width of the channel in the left-right direction) is D. In addition, in FIG. 81, the height of the left wall and the right wall that constitute the flow path is the same, and the length from the inside of the uppermost part of the left wall to the inside of the uppermost part of the right wall is However, if the heights of the left wall and right wall that make up the flow path are different (see Figure 79), from the inside of one wall at the top of the low wall. The length to the inside of the other wall portion may be set as D.

FIG. 81 shows a state in which a medal (medal indicated by a solid line) is caught in the gap SM. Here, if the gap SM is smaller than the thickness of one medal, one medal will be caught in the gap SM, and if the gap SM is longer than the thickness of one medal, two medals will be caught in the gap. It is now possible for a situation where the user is caught in an SM situation to occur. Such a situation in which medals are caught in the gap SM may occur during inspection work by a hall clerk, but it may also occur during a game for some reason.

As shown in FIG. 81, the gap SM is located between the medal selector DS and the chute main body DSH, and is a gap formed by the right end of the medal selector DS and the left end of the chute main body DSH. In addition, when the medal selector DS is indirectly attached to the front door DU by an indirect member such as a mounting bracket, the gap SM is the unit of the medal selector DS (the combination of the medal selector DS and the indirect member such as the mounting bracket). This is a gap formed by the right end of the chute body DSH and the left end of the chute body DSH. In addition, when the chute main body DSH is indirectly attached to the front door DU with an indirect member such as a mounting bracket, the gap SM is between the right end of the medal selector DS (including the unit of the medal selector DS) and the unit of the chute main body DSH. This is the gap formed by the left end of the chute body DSH (a member that combines the chute body DSH and indirect members such as mounting fittings). In any case, the gap SM may be a gap located between the medal selector DS and the chute body DSH, and may be a gap in which a medal can be sandwiched.

The coin shooter entrance D92 of the coin shooter D90 is located below the gap SM. With this structure, medals that are caught during an inspection or the like by a hall clerk are ejected into the medal tray D230 via the coin shooter D90, thereby preventing the inserted medals from passing through. You can avoid it. In addition, by adopting such a structure, when handling medals (medals to be returned to players) that are caught in the medal selector DS during inspection etc. by hall staff, the medal receiving tray on the front door DU side can be used. By inserting the medals into the coin shooter entrance D92, the medals can be easily returned to the medal receiving tray D230 via the coin shooter D90 without having to go around D230 and return the medals one by one. As shown in FIG. 82, the distance between the front and back of the coin shooter entrance D92 is W51, which is longer than the diameter M1 of the medal, and the length in the left-right direction of the coin shooter entrance D92 below the gap SM. The distance (distance from the right end of the medal selector DS to the right end of the coin shooter entrance D92) is W22, which is longer than the thickness M2 of the medal, so the coin shooter entrance D92 below the gap SM It is now possible to accept medals in this section.

In addition, a gap SM is provided between the medal selector DS and the chute main body DSH, and in addition to the structure in which the coin shooter inlet D92 of the coin shooter D90 is located below the gap SM, the gap SM is provided from the upper end of the entrance of the hopper H40. The structure is such that the upper part is also located on the upper side. With this structure, when handling medals (medals to be returned to players) that are caught in the medal selector DS during inspection or other work by hall staff, the medals can be placed in the medal tray D230 on the front door DU side. By inserting the medals into the coin shooter entrance D92, the medals can be easily returned to the medal receiving tray D230 via the coin shooter D90 without turning around and returning the medals. In addition, if a hall clerk forgets to dispose of medals that are caught during an inspection or other work, the medals will fall into the coin shooter entrance D92 or hopper H40 when the front door DU is closed, so the medals will be scattered inside the housing. You can avoid this from happening.

In addition, a gap SM is provided between the medal selector DS and the chute body DSH, and in addition to the structure in which the coin shooter entrance D92 of the coin shooter D90 is located below the gap SM, the dimension A of the gap SM is the thickness of the medal. It has a structure that is approximately two pieces long. In other words, the structure is such that the dimension A is approximately twice the thickness M2 of the medal. By structuring the gap SM so that such a stuck medal does not become impossible to remove, the stuck medal can be easily removed. Furthermore, if a hall clerk forgets to dispose of a medal that is caught during an inspection or other work, the medal will fall when the front door DU is closed, so it is important to ensure that the flow of inserted medals is not obstructed. can. Furthermore, if the structure is such that the gap SM is located above the upper end of the entrance of the hopper H40, medals that cannot be accepted at the coin shooter entrance D92 will fall into the hopper H40, so there will be no medals inside the housing. It can also be made so that they are not scattered.

Further, as shown in FIG. 81, there is a state (situation) in which a medal is caught in the gap SM. In this state, medals inserted from the medal slot D170 can pass through the medal selector DS. Specifically, if the lowest part of the stuck medal is above the highest part of the wall of the chute main body DSH (the wall on the side closer to the front door and higher than the diameter M1 of the medal), Medals inserted from the medal slot D170 can pass through the medal selector DS. With such a structure, even if a medal gets caught during a game, it can be ensured that subsequent games will not be hindered. In addition, if the height of the wall of the chute body DSH is lower than the diameter M1 of the medal, the lowest part of the caught medal is at a position higher than the diameter M1 of the passing medal (the medal indicated by the two-dot chain line). In some cases, medals inserted from the medal slot D170 can pass through the medal selector DS.

Further, as shown in the plan view of FIG. 82, the coin shooter entrance D92 is composed of an opening D92-1 covered by the medal selector DS and an opening D92-2 not covered. The opening D92-1 is not visible to the hall clerk in plan view, and the opening D92-2 is visible to the hall clerk in plan view. Further, the distance between the front and back of the opening D92-2 is W52, which is longer than the thickness M2 of the medal and shorter than the diameter M1 of the medal. Therefore, when handling medals (medals to be returned to players) that are caught in the medal selector DS during inspection or other work by hall clerks, the medals must be returned to the medal tray D230 on the front door DU side. Instead, the medals can be easily returned to the medal tray D230 via the coin shooter D90 by inserting the medals into the opening D92-2. It should be noted that W52 may have a structure that is larger (longer) than the thickness M2 of one medal, and even with such a structure, by inserting a medal into the opening D92-2, it will be inserted into the medal tray through the coin shooter D90. You can easily return medals to D230. Further, W52 may have a structure shorter than half the diameter of the medal, that is, the radius M1/2, and even with such a structure, by inserting the medal into the opening D92-2, the coin shooter D90 The medals can be easily returned to the medal receiving tray D230 via.

The modified examples of the chute main body DSH shown in FIGS. 78 and 79 are similarly applicable to the embodiment of configuration 2.

<<<Third Embodiment>>>
Next, a third embodiment will be described. In the description, the same reference numerals and words will be used for the same parts as in the above-described embodiment, and the description will be omitted or simplified. Note that all the configurations of the third embodiment can be applied to other embodiments, and all the configurations of the other embodiments can be applied to the third embodiment.

Furthermore, although the third embodiment is a drum-type game machine that uses game medals, the configuration that does not use game medals among the configurations detailed in the third embodiment is a medal-less drum-type game machine. I would like to add that this can also be applied to machines.

In the third embodiment, only the differences from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the game progress control process related to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. The difference from the second embodiment is step 1219-1. That is, in step 1219-1, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes error-related processing, and proceeds to step 1220. Further, in the case of No in step 1251, the process moves to step 1219-1.

Here, in the error-related processing of step 1219-1, processing related to the discontinued state including processing related to transition to the discontinued state is executed, and more specifically, when the discontinued flag is on. In this case, a process of shifting to a discontinued state, advance discontinuation notification or discontinuation notification on the payout number display device D270 (described later), output of a signal regarding the discontinued state to a rental machine (sometimes referred to as a rental unit), etc. are executed. In addition, in the error-related process of step 1219-1, in addition to the process related to the discontinued state, a predetermined error monitoring process and a predetermined error stop process (process to stop the progress of the game) are executed. .

The main control board M side is configured to have a first RAM area that is a storage area related to the progress of the game, and a second RAM area that is a storage area related to error-related processing that is different from the normal progress of the game. In this case, the abort flag, the counter value of the difference counter, etc. may be stored in the second RAM area.

Additionally, if the error-related process in step 1219-1 results in a cancellation, automatic payment processing (processing to pay out all game medals stored in credits without operating any operating member) will be executed. It may be configured so that automatic payment processing is not executed.

In addition, even if the automatic settlement process is configured to be executed in the error-related process of step 1219-1 when the game is stopped, if the progress of the game is stopped due to a predetermined error, The configuration is such that automatic payment processing is not executed in the error-related processing of step 1219-1.

Next, FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the game progress control process related to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. The difference from the second embodiment is step 3700 and step 3800, that is, if the payout corresponding to the winning is completed in step 1290 (in the case of Yes), or if the winning to pay out the game medals is completed in step 1275. If not (No), in step 3700, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes the abort monitoring process described above. Next, in step 3800, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes the MY counter monitoring process described above, and proceeds to step 3400.

In this manner, the third embodiment is configured to execute the processing in step 3700 and step 3800 at a timing before the processing related to updating the gaming state from step 3400 to step 1293. In other words, it is configured to execute processing related to updating (and/or calculating) the counter value of the difference counter and updating (and/or calculating) the counter value of the MY counter before the processing related to updating the gaming state. ing.

Furthermore, as detailed in FIGS. 83 and 84, in the third embodiment, in the game progress control process (sometimes referred to as main loop process), an error occurs in step 1219-1, which includes the process related to the discontinued state. After executing the related process, the abort monitoring process of step 3700 including the process related to updating the difference counter is executed. In other words, if the abort monitoring process is executed in a certain game progress control process, and the calculation result related to the counter value of the difference counter is less than 0 and the abort flag is turned on, the next game of the certain game progress control process is executed. It is configured to shift to the aborted state in error-related processing in the progress control processing.

In addition, if the error-related process transitions to a discontinued state, similar to other errors that cause the game to be stopped, the system is configured so that the predetermined error monitoring process and the predetermined error stop process in the error-related process are not executed thereafter. You can.

<<Illustration related to the display of the payout number display device>>
Next, FIG. 85 is a diagram regarding the display of the payout number display device D270 in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the payout number display device D270 is configured to be able to execute (display) advance notification of cancellation, reservation status notification, and notification of cancellation in addition to displaying the number of payouts, push order navigation, and error notification. . Hereinafter, a specific display mode on the payout number display device D270 will be described in detail.

Note that the payout number display device D270 in the third embodiment is configured with a 2-digit 7-segment display.

<Advance cancellation notification, reservation status notification, and cancellation notification>
(a1) to (a5) in the same figure are the display modes of the discontinuation advance notification, and the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on is a specified number (18500 in this example) or more. In this case, the payout number display device D270 is configured to display a discontinuation advance notice.

Here, the prior notification of cancellation is a notification that informs the player that the number of differences until the cancellation state is reached is small, in other words, a notification that suggests the remaining number of differences until the cancellation state is reached, and the third embodiment , the display is configured to be displayed on the payout number display device D270 controlled by the main control board M side, but the display is not limited to this, and as will be described later, other displays controlled by the main control board M side may be displayed. It may be configured to notify by a device, etc. (a lamp etc.), it may be configured to notify by a display device, etc. controlled by the sub-control board S, or it may be controlled by the main control board M. The notification may be provided using a plurality of display devices, such as a display device that controls the control board S and a display device that controls the sub-control board S side.

In addition, in the third embodiment, unlike the second embodiment, when the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on becomes 18,500 or more, the system enters the discontinued advance notification state. It is configured so that it can be migrated. In other words, when the counter value of the difference counter becomes 500 or less, the system is configured to shift to the discontinuation advance notification state.

As a specific display mode of the discontinuation advance notification on the payout number display device D270, if the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number after power-on is 18,500 or more and less than 18,600, (a1 ) as shown in "L5", and if the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on is 18,600 or more and less than 18,700, as shown in (a2) If the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on is 18,700 or more and less than 18,800, the light turns on at "L4" as shown in (a3). ”, and if the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on is 18,800 or more and less than 18,900, it lights at “L2” as shown in (a4). However, if the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after the power is turned on is 18,900 or more and less than 19,000, it is configured to turn on at "L1" as shown in (a5). ing. In other words, if the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on is a specific number (18,500 in this example), then the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on is set as the reference. The display mode is configured to switch in the order of "L5" → "L4" → "L3" → "L2" → "L1" every time the maximum difference number increases by 100.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to simplify the control when the prior discontinuation notification, which is information corresponding to the difference number, is switched before transitioning to the discontinuation state. Further, by setting the range of the counter values of the difference counters corresponding to the first discontinuation advance notice to a constant value (100 in this example), it is possible to prevent the player from becoming confused.

Note that the above fixed value (100 in this example) is sometimes referred to as a predetermined number of differences, and is 18,500 or more and Less than 18,600, 18,600 or more and less than 18,700, 18,700 or more and less than 18,800, 18,800 or more and less than 18,900, and 18,900 or more and less than 19,000 may be referred to as a range of the difference number by a predetermined number.

Further, in the third embodiment, the above-mentioned constant value is set to 100, but it is not limited to this, and there is no problem in changing it. By setting the above-mentioned constant value to a small value, it is possible to notify the player of more detailed advance notice of discontinuation, and by setting the above-mentioned constant value to a large value, the amount of data used for advance notice of discontinuation can be reduced. can do. Further, the range of the number of differences for which the display mode of advance notification of discontinuation changes may be set to a value that is not constant. For example, the range of the number of differences that causes the display mode of advance notice of discontinuation may be set to a value that is not constant. If the value is 18,500 or more and less than 18,700, "L5" lights up, and if the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference after power-on is 18,700 or more and less than 18,850, "L4" lights up. ”, and if the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest difference since power-on is 18,850 or more and less than 18,920, “L3” will light, and the difference since power-on will be lit. If the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences is 18920 or more and less than 18970, "L2" lights up, and the maximum difference based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on is lit. If the number is greater than or equal to 18970 and less than 19000, a predetermined number (such as lighting at "L1") will be set to the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number after the power is turned on. In this example, the range of the difference number corresponding to the discontinuation advance notification may be configured to become narrower as it approaches 19000).

In addition, under the situation where "L1" is displayed as a discontinuation advance notice on the payout number display device D270, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after the power is turned on is a predetermined number (in this example, , 19000), if the bonus is being executed at the timing of reaching the bonus, the system enters the canceled reservation state as in the second embodiment, and the display mode of the payout number display device D270 is as shown in (a6). The reservation status notification corresponding to the canceled reservation status is switched to "L0" as shown in FIG. "CP" will be displayed as a discontinuation notification corresponding to the discontinuation state.

Furthermore, even if the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on reaches a predetermined number (19,000 in this example) while the bonus is being executed, the game ends when the predetermined number is reached. It may be configured so that it later transitions to the aborted state, and in such a configuration, it may be configured such that it does not have the aborted reservation state.

Note that the predetermined number (19,000 in this example) may be referred to as a first value.

Further, the stopped state is sometimes referred to as a complete state, or a complete function is operating. Further, reservation status notification may also be referred to as advance cancellation notification.

Furthermore, when the discontinued state is reached, the speaker S20 may output a sound indicating that the discontinued state has been reached, or the lamp unit may be configured to be lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the discontinued state. In addition, when the reservation is canceled, the speaker S20 may output a sound indicating that the reservation is canceled, or the lamp unit may be lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the reservation reservation. .

<Display number of payouts>
Further, when a symbol combination that causes a payout is displayed in a stopped state, the number of payouts corresponding to the symbol combination will be displayed on the payout number display device D270. As a specific example, as shown in (b1), when 10 coins are paid out, "10" is displayed.

Here, when 10 coins are paid out, the display mode of the payout number display device D270 may be configured to be displayed as "hidden → 10" or "hidden → 1 → 2→...→8→9→10" may be displayed in increments of 1. Note that the above-mentioned non-display may be replaced with 0.

<Error notification>
Further, if an error occurs, an error notification corresponding to the error will be displayed on the payout number display device D270. As a specific example, as shown in (c1), "EE" will be displayed if an input medal backflow error has occurred. Note that the occurrence of an error means that the gaming machine detects that an error has occurred, and in a situation where an error has occurred, the gaming machine executes error notification regarding the error that is occurring. As a specific example of error notification, notification may be made using various lamps on the main control board M side, or notification may be made using the speaker S20 or the effect display device S40 on the sub control board S side. Furthermore, the fact that a gaming machine detects that an error has occurred is sometimes referred to as an error state.

Although not shown, the third embodiment has multiple types of errors (including multiple recoverable errors and multiple unrecoverable errors), and each error The payout number display device D270 is configured to display an error notification corresponding to the payout number display device D270. For example, if an input medal retention error occurs, "E1" is displayed on the payout number display device D270, and if the display format of the error notification differs depending on the type of error, it may be changed. no problem.

Here, in the third embodiment, as described above, there are a plurality of errors, and the error notification corresponding to the error that has occurred is sent to the left digit (referred to as the first digit) of the payout number display device D270. ) and the right-hand digit (sometimes referred to as the second digit).When any error occurs, the left-hand digit of the payout number display device D270 in error notification and , discontinuation advance notification, reservation status notification, or discontinuation notification (the three notifications may be collectively referred to as notification regarding discontinuation) are configured so that the display mode is different from the left digit of the payout number display device D270. (In FIG. 85, the digit on the left side of the payout number display device D270 in the error notification is “E”, whereas the digit on the left side of the payout number display device D270 in the cancellation advance notification, reservation status notification, or cancellation notification The digit is "L" or "C").

By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure so that the player or the gaming hall manager does not confuse the error notification on the payout number display device D270 and the notification regarding cancellation.

Note that notification regarding discontinuation may be referred to as information corresponding to the number of differences after a predetermined timing after power-on, or information corresponding to the number of differences, and advance notice of discontinuation is referred to as information corresponding to the number of differences after a predetermined timing after power-on. This is sometimes referred to as information corresponding to the number of differences or information corresponding to the number of differences.

In this way, the payout number display device D270 is configured to display a variety of information, and by varying the display format and display timing, the player can grasp what information is currently being displayed. (Details will be explained later).

Note that the 7-segment display such as the payout number display device D270 in the third embodiment may be configured to have DP (circular lighting area, sometimes referred to as dot point), for example, It may be provided in the lower right area (8 locations can be lit). In this case, the error notification corresponding to the input medal backflow error is displayed as "CE" on the payout number display device D270, and the discontinuation notification is displayed as "CP" on the payout number display device D270. In other words, by displaying the left digits of the payout number display device D270 as "C" and "C.", the left digit of the payout number display device D270 in error notification and the discontinued number may be displayed. It is possible to configure the display mode to be different from the left digit of the payout number display device D270 in the notification regarding the number of payouts. In other words, even if the digits on the left side of the payout number display device D270 are lit in a lighting mode indicating the same alphabet, they can be distinguished by whether or not the DP is lit, so the lighting modes can be different.

Further, when a player or an administrator of a gaming parlor visually recognizes the payout number display device D270, it is only necessary to be able to determine whether it is an error notification or a notification regarding discontinuation. The display mode may be the same as that of the left digit of the payout number display device D270 in the notification regarding the stoppage.

<Diagram regarding payout number display device when replay is stopped>
Next, FIG. 86 is a diagram regarding the display of the payout number display device D270 when the symbol combination corresponding to replay is stopped and displayed according to the third embodiment.

First, in (a) in the figure, bet 3 coins in a predetermined gaming state (this may be an AT state in which push order navigation is executed, or a gaming state different from the AT state). games are being executed. The counter value of the difference counter is 480, and the effect display device S40 displays a message indicating the discontinuation state, "The discontinuation state will be reached with 480 sheets left."

After that, a stop operation is performed on the reels, the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed, the counter value of the difference counter becomes 483, and the effect display device S40 displays a message indicating the stop state, ``With 483 pieces remaining, the stop is stopped.'' ” is displayed. In addition, at the timing shown in (b) in the figure after all the reels are stopped, game medals can be inserted, and "L5" corresponding to the difference counter value 483 is displayed on the payout number display device D270 as a preliminary notification of discontinuation. Is displayed.

In this manner, in the third embodiment, when the advance notice of discontinuation is displayed on the payout number display device D270, it is displayed at the timing when game medals can be inserted.

Note that the timing at which game medals can be inserted at which advance notice of cancellation is displayed may be referred to as the specific timing at which bets can be placed.

Note that in the third embodiment, the timing at which the payout number display device D270 starts displaying notification regarding discontinuation, such as advance notice of discontinuation, is the timing when game medals can be inserted, but the timing is not limited to this. The timing may be a timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since all the reels stopped and displayed, a timing when all the reels stopped and displayed, a timing when the payout process ended, etc.

After that, when three game medals are bet and the start lever D50 is operated (when the operation of the start lever D50 is accepted), the advance notice of discontinuation on the payout number display device D270 is hidden, and then (c ), the reels for the next game (3 bet game) of the game (a) in the figure start rotating.

Note that when the payout number display device D270 in the figure is hidden, it may be configured to display "00" or "0" (in other configurations as well, the number display device D270 may display "00" or "0"). ” or “0”).

Further, in the third embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the counter value of the difference counter is configured to be updated after the end of the game medal payout process, but the counter value of the difference counter is updated. The timing may be changed, and the timing of updating the counter value of the difference counter when game medals are inserted and the timing of updating the counter value of the difference counter when game medals are paid out. may be made different. As a specific example, the counter value of the difference counter may be increased (increased by 3 in the case of 3 bets) at the timing when the bet is placed in (c) in the figure.

Thereafter, a stop operation is performed on the reels, symbol combinations corresponding to the replay are stopped and displayed, and an automatic bet corresponding to the replay symbols is executed. In addition, the counter value of the difference counter remains 483 (determined as No in step 3704 in FIG. 57), and the production display device S40 displays a message indicating the discontinuation state, ``With 483 sheets remaining, the discontinuation state will be reached.'' ' remains displayed. Furthermore, at the timing shown in (d) in the figure after all the reels are stopped and displayed, game medals can be inserted, but the payout number display device D270 does not display the advance notice of discontinuation and is hidden. .

In this way, in the third embodiment, when a symbol combination corresponding to re-gaming is stopped and displayed, the updating process of the counter value of the difference counter is not executed, and the payout number display device D270 is configured so that advance notice of discontinuation is not displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 86, in the third embodiment, in a situation where the counter value of the difference counter is a value that displays advance notice of discontinuation, the game medals are not inserted until the game medals can be inserted. During the period until the operation of the start lever D50 is accepted, the payout number display device D270 is configured to be able to display an advance notice of discontinuation, but even during this period, symbol combinations corresponding to re-gaming (re-gaming symbols and ) is displayed in a stopped state, the prior discontinuation notification will not be displayed. In other words, when the replay symbol is displayed as stopped in a situation where the counter value of the difference counter is a value that displays a prior notification of cancellation, the period from then on until the operation of the start lever D50 is accepted (after the automatic bet is placed) (This may be a period until the operation of the start lever D50 is accepted), the advance notification of discontinuation will not be displayed.

In addition, when the replay symbols are stopped and displayed, the speaker S20 outputs a sound indicating that the replay symbols are stopped and displayed, and the lamp unit is configured to light up in a lighting mode corresponding to the replay. You can.

When the replay symbol is displayed in a stopped state, there is a low possibility that the player will be replaced, and even if the player is replaced, there is a low possibility that the next player will be at a disadvantage, so as mentioned above, When the replay symbols are displayed in a stopped state, power consumption can be suppressed by configuring the payout number display device D270 not to display the advance notification of discontinuation.

Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the replay symbols are displayed in a stopped state, advance notice of cancellation may be displayed on the payout number display device D270 (for example, when the start lever D50 is turned off from the timing when an automatic bet is placed). The screen may be displayed until the operation is accepted (specifically, in the situation shown in (d) in FIG. 86). By configuring it in this way, the process related to advance notification of discontinuation is simplified. be able to.

In addition, "L0", which is the reservation status notification corresponding to the canceled reservation status, is also displayed in the period from when it becomes possible to insert game medals until the operation of the start lever D50 is accepted, similar to "L5" etc. It is configured to be Also, like "L5", "L0" may be configured not to be displayed when a symbol combination compatible with replay is stopped, and "L0" is compatible with replay. It may be configured such that it can be displayed even when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed.

<Diagram regarding the payout number display device in case of suspension>
Next, FIG. 87 is a diagram regarding the display of the payout number display device D270 when the game is stopped, according to the third embodiment.

First, in (a) in the figure, a game state in which the push order navigation is executed in a game in which the push order winning combination (for example, the number of game medals paid out may differ depending on the reel stop order such as the push order bell) is won. A three-coin bet game is being executed in the AT state (state related to AT). In this game, since the push order combination has not been won, the push order navigation is not executed, and the counter value of the difference counter is 4, and the effect display device S40 displays "4 more to go" as a discontinued state suggestion display. "The game will be stopped when the number of copies is reached." is displayed.

After that, a stop operation is performed on the reels, the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed, the counter value of the difference counter becomes 7, and the effect display device S40 displays a message indicating the stop state, ``With 7 more pieces left, it will stop.'' ” is displayed. In addition, at the timing shown in (b) in the figure after all the reels are stopped, game medals can be inserted, and "L1" corresponding to the difference counter value 7 is displayed on the payout number display device D270 as a preliminary notification of discontinuation. Is displayed.

After that, when three game medals are bet and the start lever D50 is operated (when the operation of the start lever D50 is accepted), the advance notice of discontinuation on the payout number display device D270 is hidden, and then (c ), the reels for the next game (a 3-bet bet game) of the game (a) in the figure start to rotate, and the payout number display device D270 shows a message corresponding to "left → middle → right". "=1", which is a push order navigation, is displayed. In addition, on the performance display device S40, the message ``The game will be stopped after 7 pictures'' is displayed as a stop state suggestion display, and ``123'' is displayed as a push order navigation image. Note that in the third embodiment, the display priority is higher for the discontinued state suggestion display than the push order navigation image; however, the display priority is not limited to this, and the push order navigation image is given a higher display priority than the discontinued state suggestion display. It may be configured such that the display priority is higher.

Further, the push order navigation image on the effect display device S40 may be displayed when the operation of the start lever D50 is received, or may be displayed when the reels start rotating. Further, the push order navigation on the payout number display device D270 may be displayed when an operation of the start lever D50 is received, or may be displayed when the reels start rotating.

In addition, when a game in which the push order navigation is executed, if the start lever D50 is operated in a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed, the payout will be higher than the push order navigation image on the effect display device S40. The push order navigation on the number display device D270 may be configured to be displayed first or may be configured to be displayed later.

In addition, when a game in which the push order navigation is executed, if the start lever D50 is operated in a situation where the minimum game time has elapsed, the payout will be higher than the push order navigation image on the effect display device S40. The push order navigation on the number display device D270 may be configured to be displayed first or may be configured to be displayed later.

Thereafter, a stop operation on the reels (stop operation in the order of left → middle → right) is executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the bell is stopped and displayed, and 10 coins are paid out. At the timing (d) in the figure when the payout process is completed (for example, the timing when the process of step 3700 in FIG. 84 is executed), the abort flag is turned on because the calculation result related to the counter value of the difference counter is less than 0. The payout number display device D270 displays "10" corresponding to the number of bells to be paid out, and the production display device S40 displays a message indicating the stoppage state, ``With 7 pieces remaining, the payout state will be stopped.'' ” is displayed.

Note that, at the timing (d) in the figure, the message ``The process will be stopped when 0 sheets remain'' may be displayed as the abort state suggestion display, or the abort state suggestion display may be hidden.

Thereafter, at the timing (e) in the figure (for example, the timing at which the process of step 1219-1 in FIG. 83 is executed), the discontinued state is reached, and "CP" is displayed on the payout number display device D270 as a discontinuation notification. , the effect display device S40 displays "During the stopped state, the game will be stopped. Please call the staff" as a display during the stopped state.

Note that "10", which is the payout number display in FIG. Alternatively, the display may be continued until another display is displayed on the payout number display device D270.

In this way, in the payout number display device D270, the left digit (sometimes referred to as the first digit) of the discontinuation advance notice is "L", and the left digit of the discontinuation notice is "C". The notification format is different. With this configuration, the player can easily recognize whether or not the game has been stopped and the game cannot be continued.

Note that the left digit of the payout number display device D270 may be referred to as a predetermined display area of a predetermined display section.

Here, as described above, in the third embodiment, the discontinuation advance notification in the payout number display device D270 is configured to be hidden when the start lever D50 is operated. Under the situation where "L5" is displayed as the advance notice of discontinuation on the device D270, the start lever D50 is operated and after the game is played, the counter value of the difference counter becomes 400 or less, and the advance notice of discontinuation on the payout number display device D270 is displayed. When the display mode of the advance notice of discontinuation is changed so that "L4" is displayed as the notice, the payout number display device D270 is configured to have a non-display period.

With this configuration, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the display of the advance notification of cancellation has been switched.

In addition, when the start lever D50 is operated and "=1" is displayed as the push order navigation on the payout number display device D270 under the situation where "L5" is displayed as the advance notification of discontinuation on the payout number display device D270, It may also be configured to have a non-display period between "L5" and "=1". Further, even if the counter value of the difference counter becomes 400 or less after the game is executed and "L4" is displayed as the advance notification of discontinuation on the payout number display device D270, "10" is displayed as the payout number. (The number of payouts is just an example and varies depending on the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed) and "L4" may be configured to have a non-display period.

In addition, when switching from "L5" to "=1" on the payout number display device D270, one of the following structures can be used as a structure having a non-display period between "L5" and "=1". Can be applied. Note that "L5" and "=1" are just examples, and can be applied to all cases where the display on the payout number display device D270 changes.
(1) There is a non-display period at the last predetermined time (for example, 100 ms) in the "L5" display period.
(2) There is a non-display period at the first predetermined time (for example, 100 ms) in the display period of "=1".
(3) After the display period of “L5” ends, a predetermined wait (predetermined freeze) in which the display is not displayed is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 87, since the period for displaying the discontinuation advance notice on the payout number display device D270 and the period for displaying the payout number display on the payout number display device D270 are configured so as not to overlap, the game It is possible to prevent a person from misunderstanding the discontinuation advance notice and the payout number display.

In addition, when game medals can be inserted and a notification regarding discontinuation is displayed on the payout number display device D270, the timing at which the advance notice of discontinuation is displayed on the payout number display device D270 and the timing when the advance notice of discontinuation is displayed on the payout number display device D270. The timing at which the reservation status notification is displayed and the timing at which the discontinuation notification is displayed on the payout number display device D270 (the timing at which the display starts) are the same timing (for example, 100ms after game medals can be inserted). ).

In addition, in the case where the notification regarding discontinuation is displayed on the payout number display device D270, the timing at which the advance notice of discontinuation is displayed on the payout number display device D270 and the timing at which the reservation status notification is displayed on the payout number display device D270 are different. , the timing at which the discontinuation notification is displayed on the payout number display device D270 may be configured to be at a different timing. As a specific example, the configuration may be as follows.

<Timing at which advance discontinuation notification is displayed>
The advance notification of discontinuance is given after all reels have stopped, when the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences since power-on is greater than or equal to a specific number (18,500 in this example) and a predetermined number (in this example, , 19000), the game medals are displayed at the timing when they can be inserted.

<Timing when reservation status notification is displayed>
The reservation status notification is made when the maximum number of differences is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (in this example, 19,000) based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after the power is turned on after all reels have stopped during the execution of the bonus. In this case, the game medals are displayed at the timing when they can be inserted.

<Timing at which discontinuation notification is displayed>
The stop notification is when all reels stop in a situation where no bonus is executed, then a payout corresponding to the symbol combination that was stopped and displayed occurs, and the maximum number of reels based on the timing with the smallest difference after the power is turned on occurs. If the number of differences is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (19,000 in this example), a predetermined freeze occurs for a first period of time, and is displayed after the predetermined freeze ends. In addition, in a situation where a bonus is in progress and is in a canceled reservation state, after all reels related to the final game of the bonus have stopped, the bonus end screen freezes for a second period of time (bonus end screen (a predetermined freeze occurs in a situation where is displayed on the effect display device S40), and is displayed after the predetermined freeze ends. Note that the first time and the second time may be the same time value or may be different time values.

In this way, the time from when all the reels stop to when the notification regarding discontinuation is displayed on the payout number display device D270 (the timing at which the notification regarding discontinuation is displayed) is determined by the pre-discontinuation notification, the reservation status notification, and the discontinuation notification. It is also possible to configure the system to be different.

Further, as described above, when the discontinuation notification is displayed on the payout number display device D270, it is configured to be displayed after a predetermined freeze occurs, while the discontinuation advance notice is displayed on the payout number display device D270. In this case, the display may be configured to be displayed without a predetermined freeze.

<Diagram regarding the payout number display device in the case of a backflow error of inserted medals>
Next, FIG. 88 is a diagram related to the display on the payout number display device D270 when an inserted medal backflow error occurs, according to the third embodiment.

First, in (a) in the figure, bet 3 coins in a predetermined gaming state (this may be an AT state in which push order navigation is executed, or a gaming state different from the AT state). games are being executed. The counter value of the difference counter is 480, and the effect display device S40 displays a message indicating the discontinuation state, "The discontinuation state will be reached with 480 sheets left."

After that, a stop operation is performed on the reels, the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed, the counter value of the difference counter becomes 483, and the effect display device S40 displays a message indicating the stop state, ``With 483 pieces remaining, the stop is stopped.'' ” is displayed. In addition, at the timing shown in (b) in the figure after all the reels are stopped, game medals can be inserted, and "L5" corresponding to the difference counter value 483 is displayed on the payout number display device D270 as a preliminary notification of discontinuation. Is displayed.

After that, in a situation where game medals can be inserted, an inserted medal backflow error occurs, and as shown in (c) in the figure, the payout number display device D270 displays "EE", which is an error notification corresponding to the inserted medal backflow error. is displayed (switches from "L5" to "EE"). In addition, the effect display device S40 displays "Inserted medal backflow error is occurring! Please call an attendant" as an error display corresponding to the inserted medal backflow error.

After that, in (d) in the figure, when the inserted medal backflow error is cleared, "L5" corresponding to the difference counter value 483 is displayed again on the payout number display device D270 as a discontinuation advance notice (from "EE" to " (Switches to "L5"). In addition, the effect display device S40 displays a message indicating that the game will be stopped with 483 pieces remaining.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when a predetermined error (a recoverable error, and in FIG. 88, an inserted medal backflow error) occurs while the discontinuation advance notification is displayed on the payout number display device D270. In this case, the payout number display device D270 displays an error notification corresponding to the predetermined error, and when the predetermined error is canceled, the payout number display device D270 displays a discontinuation advance notice again. It is configured.

With this configuration, when a predetermined error occurs, the display on the payout number display device D270 can be switched to an error notification corresponding to the predetermined error, and a single display on the payout number display device D270 can be switched. It is possible to display only the relevant information, and to provide appropriate notifications to players and game hall managers.

Note that the display on the payout number display device D270 may be configured to have a period of non-display when switching from "EE" to "L5" or from "L5" to "EE".

In addition, in the third embodiment, the notification regarding the discontinuation and the error notification are notified on the payout number display device D270, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification regarding the discontinuation may be notified on the first display device. , the error notification may be provided on a second display device, or the notification regarding cancellation and the error notification may be provided on different display devices.

Note that the following configuration can be applied as a specific example of the first display device that displays the notification regarding suspension.
(1) Payout number display device D270
(2) Termination display device described later in notification mode A of FIG. 92 (3) LED dedicated for notification regarding termination, described later in notification mode B of FIG. 92
(4) Credit number display device D200
(5) Effect display device S40
(6) A 4-digit 7-segment display for presentation, which is controlled by the sub-control board S and used for presentation during the game.

Further, as a specific example of the second display device that displays the error notification, the following configuration can be applied.
(1) Payout number display device D270
(2) Credit number display device D200
(3) Effect display device S40
(4) Display device dedicated to error notification

Note that either the notification regarding the discontinuation or the error notification may be configured to be notified on the payout number display device D270, or the notification regarding the discontinuation and the error notification may be provided on a display device different from the payout number display device D270. It may also be configured to notify the user.

With this configuration, while error notification is being performed on the second display device, notification regarding discontinuation can be performed on the first display device, and two notifications can be performed at the same time.

Furthermore, as described above, when an error occurs, in addition to displaying the error notification on the payout number display device D270, the error notification is also executed on the speaker S20 on the sub-control board S side and the effect display device S40. It may be configured to do so.

Further, when a predetermined error occurs, an error notification is displayed on the payout number display device D270, an error sound is output from the speaker S20, an error display is displayed on the effect display device S40, and then the predetermined error When the error is canceled, the error notification on the payout number display device D270 is hidden, but the error sound from the speaker S20 and/or the error display on the production display device S40 continues for a predetermined period of time even after the predetermined error is canceled. It may be configured to be executed.

In addition, in a situation where a notification regarding discontinuation is displayed on the payout number display device D270, if a predetermined error occurs, an error notification is displayed on the payout number display device D270, and an error sound is emitted from the speaker S20. is output and an error display is displayed on the production display device S40, and then, when the predetermined error is canceled, the error notification is hidden and a notification regarding discontinuation is displayed on the payout number display device D270. , the error sound from the speaker S20 and/or the error display on the effect display device S40 may be configured to continue for a predetermined period of time even after the predetermined error is canceled.

In addition, in a situation where a notification regarding discontinuation is displayed on the payout number display device D270, if a predetermined error occurs, an error notification is displayed on the payout number display device D270, and an error sound is emitted from the speaker S20. is output, an error display is displayed on the performance display device S40, and then, when the predetermined error is canceled, the error notification is hidden on the payout number display device D270, and the error sound and/or performance is output from the speaker S20. It may be configured such that the error display on the display device S40 continues for a predetermined period of time even after the predetermined error is cleared, and when the predetermined time period elapses, a notification regarding discontinuation is displayed on the payout number display device D270.

Further, if a predetermined error occurs during rotation of one or more reels, the following configuration may be adopted.

(Configuration 1)
(1) In a situation where the notification regarding the stoppage is displayed on the payout number display device D270, the start lever D50 is operated, the notification regarding the stoppage is hidden on the payout number display device D270, and the reels start rotating.
(2) If a predetermined error occurs during reel rotation, neither the notification regarding stoppage nor the error notification is displayed on the payout number display device D270.
(3) After that, when all the reels stop without the predetermined error being cleared, the payout number display device D270 does not display a notification regarding the stoppage, but displays an error notification corresponding to the predetermined error.

(Configuration 2)
(1) In a situation where the counter value of the difference counter is 4, the bonus has not been executed, and "L1" is displayed on the payout number display device D270 as a notification regarding cancellation, the start lever D50 is operated, The result of the internal lottery is a common bell that results in a payout of 10 pieces (a lottery result in which symbol combinations that result in a payout of 10 pieces are displayed in a static manner regardless of the order of pressing or the timing of the stop operation), and the payout number display device D270 notifies you of the discontinuation. will disappear and the reels will start spinning.
(2) If a predetermined error occurs during reel rotation, neither the notification regarding the stoppage nor the error notification is displayed on the payout number display device D270.
(3) After that, if all the reels stop without the predetermined error being cleared, a payout of 10 coins corresponding to the common bell will occur, and when the payout ends, the predetermined error will be displayed on the payout number display device D270. The corresponding error notification is not displayed, but a cancellation notification ("CP") is displayed.

(Configuration 3)
(1) The start lever D50 is operated in a situation where the counter value of the difference counter is 4, the bonus has not been executed, and "L1" is displayed on the payout number display device D270 as a notification regarding cancellation, The result of the internal lottery is a common bell that results in a payout of 10 pieces (a lottery result in which symbol combinations that result in a payout of 10 pieces are displayed in a static manner regardless of the order in which they are pressed or the timing of the stop operation), and the payout number display device D270 notifies you of the discontinuation. will disappear and the reels will start spinning.
(2) If a predetermined error occurs during reel rotation, neither the notification regarding stoppage nor the error notification is displayed on the payout number display device D270.
(3) After that, if all the reels stop without the predetermined error being cleared, the payout of 10 coins corresponding to the common bell will not occur and the payout number display device D270 will display the error corresponding to the predetermined error. The notification will be displayed, and the discontinuation notification will not be displayed.
(4) Thereafter, when the predetermined error is cleared, a payout of 10 coins corresponding to the common bell occurs, and when the payout is completed, a discontinuation notification ("CP") is displayed on the payout number display device D270. be done.

Note that various errors can be applied to the above-mentioned predetermined error, and as an example, the following errors may be applied. It should be noted that the error notification display mode (display mode on the payout number display device D270) described below is just an example, and there is no problem in changing it.
(1) Door opening error (error notification display format is “DO”)
(2) Inserted medal backflow error (error notification display format is "EE")
(3) Inserted medal retention error (error notification display format is "E1")
(4) Medal empty error (Error notification display format is "E2")
(5) Setting value error (error notification display format is "E3")
(6) Medal full error (Error notification display format is "E4")
(7) Display judgment error (display format of error notification is "E5")
(8) Error in the number of sheets inserted (the error notification display format is "E6")
(9) Abnormal loading error (display format of error notification is "E7")
(10) Abnormal payout error (display format of error notification is “E8”)
(11) Payout medal retention error (error notification display format is "E9")

<Diagram regarding payout number display device in case of power outage>
Next, FIG. 89 is a diagram regarding the display of the payout number display device D270 when a power outage occurs, according to the third embodiment.

First, in (a) in the figure, bet 3 coins in a predetermined gaming state (this may be an AT state in which push order navigation is executed, or a gaming state different from the AT state). games are being executed. The counter value of the difference counter is 480, and the effect display device S40 displays a message indicating the discontinuation state, "The discontinuation state will be reached with 480 sheets left."

After that, a stop operation is performed on the reels, the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed, the counter value of the difference counter becomes 483, and the effect display device S40 displays a message indicating the stop state, ``With 483 pieces remaining, the stop is stopped.'' ” is displayed. In addition, at the timing shown in (b) in the figure after all the reels are stopped, game medals can be inserted, and "L5" corresponding to the difference counter value 483 is displayed on the payout number display device D270 as a preliminary notification of discontinuation. Is displayed.

Thereafter, in (c) of the figure, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off (power cutoff occurs) under a situation in which game medals can be inserted, and the payout number display device D270 becomes hidden.

After that, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch turned off (when the power is turned on without shifting to setting change mode), the counter value of the difference counter is initialized as shown in (d) in the figure. 19,000, the payout number display device D270 does not display "L5" that was displayed before the power was cut off, and is hidden, and the effect display device S40 does not display the stop state suggestion display.

As described above, in the third embodiment, if a power outage occurs and the power is restored without transitioning to the setting change mode in a situation where the discontinuation advance notice is displayed on the payout number display device D270, the payout will be discontinued. The number display device D270 is configured so that the advance notice of discontinuation is not displayed again and is hidden.

With this configuration, even if a power outage occurs while the game parlor is in operation, the situation regarding the current difference number can be appropriately notified on the payout number display device D270.

Note that after (c) in the figure, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch on (when the power is turned on to shift to the setting change mode), the counter value of the difference counter is initialized. 19,000, the payout number display device D270 does not display "L5" that was displayed before the power was cut off, and is hidden, and the effect display device S40 is configured so that the discontinuation state suggestion display is not displayed. There is.

Note that when the first number (for example, 10) is displayed on the credit number display device D200 and the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, and then the settings cannot be changed. When the power is turned on without the setting key switch being turned off (the power is turned on with the setting key switch turned off), the first number (for example, 10) is displayed on the credit number display device D200, and the 3 bet lamp D213 lights up. It is configured like this.

Further, in a situation where the first number (for example, 10) is displayed on the credit number display device D200 and the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, and then the settings cannot be changed. When the power is turned on (the power is turned on with the setting key switch turned on), 0 is displayed on the credit number display device D200 (it may be hidden), and the 3 bet lamp D213 is configured not to light up. has been done.

Note that there is no problem in replacing the 3-bet ramp D213 with the 1-bet ramp D211 or the 2-bet ramp D212.

<Diagram regarding the payout number display device in case of power outage during bonus>
Next, FIG. 90 is a diagram related to the display of the payout number display device D270 when a power failure occurs during execution of a bonus according to the third embodiment.

First, in (a) in the figure, a three-coin bet game is being executed during the bonus. The counter value of the difference counter is 4, and the effect display device S40 displays the message ``The game will be stopped with 4 pieces remaining'' as a stop state suggestion display. Note that "GET157" is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a display of the number of game medals obtained from the bonus being executed (which may also be the number of game medals that have been paid out). In addition, in order to display the number of game medals acquired in the bonus being executed, the timing at which the amount of game medals bet is subtracted and displayed is after all the reels have stopped in the same figure, but this is not the case. is not limited, and may be the timing when a bet is placed or the timing when the operation of the start lever D50 is received.

Note that the bonus in FIG. 90 may be applied to any of the above-mentioned bonuses such as BB and RB, and the timing at which the power is cut off, which will be described later, is during the operation of the first type special accessory continuous operation device and the first one. It may be applied while the Type 1 special accessory is not in operation.

After (a) in the figure, a stop operation is performed on the reels, the symbol combination corresponding to the bell is stopped and displayed, and ten coins are paid out in (b) in the figure. The payout number display device D270 displays "10" as the payout number display. In addition, in (b) of the figure, the display on the effect display device S40 has not been updated in response to the bell, and the display indicating the stoppage state is displayed as "4 pieces left and the play will be stopped." "GET 157" remains displayed as the display of the number of game medals acquired from the bonus being executed.

Further, in (b) of the figure, the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number after power-on is 19,000 or more, and the bonus is being executed, so the cancellation reservation flag is turned on.

After that, at (c) in the figure when game medals can be inserted, the cancellation reservation flag is on, so the reservation status is canceled, and "L0" is displayed on the payout number display device D270 as a reservation status notification. The effect display device S40 displays the message ``The bonus will be canceled after the bonus ends'' as a cancellation reservation display. In addition, in (c) of the figure, the display on the performance display device S40 is updated in accordance with the bell, and "GET164" is displayed as the display of the number of game medals acquired in the bonus being executed.

In addition, in (c) in the figure, the effect display device S40 displays the message ``The cancellation will be canceled after the bonus ends'' as a cancellation reservation display, and ``GET164'' is displayed as the display of the number of game medals acquired from the bonus being executed. It may be configured so that it is displayed.

Thereafter, at (d) in the figure, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off (power cutoff occurs) in a situation where game medals can be inserted, and the payout number display device D270 becomes hidden.

After that, if the power is turned on with the setting key switch turned off (if the power is turned on without transitioning to setting change mode, or if the power is turned on without changing settings), (e) in the figure , the execution of the bonus has resumed, the cancellation reservation flag has been turned on, the payout number display device D270 is displaying "L0", which was displayed before the power was cut off, and the effect display device S40 is displaying "L0". A canceled reservation is displayed.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when the power is cut off while the bonus is being executed and the reservation status notification is displayed on the payout number display device D270, the power is restored without shifting to the setting change mode. When this happens, the reservation status notification is displayed again on the payout number display device D270.

With this configuration, even if a power outage occurs during operation of the gaming hall, the current situation regarding the difference number and the situation regarding the discontinued state can be displayed on the payout number display device D270 and the effect display device S40. Appropriate notifications can be made.

As detailed in FIG. 90, when the bonus is being executed and the reservation status notification is being displayed on the payout number display device D270, a power outage occurs, and the power is subsequently restored without changing settings. If (the power is turned on with the setting key switch turned off or the power is turned on without transitioning to the setting change mode), the bonus is being executed and the reservation status notification is displayed on the payout number display device D270. However, when the bonus is being executed and the reservation status notification is being displayed on the payout number display device D270, a power outage occurs, and the power is restored with a setting change (setting If the power is turned on while the key switch is on, or the power is turned on to shift to the setting change mode), the bonus is no longer being executed and a reservation status notification is displayed on the payout number display device D270. It is configured so that it does not occur.

In addition, in a situation where a discontinuation notification is displayed on the payout number display device D270, a power outage occurs, and then the power is restored without changing the settings (setting change mode in which the power is turned on with the setting key switch turned off). If the power is turned on without transitioning to the current state, the discontinuation notification is displayed again on the payout number display device D270, but the situation where the discontinuation notification is displayed on the payout number display device D270 Below, if the power is turned off and then the power is restored with a setting change (the power is turned on with the setting key switch on, or the power is turned on to shift to the setting change mode), the number of payouts will be The display device D270 is configured so that the discontinuation notification is not displayed.

In addition, in a situation where "L0" is displayed as a reservation status notification on the payout number display device D270, the system is configured so that when the bonus in progress ends, it will be canceled, but the final game of the bonus will be replayed. Even in the case of a winning game (for example, in a case where the bonus is configured so that it can be terminated based on the number of times the game is executed), it may be configured such that the replay symbol is stopped at the timing when it is stopped and displayed. .

Also, if the power is turned off at the timing shown in (a) in Figure 90, then the power returns without changing the settings (the power is turned on with the setting key switch turned off, or the power is turned on without transitioning to the setting change mode). is executed), the bonus is being executed, the reels rotate, the payout number display device D270 is not displayed, and the discontinuation state suggestion display of the effect display device S40 is not displayed (the counter of the difference counter (because the value is initialized). Also, if the power is turned off at the timing shown in (a) in Figure 90, then the power is restored with a setting change (the power is turned on with the setting key switch on, or the power is turned on to shift to the setting change mode). ), the bonus is no longer being executed, the reels do not rotate, the payout number display device D270 is not displayed, and the discontinuation state suggestion display on the effect display device S40 is not displayed (the difference counter (because the counter value is initialized).

In addition, the bonus is being executed, the counter value of the difference counter is 4 (the counter value is just an example, and there is no problem in changing it), the reels are stopped, and the payout number display device D270 is displayed. In a situation where "L1" is displayed as advance notification, the power is turned off and then the power is restored without changing the settings (the power is turned on with the setting key switch turned off, or the power does not enter the setting change mode) If the bonus is in progress, the reels do not rotate, the payout number display device D270 is not displayed, and the discontinuation state suggestion display on the effect display device S40 is not displayed (the difference counter (because the counter value is initialized). In addition, if the bonus is being executed, the counter value of the difference counter is 4, the reels are stopped, and "L1" is displayed on the payout number display device D270 as a pre-discontinuation notification, the power is turned off. occurs, and then the power is restored with a setting change (the power is turned on with the setting key switch on, or the power is turned on to shift to setting change mode), the bonus is no longer being executed. , the reels do not rotate, the payout number display device D270 is not displayed, and the stop state suggestion display of the effect display device S40 is not displayed (because the counter value of the difference counter is initialized).

Note that the situation where the payout number display device D270 is not displayed in the third embodiment can be replaced with a situation where “00” or “0” is displayed on the payout number display device D270.

<<Illustration of the display on the lower panel>>
Next, FIG. 91 is a diagram regarding the display of the lower panel D140 according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, in a cancellation explanation area D141 located at the upper right of the lower panel D140 when viewed from the front, an explanation regarding advance cancellation notification, reservation status notification, and cancellation notification (sometimes referred to as an explanation regarding the cancellation state) is provided. ) is configured to display.

A specific example of the explanation regarding the stopped state can be configured as follows.
<About the display on the payout number display device>
L5: 500 sheets or less remaining until the canceled state L4: 400 sheets or less remaining until the canceled state L2: 300 sheets or less remaining until the canceled state L2: 200 sheets or less remaining until the canceled state L1: 100 sheets or less remaining until the canceled state L0: Reserved state for canceling CP: Canceled state

With this configuration, regardless of the gaming situation, the player can understand the content of the notification regarding the stoppage on the payout number display device D270 by visually recognizing the explanation regarding the stoppage state.

It is preferable that the explanation regarding the no-stop state on the lower panel D140 is configured so that it is easily recognized by the player. It may be configured to be larger than the display area of the display, or may be configured to be larger than the display area of the display related to the gaming machine manufacturer name on the lower panel D140.

Further, the lower panel D140 may be configured to display that the machine is equipped with a suspended state, and as a specific example, it may be displayed as "machine equipped with a suspended state." Note that the display area for the indication that the discontinued state is installed may be larger or smaller than the display area for the explanation regarding the discontinued state on the lower panel D140. Furthermore, the display area for the display indicating that the discontinued state is installed may be configured to be larger than the display area for the display regarding the model name of the gaming machine on the lower panel D140, or The display area may be configured to be larger than the display area for the display related to the name.

Further, the explanation regarding the stopped state and the fact that the stopped state is installed may be configured to be displayed on a panel other than the lower panel D140. For example, a panel other than the lower panel D140 such as a middle panel or an upper panel, It may be configured so that it is displayed on the operation console, or while the standby demo is being displayed on the effect display device S40 (this may be a part of the period in which the standby demo is displayed, or may be the entire period). It may be configured to be displayed.

With this configuration, before the player starts playing, it is possible to make the player aware of whether or not the model has a suspended state, thereby preventing troubles between the player and the gaming parlor. can do.

<<Diagram regarding notification mode of notification regarding suspension>>
Next, FIG. 92 is a diagram regarding a notification mode of notification regarding termination applicable to the third embodiment. The notification mode of the notification regarding termination described in the third embodiment is just an example, and various notification modes can be applied as shown in FIG. 92.

<Notification mode A>
First, the notification mode A shown in the upper part of FIG. 92 will be described in detail. In notification mode A, a stop display device (for example, provided in a position visible from the front of the game machine) consisting of a 4-digit 7-segment display is provided exclusively for notification regarding stoppage, and the notification regarding stoppage is provided in the third embodiment. It is configured to be executed on the stop display device instead of the payout number display device D270 of the form.

In the discontinuation display device, when the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest difference after power-on reaches 18,500, advance notice of discontinuation is displayed, and as shown in (A1), the discontinuation advance notice is displayed. If the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest number is 18500 (the counter value of the difference counter is 500), "L500" is displayed.

When 10 coins are paid out in the situation (A1), the counter value of the difference counter becomes 490, and in (A2), "L490" is displayed on the stop display. Thereafter, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on increases, and at (A3), the display device stops displaying "L003."

When a payout of 10 coins occurs in the situation (A3), the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number after the power is turned on reaches 19,000, and if the bonus is not in progress, it will be canceled. state, and "CP" is displayed on the stop display device as shown in (A4). On the other hand, when the bonus is being executed, the game is in a reservation reservation state, and "LL" is displayed on the cancellation display device as shown in (A5).

In this way, the discontinuation display device is composed of a 4-digit 7-segment display, and when displaying advance notice of discontinuation, "L" is displayed in the first digit from the left, and four digits from the second digit from the left are displayed. The value corresponding to the counter value of the difference counter in the first three digits, in other words, the maximum difference based on the timing with the smallest difference after power-on is the predetermined number at which the discontinuation state is reached (in this example, , 19000) remaining until the difference number (or the counter value of the difference counter) is displayed. Further, unlike the third embodiment, in the notification mode A, the prior notification of cancellation can be displayed for each differential number of sheets, and with this configuration, the player can be informed of the cancellation state. You will be able to accurately determine the number of differences between

Note that in notification mode A, notification regarding termination is executed using a termination display device consisting of a 4-digit 7-segment display dedicated to notification regarding termination; however, the notification regarding termination is not limited to this; The display device may be controlled by the main control board M side, consisting of a 4-digit, 7-segment display, and may be configured to serve both as notification regarding termination and other displays.

In addition, on the 4-digit performance 7-segment display used as a performance during the game, which is controlled by the sub-control board S side, if the 4-digit numbers are the same, such as "7777", the player will receive a profit. It may be configured such that an effect indicating that a is given is executed, and the above-mentioned notification regarding discontinuation is executed in the notification mode A on the 4-digit 7-segment display for effect.

Note that in any of the four-digit 7-segment displays described above, there is no problem even if the number of digits is changed. For example, if a 3-digit 7-segment display is used to notify the discontinuation, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on is 18,500 (the counter value of the difference counter). is 500), it is configured to display "500", that is, to display three digits other than "L", which was displayed in the first digit from the left in the case of a 4-digit 7-segment display. By doing this, the remaining number of differences is displayed one by one until the maximum number of differences reaches a predetermined number (19,000 in this example) at which the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after the power is turned on is discontinued. be able to.

<Notification mode B>
Next, notification mode B shown in the lower part of FIG. 92 will be described in detail. In the notification mode B, there is a stoppage display device made up of five consecutive LEDs that can be lit, and the notification regarding the stoppage is executed by the stoppage display device instead of the payout number display device D270 of the third embodiment. It is configured like this.

In the discontinuation display device, when the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest difference after power-on reaches 18,500, advance notice of discontinuation is displayed. The prior notification of discontinuation is (B1) to (B5), and specifically, they are lit as follows.
(B1) If the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on is 18,500 or more and less than 18,600, only the first digit from the left of the abort display device lights up.
(B2) If the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on is 18,600 or more and less than 18,700, the first and second digits from the left of the abort display will light up. do.
(B3) If the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on is 18,700 or more and less than 18,800, the first to third digits from the left of the abort display device will light up. do.
(B4) If the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on is 18,800 or more and less than 18,900, the first to fourth digits from the left of the abort display device will light up. do.
(B5) If the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on is 18,900 or more and less than 19,000, all of the first to fifth digits from the left of the abort display device Light.

In addition, if the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences since power-on reaches 19,000 and the bonus is not being executed, the state will be canceled, and a cancellation notification will be executed on the cancellation display device. Ru. The termination notification is (B6), and the first to fifth digits from the left of the termination display device all flash.

In addition, if the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences since power-on reaches 19,000 and the bonus is being executed, the reservation status will be canceled and the reservation status will not be notified on the cancellation display device. executed. The reservation status notification is (B7), and the first and fifth digits from the left of the cancellation display device blink.

In this way, the discontinuation display device is composed of five consecutive LEDs that can be lit, and when notification regarding discontinuation is to be executed, the notification is made by the lighting mode of the five LEDs. In addition, in notification mode B, the number of remaining differences until the maximum number of differences reaches a predetermined number (in this example, 19,000) at which the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after the power is turned on is discontinued. The system is configured so that 100 notifications can be made depending on the lighting mode of the five LEDs.

Note that the number of LEDs and the lighting mode of the stoppage display device related to notification mode B are just examples, and there is no problem with changing them, and the lighting and blinking in notification mode B is just an example, so that the player can visually recognize them. It is sufficient if it is possible to distinguish between different lighting modes.

<<Applicable configurations regarding stopping>>
Next, a configuration related to stopping that can be applied to the gaming machine according to the present specification will be described in detail below. The following configuration is applicable to all the embodiments described above. Furthermore, only one of the following configurations may be applied, or a plurality of configurations may be applied in combination.

<Configuration related to payout number display>
When 10 coins are paid out, the number displayed on the payout number display device D270 is counted up by 1 and displayed as "hidden → 1 → 2 → ... → 8 → 9 → 10", and then When “L1” is displayed on the payout number display device D270 at the timing when game medals can be inserted, the update time of the payout number display is the time required for the numerical value to switch from “1” to “2” etc. If the time when "10", which is the last payout number display, is displayed is the maintenance time of the payout number display, then "update time of the payout number display < maintenance time of the payout number display". It may be configured so that

In this way, by making the payout number display displayed at the end of the payout number display longer, it is possible for the player to complete the payout number by the time the payout number display device D270 displays the notification regarding discontinuation. can be recognized with certainty.

Further, when the display of the payout number display device D270 switches from displaying the number of payouts to notification regarding discontinuation, the payout number display device D270 is configured to have a period of non-display (for example, it is not displayed for 100 ms). Good too. As a specific example, it may be configured to include non-display in the notification mode of notification regarding discontinuation, such as "hidden for 100 ms → display L1", or to execute a predetermined freeze at the start of notification regarding discontinuation.

With this configuration, it is possible to easily understand that the display on the payout number display device D270 has been switched to the notification regarding discontinuation.

Furthermore, when the payout number display is displayed on the payout number display device D270, a display corresponding to the payout number display that is displayed at the end of the payout number display may also be displayed on the effect display device S40. With this configuration, even when the display on the payout number display device D270 switches from the payout number display displayed at the end of the payout number display to the notification regarding discontinuation, a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the timing of the switch. Until this happens (or until a predetermined operation member is operated), the effect display device S40 may be configured to display a display corresponding to the payout number display displayed at the end of the payout number display.

<Configuration related to bed lamp>
The game starts, then all reels stop, the 3-bet lamp D213 (also 1-bet lamp D211 or 2-bet lamp D212) is lit, and the timing is determined when the number of differences after power-on is the smallest. When the maximum difference number as a reference reaches a predetermined number (in this example, 19,000), a discontinuation notification ("CP") is displayed on the payout number display device D270, the 3 bet lamp D213 is displayed at a predetermined timing thereafter. The light goes out, but the discontinuation notification may be configured to remain displayed (the discontinuation notification may be configured so that it does not disappear over time).

With this configuration, the 3-bet lamp D213 will turn off over time even in the stopped state, and the player can continue the game by visually confirming that the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off. Not only can it be recognized that the payout number display device D270 is not played, but it can also be recognized that the payout number display device D270 is in a stopped state.

<Configuration related to door opening error>
If the front door DU is opened in a predetermined gaming state in which the game can proceed, a door opening error will occur (a door opening error will occur), and the display on the payout number display device D270 will be an error notification corresponding to the door opening error ( For example, it may be configured to switch to "DO"), and in this case, any of the following configurations may be applied.
(1) If the front door DU is opened in a situation where the discontinuation notification (“CP”) is displayed on the payout number display device D270, a door open error occurs (a door open error occurs), and the payout number display device The display at D270 switches to an error notification (for example, "DO") corresponding to the door opening error.
(2) Even if the front door DU is opened in a situation where the discontinuation notification (“CP”) is displayed on the payout number display device D270, the discontinuation notification (“CP”) will be displayed on the payout number display device D270. It remains displayed, and the error notification (for example, "DO") corresponding to the door opening error is not displayed.

In addition, when the above configuration (2) is applied, when the front door DU is opened in a situation where the discontinuation notification ("CP") is displayed on the payout number display device D270, the front door is emitted from the speaker S20. It may be configured to output a sound indicating that the DU has been opened, or to light the lamp unit in a lighting mode corresponding to the opening of the front door DU.

By configuring as described in (1) above, error notification can be appropriately executed even in a discontinued state.

By configuring as described in (2) above, it is possible to give priority to notification of a discontinued state in which the game on that day ends over various error notifications.

<Configuration related to setting confirmation mode>
One or more of the following configurations may be applied as the configuration when transitioning to the setting confirmation mode in the aborted state.
(1) When the front door DU is opened and the setting key switch is turned on from OFF while the discontinuation notification ("CP") is displayed on the payout number display device D270, the mode shifts to setting confirmation mode and the number of payouts is The display on the display device D270 switches to the current set value. Thereafter, when the setting key switch is turned from on to off, the setting confirmation mode ends and the display on the payout number display device D270 switches to a discontinued notification ("CP").
(2) When the front door DU is opened in a situation where the discontinuation notification (“CP”) is displayed on the payout number display device D270, the error notification corresponding to the door opening error is displayed on the payout number display device D270. (for example, "DO"). Thereafter, when the setting key switch is turned from off to on with the front door DU open, the setting confirmation mode is entered, and the display on the payout number display device D270 is switched to the current setting value. Thereafter, when the setting key switch is turned from on to off, the setting confirmation mode ends, and the display on the payout number display device D270 switches to an error notification (for example, "DO") corresponding to the door opening error. Thereafter, when the front door DU is closed, the display on the payout number display device D270 switches to a discontinuation notification ("CP").
(3) When the front door DU is opened and the setting key switch is turned on from OFF while the payout number display device D270 is not displayed, the mode shifts to setting confirmation mode, and the current setting value is displayed on the payout number display device D270. is displayed. Thereafter, a predetermined error (eg, thrown-in medal backflow error) occurs during the setting confirmation mode, but an error notification corresponding to the predetermined error is not displayed on the payout number display device D270. After that, if the setting key switch is turned from on to off without the predetermined error being canceled, the setting confirmation mode ends, and the display on the payout number display device D270 changes to an error notification (for example, "EE") corresponding to the predetermined error. ”) is displayed.
(4) When the front door DU is opened and the setting key switch is turned on from off while the discontinuation notification (“CP”) is displayed on the payout number display device D270, the mode shifts to setting confirmation mode and the number of payouts is The display on the display device D270 switches to the current set value. Thereafter, a predetermined error (eg, thrown-in medal backflow error) occurs during the setting confirmation mode, but an error notification corresponding to the predetermined error is not displayed on the payout number display device D270. After that, if the setting key switch is turned from on to off without the predetermined error being canceled, the setting confirmation mode ends, and the display on the payout number display device D270 changes to an error notification (for example, "EE") corresponding to the predetermined error. ”) is displayed. Thereafter, when the predetermined error is cleared, the display on the payout number display device D270 switches to a discontinuation notification ("CP").
(5) When the front door DU is opened in a situation where the discontinuation notification (“CP”) is displayed on the payout number display device D270, the error notification corresponding to the door opening error is displayed on the payout number display device D270. (for example, "DO"). Thereafter, when the setting key switch is turned from off to on with the front door DU open, the setting confirmation mode is entered, and the display on the payout number display device D270 is switched to the current setting value. Thereafter, a predetermined error (eg, thrown-in medal backflow error) occurs during the setting confirmation mode, but an error notification corresponding to the predetermined error is not displayed on the payout number display device D270. After that, if the setting key switch is turned from on to off without the predetermined error being canceled, the setting confirmation mode ends, and the display on the payout number display device D270 changes to an error notification (for example, "EE") corresponding to the predetermined error. ”) is displayed. Thereafter, when the predetermined error is canceled, the display on the payout number display device D270 switches to an error notification (for example, "DO") corresponding to the door opening error. Thereafter, when the front door DU is closed, the display on the payout number display device D270 switches to a discontinuation notification ("CP").
(6) When the front door DU is opened and the setting key switch is turned on from off in a situation where the discontinuation notification (“CP”) is displayed on the payout number display device D270, the discontinuation notification is displayed on the payout number display device D270. (“CP”) remains displayed (you may or may not shift to the setting confirmation mode).

In addition, the display of the set value in the setting confirmation mode does not need to be displayed on the payout number display device D270. It may be configured to include a display device for displaying set values. When configured in this way, during the setting confirmation mode, the set value is displayed on the display device for displaying the set value, so the payout number display device D270 (or other display device on which notification regarding discontinuation is displayed) The display device) can be configured to display a notification regarding the suspension. Similarly, even if a specified error occurs during the setting confirmation mode (when the cause of the specified error occurs), the setting value will not be displayed on the display device for displaying the setting value during the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the payout number display device D270 can be configured to display an error notification corresponding to the predetermined error.

In addition, when the setting key switch is turned from off to on (you may add the condition that the front door DU is open) while the discontinuation advance notice is displayed on the payout number display device D270, the setting will be confirmed. mode, and the setting key switch is turned from off to on (it may be added as a condition that the front door DU is open) while the reservation status notification is displayed on the payout number display device D270. Even if the setting key switch is turned from off to on in a situation where the setting confirmation mode is entered and a discontinuation notification is displayed on the payout number display device D270, the setting confirmation mode may not be entered.

<Configuration related to test signals>
Here, when performing a type test, if the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on reaches the predetermined number of 19,000, and the state is discontinued or reserved for discontinuation. After turning off the power, it becomes necessary to turn on the power accompanied by setting changes, and information related to the game will be cleared. Therefore, before the maximum number of differences reaches a predetermined number (in this example, 19000) based on the timing with the smallest number of differences since power-on, the timing with the smallest number of differences since power-on is set as the reference timing. It may be configured to start outputting a test signal related to the discontinuation state based on the maximum difference number reaching a specific number (in this example, 18,500). recognizes that the gaming machine is about to be discontinued, shuts off the power to the gaming machine, and restores the power without changing the settings.The counter value of the difference counter is cleared, while the information regarding the gaming is maintained. The type test can be continued.

Furthermore, in the case where the output of the test signal is configured as described above, when the gaming machine is operated at the gaming parlor, the test signal is not output outside the gaming machine, but the test signal is output. The processing is configured to be executed. In other words, even when the gaming machine operates at a gaming parlor, the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after power-on has reached a specific number (18,500 in this example). It is possible to perform a process for outputting a test signal related to a discontinued state, which is started when the test signal is stopped.

<Signal output to the outside of the gaming machine>
In a drum-type game machine using game medals like the third embodiment, an external signal (sometimes referred to as an external output signal) is the maximum signal based on the timing with the smallest difference after the power is turned on. The system is configured to start outputting an external signal related to the discontinuation state based on the difference number reaching a predetermined number (19000 in this example), and end the output when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed. Good too.

In addition, in a reel-type game machine that does not use game medals (a medal-less reel-type game machine), the signal sent to the loaner machine (sometimes referred to as a loaner unit) is based on the maximum number of differences since the power is turned on. Based on the fact that the maximum difference number based on the small timing reaches a predetermined number (19000 in this example), a signal related to the discontinued state is started to be output, and when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, It may be configured so that the output ends.

<Difference counter update timing>
The execution timing of the stop monitoring process in step 3700, which is the process of updating the difference counter, is from the time when all the reels in the game stop to the time when new game medals can be inserted (or when a new bet can be placed). It is preferable to execute each game during the period up to ). Furthermore, even if advance notification of discontinuation is performed only on the sub control board S side (for example, the effect display device S40), the update process of the difference counter is executed on the main control board M side, and the counter value of the difference counter is The configuration may be such that commands related to the above are output from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.

<Configuration related to initializing the counter value of the difference counter>
In the third embodiment, when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off and then the power is restored (power-on without setting change, power-on with setting change, power-on when a RAM error occurs), the difference The counter is configured so that the counter value is initialized, but if the specified conditions are met before the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the power will be turned on without changing the settings, and the setting will be changed. The counter value of the difference counter may be configured not to be initialized even if either the power is turned on or the power is turned on when a RAM abnormality occurs. An example of a predetermined condition is that if the operation is performed before the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the power supply to the gaming machine will be cut off, and even after the power is restored, the counter value of the difference counter will be reset to the initial value. It may also be configured to have an operating member that is not Note that the present invention may be applied only to power-on without setting changes, power-on with setting changes, power-on when a RAM abnormality occurs, or may be applied to multiple cases.

Furthermore, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off in the discontinued state and/or the discontinued reservation state, and then the power is turned on without changing the settings, the counter value of the difference counter is configured not to be initialized. You can.

<Configuration related to the counter value of the difference counter>
It is preferable that the RAM area for storing the counter value of the difference counter is 2 bytes or more. Further, it is preferable to configure the system so that the counter value of the difference counter is not used to perform AT-related processing (sometimes referred to as instruction function-related processing).

<Display period of advance notice of discontinuation>
In the third embodiment, the display period of the discontinuation advance notification on the payout number display device D270 is the period from when game medals can be inserted until the start lever D50 is operated, but it is not limited to this. For example, the payout number display device D270 may be configured to display advance notice of discontinuation even while the reels are rotating.

<Configuration related to audio output>
When a pre-discontinuation notice in a predetermined display format is newly displayed on the payout number display device D270, a sound corresponding to the discontinuation advance notice is not output from the speaker S20, but a new discontinuation notice is displayed on the payout number display device D270. , the speaker S20 may be configured to output a sound corresponding to the discontinuation notification. Further, when a reservation status notification is newly displayed on the payout number display device D270, the speaker S20 may be configured to output a sound corresponding to the reservation status notification. Further, even when a pre-discontinuation notice in a predetermined display mode is newly displayed on the payout number display device D270, the speaker S20 may be configured to output a sound corresponding to the discontinuation advance notice.

<Deleting and redisplaying advance notice of discontinuation>
In the third embodiment, the discontinuation advance notification of the payout number display device D270 is given when the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number after the power is turned on is a specific number (18500 in this example) or more. Although the configuration has been configured so that a new display is displayed when a change occurs, any of the following may be applied as a subsequent action.
(1) If the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after the power is turned on is less than a specific number (18,500 in this example), the discontinuation advance notification on the payout number display device D270 is disabled. will be displayed.
(2) Even if the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences after the power is turned on is less than a specific number (18,500 in this example), the discontinuation advance notification on the payout number display device D270 will not be displayed. Then, if the maximum difference number based on the timing with the smallest difference number after the power is turned on becomes less than a first number (for example, 17000) that is smaller than the specific number, the payout number display device The advance notification of discontinuation of D270 is hidden.

In addition, in both (1) and (2) above, after the discontinuation advance notification on the payout number display device D270 is hidden, the maximum It may be configured to be displayed again when the number of differences between the numbers is a specific number (in this example, 18,500) or more.

In addition, when the configuration of the third embodiment is applied to a medalless drum-type gaming machine, the timing at which game medals can be inserted as described above may be used as the timing at which bets can be placed, or the timing at which bets can be placed may be determined. The timing may be the timing when lending becomes possible, or the timing when the operation of the lending button becomes valid.

Note that the stopping state described in detail in the second embodiment and the third embodiment is different from the conventional stopping function. Specifically, in the previous version, the game center manager could set whether or not the stoppage function would be activated (for example, if the power was turned on while operating a predetermined operating member, the stoppage function would be turned on, If the power is turned on without the termination function being turned on, the termination function will be turned off), and if the termination function is on, the termination will be terminated if the predetermined conditions are met, while if the termination function is off, and the predetermined conditions are met, the termination will be terminated. In contrast, the discontinued state in this specification satisfies a predetermined condition (in this example, the bonus is not executed, and the number of differences after the power is turned on is the smallest). When the maximum difference based on the timing reaches 19,000, etc.), the game will always enter the stopped state, and players and game hall managers should change whether or not it is possible to move to the stopped state. The configuration is such that it is not possible to set whether or not each gaming machine can shift to a discontinued state.

With this configuration, the administrator of the gaming hall can prevent the gaming machine from operating in a high gambling state by setting it so that it does not shift to the discontinued state, thereby ensuring a fair gaming machine. It can be done. In addition, it is possible to prevent players from becoming confused because their games may or may not be canceled depending on the game parlor, even though they are playing the same model. Note that this configuration of the stopped state that is different from the conventional one can be applied to all the stopped states in this specification.

<<<Configuration regarding the maximum expected value of profits given to players at a single opportunity>>>
Next, a configuration applicable to the reel-type gaming machine of the present specification, which is related to suppressing the maximum expected value of profit given to a player at a single opportunity, will be described in detail below. Here, the first opportunity is the determination of the number of AT games at the time of the first AT win (at the time of winning the AT lottery) or winning the lottery for adding up the number of AT games, and the first opportunity is given to the player. The maximum expected value of profit is the maximum expected value of the profit that will be given to the player based on the occurrence of an opportunity that is advantageous to the player. It is a value. The details will be described later, but as an example, if the number of AT games at the time of the first AT win (at the time of winning the AT lottery) is determined, then from the first AT win to the AT first win. The maximum expected value of the game medals awarded to the player until the number of AT games determined in the AT state is executed is the maximum expected value of the gaming medals awarded to the player at a single opportunity. If it is an expected value and the trigger is winning a lottery to add the number of AT games, then after winning the lottery to add the number of AT games, the lottery to add the number of AT games (or the lottery to add the number of AT games) The maximum expected value of the game medals awarded to the player will be 1 by the time the game is executed in the AT state for the number of additional games determined by the multiple AT game number addition lottery related to This is the maximum expected value of the profit given to the player at the opportunity. Note that these are just examples, and there is no problem in applying a configuration related to the maximum expected value of profit given to a player at a single opportunity, as will be described later.

By preventing the maximum expected value of profits given to players at a single opportunity from becoming too large, it is possible to suppress the gambling nature and prevent the gaming hall from suffering unintended disadvantages. can do. Furthermore, the maximum expected value of the profit that will be given to the player based on one opportunity is the maximum expected value of the profit that will be given to the player based on one opportunity, and the maximum expected value of the profit that will be given to the player based on one opportunity This is sometimes referred to as the maximum value of the expected increase in gaming value.

In addition, in the explanation regarding suppressing the maximum expected value of profit given to the player at a single opportunity, the same symbols and words are used for the same parts as in the above embodiment, so that the explanation is omitted or It shall be simplified. Note that all configurations detailed below can be applied to other embodiments, and all configurations of other embodiments can be applied to all configurations detailed below.

Further, the configuration described in detail below may be applied to a drum-type gaming machine using game medals, or a drum-type gaming machine without medals.

In addition, the configuration detailed below is based on the configuration of the first embodiment, and the differences detailed below are different from the first embodiment. Any specification may be applicable to the configuration related to suppressing the maximum expected value of profits granted to players, and as an example, it may be applied to a reel-type gaming machine having the following characteristic configurations. It may be configured to do so.

<Characteristic configuration>
(1) In the normal section, there is a high probability (for example, 1/1.1) of winning the lottery to move to the advantageous section.
(2) In the internal lottery when the bonus is not internal, the condition device related to the bonus is determined with high probability (for example, 65532/65536).
(3) Games can only be played by betting 3 coins.
(4) Inside the bonus, symbol combinations corresponding to the bonus are not displayed in a stopped state, regardless of the gaming method (stop order and stop timing).
(5) When the game is played in a predetermined stop order, the expected value of the number of coins paid out by the small winning combination is higher than when the game is played in a specific stop order.
(6) All the drawings related to AT are more disadvantageous to the player when the game is played in a predetermined stop order than when the game is played in a specific stop order.

In addition, in (6) above, all lottery related to AT includes, for example, AT lottery, AT game number addition lottery, AT-related state transition lottery, etc., and as mentioned above, when games are played in a predetermined stop order. It may be configured so that all of the AT-related drawings are disadvantageous to the player, or some of the AT-related drawings may be configured to be disadvantageous to the player, than when the player plays the game in a specific stopping order. good. Moreover, the term "become disadvantageous" may include not executing a lottery related to AT.

Note that only some or all of the characteristic configurations described above may be applied.

In addition, in the following, multiple configurations will be detailed as configurations related to suppressing the maximum expected value of profits given to players at a single opportunity, but only one of the multiple configurations will be applied. or a combination of some or all of the multiple configurations may be applied.

In the configuration described in detail below, only the differences from the first embodiment will be described in detail.

First, FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the game progress control process related to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. The difference from the first embodiment is the processing in step 1400 and step 3500. In step 1700, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes the RT state transition control processing, and then in step 1400, the CPU 100 of the main control board M The CPU 100 executes AT state transition control processing. Next, in step 1750, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes AT state start control processing. Next, in step 3500, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a game section transition control process, and proceeds to step 1293.

Next, FIG. 94 is a flowchart of AT state transition control processing related to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 93. First, in step 1401-1, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current gaming section is an advantageous section. If Yes in step 1401-1, in step 1401-2, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state regarding the AT is such that the AT lottery can be executed.

In the case of Yes in step 1401-2, in step 1401-3, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the condition device related to the game is an AT lottery combination. If Yes in step 1401-3, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop order of the game is a stop order in which AT lottery can be executed in step 1401-4. Determine.

Here, in this example, when the game is executed in the stop order of the first left stop (left center right or left and right center), the small role The expected value of the number of coins to be paid out is low, and the probability of winning the AT lottery is high (in this example, if the game is executed in another stop order, the AT lottery will not be executed). Note that the predetermined stop order described above corresponds to other stop orders, and the above-described specific stop order corresponds to the stop order of the first left stop.

If Yes in step 1401-4, in step 1401-5, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes an AT lottery in which the lottery has a predetermined probability of winning. Next, in step 1401-6, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT lottery executed in step 1401-5 has been won. If Yes in step 1401-6, in step 1401-7, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the AT-related state of the next and subsequent games to be an AT precursor state, and moves to the next process (the process of step 1750). do.

Further, if No in step 1401-1, step 1401-2, step 1401-3, step 1401-4, or step 1401-6, in step 1401-8, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M The state regarding the AT of the next game is determined based on the condition device related to the game, etc., and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1750).

In addition, the conditions for determining the state related to AT of the next game in step 1401-1 can be applied to various configurations other than the current game state and the condition device related to the game. It may be configured such that the manner of determination differs depending on whether the number of games that can be played in the section is greater than or equal to a predetermined number.

Note that the configuration in the figure is just an example, and there is no problem in changing the execution conditions of the AT lottery in step 1401-5. As an example, the AT lottery may be configured to be executed in a game in which a condition device related to a predetermined push order bell is determined, or the AT lottery may be configured to be executed regardless of the condition device. Further, it may be configured to have a state related to AT (for example, CZ (chance zone)) in which it is easy to win the AT lottery.

Furthermore, the AT lottery may be executed based on the order in which the reels stop after all reels in one game have stopped, or all reels in one game have stopped. The AT lottery may be executed at a previous timing, and after all reels have stopped, it may be determined whether or not the AT lottery is valid based on the order in which the reels stopped.

Next, FIG. 95 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process related to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. First, in step 3501-1, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the game section related to the game (sometimes referred to as a game) is a normal section. In the case of Yes in step 3501-1, in step 3501-2, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the game section from the next game onward (for example, selects an advantageous section transition lottery based on the condition device determined in the game). If this is executed and the lottery for moving to an advantageous section is won, the game section of the next game is determined to be an advantageous section), and the process moves to step 3501-10.

Note that the normal section may be referred to as a first section, and the advantageous section may be referred to as a second section.

Further, if No in step 3501-1, in step 3501-3, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the counter value of the advantageous section remaining games counter satisfies the termination condition (in this example, the counter value becomes 0). (by which the termination condition is satisfied) is determined. In this example, the initial value of the counter for the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is 4000. In other words, the advantageous section is configured to forcibly end when it continues for 4000 games.

In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned medalless reel-type gaming machine, it may be configured so that it does not have a counter for the number of games remaining in the advantageous section. The advantageous section may not be forcibly terminated depending on the number of games played.

If Yes in step 3501-3, in step 3501-4, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the advantageous interval difference counter does not satisfy the termination condition. Here, in this example, the difference number (the number of game medals acquired by the player, sometimes referred to as the difference number) from the start of the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (2400 in this example). As a result, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated. In the second embodiment, the MY counter is used, that is, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated when the maximum difference in one advantageous section reaches 2400. In the example, the advantageous section is configured to forcibly end when the difference from the start of the advantageous section reaches 2400, so for example, after moving to the advantageous section, the number of medals you have decreases. Even in this case, the advantageous section can be configured not to be forcibly terminated until game medals equivalent to "the reduced amount + 2400 coins" are obtained thereafter.

As an example, the advantageous section difference counter is a decrement counter, and is configured such that the advantageous section is forcibly terminated when the calculation result of the counter value of the advantageous section difference counter becomes less than 0. Also, when the number of differences from the start of the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (2400 in this example), it is referred to as the number of differences in the second section reaching a predetermined number after moving to the second section. Sometimes.

In the case of Yes in step 3501-4, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether any advantageous section end condition (for example, the end condition of the AT state) is not satisfied. If Yes in step 3501-6, in step 3501-7, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the game period after the next game to be an advantageous period, and proceeds to step 3501-10.

Further, if No in step 3501-3, step 3501-4, or step 3501-6, the CPU 100 of the main control board M clears all information related to the AT in step 3501-8. Next, in step 3501-9, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the game period after the next game to be the normal period, and proceeds to step 3501-10.

Next, in step 3501-10, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether it has been decided to move to a new advantageous section in the next game. If Yes in step 3501-10, in step 3501-11, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets the advantageous section remaining games counter and the advantageous section difference counter to initial values (in this example, the advantageous section remaining games counter). The initial value is 4000, and the initial value of the advantageous section difference counter is 2400), and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1293). Also, in the case of No in step 3501-10, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1293).

<<Image diagram 1 regarding AT status>>
Next, FIG. 96 is an image diagram 1 regarding an AT state applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the present specification. The configuration in the figure may be applied to the reel-type gaming machine having the configurations shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, or may be applied to the reel-type gaming machine having other configurations (with other specifications). Note that a state in which push order navigation can be performed, such as an AT state, may be collectively referred to as an AT state.

<Contents of AT status 1>
First, as described in "Contents 1 of the AT state" in the figure, the configuration in the figure has the AT state 1 and the AT state 2 as the AT state. In state 1, the net increase is +3 coins and the stay period is 50G, and in AT state 2, the net increase is -1 coin and the stay period is 10G. Note that a section where the net increase is a negative value, such as state 2 during AT, may be referred to as a decreasing section. In the decreasing section, the configuration may be such that push-order navigation can be executed, or the press-order navigation may not be executed.

Here, the net increase is an expected value regarding an increase or decrease in game medals when a game is executed once in a state related to one AT. As an example, as described in "Example of Net Increase Calculation", a case will be described in detail in which the following three types of conditional devices are configured to be determined as internal lottery results. It should be noted that the case where all games are executed by betting 3 coins is illustrated. .
Internal lottery result: Push order bell (high), Number of coins paid out: 10, Lottery probability (probability of winning): 4/8
Internal lottery result: Replay, Number of coins paid out: 3, Lottery probability (probability of winning): 1/8
Internal lottery result: Loss, Number of coins paid: 0, Lottery probability (probability of winning): 3/8

In addition, the push order bell (high) means that if you win the push order bell during AT, the push order navigation will be executed, so the symbol combination with the highest number of payouts will be stopped and displayed. ing.

If configured as above, "Number of coins paid out for push order bell x probability of winning for push order bell + number of payouts for replay (3 automatic bets) x probability of winning for replay + number of payouts for loser x winning probability for loser" "Probability - number of bets" is a net increase, that is, "10 x 4/8 + 3 x 1/8 + 0 x 3/8 - 3 = 2.375 (coins)". Note that the net increase may be calculated by setting the number of coins to be paid out in the re-game as 0 coins, and in a game where the re-gaming is determined as a lottery result, the number of bets and the number of coins to be paid out are both 0 coins.

Note that the net increase is sometimes referred to as the expected increase in game medals per game.

In addition, in the configuration shown in the figure, the AT state is managed by the number of sets, and the number of sets is determined at the first AT win (when winning the AT lottery, when the AT state starts, etc.). It is configured. In addition, after 10 games of AT state 2 are executed, 50 games of AT state 1 are executed, making a total of 60 games, and the set is repeated for the number of sets determined at the time of the first AT hit. It is configured so that

More specifically, at (1) in the figure, the AT state starts, and the AT state 2 starts as the first set of AT states. Thereafter, at (2) in the figure, the first set of AT state 2 is completed after 10 games have been executed, and the AT state 1 is entered. Thereafter, at (3) in the figure, when the first set of AT state 1 has been executed for 50 games, the first set of AT state ends, and the state shifts to AT state 2 of the second set. Note that if the number of sets determined at the time of the initial AT hit is one, the AT state ends at (3) in the figure.

Thereafter, at (4) in the figure, the second set of AT state 2 is completed after 10 games have been executed, and the AT state 1 is entered. Thereafter, at (5) in the figure, the second set of AT state 1 has been executed for 50 games, and the second set of AT state 1 ends, and the state shifts to the third set of AT state 2. After that, the AT state continued, and the 25th set of AT state 1 was played 50 games, so at (6) in the figure, the 25th set of AT state ended and the first AT hit occurred. Since the number of sets determined at the time was 25, the AT state ends. Note that 25 sets is the maximum number of sets determined at the time of the first AT hit.

<Contents of AT status 2>
Next, as described in "Contents of AT state 2" in the figure, the configuration in the figure is designed as follows.
Expected increase in game medals per set: 140 pieces Maximum number of sets at initial AT hit: 25 sets Expected increase in game medals in state 1 during AT with the maximum number of sets: 3750 pieces In state 2 during AT with the maximum number of sets Expected increase in game medals: -250 Expected increase in game medals at maximum set number: 3500

As described above, in the configuration shown in the figure, in one set of AT states, AT state 2 has a negative net increase (-1), and AT state 1 has a positive net increase (+3). And it's set up for your stay.

In addition, the maximum number of sets at the time of the first AT win is 25 sets, and if the number of sets determined at the time of the first AT win is the maximum of 25 sets, the expected increase in game medals is 3500 pieces. , the number is below the specified number of 3,600 sheets.

Furthermore, if we apply the maximum expected value of profit given to the player by the above-mentioned one opportunity to the structure shown in the same figure, the "one opportunity" is the maximum number of sets determined at the time of the first AT win, which is 25. This corresponds to the case of a set. That is, in the configuration shown in the figure, the maximum expected value of profit given to the player at one opportunity is 3,500 coins, which is less than or equal to a specific number (3,600 in this example).

<Configuration regarding specific number>
Here, as mentioned above, the configuration of this example can suppress the gambling nature by preventing the maximum expected value of the profit given to the player at a single opportunity from becoming too large. At the same time, the purpose is to prevent gaming facilities from suffering unintended disadvantages, and this purpose can be achieved by setting the maximum expected value of profits given to players at a single opportunity to a specified number or less. It is composed of

In this example, the specific number is 3600, which is 1.5 times the initial value of 2400 of the advantageous section difference counter. With this configuration, even if the number of medals you have decreases after moving to an advantageous section, the number of medals will decrease to 1200 medals, which is half of the initial value of 2400, which is the initial value of the advantageous section difference counter. This makes it possible to compensate players for their losses, and while suppressing the gambling nature, it is possible to prevent players from being at an excessive disadvantage.

Further, the specific number is smaller than 4000, which is the initial value of the counter for the number of games remaining in the advantageous section. With this configuration, even if the advantageous section continues for 4000 games, which is the upper limit, the number of game medals will not increase at a rate of more than one per game, making it possible to suppress the gambling nature.

Returning to the explanation of the figure, if the number of sets determined at the time of the first AT hit is the maximum of 25 sets, the expected increase in the number of game medals is 3500 pieces, which is less than the specified number (3600 pieces in this example). It has become.

On the other hand, when the number of sets determined at the time of the first AT hit is the maximum of 25 sets, the expected increase in game medals only in state 1 during AT is 3750, which is larger than the specific number (3600 in this example). By configuring it in this way, the maximum expected value of the profit given to the player at a single opportunity is suppressed from becoming excessively large, while the area where the number of game medals increases (AT In medium state 1), by configuring the system to allow more than a specific number (3,600 in this example) of game medals to be acquired, the player can experience the exhilaration of acquiring the balls.

In addition, in FIG. 96, the configuration is such that the player stays in the AT state for a period corresponding to the number of sets determined at the time of the first AT hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured such that the number of sets that can stay in the state is increased (a lottery for adding the number of sets is executed), or a lottery for adding the number of AT games is executed separately from the number of sets.

<<Image diagram regarding display of number of acquired coins>>
Next, FIG. 97 is an image diagram regarding the display of the number of acquired coins applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the present specification. The configuration in this figure is similar to that in FIG. 96.

First, in (a) in the figure, the first set of the AT state is started, and the AT state 2 is reached. On the effect display device S40, a display of "Animal Rush Preparing" corresponding to state 2 during AT and a display of the number of acquired coins of "GET0" are displayed.

Thereafter, 59 games are executed, and at (b) in the figure, the 60th game, which is the final game of the first set in the AT state, is started. The state related to AT is AT state 1. On the effect display device S40, a navigation image of the pressing order of the middle left and right is displayed, "GET 137" is displayed as the number of acquired pieces, and "Animal rush is in progress!!" corresponding to state 1 during AT is displayed. is being done.

Thereafter, the reels are stopped in the middle left and right stopping order, the symbol combination corresponding to the push order bell (high) is stopped and displayed, and 10 pieces are paid out. The number of acquired coins displayed on the performance display device S40 is increased by 7 coins, which is obtained by subtracting the bet number of 3 coins from the payout of 10 coins, and is displayed as "GET144".

In this figure, the display of the number of coins won is configured such that after all reels stop, the number of coins paid out is added and the number of bets is subtracted, but this is not limited to this. Regarding the display, it may be configured such that the addition of the number of coins to be paid out is executed after all reels have stopped, while the subtraction of the number of bets is executed after the bet is executed.

After (c) in the figure, at (d) in the figure when the next game starts, the second set of the AT state starts, and the AT state 2 is established. On the effect display device S40, a display saying "Animal rush preparation" corresponding to state 2 during AT and a display indicating the number of acquired coins "GET144" are displayed.

Thereafter, the reels are stopped and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed. The performance display device S40 displays a display of "Animal Rush Preparing" corresponding to state 2 during AT, and a display of the number of acquired coins "GET141" from which 3 for the number of bets has been subtracted.

In this way, in the figure, in the AT state, the effect display device S40 is configured to display the number of acquired pieces in both the AT state 1 and the AT state 2. The display is configured to be updated (increased or decreased) even in AT state 2 where the net increase is a negative value. With this configuration, even if the increased number of game medals in state 1 during AT exceeds a specific number (3600 in this example), the number of acquired medals will decrease in state 2 during AT. Since the number of game medals obtained is subtracted, it is possible to prevent the displayed number of acquired medals from exceeding a specific number (3600 in this example).

<<Image diagram 2 regarding AT status>>
Next, FIG. 98 is an image diagram 2 regarding an AT state applicable to the reel type gaming machine according to the present specification. The configuration in the figure may be applied to the reel-type gaming machine having the configurations shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, or may be applied to the reel-type gaming machine having other configurations (with other specifications).

<Contents of AT status 1>
First, as described in "Contents 1 of the AT state" in the figure, the configuration in the figure has the AT state 1 and the AT state 2 as the AT state. In state 1, the net increase is +3 sheets and the stay ratio is 50%, and in the AT state 2, the net increase is +1 sheet and the stay ratio is 50%. Also, if you win the 1/50 transition lottery in AT state 2, you will move to AT state 1, and if you win the 1/50 transition lottery in AT state 1, you will transition to AT state 2. It is configured.

The stay ratio is the ratio of the theoretical value of the number of games to stay in the entire AT state. For example, if you stay in the AT state for 100 games, the stay ratio is 50% each, so the theoretical Above, you will stay in state 1 during AT for 50 games and in state 2 during AT for 50 games.

As shown in the upper part of the figure, in the configuration of the figure, when transitioning to the AT state, AT state 1 starts at (1) in the figure, and then at 1/50 at (2) in the figure. Based on winning the transition lottery of 1/50, the player moves to AT state 2, and then, based on winning the 1/50 transition lottery at (3) in the figure, shifts to AT state 1, and then, Based on winning the 1/50 transition lottery at (4) in the figure, the system transitions to AT state 2. In this way, it is configured to alternately transition between the AT state 1 and the AT state 2.

<Contents of AT status 2>
The net increase in state 1 during AT is +3 coins, the net increase in state 2 during AT is +1 coin, and the stay ratio is 50% each, so the average value of the net increase in all states during AT is +2 coins. There is.

<Contents of AT status 3>
The AT game number lottery table at the time of initial winning is configured as follows.
Number of games: 50G, probability: 70%
Number of games: 100G, probability: 26%
Number of games: 500G, probability: 3%
Number of games: 1500G, probability: 1%
The average number of AT games at the first hit was 91G.

<Contents of AT status 4>
The AT game number addition lottery table is configured as follows. Note that the AT game number addition lottery is configured to be executed every game with reference to the AT game number addition lottery table.
Number of games: 0G, probability: 99%
Number of games: 10G, probability: 0.5%
Number of games: 20G, probability: 0.3%
Number of games: 30G, probability: 0.2%
The average number of games when added on is 17G.

Note that the AT game number addition lottery does not need to be performed every game, and may be configured to be performed only in games in which a predetermined condition device is won.

<Contents of AT status 5>
Next, the configuration shown in the figure is designed as follows.
Expected number of coins to be acquired when the maximum G number (1500G) is reached at the first hit (excluding add-ons): 3000 pieces Expected number of coins acquired when the maximum G number (1500G) is reached at the first hit and only stays in state 1 during AT (excluding add-ons) : 4,500 sheets Expected number of coins to be obtained when the maximum G number (1500G) is reached at the first hit and only stays in state 2 during AT (excluding additions): 1500 sheets Expected number of coins obtained when the maximum G number (1500G) is the first hit ( (Including add-ons): 3204 coins "Excluding add-ons" indicates the expected number of coins to be acquired only based on the number of games determined at the first AT win, which does not include the number of games added in the AT game number add-on lottery. , ``Including top-up'' indicates the expected number of coins to be won in the number of games that is the sum of the number of games added in the AT game number-up lottery and the number of games determined at the time of the first AT win.

Here, if we apply the maximum expected value of the profit given to the player at the first opportunity mentioned above to the configuration shown in the same figure, the first opportunity is when the number of AT games determined at the time of the first AT hit is 1500 games. This corresponds to the case where there was.

In addition, in the case of the configuration shown in the figure, as illustrated in "Contents of AT state 4", the winning probability of the AT game number addition lottery with reference to the AT game number addition lottery table, in other words, the number of additional games ( The probability of winning (sometimes referred to as the number of AT additional games) (probability of not getting 0G) is 1%, which is not a relatively high probability, so the expected value of profit based on the AT number additional lottery is taken into consideration. Even if there is no such system, it will not have a big impact on the profits of players and gaming parlors. Therefore, the maximum expected value of the profit given to the player at a single opportunity does not become too large without taking into consideration the AT game number addition lottery where the probability of acquiring the number of additional games is relatively low. Just configure it. Note that the fact that the probability of acquiring the number of additional games is not relatively high is sometimes referred to as the fact that the probability of acquiring the instruction right is not high.

In addition, as in the configuration shown in the figure, when transitioning between states related to multiple ATs with different net additions in one AT in-progress state, the average net addition taking into consideration the stay ratio is used to attract players at one opportunity. It is preferable to calculate the maximum expected value of the profit to be granted. In other words, the maximum expected value of the profit given to the player at a single opportunity in the figure is when the maximum number of AT games determined at the time of the first AT hit is 1500 games, which is played with a net increase of 2 coins. be. In other words, the maximum expected value of profit given to the player at a single opportunity in the figure is the expected number of coins earned when the maximum number of G at the first hit (1500 G) is mentioned above in "Contents 5 of the AT state". (excluding add-ons), which is 3,000 sheets.

In this way, in the configuration shown in the figure, the "expected number of coins to be acquired (excluding add-ons) when the maximum number of G at the time of initial hit (1500 G)" is 3000, and the value below the specific number (3600 in this example) is 3000. By preventing the maximum expected value of the profit given to the player at a single opportunity from becoming too large, it is possible to suppress the gambling nature, and also prevent the gaming hall from receiving unintended disadvantages. It is also possible to prevent this from occurring.

In addition, as mentioned above, in order to calculate the maximum expected value of profit given to a player at a single opportunity using the average net increase taking into account the stay ratio, There is no problem even if the "expected number of coins to be acquired (excluding additional coins) when the maximum number of G at the time of initial hit (1500G) and only stays in state 1 during AT" is larger than the specified number (3600 in this example). In the figure, it is 4500 sheets.

In addition, as mentioned above, the maximum expected value of the profit given to the player at a single opportunity in the same figure is the maximum number of G at the first hit (1500 G) mentioned above in "Contents 5 of the AT state". The expected number of coins to be acquired (excluding add-on) is 3000 coins, and the expected number of coins to be acquired (including add-on) when the maximum number of G at first hit (1500 G) is 3000 coins. There is no problem even if the number is larger than a specific number (3600 in this example). In addition, in the configuration shown in the same figure, the ``expected number of coins obtained (including additional bonuses) in the case of the maximum number of G at the first hit (1500 G)'' mentioned above in ``Contents of AT state 5'' is 3204. , is smaller than a specific number (3600 in this example). As shown in the configuration in the same figure, the maximum expected value of the profit given to the player at a single opportunity is different from the maximum number of G at the first hit (1500 G) mentioned above in ``Contents of the AT state 5''. By configuring the "expected number of coins to be acquired (including add-ons)" to be less than or equal to a specific number (in this example, 3600), it is possible to create a gaming machine with a more suppressed gambling feel.

In addition, in FIG. 98, the first opportunity in the maximum expected value of the profit given to the player at one opportunity is the case where the number of AT initial winning games is determined to be the maximum value, but this is not limited to Instead, the maximum value may be determined as the number of additional games based on one opportunity among the maximum expected values of profits given to the player at one opportunity. As a specific example, an AT game number addition lottery is executed, and the maximum value of 1000 games is determined as the number of additional games. The maximum expected value of the profit that will be given to the player when the 1,000 games are consumed with a net increase of 2 coins (the average value of the net increase in states related to AT that can be transitioned) based on the fact that It may be configured such that the number is equal to or less than a specific number (3600 in this example). In addition, once the maximum number of AT games (1,000 games) has been determined, the AT status is calculated by adding up the 1,000 games and the results of the lottery for the number of AT games after the AT games are decided. It may be configured such that the expected value when the number of consecutive games is consumed by a net increase of two coins (the average value of the net increase of states related to AT that can be transitioned) is a specific number (3600 in this example) or less.

<<Image diagram 3 regarding AT status>>
Next, FIG. 99 is an image diagram 3 regarding an AT state applicable to the reel type gaming machine according to the present specification. The configuration in the figure may be applied to the reel-type gaming machine having the configurations shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, or may be applied to the reel-type gaming machine having other configurations (with other specifications).

<Contents of AT status 1>
First, as described in "Contents 1 of the AT state" in the figure, the configuration in the figure has the AT state 1 and the AT state 2 as the AT state. State 1 is a state in which the net increase is +1 piece and is related to AT, which stays when the AT in progress state starts. Further, the AT state 2 is a state related to AT that is transferred when the net increase is +4 coins and a transition lottery is won at 1/1000 in the AT state 1.

Here, as a configuration for differentiating the net increase between the AT state 1 and the AT state 2, for example, in the AT state 2, symbol combinations with different payout numbers depending on the reel stop order, such as the push order bell, may be stopped and displayed. Push order navigation is executed in all games in which a conditional device (sometimes referred to as push order combination) has been determined, and in AT state 1, push order navigation is executed in games in which some push order combinations have been determined. On the other hand, the net increase may be made different by configuring so that the push order navigation is not executed in other games where the push order combination has been determined, or in AT state 2, when the push order navigation has been determined, the net increase may be different. The push order navigation is executed in all cases, and in the AT state 1, the push order navigation is executed when a lottery with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2) is won in a game in which the push order combination is determined. By doing so, the net increase may be made different.

As shown in the upper part of the figure, in the configuration of the figure, when transitioning to the AT state, the AT state 1 starts at (1) in the figure, and then at 1/1000 at (2) in the figure. Based on winning the transition lottery, the system shifts to the AT state 2, and thereafter the AT state 2 continues.

<Contents of AT status 2>
At the time of the first AT hit, the AT state 1 is entered and the number of AT games is 100.

<Contents of AT status 3>
The lottery for adding on the number of AT games is won at 1/300 in state 1 during AT, and at the time of winning, the number of extra games will be 1000 games. In the AT state 2, the AT game number addition lottery is not executed. In addition, in the AT state 1, it may be configured to perform a lottery for increasing the number of AT games that is won at 1/300 every game, or a lottery for increasing the number of AT games may be executed in games for which a predetermined condition device is determined. However, it may be configured such that the total winning probability of the AT game number addition lottery is 1/300. In addition, the AT game number addition lottery, the AT lottery (AT first winning lottery), and the lottery to move to AT state 2 where you win at 1/1000 in AT state 1 are each executed independently and are different. It is a lottery.

<Expected number of coins earned when AT game number addition occurs>
In the configuration of FIG. 99, the expected number of coins to be acquired when an additional number of AT games occurs in state 1 during AT can be calculated as follows.
Net increase in number of AT state 1: A net number of AT state 2: B number of AT state 2 lottery winning probability: 1/C
Maximum number of AT games added When winning the number of additional games: D game,
Expected number of coins acquired when AT game number addition occurs = A × (DD/C) + B × (D/C)
It can be calculated as follows.

In other words, the expected number of coins to be acquired when the number of AT games is added in the configuration of FIG. 99 is:
1×(1000-1000/1000)+4×(1000/1000)=1003
This is a specific number (3600 in this example) or less.

Furthermore, if we apply the maximum expected value of the profit given to the player due to the above-mentioned opportunity to the configuration shown in the figure, the first opportunity is when an additional AT game number of 1000 games occurs in state 1 during AT. The case is equivalent.

With this configuration, the maximum expected value of the profit given to the player at a single opportunity does not become too large, thereby suppressing the gambling nature and making it possible for the gaming hall to It is also possible to prevent disadvantages caused by not doing so.

In addition, in this example, a case is illustrated in which an AT game number addition lottery is executed in which the number of AT games is added as an additional lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In a situation where the number of executions remains, an additional lottery may be executed in which the push order navigation is executed in the game in which the push order combination is determined. As an example of such a configuration, the probability of occurrence of the push order navigation (probability of winning the push order combination) is 1/X, and the maximum number of executions of the push order navigation that can be determined by the additional lottery of the push order navigation is set to 1/X. In the case of Y times, X is the reciprocal of the probability of occurrence of the push order navigation (probability of winning the push order combination), and Y is the maximum number of times the push order navigation is executed, which can be determined by the additional lottery of the push order navigation. The value obtained by multiplying the above can be applied as the above D.

<Example of changes regarding advantageous section end conditions>
Next, a modification of the game section transition control process described above with reference to FIG. 95 will be described in detail below using FIG. 100. Note that the configuration related to FIG. 100 can be applied to any embodiment of this specification.

FIG. 100 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process related to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. The difference from FIG. 95 is step 3501-5 and step 3501-11.

In step 3501-4, if the counter value of the advantageous interval difference counter does not satisfy the end condition (in the case of Yes), in step 3501-5, the CPU 100 of the main control board M controls the value of the advantageous interval difference counter. It is determined whether the counter value satisfies the termination condition.

Here, the advantageous section MY counter is a counter that can measure the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest difference in one advantageous section, and when the counter value satisfies the end condition, the advantageous section is It is configured to force close. In this example, the advantageous section MY counter is a decrement counter with an initial value of 3600, and the advantageous section MY counter is configured to forcibly end when the calculation result related to the counter value of the advantageous section MY counter becomes less than 0.

If Yes in step 3501-5, the process moves to step 3501-6, and if No, the process moves to step 3501-1, where the advantageous section is forcibly ended.

Further, in step 3501-10, if the next game is to move to a new advantageous section (in the case of Yes), in step 3501-11, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets the advantageous section remaining game number counter, the advantageous section remaining game number counter, Initial values are set for the section difference counter and the advantageous section MY counter (in this example, the initial value of the advantageous section remaining games counter is 4000, the initial value of the advantageous section difference counter is 2400, and the initial value of the advantageous section MY counter is 3600. ) is set, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1293).

Thus, in the configuration of FIG. 100, the initial value of the counter value of the advantageous section MY counter is 3600, which is the same value as the specific number described above (3600 in this example). That is, as a condition for ending an advantageous section, when the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest difference in one advantageous section reaches a specific number (3600 in this example), the advantageous section is forcibly ended. It is configured like this.

With this configuration, the profit given to the player at a single opportunity was scheduled to be larger than a specific number (in this example, 3600) (the number of AT games added was significantly higher than the expected value). Even in the case where the profit given to the player reaches a certain number (in this example, 3600), the advantageous section (AT state) will be forcibly terminated. Therefore, it is possible to configure the system so that the profit given to the player at a single opportunity does not become too large, and it is possible to prevent the gambling nature from becoming high.

In the configuration of FIG. 100, the initial value of the counter value of the advantageous section MY counter is set to a specific number (3600 in this example), but it is not limited to this and may be changed. As an example, by setting the initial value of the counter value of the advantageous section MY counter to 3550, which is smaller than a specific number (in this example, 3600), the profit given to the player at one time can be increased by a specific number (in this example, 3600). 3600). Further, the initial value of the counter value of the advantageous section MY counter may be set to "specific number (in this example, 3600) - maximum number of payout coins in one game + number of bets in the game". When configured in this way, regardless of the result of the game where the advantageous section is forcibly terminated (winning small winning combination), the profit given to the player at one time will be greater than a specific number (in this example, 3600). It can be configured so that the advantageous section ends without increasing. Note that a value smaller than 3600, such as 3550, may be referred to as a specific number.

<Configuration regarding AT game additional lottery>
Next, the configuration regarding the AT game number addition lottery applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the present specification will be described in detail below using FIG. 101. Note that the configuration related to FIG. 101 can be applied to any embodiment of this specification.

FIG. 101 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution process related to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1501-1, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the game is a game in which an AT game number addition lottery is executed. If Yes in step 1501-1, in step 1501-2, the CPU 100 of the main control board M refers to the AT game number addition lottery table and executes the AT game number addition lottery. Note that the contents of the AT game number addition lottery table may be the contents detailed in this specification, or may be other contents.

Next, in step 1501-3, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the lottery for increasing the number of AT games in step 1501-2 has been won. If Yes in Step 1501-3, in Step 1501-4, the CPU 100 of the main control board M refers to the number of additional games related to the winning AT game number addition lottery, and determines whether or not the player can be Calculate the expected value of profit given to

Here, the expected value of the profit that will be given to the player at one opportunity after the addition is the expected value of the number of acquired coins related to this addition to the profit that will be given to the player at one opportunity under the current situation. This is the added value. For example, in a situation where the first opportunity is the first AT hit and the profit given to the player with the first opportunity is 3000 coins, an additional 300 games occurs and the AT is in progress. If the net increase is +3 coins, the expected value of the profit given to the player at one opportunity after the addition is "3000 + 300 x 3 = 3900". In addition, in a game related to the number of add-on games, the expected value of the profit that will be given to the player at one opportunity after the add-on is calculated, taking into consideration that the AT game number-add lottery will be won. You can.

Next, in step 1501-5, the CPU 100 of the main control board M calculates that the expected value calculated in step 1501-4 (the expected value of the profit given to the player at one opportunity after the addition) is the regulation value. (in this example, 3400) or not is determined. If Yes in step 1501-5, in step 1501-6, the CPU 100 of the main control board M adds the determined number of additional games to the AT remaining number of games, and moves to the next process (the process in step 1450). .

Further, if No in step 1501-5, in step 1501-7, the CPU 100 of the main control board M adds a predetermined value (in this example, 10) as the number of additional games to the number of AT remaining games, and performs the next process. The process moves to step 1450 (processing of step 1450).

Also, in the case of No in step 1501-1 and step 1501-3, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1450).

In this way, in this example, if you win the AT game number addition lottery, taking into account the expected number of coins to be acquired related to the number of additional games, the profit that will be given to the player at one opportunity will be the regulation value (in this example, , 3400) or more, the system is configured to add a predetermined value (10 in this example) instead of the number of additional games determined in the AT game number addition lottery.

With this configuration, if the profit given to a player at a single opportunity exceeds the regulation value, the number of additional games will be set relative to the number of games determined by the AT game number additional lottery. By setting the number of games to a relatively small number, it is possible to configure the system so that the profit given to the player at one time does not exceed a specific number (3600 in this example).

Note that the number of additional games determined in the AT game number addition lottery may be referred to as a predetermined profit, and the fact that the additional amount is determined in the AT game number addition lottery may be referred to as satisfying a predetermined condition. A case in which the profit given to a player at a single opportunity exceeds a regulation value (in this example, 3400) is sometimes referred to as a case in which a specific condition is satisfied.

Although there is no problem in changing the above-mentioned regulation value to a value other than 3400, it is preferable to set it to a value less than a specific number (3600 in this example). Further, there is no problem in changing the predetermined value in step 1501-7 to a value other than 10 games, but it is preferable that the value is smaller than the average value of the number of additional games determined by the AT game number additional lottery. Yes, the value may be less than or equal to the smallest number of additional games determined in the AT game number additional lottery.

In addition, in this example, if the profit given to the player at one opportunity exceeds the regulation value, by setting the number of additional games to a fixed value, the profit given to the player at one opportunity will be increased. Although the structure is configured so that the profit given to the player does not exceed a specific number (3,600 in this example), the structure is not limited to this, and the profit given to a player at a single opportunity does not exceed a specific number (3,600 in this example). Any configuration may be used as long as the configuration related to the AT game number addition lottery can be restricted so as to prevent this.

As an example, if the profit given to a player at one time is scheduled to exceed a certain number (3600 in this example) due to winning the AT game number addition lottery, the addition will be executed. It may be configured such that the number of AT games is not added (the number of additional games is set to 0), or the AT game number additional lottery table to be referred to (the winning probability and the number of additional games is (different) may be made different.

<<Image diagram 4 regarding AT status>>
Next, FIG. 102 is an image diagram 4 regarding an AT state applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the present specification. The configuration in the figure may be applied to the reel-type gaming machine having the configurations shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, or may be applied to the reel-type gaming machine having other configurations (with other specifications).

<Contents of AT status 1>
First, as described in "Contents 1 of the AT state" in the figure, in the configuration shown in the figure, the net increase in the AT state is +3 cards, and the stay period of one set is 100 games. . Further, the AT state in FIG. 102 is a so-called loop type AT in which a set of 100 games continues at a continuation rate of 90%. Further, the AT state in FIG. 102 is configured such that the forced termination condition is satisfied by continuing 1200 games, and the AT state is forcibly terminated. Note that the execution timing of the continuous lottery with a 90% chance of winning may be configured in any way, for example, it may be the timing when the start lever operation related to the first game of one set is received, or it may be the timing when the start lever operation related to the first game of one set is accepted, or the timing when the start lever operation related to the first game of one set is accepted. It may also be the timing when the operation of the final stop button related to the game is received.

As shown in the upper part of the figure, in the configuration of the figure, if you continue to win 90% of the continuous lottery, when the AT state is entered, the first set will start at (1) in the figure, and then , the second set starts at (2) in the figure, then the third set starts at (3) in the figure, and then the AT state continues for 1200 games at (4) in the figure. The system is configured such that the forced termination condition is satisfied and the AT status is terminated.

<Contents of AT status 2>
The expected number of coins to be acquired in the AT state when the forced termination condition is satisfied is 3 net additional coins x 1200 games = 3600 coins.

In this way, if the AT state continues in a loop, the number of sets that will continue is uncertain, so by setting a forced termination condition as shown in the configuration of FIG. It is possible to configure the system so that the profit given to the player does not become too large, and it becomes possible to suppress the gambling nature.

Note that satisfying the forced termination condition is sometimes referred to as reaching the limiter.

In addition, in the configuration of FIG. 102, the expected number of coins to be acquired in the AT state when the forced termination condition is satisfied is set to a specific number (3600 in this example), but the profit given to the player at a single opportunity is If you want to lower the possibility of exceeding a specific number (3600 in this example), you may reduce the number of games under the forced termination condition (for example, 1150 games).

Note that the configuration shown in FIG. 102 may also have the decreasing section described above with reference to FIG. 96. For example, one set may include an increasing section of AT state 1 and a decreasing section of AT state 2. If configured in this way, forced termination will be performed based on the expected value of the number of coins acquired per set, taking into account both the AT state 1, which is the increase period, and the AT state 2, which is the decrease period. The configuration may be such that the number of games (or number of sets) serving as a condition is determined.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 102, the configuration is such that "(average number of net additions in the AT state x number of continued games when the forced termination condition is satisfied) ≦ specific number (in this example, 3600)". ing.

Furthermore, the configuration in which a forced termination condition is provided, detailed in FIG. 102, can be applied to all configurations in this specification.

In addition, the average net increase in the number of games in the AT state is sometimes referred to as the expected increase in gaming value per game in the operation notification state, and the number of consecutive games when the forced termination condition is satisfied is referred to as the predetermined number of games. There is.

<<Image diagram regarding display of number of acquired coins>>
Next, FIG. 103 is an image diagram regarding an additional specialization state applicable to the reel type gaming machine according to the present specification. The configuration in the same figure may be applied to the reel-type gaming machine having the configurations shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, or may be applied to the reel-type gaming machine having other configurations (with other specifications). Applicable to all configurations with AT in progress state.

First, in (a) in the figure, the game is progressing in the AT state. The effect display device S40 displays a message "Animal rush in progress!!" corresponding to the AT state, a display of the number of acquired coins "GET 158", and a push order navigation image corresponding to the push order of middle, left, and right. ing.

After that, the state shifts to an additional specialization state (a state related to AT where the AT game number additional lottery is relatively advantageous), and at (b) in the figure, the first game in the additional specialization state starts, and the effect display device S40 A push order navigation image corresponding to the push order of middle, left, and right is displayed. In addition, the effect display device S40 displays a display of "Super Animal Rush in progress!!!" corresponding to the specialization state and a display of the number of acquired coins of "GET 200".

After that, all the reels of the first game in the top-up special state are stopped in the stopping order of middle left and right, and at (c) in the figure, the symbol combination corresponding to the push order bell (high) is stopped and displayed, and 10 reels are stopped. A payout will occur. "+500G" is displayed on the effect display device S40 as the number of additional games.

After that, the second game in the top-up special state is executed, and all the reels are stopped in the middle left and right stop order corresponding to the push order navigation, and in (d) in the figure, the second game is executed in the order of push order (high). The symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and a payout of 10 pieces occurs. "+300G" is displayed on the effect display device S40 as the number of additional games.

After that, the third game in the top-up special state is executed, and all the reels are stopped in the middle left and right stop order corresponding to the push order navigation, and in (e) in the figure, the reels are stopped in the order of stops corresponding to the push order bell (high). The symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and a payout of 10 pieces occurs. "+500G" is displayed on the effect display device S40 as the number of additional games.

After that, the third game, which is the final game in the specialization state, is completed, and at (f) in the figure, an image of a lion and an image of meat are displayed on the effect display device S40 as an additional result display in the specialization state. "GET!" is displayed.

In this way, in the configuration of FIG. 103, the number of add-on games in each game in the add-on specialization state is displayed in a display format including a number such as "+500G", while the final game in the add-on specialization state is completed. The added result display when doing so is configured to be displayed in a display format that does not include numbers.

Here, if a relatively large number of add-on games is determined for each game in the add-on specialization state, the total number of add-on games in the add-on specialization state is displayed in a display format that includes numbers as the add-on result display. If this happens, the number of additional games displayed will become too large, which may arouse the player's desire for gambling. On the other hand, by configuring as shown in FIG. 103, it is possible to prevent the player's gambling spirit from being aroused regardless of the number of add-on games determined for each game in the add-on special state.

In addition, in FIG. 103, regardless of the result of each game in the add-on specialization state, the add-on result display when the final game in the add-on specialization state is completed is configured to be displayed in a display format that does not include numbers. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, the total number of add-on games determined in each game in the add-on specialization state is multiplied by the net increase (or the average value of net increases) in the AT state and the add-on specialization state. If the value is less than a specific number (3600 in this example), the add-on result display will be displayed in a display format that includes numbers (for example, "TOTAL + 2000 G!!"), and each game in the add-on specialized state will be displayed. If the value obtained by multiplying the total number of add-on games determined by the net increase (or the average value of net increases) of the AT state and the add-on specialized state is larger than a specific number (in this example, 3600), the add-on result The display may be configured to be displayed in a display format that does not include numbers.

In addition, as a display mode that does not include numbers for displaying the added results, in FIG. 103, the image of a lion, the image of meat, and "GET!" are displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, It is configured so that one icon corresponds to 100 additional games, and if the total number of additional games determined in each game in the additional specialized state is 1000 games, 10 meat icons are displayed, The total number of additional games may be indicated to the player by displaying something like "meat icon x 10".

Note that the display of the top-up result when the final game in the special top-up state is completed is referred to as information corresponding to the total number of games that can be played in the second operation notification state given to the player in the operation notification state. In some cases, the display of the number of add-on games in each game in the add-on specialized state is sometimes referred to as information corresponding to the number of games that can be played in the operation notification state given to the player in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 103 from (a) to (b), when transitioning from the AT state to the additional specialization state, the next person who won the predetermined transition lottery in the AT state It may be configured so that the state shifts from the game to the specialization state, or after winning a predetermined transition lottery in the AT state, the game can be played a predetermined number of times (this is a so-called omen, and the specialization state can be changed in the effect display device S40. The configuration may be such that the transition to the additional specialization state is performed after performing a performance that encourages the transition to the state.

<<Image diagram regarding the AT end screen>>
Next, FIG. 104 is an image diagram regarding an AT end screen applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the present specification. The configuration in the same figure may be applied to the reel-type gaming machine having the configurations shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, or may be applied to the reel-type gaming machine having other configurations (with other specifications). Applicable to all configurations with AT in progress state.

First, in (a) in the figure, the game is progressing in the AT state. The effect display device S40 displays a message "Animal rush in progress!!" corresponding to the AT state, a display of the number of acquired coins "GET 158", and a push order navigation image corresponding to the push order of middle, left, and right. ing.

After that, the game progresses, and in (b) in the figure, the remaining three games in the AT state are executed, and the effect display device S40 displays "Animal Rush in progress!!" corresponding to the AT state. ” and the number of acquired coins “GET 3800” are displayed. In addition, the effect display device S40 displays "LAST3" corresponding to the remaining three games at the start of reel rotation as the number of remaining games. Here, the remaining number of games display is a display indicating to the player the number of remaining games in the AT state, and is configured to be displayed on the effect display device S40 at a predetermined timing after the start of reel rotation.

After that, the game progresses, and at (c) in the figure, the final game in the AT state is executed, and the effect display device S40 displays "Animal Rush in progress!!" corresponding to the AT state. and "GET 3807" to display the number of acquired coins, a push order navigation image corresponding to the push order of middle, left, and right, and a display of the number of remaining games to "last game" corresponding to the final game.

Thereafter, all the reels related to the final game in the AT state are stopped and displayed, and at (d) in the figure, the symbol combination corresponding to the push order bell (higher) is stopped and displayed, and a payout of 10 pieces occurs.

Thereafter, at (e) in the figure after a predetermined time has elapsed from (d) in the figure, the final game in the AT state ends, and the AT end screen is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, the AT end screen is a screen that displays the number of games in which the AT state continued and the final number of game medals acquired during the AT state. 1298 is displayed as the number of consecutive games, and 3814, which is larger than the specific number 3600, is displayed as the final number of acquired coins.

In this way, in the configuration of FIG. 104, the final number of acquired coins displayed on the AT end screen is configured such that a number larger than a specific number (3600 in this example) can be displayed. Here, when the configuration in FIG. 104 and the configuration described above in FIG. In this case, the additional result display should be displayed in a display format that does not include numbers, while the final number of coins obtained on the AT end screen should be configured so that a number larger than a specific number (in this example, 3600) can be displayed. Can be done.

With this configuration, the display regarding the profit that will be given to the player afterwards, such as the total number of add-on games determined for each game in the add-on specialization state, will be displayed from a specific number (3600 in this example). By configuring the system so that large numbers are not displayed, it is possible to prevent players from agitating their desire for gambling, while displaying information on profits granted to players in the past, such as displaying the final number of coins earned on the AT end screen, By configuring the system to display a number larger than a specific number (3600 in this example), it is possible to give a sense of satisfaction to the player.

Note that the final number of coins displayed on the AT end screen may be referred to as the total gaming value given to the player in the operation notification state.

<<Image diagram 1 regarding the maximum expected value of profits given to players at a single opportunity>>
Next, FIG. 105 is an image diagram 1 regarding the maximum expected value of profit given to a player at one opportunity, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the present specification. In the same figure, the configuration of the AT state that is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the present specification and takes into account the maximum expected value of the profit given to the player at a single opportunity will be described in detail.

<Contents of lottery for additional AT games>
The configuration of FIG. 105 has an additional specialization state, and in the additional specialization state, in one game, AT games additional lottery 1, AT games additional lottery 2, and AT games additional lottery are performed in one game. The system is configured to carry out three AT game number additional lottery, namely Lottery 3 and Lottery 3. As an example, a case where the special add-on state ends after one game is illustrated.

<AT game number additional lottery 1>
The AT game number addition lottery 1 is configured to be executed with reference to the AT game number addition lottery table 1, and the AT game number addition lottery table 1 is configured as follows.
Number of games: 30G, probability: 49.9%
Number of games: 50G, probability: 50%
Number of games: 500G, probability: 0.1%
The average number of games when added is 40.5G.

<AT game number additional lottery 2>
The AT game number addition lottery 2 is configured to be executed with reference to the AT game number addition lottery table 2, and the AT game number addition lottery table 2 is configured as follows.
Number of games: 0G, probability: 49.9%
Number of games: 50G, probability: 50%
Number of games: 400G, probability: 0.1%
The average number of games when added is 25.4G.

<AT game number additional lottery 3>
The AT game number addition lottery 3 is configured to be executed with reference to the AT game number addition lottery table 3, and the AT game number addition lottery table 3 is configured as follows.
Number of games: 0G, probability: 49.9%
Number of games: 50G, probability: 50%
Number of games: 280G, probability: 0.1%
The average number of games when added is 25.3G.

In this case, the first opportunity to calculate the maximum expected value of the profit that will be given to the player in one opportunity is that there will always be three AT game bonus lottery draws in one game. Since this is executed, it is preferable that the maximum number of additional games is determined in each of the AT game number additional lotteries 1 to 3.

In other words, as shown in the upper part of the figure, the maximum expected value of the profit given to the player at one opportunity is 500 games, which is the maximum value of the AT game number addition lottery 1, and the AT game number addition lottery 2. It is the value obtained by multiplying the total number of games of the maximum value of 400 games and the maximum value of AT game number addition lottery 3 of 280 games by the average value of the net increase in the AT state (and additional specialization state), and the figure Since the average value of the net increase in the AT state (and additional specialized state) is +3 sheets, "(500+400+280)G x 3 sheets = 3540".

By configuring the system so that the maximum expected value of the profit given to the player at a single opportunity, calculated as shown in the figure, does not exceed a specific number (3600 in this example), the gambling nature is improved. It can be configured so that it does not become too high.

<<Image diagram 2 regarding the maximum expected value of profits given to players at a single opportunity>>
Next, FIG. 106 is an image diagram 2 regarding the maximum expected value of profit given to a player at one opportunity, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the present specification. In the figure, a detailed description will be given of the configuration of the AT state that is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the present specification and takes into account the maximum expected value of the profit given to the player at a single opportunity.

<Contents of lottery for additional AT games>
In the configuration shown in FIG. 106, in a predetermined situation in the AT state (for example, an add-on specialized state), the AT game number addition lottery 1 (the lottery with reference to the AT game number addition lottery table 1) is drawn in one game. After the execution, the AT game number addition lottery 2 (a lottery that refers to the AT game number addition lottery table 2) is executed, and the AT game number addition lottery 2 is executed until the end of the loop is determined in the AT game number addition lottery 2. It is configured to run repeatedly. Furthermore, the average net increase in the AT state (and additional specialization state) is +3 pieces.

<AT game number additional lottery 1>
The AT game number addition lottery 1 is configured to be executed with reference to the AT game number addition lottery table 1, and the AT game number addition lottery table 1 is configured as follows.
Number of games: 30G, probability: 49.9%
Number of games: 50G, probability: 50%
Number of games: 500G, probability: 0.1%
The average number of games when added is 40.5G.

<AT game number additional lottery 2>
The AT game number addition lottery 2 is configured to be executed with reference to the AT game number addition lottery table 2, and the AT game number addition lottery table 2 is configured as follows.
Loop completed, probability: 20%
Number of games: 100G, probability: 40%
Number of games: 200G, probability: 40%
The average number of games when added is 150G, and the average number of loops is 4.

<Maximum expected value of profit given to the player at a single opportunity>
In this case, the first opportunity to calculate the maximum expected value of the profit that will be given to the player at one opportunity is the AT game number addition lottery 1 (AT game number addition lottery table 1). In this case, the maximum 500G is determined in the AT game number addition lottery 2 (the lottery that referred to the AT game number addition lottery table 2), which is the average of 4 times. The average number of additional games when the loop is executed is "4 times x 150G = 600", so the expected number of additional games is 1100 games, and the expected number of coins acquired is "3 x 1100 = 3300 coins". However, since AT game number addition lottery 2 is a loop lottery and the number of loops is indefinite (because the results tend to vary), it is preferable to install a limiter. It is.

The limiter in the figure is the upper limit of the number of times the AT game number addition lottery 2 can be executed, and in the figure, it is set to 4 times, so that the expected number of acquired coins is larger than the specific number of 3600 coins. It can be configured so that it does not occur.

In addition, the number of additional games is not limited to this, and the upper limit of the number of additional games is 1200 games obtained by dividing the specific number (3600 in this example) by the net increase of +3, and if there is a possibility that the number of additional games will exceed the upper limit. Alternatively, a limiter may be provided to terminate the loop of the AT game number addition lottery 2.

By providing a limiter as shown in the figure, the maximum expected value of the profit given to the player at one opportunity (or the profit given to the player at one opportunity) is In this example, by configuring the value not to exceed 3600), it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

<<Image diagram 3 regarding the maximum expected value of profits given to players at a single opportunity>>
Next, FIG. 107 is an image diagram 3 regarding the maximum expected value of profit given to a player at a single opportunity, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the present specification. In the same figure, the configuration of the AT state that is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the present specification and takes into account the maximum expected value of the profit given to the player at a single opportunity will be described in detail.

<Contents of lottery for additional AT games>
In the configuration shown in FIG. 107, in the game before transitioning to the AT state, CZ (a gaming state in which there is a relatively high expectation of acquiring the right to transition to the AT state, and is sometimes referred to as a chance zone) configured to migrate. There are 11 games in CZ, and in the 1st to 10th games, the first winning AT game number lottery 1 is executed, and in the 11th game, the first winning AT game number lottery 2 is executed, and if you win, , the total number of games determined in the 1st to 10th games becomes the number of AT games at the time of the first win, and in the case of non-winning, the number of AT games at the time of the first win becomes 0 (does not shift to the AT state). Furthermore, the average net increase in the AT state (and additional specialization state) is +3 pieces.

<First time AT game number lottery 1>
The first winning AT game number lottery 1 is configured to be executed with reference to the first winning AT game number lottery table 1, and the first winning AT game number lottery table 1 is configured as follows. .
Number of games: 30G, probability: 40%
Number of games: 50G, probability: 50%
Number of games: 500G, probability: 10%
The average number of games is 87G.

<First time AT game number lottery 2>
The first winning AT game number lottery 2 is configured to be executed with reference to the first winning AT game number lottery table 2, and the first winning AT game number lottery table 2 is configured as follows. .
Winning, probability: 20%
Non-winning, probability: 80%

<Maximum expected value of profit given to the player at a single opportunity>
In this case, the average value of the total number of AT games determined in the 1st to 10th games in CZ is "87G x 10 = 870G", and the 870G is the number of AT games at the time of the first win. In this case, the expected number of coins to be acquired is "3 x 870 = 2610 coins".

In other words, even if you win the AT game number addition lottery 2, the expected number of coins to be acquired will be a certain number (3600 in this example) or less, but depending on the lottery format of the AT game number lottery at the time of the first win (especially at the time of the first win) Since the number of AT games that can be determined in the AT game number lottery 1 is indefinite (because the results are likely to vary), processing is performed to prevent the expected number of acquired coins from exceeding a specific number (in this example, 3600). It is preferable to provide one. As an example, if the upper limit of the number of AT games at the time of the first win is 1200 games obtained by dividing the specific number (3600 in this example) by the net increase of +3, and the number of AT games at the time of the first win reaches the upper limit, is configured so that the result of the AT game number lottery 1 at the time of the first win is 0G, or if the number of AT games at the first win is close to the upper limit, the AT game number lottery 1 at the time of the first win is configured. The table to be referred to may be changed to a table other than AT game number lottery table 1 at the time of initial winning.

With this configuration, the maximum expected value of the profit given to the player at one opportunity (or the profit given to the player at one opportunity) is set to a specific number (in this example, 3600). It is possible to configure the system so as not to exceed the limit and to prevent the gambling nature from becoming too high.

<<Image diagram 4 regarding the maximum expected value of profits given to players at a single opportunity>>
Next, FIG. 108 is an image diagram 4 regarding the maximum expected value of profit given to a player at one opportunity, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the present specification. In the figure, a detailed description will be given of the configuration of the AT state that is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the present specification and takes into account the maximum expected value of the profit given to the player at a single opportunity.

<Contents of lottery for additional AT games>
The configuration of FIG. 108 has an additional specialization state, and the additional specialization state stays for 3 games, and in the first game, AT game number additional lottery 1 (lottery with reference to AT game number additional lottery table 1) is selected. Execute. If the maximum number of additional games, 500 games (details will be described later), is not determined in AT game number addition lottery 1, the AT game number addition lottery 1 (AT game number addition lottery table) is not determined in the next game. 1), and if the maximum number of additional games, 500 games, is determined in the AT game number addition lottery 1, from the next game onward, the AT game number addition lottery 2 (AT It is configured to execute a lottery with reference to the game number addition lottery table 2. Furthermore, the average net increase in the AT state (and additional specialization state) is +3 pieces.

<AT game number additional lottery 1>
The AT game number addition lottery 1 is configured to be executed with reference to the AT game number addition lottery table 1, and the AT game number addition lottery table 1 is configured as follows.
Number of games: 30G, probability: 49.9%
Number of games: 50G, probability: 50%
Number of games: 500G, probability: 0.1%
The average number of games when added is 40.5G.

<AT game number additional lottery 2>
The AT game number addition lottery 2 is configured to be executed with reference to the AT game number addition lottery table 2, and the AT game number addition lottery table 2 is configured as follows.
Number of games: 30G, probability: 0%
Number of games: 50G, probability: 50%
Number of games: 500G, probability: 50%
The average number of games when added is 275G.

In this case, the first opportunity to calculate the maximum expected value of the profit that will be given to the player in one opportunity is the number of additional games in AT game number addition lottery 1 for the first game. In this case, the maximum expected value of the profit given to the player at one opportunity is the maximum value of the AT game number additional lottery 1 for the first game. The sum of 500 games, 275 games which is the average value of the AT game number addition lottery 2 of the second game, and 275 games which is the average value of the AT game number addition lottery 2 of the third game, and the AT state It is the value multiplied by the average value of the net increase in the AT state (and the add-on specialization state), and since the average value of the net increase in the AT state (and the add-on specialization state) in the same figure is +3 sheets, "(500 + 275 + 275) G × 3 pieces = 3150''. In this way, in the configuration of FIG. 108, the first opportunity when calculating the maximum expected value of the profit that will be given to the player at one opportunity is the addition game in the AT game number addition lottery 1 for the first game. This is a case where the maximum number of games, 500 games, has been determined, and from the second game onward, the number of additional games is not determined (undefined), so the average value of AT game number additional lottery 2 is used. ing.

As shown in the figure, by configuring the system so that the maximum expected value of the profit given to the player at a single opportunity does not exceed a specific number (in this example, 3600), the gambling quality is enhanced. It can be configured so that it does not go too far.

<<Image diagram 5 regarding the maximum expected value of profits given to players at a single opportunity>>
Next, FIG. 109 is an image diagram 4 regarding the maximum expected value of profit given to a player at one opportunity, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the present specification. In the same figure, the configuration of the AT state that is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the present specification and takes into account the maximum expected value of the profit given to the player at a single opportunity will be described in detail.

<Contents of lottery for additional AT games>
The configuration of FIG. 109 has an additional specialization state, and the additional specialization state stays for 3 games, and in the first game, AT game number additional lottery 1 (lottery referring to AT game number additional lottery table 1) is selected. In the second game, AT game number addition lottery 2 (lottery with reference to AT game number addition lottery table 2) is executed, and in the third game, AT game number addition lottery 3 (refer to AT game number addition lottery table 3) is executed. The lottery is configured to perform In addition, the average net increase in the AT state (and additional specialized state) is +3 pieces.

<AT game number additional lottery 1>
The AT game number addition lottery 1 is configured to be executed in the first game in the add-on specialized state by referring to the AT game number addition lottery table 1, and the AT game number addition lottery table 1 is as follows. It is composed of
Number of games: 30G, probability: 30%
Number of games: 50G, probability: 50%
Number of games: 500G, probability: 20%
The average number of games when added on is 134G.

<AT game number additional lottery 2>
The AT game number addition lottery 2 is configured to be executed in the second game in the add-on specialized state by referring to the AT game number addition lottery table 2, and the AT game number addition lottery table 2 is as follows. It is composed of
Number of games: 30G, probability: 49.9%
Number of games: 50G, probability: 50%
Number of games: 700G, probability: 0.1%
The average number of games when added is 40.7G.

<AT game number additional lottery 3>
The AT game number addition lottery 3 is configured to be executed with reference to the AT game number addition lottery table 3 at the third game in the add-on specialized state, and the AT game number addition lottery table 3 is as follows. It is composed of
Number of games: 20G, probability: 10%
Number of games: 40G, probability: 20%
Number of games: 200G, probability: 70%
The average number of games when added is 150G.

<Maximum expected value of profit given to the player at a single opportunity>
In this case, the first opportunity to calculate the maximum expected value of the profit that will be given to the player in one opportunity is the number of additional games in the lottery 2 for adding the number of AT games to the second game. The maximum value of 700 games is determined, and in this case, the maximum expected value of the profit given to the player at one opportunity is the average value of the AT game number addition lottery 1 for the first game. The total value of 134 games, 700 games which is the maximum value of the AT game number addition lottery 2 in the second game, and 150 games which is the average value of the AT game number addition lottery 3 in the third game, and It is the value multiplied by the average value of net increase in the state (and specialization state), and since the average value of net increase in the AT state (and specialization state) in the same figure is +3 sheets, it is "(134 + 700 + 150) G x 3 pieces = 2952''. In this way, in the configuration of FIG. 109, the first opportunity when calculating the maximum expected value of the profit that will be given to the player at one opportunity is the additional game in AT game number addition lottery 2 for the second game. This is a case where the maximum number of games, 700 games, is determined, and in the first and third games in this case, the number of additional games is not determined (undefined), so AT game number additional lottery 1 For AT game number additional lottery 3, the average value is used.

By configuring the system so that the maximum expected value of the profit given to the player at a single opportunity, calculated as shown in the figure, does not exceed a specific number (3600 in this example), the gambling nature is improved. It can be configured so that it does not become too high.

<<Image diagram 6 regarding the maximum expected value of profits given to players at a single opportunity>>
Next, FIG. 110 is an image diagram 6 regarding the maximum expected value of profit given to a player at one opportunity, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the present specification. In the figure, a detailed description will be given of the configuration of the AT state that is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the present specification and takes into account the maximum expected value of the profit given to the player at a single opportunity.

<Contents of lottery for additional AT games>
The configuration of FIG. 110 has an additional specialization state, and the additional specialization state stays for 3 games, and in the first game, AT game number additional lottery 1 (lottery referring to AT game number additional lottery table 1) is selected. Execute. If the maximum number of additional games, 500 games (details will be described later), is not determined in AT game number addition lottery 1, the AT game number addition lottery 1 (AT game number addition lottery table) is not determined in the next game. 1), and if the maximum number of additional games, 500 games, is determined in the AT game number addition lottery 1, from the next game onward, the AT game number addition lottery 2 (AT It is configured to execute a lottery with reference to the game number addition lottery table 2.

In addition, if the maximum number of additional games of 200 games (details will be described later) is not determined in the AT game number additional lottery 2, the AT game number additional lottery 2 (AT game number additional If 200 games, which is the maximum number of additional games, is determined in the AT game number addition lottery 2, the AT game number addition lottery 3 will be executed from the next game onwards. (The lottery with reference to the AT game number addition lottery table 3) is configured to be executed. Furthermore, the average net increase in the AT state (and additional specialization state) is +3 pieces.

<AT game number additional lottery 1>
The AT game number addition lottery 1 is configured to be executed with reference to the AT game number addition lottery table 1, and the AT game number addition lottery table 1 is configured as follows.
Number of games: 30G, probability: 49.9%
Number of games: 50G, probability: 50%
Number of games: 500G, probability: 0.1%
The average number of games when added is 40.5G.

<AT game number additional lottery 2>
The AT game number addition lottery 2 is configured to be executed with reference to the AT game number addition lottery table 2, and the AT game number addition lottery table 2 is configured as follows.
Number of games: 30G, probability: 30%
Number of games: 50G, probability: 50%
Number of games: 200G, probability: 20%
The average number of games when added on is 74G.

<AT game number additional lottery 3>
The AT game number addition lottery 3 is configured to be executed with reference to the AT game number addition lottery table 3, and the AT game number addition lottery table 3 is configured as follows.
Number of games: 20G, probability: 10%
Number of games: 40G, probability: 20%
Number of games: 400G, probability: 70%
The average number of games when added is 290G.

In this case, when the maximum value of 400G is determined in the AT game number addition lottery 3, the maximum value of 500G is determined in the AT game number addition lottery 1, and the AT game number Since the maximum value of 200G has been determined in the additional lottery 2, the first opportunity when calculating the maximum expected value of the profit that will be given to the player in one opportunity is the AT game number additional lottery. This is the case where the maximum value is determined for all of 1 to 3, and in this case, the maximum expected value of the profit given to the player at one opportunity is the maximum value of the AT game number addition lottery 1 of the first game. 500 games, 200 games which is the maximum value of AT game number addition lottery 2 of the second game, and 400 games which is the maximum value of AT game number addition lottery 2 of the third game, and AT It is the value multiplied by the average value of net increase in the state (and specialization state), and since the average value of net increase in the AT state (and specialization state) in the same figure is +3 sheets, "(500 + 200 + 400) G x 3 pieces = 3300''.

As shown in the figure, by configuring the system so that the maximum expected value of the profit given to the player at a single opportunity does not exceed a specific number (in this example, 3600), the gambling quality is enhanced. It can be configured so that it does not go too far.

<Configuration related to ending state>
Further, as a configuration regarding the maximum expected value of profit given to a player at a single opportunity, it may be configured to be able to shift to an ending state. The ending state is a state related to an AT that can execute push order navigation, and can be configured such that when a predetermined number of games are played in the ending state, the ending state ends and the normal section begins.

In the ending state, the player can feel a sense of accomplishment by executing a special effect (for example, a moving image of a scene related to the ending of a story about a gaming machine) on the effect display device S40 or the like.

Note that the ending state may be configured to be a state related to AT, or may be configured to be maintained as an AT-in-progress state on the main control board M side and as a state on the sub-control board S side.

The ending state is configured so that it can transition to the ending state by satisfying a predetermined condition (for example, the number of coins acquired in the AT state reaches 3300 coins). By configuring the system so that the sum of the number of coins acquired in the AT state and the number of coins acquired in the ending state is less than or equal to a specific number (3600 in this example), the profit given to the player at a single opportunity can be increased. The maximum expected value can be configured to be less than or equal to a specific number (3600 in this example), and the gaming machine can be made such that the gambling quality does not become too high.

Also, when the difference from the start of the advantageous section reaches a first value (for example, 2100) that is less than a predetermined number A (2400 in this example), the transition to ending state A occurs, and when ending state A ends, A second value (which is a normal section and where the maximum number of differences (sometimes referred to as MY) based on the timing with the smallest number of differences in one advantageous section is less than a predetermined number B (in this example, 3600) For example, when reaching 3300), a transition is made to ending state B, and when ending state B ends, the normal section may be entered.

In this configuration, even if the ending state A and the ending state B are the same state (the same state on both the main control board M side and the sub control board S side, and the same effect is executed) Alternatively, they may be in different states (the main control board M side and/or the sub control board S side are in different states, and different effects are executed).

In the situation of ending state A, a second value (for example, 3300) in which the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences in one advantageous section is smaller than the predetermined number B (3600 in this example). The configuration may be such that the ending state B does not start anew when the end state B is reached. In addition, in a situation where the ending state B is present, if the number of differences from the start of the advantageous section reaches a first value (for example, 2100) that is smaller than the predetermined number A (2400 in this example), the ending state It may be configured so that A does not start anew. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure the system so that the profit given to the player at a single opportunity does not become too high.

In the situation of ending state A, a second value (for example, 3300) in which the maximum number of differences based on the timing with the smallest number of differences in one advantageous section is smaller than the predetermined number B (3600 in this example). If the state is reached, the ending state B may be configured to start anew. In addition, in a situation where the ending state B is present, if the number of differences from the start of the advantageous section reaches a first value (for example, 2100) that is smaller than the predetermined number A (2400 in this example), the ending state A may be configured to start anew.

<Configuration related to AT>
Note that it is possible to combine one or more configurations to prevent the maximum expected value of the profit given to the player from becoming too large due to the above-mentioned one opportunity, and it is possible to combine one or more configurations. It is possible to apply any configuration of the state regarding the AT that can execute the push-order navigation.

As an overview of the structure of the state related to AT, a structure is applied to each of the following structures to prevent the maximum expected value of the profit given to the player from becoming too large due to the above-mentioned one opportunity. is possible. Note that there is no problem even if a plurality of the following configurations are combined.
(1) It has a decreasing section as detailed in FIG. 96.
(2) Execute the AT state for the number of sets determined at the time of initial hit, as detailed in FIG. 96.
(3) Enable transitions between multiple AT states detailed in FIG. 98.
(4) Provide a limiter as detailed in FIG. 102.
(5) Execute the loop lottery detailed in FIG. 102.
(6) Execute a lottery for adding up the number of AT games.
(7) Has an additional specialization state.
(8) Execute the AT game number addition lottery a plurality of times in one game, as detailed in FIG. 105.
(9) Execute the loop lottery detailed in FIG. 105.
(10) It has CZ as detailed in FIG. 107.
(11) It is possible to refer to a plurality of AT game number addition lottery tables detailed in FIGS. 108 to 110.
(12) The AT state is managed not by the number of games but by the number of acquired coins. That is, the AT state ends when the player acquires the determined number of game medals.
(13) Instead of a lottery for adding the number of AT games, a lottery for adding the number of AT acquisition coins is executed, and the AT state continues until the determined number of acquisition coins is acquired.
(14) In the AT state, if a fall lottery is executed and the player wins the fall lottery, the AT state ends.
(15) In the special add-on state, the AT game number add-on lottery is executed with reference to only one table.

(summary)
Note that the following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configuration shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are just examples, and it goes without saying that these listed concepts can be combined or separated (higher-level conceptualization), and concepts based on the further structures shown in the above examples can be added to these concepts. It's okay.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (F1) is
Equipped with an internal lottery means,
an operation notification state in which a predetermined operation mode can be notified in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means;
a first section in which the operation notification state does not occur;
a second section that can be in the operation notification state;
a first counter that can be updated based on the result of the game in the second section;
and a second counter that can be updated based on the result of the game after the power is turned on,
It is configured so that it can enter a stopped state, which is a state in which the game cannot be played.
The second section is configured to end when the value of the first counter satisfies a first condition;
When the value of the second counter satisfies a second condition, the discontinuation state is possible;
The second counter is configured to be able to update the value of the second counter based on the result of the game in the first period, but not to update the value of the first counter based on the result of the game in the first period. Ori,
If the value of the first counter satisfies the first condition and the second period ends, a predetermined initialization process is executed;
When executing the predetermined initialization process, the value of the first counter is initialized, but the value of the second counter is not initialized,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a specific initialization process is executed when the power is turned on, the value of the second counter is initialized, but the value of the first counter is not initialized. be.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (F2) is
Equipped with an internal lottery means,
It is configured so that it can enter a stopped state, which is a state in which the game cannot be played.
If the number of differences after a predetermined timing after the power is turned on is greater than or equal to a first value, the system is configured to be in the aborted state,
If the number of differences after the predetermined timing after the power is turned on is equal to or greater than a second value that is less than the first value, a predetermined notification state can be entered;
After the number of differences after the predetermined timing after power-on becomes equal to or greater than the second value and the predetermined notification state is reached, the number of differences after the predetermined timing after power-on becomes less than the second value. If the predetermined notification state is not terminated even after the power is turned on, and the difference number after the predetermined timing after the power is turned on becomes less than a third value, which is a value less than the second value, the predetermined notification state is determined. This gaming machine is characterized in that it is possible to end the notification state.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (F3) is
Equipped with an internal lottery means,
It is configured so that it can enter a stopped state, which is a state in which the game cannot be played.
If the number of differences after a predetermined timing after the power is turned on is greater than or equal to a first value, the system is configured to be in the aborted state,
If the number of differences after the predetermined timing after the power is turned on is equal to or greater than a second value that is less than the first value, a predetermined notification state can be entered;
After the number of differences after the predetermined timing after power-on becomes equal to or greater than the second value and the predetermined notification state is reached, the number of differences after the predetermined timing after power-on becomes less than the second value. If the predetermined notification state is not terminated even after the power is turned on, and the difference number after the predetermined timing after the power is turned on becomes less than a third value, which is a value less than the second value, the predetermined notification state is determined. It is configured to be able to terminate the notification state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the difference between the second value and the third value is larger than the maximum number of game values given to the player in one game.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (F4) is
Equipped with an internal lottery means,
It is configured so that it can enter a stopped state, which is a state in which the game cannot be played.
If the number of differences after a predetermined timing after the power is turned on is greater than or equal to a first value, the system is configured to be in the aborted state,
If the number of differences after the predetermined timing after the power is turned on is equal to or greater than a second value that is less than the first value, a predetermined notification state can be entered;
After the number of differences after the predetermined timing after power-on becomes equal to or greater than the second value and the predetermined notification state is reached, the number of differences after the predetermined timing after power-on becomes less than the second value. If the predetermined notification state is not terminated even after the power is turned on, and the difference number after the predetermined timing after the power is turned on becomes less than a third value, which is a value less than the second value, the predetermined notification state is determined. It is configured to be able to terminate the notification state,
After the number of differences after the predetermined timing after power-on becomes less than the third value and the predetermined notification state ends, the number of differences after the predetermined timing after power-on becomes equal to or greater than the third value. Even if the power is turned on, the predetermined notification state is not reached, and if the number of differences after the predetermined timing after the power is turned on becomes equal to or greater than the second value, the predetermined notification state can be entered. This is a gaming machine that features:

The gaming machine according to this aspect (F5) is
Equipped with an internal lottery means,
It is configured so that it can enter a stopped state, which is a state in which the game cannot be played.
If the number of differences after a predetermined timing after the power is turned on is greater than or equal to a first value, the system is configured to be in the aborted state,
During execution of a predetermined bonus, even if the number of differences after the predetermined timing after power-on becomes equal to or greater than the first value, the aborted state does not occur, and after that, when the execution of the predetermined bonus ends, It is configured to be in the stopped state,
During execution of the predetermined bonus, after the number of differences after the predetermined timing after power-on becomes equal to or greater than the first value, the number of differences after the predetermined timing after power-on is less than the first value. This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to enter the aborted state even when execution of the predetermined bonus ends in a certain situation.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (F6) is
Equipped with an internal lottery means,
It is configured so that it can enter a stopped state, which is a state in which the game cannot be played.
The difference number after a predetermined timing after the power is turned on can be stored in a predetermined storage area,
If the number of differences after a predetermined timing after the power is turned on is greater than or equal to a first value, the system is configured to be in the aborted state,
During execution of a predetermined bonus, even if the number of differences after the predetermined timing after power-on becomes equal to or greater than the first value, the aborted state does not occur, and after that, when the execution of the predetermined bonus ends, It is configured to be in the stopped state,
During execution of the predetermined bonus, after the number of differences after the predetermined timing after power-on becomes equal to or greater than the first value, the number of differences after the predetermined timing after power-on is less than the first value. The system is configured so that the above-mentioned discontinued state also occurs when the execution of the predetermined bonus ends in a certain situation,
When executing a specific initialization process when the power is turned on, the difference number stored in the predetermined storage area is initialized,
In the event of a power outage, the system is configured to perform power outage processing.
While the predetermined bonus is being executed, after the number of differences after the predetermined timing after the power is turned on becomes equal to or greater than the first value, power-off processing is executed in a situation where the predetermined bonus is being executed. and thereafter, the system is configured to enter the aborted state even if execution of the predetermined bonus ends after the power is turned on under a predetermined situation and the specific initialization process is executed. It is a gaming machine with

The gaming machine according to this aspect (F7) is
Equipped with an internal lottery means,
It is configured so that it can enter a stopped state, which is a state in which the game cannot be played.
If the number of differences after a predetermined timing after the power is turned on is greater than or equal to a first value, the system is configured to be in the aborted state,
During execution of a predetermined bonus, even if the number of differences after the predetermined timing after power-on becomes equal to or greater than the first value, the aborted state does not occur, and after that, when the execution of the predetermined bonus ends, It is configured to be in the stopped state,
During execution of the predetermined bonus, after the number of differences after the predetermined timing after power-on becomes equal to or greater than the first value, the number of differences after the predetermined timing after power-on is less than the first value. The system is configured so that the above-mentioned discontinued state also occurs when the execution of the predetermined bonus ends in a certain situation,
The gaming machine is characterized in that during the execution of the predetermined bonus, when the number of differences after the predetermined timing after power-on becomes equal to or greater than the first value, a specific notification can be executed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (F8) is
Equipped with an internal lottery means,
It is configured so that it can enter a stopped state, which is a state in which the game cannot be played.
The difference number after a predetermined timing after the power is turned on can be stored in a predetermined storage area,
If the number of differences after a predetermined timing after the power is turned on is greater than or equal to a first value, the system is configured to be in the aborted state,
When executing a specific initialization process when the power is turned on, the difference number stored in the predetermined storage area is initialized,
In the event of a power outage, the system is configured to perform power outage processing.
In a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, a granting process for granting a predetermined number of gaming values to the player is executed, a power-off process is executed during the execution of the granting process, and after that, the power is turned off. If the execution of the granting process for granting the predetermined number of gaming values to the player is completed after the game value is inputted, the discontinued state does not occur, and the difference number stored in the predetermined storage area is This gaming machine is characterized by being configured so that it can be updated.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (F9) is
an internal lottery means;
and an information display means capable of displaying information,
In a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, an operation notification state is provided in which a predetermined operation mode can be notified;
It is configured so that it can enter a stopped state, which is a state in which the game cannot be played.
If the number of differences after a predetermined timing after the power is turned on is greater than or equal to a first value, the system is configured to be in the aborted state,
In the event of a power outage, the system is configured to perform power outage processing.
In the operation notification state, the power-off processing is executed in a situation where predetermined information regarding the discontinued state and information regarding the gaming value given in the operation notification state are displayed on the information display means, and then , a gaming machine characterized in that at a specific timing after the power is turned on, predetermined information regarding the aborted state is hidden, and information regarding the gaming value given in the operation notification state is displayed. It is.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (F10) is
Equipped with an internal lottery means,
It is configured so that it can enter a stopped state, which is a state in which the game cannot be played.
If the number of differences after a predetermined timing after the power is turned on is greater than or equal to a first value, the system is configured to be in the aborted state,
If the game continues to be played at the game interval that corresponds to the minimum playing time,
The first value is A,
Let B be the expected increase in gaming value per game in the most advantageous situation for the player,
The minimum playing time is C seconds,
If the hours during which amusement halls are allowed to operate as stipulated by the Entertainment Business Act are D hours,
(A/B)×C<D×3600
This is a gaming machine characterized by the following.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (F11) is
an internal lottery means;
and an information display means capable of displaying information,
It is configured so that it can enter a stopped state, which is a state in which the game cannot be played.
If the number of differences after a predetermined timing after the power is turned on is greater than or equal to a first value, the system is configured to be in the aborted state,
If there is a shortage of game medals to be paid out outside the gaming machine, a medal empty error state occurs, and the information display means is configured to display medal empty error information,
When a predetermined game is executed and a payout process for awarding a predetermined number of game medals to a player is executed, and the difference after the predetermined timing after the power is turned on becomes equal to or greater than the first value. is configured to display specific information regarding the discontinued state on the information display means and to execute an automatic settlement process that does not require any operation by the player;
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the medal empty error state occurs during execution of the automatic payment processing, the medal empty error information is displayed on the information display means in a visible manner. It is.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (F12) is
an internal lottery means;
and an information display means capable of displaying information,
It is configured so that it can enter a stopped state, which is a state in which the game cannot be played.
If the number of differences after a predetermined timing after the power is turned on is greater than or equal to a first value, the system is configured to be in the aborted state,
If there is a shortage of game medals to be paid out outside the gaming machine, a medal empty error state occurs, and the information display means is configured to display medal empty error information,
When a predetermined game is executed and a payout process for awarding a predetermined number of game medals to a player is executed, and the difference after the predetermined timing after the power is turned on becomes equal to or greater than the first value. The player is configured to execute automatic payment processing, which is payment processing that does not require any operation by the player, and to display specific information regarding the discontinued state on the information display means when the automatic payment processing is completed. Ori,
If the medal empty error state occurs during execution of the automatic payment processing, the information display means is configured not to display the specific information regarding the discontinued state in the medal empty error state. This is a gaming machine with special features.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (F13) is
an internal lottery means;
and an information display means capable of displaying information,
It is configured so that it can enter a stopped state, which is a state in which the game cannot be played.
If the number of differences after a predetermined timing after the power is turned on is greater than or equal to a first value, the system is configured to be in the aborted state,
If there is a shortage of game medals to be paid out outside the gaming machine, a medal empty error state occurs, and the information display means is configured to display medal empty error information,
When a specific initialization process is executed when the power is turned on, the stored difference number is initialized.
In the event of a power outage, the system is configured to perform power outage processing.
When a predetermined game is executed and a payout process for awarding a predetermined number of game medals to a player is executed, and the difference after the predetermined timing after the power is turned on becomes equal to or greater than the first value. The player is configured to execute automatic payment processing, which is payment processing that does not require any operation by the player, and to display specific information regarding the discontinued state on the information display means when the automatic payment processing is completed. Ori,
If the medal empty error state occurs during execution of the automatic payment process, the information display means is configured not to display the specific information regarding the discontinued state in the medal empty error state,
During execution of the automatic payment process, the medal empty error state occurs, and the power off process is executed in the medal empty error state, and after the power is turned on, the medal empty error state is canceled and the automatic payment process is performed. The gaming machine is characterized in that the processing is executed from where it left off, and when the automatic settlement processing is completed, the specific information regarding the discontinued state can be displayed on the information display means.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (G1) is
An input slot into which game medals can be inserted;
a medal selector that selects game medals inserted from the input slot;
a hopper provided with an entrance portion for receiving game medals and storing the game medals;
a medal guide that guides game medals determined by the medal selector to meet a predetermined standard to the entrance portion of the hopper;
a medal return member located below the medal selector and provided with an opening for receiving game medals rejected by the medal selector as not meeting the predetermined standards;
The medal selector and the medal guide are configured to be in an adjacent positional relationship,
A predetermined gap is formed between the medal selector and the medal guide,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the opening of the medal return member is not located vertically below the predetermined gap.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (G2) is
An input slot into which game medals can be inserted;
a medal selector that selects game medals inserted from the input slot;
a hopper provided with an entrance portion for receiving game medals and storing the game medals;
a medal guide that guides game medals determined by the medal selector to meet a predetermined standard to the entrance portion of the hopper;
a medal return member located below the medal selector and provided with an opening for receiving game medals rejected by the medal selector as not meeting the predetermined standards;
The medal selector and the medal guide are configured to be in an adjacent positional relationship,
A predetermined gap is formed between the medal selector and the medal guide,
The predetermined gap is configured to be located above an upper end of the inlet portion of the hopper,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the opening of the medal return member is not located vertically below the predetermined gap.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (G3) is
An input slot into which game medals can be inserted;
a medal selector that selects game medals inserted from the input slot;
a hopper provided with an entrance portion for receiving game medals and storing the game medals;
a medal guide that guides game medals determined by the medal selector to meet a predetermined standard to the entrance portion of the hopper;
a medal return member located below the medal selector and provided with an opening for receiving game medals rejected by the medal selector as not meeting the predetermined standards;
The medal selector and the medal guide are configured to be in an adjacent positional relationship,
A predetermined gap is formed between the medal selector and the medal guide,
The predetermined gap is configured to have approximately the same thickness as two game medals,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the opening of the medal return member is not located vertically below the predetermined gap.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (G4) is
An input slot into which game medals can be inserted;
a medal selector that selects game medals inserted from the input slot;
a hopper provided with an entrance portion for receiving game medals and storing the game medals;
a medal guide that guides game medals determined by the medal selector to meet a predetermined standard to the entrance portion of the hopper;
a medal return member located below the medal selector and provided with an opening for receiving game medals rejected by the medal selector as not meeting the predetermined standards;
The medal selector and the medal guide are configured to be in an adjacent positional relationship,
A predetermined gap is formed between the medal selector and the medal guide,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the opening of the medal return member is located vertically below the predetermined gap.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (G5) is
An input slot into which game medals can be inserted;
a medal selector that selects game medals inserted from the input slot;
a hopper provided with an entrance portion for receiving game medals and storing the game medals;
a medal guide in which a medal flow path is formed to guide game medals determined by the medal selector to meet a predetermined standard to the inlet of the hopper;
The medal flow path includes at least a first wall, a second wall, and a bottom,
The bottom of the medal flow path is provided with a step that becomes lower from upstream to downstream,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the height of the step is smaller than the height of the first wall portion and the second wall portion, and is less than half the diameter of the game medal.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (G6) is
An input slot into which game medals can be inserted;
a medal selector that selects game medals inserted from the input slot;
a hopper provided with an entrance portion for receiving game medals and storing the game medals;
a medal guide that guides game medals determined by the medal selector to meet a predetermined standard to the entrance portion of the hopper;
The medal selector and the medal guide are configured to be in an adjacent positional relationship,
A predetermined gap is formed between the medal selector and the medal guide,
When a game medal enters a predetermined position in the predetermined gap, even a game medal determined by the medal selector to conform to the predetermined standard cannot pass through the medal selector. This is a gaming machine with special features.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (G7) is
multiple reels,
multiple stop switches,
Equipped with a performance display section that can display performances,
It has at least a first state in which an operation mode of the stop switch is notified, and a second state different from the first state,
The production stage has a plurality of production stages that can be displayed on the production display section, and is configured such that any one of the production stages is set;
The performances that can be displayed on the performance display section include a final performance that is composed of a plurality of cuts and indicates that it has been determined to be advantageous to the player, and a performance that is composed of a plurality of cuts. and a predetermined performance different from the confirmed performance,
The number of production stages that can be set in the second state is relatively larger than the number of production stages that can be set in the first state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the number of cuts constituting the predetermined performance is relatively larger than the number of cuts constituting the confirmed performance.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (G8) is
multiple reels,
and an effect display section capable of displaying an effect executed based on the stop operation of the reels,
The effects executed in response to the stop operation of the reels include a first effect executed in response to the first stop operation, and a second effect that is the next stop operation after the first stop operation. and a third effect that is executed in response to a third stop operation that is the next stop operation after the second stop operation,
The number of executable third performances is relatively larger than the number of executable first performances,
The number of executable third performances is relatively larger than the number of executable second performances,
The number of cuts forming the third effect is relatively larger than the number of cuts forming the first effect,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the number of cuts constituting the third performance is relatively larger than the number of cuts constituting the second performance.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (G9) is
multiple reels,
and an effect display section capable of displaying an effect executed based on the stop operation of the reels,
The effects executed in response to the stop operation of the reels include a first effect executed in response to the first stop operation, and a second effect that is the next stop operation after the first stop operation. and a third effect that is executed in response to a third stop operation that is the next stop operation after the second stop operation,
The number of executable third performances is relatively larger than the number of executable first performances,
The number of executable third performances is relatively larger than the number of executable second performances,
The number of cuts forming the third effect is relatively larger than the number of cuts forming the first effect,
The number of cuts forming the third effect is relatively larger than the number of cuts forming the second effect,
A continuous performance that is executed over a plurality of games and an expectation level suggesting performance that suggests the degree of expectation that the continuous performance will be successful can be displayed on the performance display section,
In a predetermined game other than the first and last game among the plurality of games, the number of executable first effects is relatively larger than the number of executable third effects. has been
In the predetermined game, the number of expectation level suggesting performances that can be displayed in the first performance is relatively larger than the number of expectation level suggesting performances that can be displayed in the third performance. This is a gaming machine characterized by the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (G10) is
If a predetermined condition is met, a performance display section capable of displaying an end performance indicating that a predetermined gaming state ends,
A game characterized in that the number of cuts constituting a start effect indicating that the predetermined game state starts is relatively larger than the number of cuts constituting the end effect. It is a machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (G11) is
Equipped with a performance display section that can display continuous performances performed over multiple games,
A game characterized in that the number of cuts constituting a performance indicating success of the continuous performance is relatively greater than the number of cuts constituting a performance indicating failure of the continuous performance. It is a machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (H1) is
an internal lottery means;
start switch and
A predetermined display section capable of displaying information,
It is configured so that it can enter a stopped state, which is a state in which the game cannot be played.
If the number of differences after a predetermined timing after the power is turned on is greater than or equal to a first value, the system is configured to be in an aborted state.
It is configured to be able to display information corresponding to the number of differences after the predetermined timing after the power is turned on (hereinafter referred to as "information corresponding to the number of differences") on the predetermined display section,
The information corresponding to the difference number is displayed on the predetermined display section from the specific timing when a new bet becomes possible until the operation of the start switch is accepted, and is configured such that it is no longer displayed once the operation of the start switch is accepted. This is a gaming machine that is characterized by the fact that

The gaming machine according to this aspect (H2) is
an internal lottery means;
start switch and
A predetermined display section capable of displaying information,
It is configured so that it can enter a stopped state, which is a state in which the game cannot be played.
If the number of differences after a predetermined timing after the power is turned on is greater than or equal to a first value, the system is configured to be in an aborted state.
It is configured to be able to display information corresponding to the number of differences after the predetermined timing after the power is turned on (hereinafter referred to as "information corresponding to the number of differences") on the predetermined display section,
In a situation where information corresponding to the number of differences is displayed on the predetermined display section, if a predetermined error occurs, an error display corresponding to the predetermined error is displayed on the predetermined display section, and then , the gaming machine is characterized in that, when the predetermined error is canceled, information corresponding to the number of differences is displayed on the predetermined display section.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (H3) is
an internal lottery means;
start switch and
A predetermined display section capable of displaying information,
It is configured so that it can enter a stopped state, which is a state in which the game cannot be played.
If the number of differences after a predetermined timing after the power is turned on is greater than or equal to a first value, the system is configured to be in an aborted state.
It is configured to be able to display information corresponding to the number of differences after the predetermined timing after the power is turned on (hereinafter referred to as "information corresponding to the number of differences") on the predetermined display section,
In a situation where information corresponding to the number of differences is displayed on the predetermined display section, if a predetermined error occurs, an error display corresponding to the predetermined error is displayed on the predetermined display section, and then , when the predetermined error is cleared, information corresponding to the difference number is displayed on the predetermined display section,
The predetermined display section can display a plurality of types of error displays,
A display mode of a predetermined display area of the predetermined display section when information corresponding to the number of differences is displayed on the predetermined display section, and one of a plurality of types of error display on the predetermined display section. The gaming machine is characterized in that the display mode of the predetermined display area of the predetermined display section is different from that when an error display is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (H4) is
an internal lottery means;
start switch and
A predetermined display section capable of displaying information,
It is configured so that it can enter a stopped state, which is a state in which the game cannot be played.
If the number of differences after a predetermined timing after the power is turned on is greater than or equal to a first value, the system is configured to be in an aborted state.
It is configured to be able to display information corresponding to the number of differences after the predetermined timing after the power is turned on (hereinafter referred to as "information corresponding to the number of differences") on the predetermined display section,
If the number of differences after a predetermined timing after the power is turned on is greater than or equal to the first value, the information corresponding to the aborted state is stored at a specific timing after the number of differences becomes greater than or equal to the first value. It is configured so that it can be displayed on a predetermined display section,
A display mode of a predetermined display area of the predetermined display section when information corresponding to the difference number is displayed on the predetermined display section, and information corresponding to the discontinued state on the predetermined display section. The gaming machine is characterized in that the display mode of the predetermined display area of the predetermined display section is different from the display mode when the predetermined display area is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (H5) is
an internal lottery means;
start switch and
A predetermined display section capable of displaying information,
It is configured so that it can enter a stopped state, which is a state in which the game cannot be played.
If the number of differences after a predetermined timing after the power is turned on is greater than or equal to a first value, the system is configured to be in an aborted state.
It is configured to be able to display information corresponding to the number of differences after the predetermined timing after the power is turned on (hereinafter referred to as "information corresponding to the number of differences") on the predetermined display section,
The information corresponding to the difference number is configured to be displayed on the predetermined display section from the specific timing when a new bet becomes possible until the operation of the start switch is received;
When the information corresponding to the number of differences is displayed on the predetermined display section from the specific timing when a new bet becomes possible until the operation of the start switch is accepted, the power supply to the gaming machine is interrupted. The gaming machine is characterized in that when the power is turned off and then the power is restored, information corresponding to the difference number is not displayed on the predetermined display section.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (H6) is
an internal lottery means;
start switch and
A predetermined display section capable of displaying information,
It is configured so that it can enter a stopped state, which is a state in which the game cannot be played.
If the number of differences after a predetermined timing after the power is turned on is greater than or equal to a first value, the system is configured to be in an aborted state.
It is configured to be able to display information corresponding to the number of differences after the predetermined timing after the power is turned on (hereinafter referred to as "information corresponding to the number of differences") on the predetermined display section,
The information corresponding to the difference number is configured to be displayed on the predetermined display section from the specific timing when a new bet becomes possible until the operation of the start switch is received;
When the information corresponding to the number of differences is displayed on the predetermined display section from the specific timing when a new bet becomes possible until the operation of the start switch is accepted, the power supply to the gaming machine is interrupted. If the power is turned on after being shut off and the power is turned on without changing the settings, the information corresponding to the difference number is not displayed on the predetermined display section,
If the number of differences after the predetermined timing after the power is turned on during execution of a predetermined bonus is equal to or greater than a first value, information indicating that the predetermined bonus will be discontinued after the end of the predetermined bonus is displayed in the predetermined display. It is structured so that it can be displayed on the
When information indicating that the predetermined bonus will be discontinued after the end of the predetermined bonus is displayed on the predetermined display section, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, and then the power is restored by turning on the power without changing settings. In this case, the gaming machine is characterized in that information indicating that the game will be discontinued after the predetermined bonus ends is displayed on the predetermined display section.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (H7) is
an internal lottery means;
A predetermined display section capable of displaying information,
It is configured so that it can enter a stopped state, which is a state in which the game cannot be played.
If the number of differences after a predetermined timing after the power is turned on is greater than or equal to a first value, the system is configured to be in an aborted state.
It is configured to be able to display information corresponding to the number of differences after the predetermined timing after the power is turned on (hereinafter referred to as "information corresponding to the number of differences") on the predetermined display section,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information corresponding to the difference number displayed on the predetermined display section is configured to have a different display mode for each range of the predetermined number of difference numbers.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (H8) is
an internal lottery means;
reel and
start switch and
stop switch and
A predetermined display section capable of displaying information,
It is configured so that it can enter a stopped state, which is a state in which the game cannot be played.
If the number of differences after a predetermined timing after the power is turned on is greater than or equal to a first value, the system is configured to be in an aborted state.
It is configured to be able to display information corresponding to the number of differences after the predetermined timing after the power is turned on (hereinafter referred to as "information corresponding to the number of differences") on the predetermined display section,
The information corresponding to the difference number is configured to be displayed on the predetermined display section from the specific timing when a new bet becomes possible until the operation of the start switch is received;
Information corresponding to the number of differences is displayed on the predetermined display section from a specific timing when a new bet becomes possible, and thereafter, when an operation of the start switch is accepted, information corresponding to the number of differences is displayed on the predetermined display section. After that, if all stop switches are operated and all reels are stopped, and the symbol combination corresponding to replay is stopped, the difference number will be changed even if the start switch is not operated. The gaming machine is characterized in that information corresponding to the above is not displayed on the predetermined display section.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (I1) is
Equipped with an internal lottery means,
an operation notification state in which a predetermined operation mode can be notified in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means;
a first section in which the operation notification state does not occur;
and a second section that can be in the operation notification state,
After moving to the second section, if the number of differences in the second section reaches a predetermined number, the second section is terminated,
The operation notification state includes a first operation notification state in which the expected increase in gaming value per game is a positive value, and a second operation notification state in which the expected increase in gaming value per game is a negative value. and has at least
In the operation notification state, the maximum value of the expected increase in gaming value given to the player based on one opportunity is equal to or less than a specific number,
the specific number is larger than the predetermined number,
In the operation notification state in which the expected increase value of the gaming value given to the player based on one opportunity is the maximum value, the player stays at least in the first operation notification state and the second operation notification state. It is configured,
In the operation notification state where the expected increase in the gaming value given to the player based on the first opportunity is the maximum value, the increase in the gaming value given to the player corresponding to the game in the first operation notification state The gaming machine is characterized in that the expected increase value is larger than the specific number.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (I2) is
Equipped with an internal drawing means,
an operation notification state in which a predetermined operation mode can be notified in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means;
a first section in which the operation notification state is not reached;
and a second section that can be in the operation notification state,
After moving to the second section, if the number of differences in the second section reaches a predetermined number, the second section is terminated,
The operation notification state includes at least a first operation notification state and a second operation notification state in which the expected increase in gaming value per game is larger than the first operation notification state,
In the operation notification state, the maximum value of the expected increase in gaming value given to the player based on one opportunity is equal to or less than a specific number,
the specific number is larger than the predetermined number,
In the operation notification state where the expected increase value of the gaming value given to the player based on one opportunity is the maximum value, the configuration is such that it can stay in the first operation notification state and the second operation notification state. has been
Awarded to a player who continues to stay only in the second operation notification state in the operation notification state where the expected increase in gaming value granted to the player based on the first opportunity is the maximum value. The gaming machine is characterized in that the expected increase in gaming value is greater than the specific number.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (I3) is
Equipped with an internal drawing means,
an operation notification state in which a predetermined operation mode can be notified in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means;
a first section in which the operation notification state is not reached;
and a second section that can be in the operation notification state,
After moving to the second section, if the number of differences in the second section reaches a predetermined number, the second section is terminated,
The operation notification state includes a first operation notification state in which the expected increase in gaming value per game is A (A is a numerical value), and a first operation notification state in which the expected increase in gaming value per game is greater than A (A is a numerical value). and a second operation notification state in which B is also large (B is a numerical value),
In the operation notification state, the maximum value of the expected increase in gaming value given to the player based on one opportunity is equal to or less than a specific number,
the specific number is larger than the predetermined number,
The first trigger when the expected increase value of the gaming value given to the player based on the first trigger reaches a maximum value is configured to occur only in the first operation notification state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to enter the second operation notification state when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the first operation notification state.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (I4) is
Equipped with an internal lottery means,
an operation notification state in which a predetermined operation mode can be notified in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means;
a first section in which the operation notification state does not occur;
and a second section that can be in the operation notification state,
After moving to the second section, if the number of differences in the second section reaches a predetermined number, the second section is terminated,
The operation notification state includes a first operation notification state in which the expected increase in gaming value per game is A (A is a numerical value), and a first operation notification state in which the expected increase in gaming value per game is greater than A (A is a numerical value). and a second operation notification state in which B is also large (B is a numerical value),
In the operation notification state, the maximum value of the expected increase in gaming value given to the player based on one opportunity is equal to or less than a specific number,
the specific number is larger than the predetermined number,
The first trigger when the expected increase value of the gaming value given to the player based on the first trigger reaches a maximum value is configured to occur only in the first operation notification state,
The controller is configured to enter the second operation notification state when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the first operation notification state,
The predetermined condition is configured to be satisfied once for every C (C is a numerical value) games in the first operation notification state,
When the expected increase in gaming value given to the player based on the first opportunity reaches the maximum value, the first opportunity grants the right to stay in the operation notification state after playing D (D is a numerical value) times. and
This gaming machine is characterized in that it is designed so that A×(DD/C)+B×(D/C)≦a specific number.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (I5) is
Equipped with an internal lottery means,
an operation notification state in which a predetermined operation mode can be notified in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means;
a first section in which the operation notification state does not occur;
and a second section that can be in the operation notification state,
After moving to the second section, if the number of differences in the second section reaches a predetermined number, the second section is terminated,
The second section is configured to end when the maximum number of differences in the second section reaches a specific number,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific number is larger than the predetermined number.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (I6) is
Equipped with an internal lottery means,
an operation notification state in which a predetermined operation mode can be notified in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means;
a first section in which the operation notification state does not occur;
and a second section that can be in the operation notification state,
After moving to the second section, if the number of differences in the second section reaches a predetermined number, the second section is terminated,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the operation notification state, a predetermined profit can be given to the player,
The gaming machine is characterized in that when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the operation notification state, the predetermined profit is not granted to the player if a specific condition is satisfied. .

The gaming machine according to this aspect (I7) is
Equipped with an internal lottery means,
an operation notification state in which a predetermined operation mode can be notified in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means;
a first section in which the operation notification state does not occur;
and a second section that can be in the operation notification state,
After moving to the second section, if the number of differences in the second section reaches a predetermined number, the second section is terminated,
In the operation notification state, the maximum value of the expected increase in gaming value given to the player based on one opportunity is equal to or less than a specific number,
The operation notification state is configured to end when the game is played a predetermined number of times,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the value obtained by multiplying the expected increase in gaming value per game in the operation notification state by the predetermined number of times is less than or equal to the specific number.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (I8) is
an internal lottery means;
A predetermined display section capable of displaying information,
an operation notification state in which a predetermined operation mode can be notified in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means;
a first section in which the operation notification state does not occur;
and a second section that can be in the operation notification state,
After moving to the second section, if the number of differences in the second section reaches a predetermined number, the second section is terminated,
The operation notification state includes at least a first operation notification state and a second operation notification state that is more advantageous to the player than the first operation notification state,
In the operation notification state, the maximum value of the expected increase in gaming value given to the player based on one opportunity is equal to or less than a specific number,
the specific number is larger than the predetermined number,
When a game in the second operation notification state is executed, information corresponding to the number of games that can be played in the operation notification state given to the player in the game is displayed, including a number of the number of times the game can be played. In an aspect, the display unit is configured to be able to display on the predetermined display section,
The final game in the second operation notification state is executed, and the total number of games that can be played in the operation notification state given to the player in the second operation notification state and the number of games per game in the operation notification state. If the value multiplied by the expected increase in gaming value is larger than the specific number, the total number of games that can be played in the operation notification state given to the player in the second operation notification state This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to be able to display corresponding information on the predetermined display section in a display format that does not include the total number of games played.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (I9) is
an internal lottery means;
A predetermined display section capable of displaying information,
an operation notification state in which a predetermined operation mode can be notified in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means;
a first section in which the operation notification state does not occur;
and a second section that can be in the operation notification state,
After moving to the second section, if the number of differences in the second section reaches a predetermined number, the second section is terminated,
The operation notification state includes at least a first operation notification state and a second operation notification state that is more advantageous to the player than the first operation notification state,
In the operation notification state, the maximum value of the expected increase in gaming value given to the player based on one opportunity is equal to or less than a specific number,
the specific number is larger than the predetermined number,
When a game in the second operation notification state is executed, information corresponding to the number of games that can be played in the operation notification state given to the player in the game is displayed, including a number of the number of times the game can be played. In an aspect, the display unit is configured to be able to display on the predetermined display section,
The final game in the second operation notification state is executed, and the total number of games that can be played in the operation notification state given to the player in the second operation notification state and the number of games per game in the operation notification state. If the value multiplied by the expected increase in gaming value is larger than the specific number, the total number of games that can be played in the operation notification state given to the player in the second operation notification state The corresponding information is configured to be displayed on the predetermined display section in a display mode that does not include the total number of games played,
If the final game in the operation notification state is executed and the total gaming value awarded to the player in the operation notification state is greater than the specific number, the game value awarded to the player in the operation notification state is This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to be able to display on the predetermined display section the total gaming value that has been earned.

P Reel-type gaming machine, DU front door (door)
D Door board, D10s Loading reception sensor D20s First loading sensor, D30s Second loading sensor D40 Stop button, D41 Left stop button D42 Middle stop button, D43 Right stop button D50 Start lever, D60 Settlement button D70 Display panel, D80 Door switch (Opening/closing detection device)
D90 Coin shooter, D100 Blocker D130 Upper panel, D140 Lower panel D150 Decorative lamp unit, D160 Reel window D170 Medal slot, D180 Start lamp D290 Replay lamp, D300 Insertable lamp D200 Credit number display device, D210 Input number indicator light D220 Bet button, D230 Medal tray D240 Discharge port, D250 Special game status display device D260 Keyhole, D270 Payout number display device (press order display device)
D280 AT counter value display device D310 Reel window frame lamp D340 Medal return member (prescribed communication path)
D341 Medal receiving port D342 Medal falling surface D343 Medal non-falling surface M Main control board M20 Setting key switch, M30 Setting/reset button C Main control chip, M50 Reel M51 Left reel, M52 Middle reel M53 Right reel, M60 AT counter M70 Game Minimum interval timer S Sub-control board, S10 LED lamp S20 Speaker, S30 Reel backlight S40 Performance display device, SC Sub-control chip E Power supply board, E10 Power switch H Medal payout device (game media payout device), H10s 1st payout Sensor H20s 2nd payout sensor, H40 Hopper H50 Disk, H50a Disk rotation axis H60 Game medal outlet, H70 Release biasing means H80 Hopper motor S50 Bet button lamp, S60 Stop button lamp K Reel board, K10 Reel motor K20 Reel sensor IN Relay board, SB Sub input button KHc High security failure counter, YKc-1 Counter for remaining games in advantageous section HS Medal auxiliary tank MW Reel frame, MO Reel band M Main control board CPUMC Microprocessor, SH Performance display device SH10 Identification segment, SH20 Ratio segment M90 Setting display LED
SR1 1st predetermined area, SR2 2nd predetermined area, SR3 3rd predetermined area CT Character display (effect display), SF dialogue display (effect display)

Claims (1)

Equipped with an internal lottery means,
an operation notification state in which a predetermined operation mode can be notified in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means;
a first section in which the operation notification state does not occur;
and a second section that can be in the operation notification state,
After moving to the second section, if the number of differences in the second section reaches a predetermined number, the second section is terminated,
The operation notification state includes a first operation notification state in which the expected increase in gaming value per game is A (A is a numerical value), and a first operation notification state in which the expected increase in gaming value per game is greater than A (A is a numerical value). and a second operation notification state in which B is also large (B is a numerical value),
In the operation notification state, the maximum value of the expected increase in gaming value given to the player based on one opportunity is equal to or less than a specific number,
the specific number is larger than the predetermined number,
The first trigger when the expected increase value of the gaming value given to the player based on the first trigger reaches a maximum value is configured to occur only in the first operation notification state,
The controller is configured to enter the second operation notification state when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the first operation notification state,
The predetermined condition is configured to be satisfied once for every C (C is a numerical value) games in the first operation notification state,
When the expected increase in gaming value given to the player based on the first opportunity reaches the maximum value, the first opportunity grants the right to stay in the operation notification state after playing D (D is a numerical value) times. and
A gaming machine characterized in that it is designed so that A×(DD/C)+B×(D/C)≦a specific number.

Images